Loading...
HomeMy Public PortalAbout09_9A_Primrose Park ProjectAGENDA ITEM 9.A. PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT MEMORANDUM DATE: December 1, 2020 TO: The Honorable City Council FROM: Bryan Cook, City Manager By: Adam Matsumoto, Director of Parks and Recreation SUBJECT: APPROVAL AND AUTHORIZATION TO INVITE BIDS FOR THE PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT RECOMMENDATION: The City Council is requested to approve the Primrose Park project and authorize staff to advertise the project for bids. BACKGROUND: 1. In January 2019, the City Council authorized pre -development activities fora new park and parking lot at the City -owned properties located at 5922 and 5934 Primrose Avenue (Primrose properties). 2. On May 7, 2019 the City Council approved to enter into a Professional Services Agreement with David Volz Design for the development of design plans and construction documents for the Primrose Park project. 3. On February 25, 2020 the California Department of Parks & Recreation publicly announced Temple City was awarded $2.9 million for Primrose Park (Proposition 68 Grant). 4. On April 1, 2020 the State received the signed Primrose Park development contract from the City. 5. On May 19, 2020 the City Council approved the addition of a custom restroom and storage facility to the Primrose Park project along with required addition of vehicle charge stations. 6. On July 24, 2020 the Facilities, Public Works and Infrastructure Standing Committee met and recommended City Council approve the fee increase for the Professional Services Agreement with David Volz Design for the Primrose Park project. 7. On August 4, 2020 the City Council reviewed the Primrose Park project status update City Council December 1, 2020 Page 2 of 4 and approved the fee increase for the Professional Services Agreement with David Volz Design. 8. On November 13, 2020 the Facilities, Public Works and Infrastructure Standing Committee met to review the 100% completed Construction Documents for the Primrose Park project and provided staff with direction to bring back for Council review and authorization to bid on December 1, 2020. ANALYSIS: The Primrose Park project was initiated by City Council back in January 2019 with the authorization for pre -development activities for the City -owned properties at 5922 and 5934 Primrose Avenue. Over the past two years the City has moved forward with the development of a concept plan, securing of funding and is on the precipice of approving the final design and authorizing the project for bid. Primrose Park design architect firm David Volz Design (DVD) has finalized the construction plans for the park development project along with the bid package (Attachment "A") for City Council review and consideration. An overview presentation of the Primrose Park project will be provided during the City Council meeting on December 1, 2020. Project Highlights • Grant Award Amount: $2,972,058.00 • Project Completion Deadline: March 30, 2024 • Reimbursable Grant (City must provide upfront funding) • Park Amenities: o Playground o Group Picnic Area o Exercise Equipment o Open Space Lawn o Water Feature o Art Opportunities o New Parking Lot o Walking Tract o Fencing, gates and masonry wall o Landscaping o Lighting o Park Signage o Restroom o Two (2) Level 2 EV Charge Stations o Sustainability Amenities: bioswales, rain sensors, evapotranspiration controllers, flow sensors and on -site water recycling City Council December 1, 2020 Page 3 of 4 Project Schedule • Advertise to Bid — December 3, 2020 • Bid Submittal — January 12, 2021 • Award of Contract — February 2, 2021 • Notice to Proceed — March 1, 2021 • Grand Opening - Oct./Nov. 2021 Concept Design Modifications During the course of completing the construction documents for the project, DVD brought back two changes to the concept design that was previously approved by the City Council. The large playground shade structure and use of flagstone paving were identified by the design architect as items for modification as outlined. • Playground Shade Structure o The playground manufacturer provided a rending that incorporates shade protection into the playground design. This creates a more custom appearance for the project as well as mitigates concerns about vandalism with the previous design. • Flagstone Paving o During the construction document phase, concerns arose about the durability of flagstone paving in high traffic areas of the park. Based on experience with other projects, the use of flagstone can be difficult to maintain, clean and repair. In place of flagstone, DVD is recommending the use of decorative concrete which mitigates the flagstone paving concerns. Estimated Construction Cost The construction phase of the Primrose Park project has a total estimated cost of $2.5 million dollars, included in this amount is the 15% construction contingency of just over $325,000. The total Prop 68 grant amount is $2,972,058 which includes both pre - construction and construction costs. At this time the state grant is projected to cover the full cost of the Primrose Park project. With the approval of the bid package and Notice Inviting Bid (NIB) distribution, staff will advertise the project. It is anticipated the bid advertisement will be approximately 1 month in duration. After the bids are opened, staff will conduct a bid analysis and recommend to City Council the award of contract to the lowest responsible bidder. CITY STRATEGIC GOALS: The Primrose Park Project will further the City's Strategic Goals of Quality of Life and Sustainable Infrastructure. City Council December 1, 2020 Page 4of4 FISCAL IMPACT: The City was awarded the Proposition 68 Grant by the California Department of Parks and Recreation in the amount of $2,972,058. This dollar amount covers the anticipated full cost of the Primrose Park Project including all park amenities outlined by the State as mandatory components identified in the grant. ATTACHMENT: A. Draft Bid Package ATTACHMENT A CITY OF TEMPLE CITY, CALIFORNIA DRAFT BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS for PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT (Located at: 5928 Primrose Avenue, Temple City, CA 91780) CITY PROJECT ID: P -21 - Date Issued: December , 2020 Bid Due Date: January , 2021, 2:00 PM Submit bids to: Office of the City Clerk City of TEMPLE CITY 9701 Las Tunas Drive, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 Program Name: Prop 68 2018 Parks Bond Act Statewide Park Development and Community Revitalization Project Number: SW -19-058 Contract Number: C9801039 GAMIN NEWSOM, GOVERNOR Wade Crowfoot, Secretary for Natural Resources Lisa Mange!, Director. Califomia Department of Parks and Fleet eat].I 6PROP State of California Parts.., Water Bond 2018 TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (Entire section C shall be submitted with the bid) SECTION A B C BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" GENERAL PROVISIONS SPECIAL PROVISIONS Attachment A - SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENTS Attachment B - SAMPLE CONTRACT TO BE EXECUTED APPENDICES: Appendix 1, Technical Specs Appendix 2, Technical Cut Sheets Appendix 3, Geotechnical Report Appendix 4, Storm Water Percolation Report Appendix 5, Hydrology Report Appendix 6, SUSMP Report Appendix 7, Bond Act Sign Appendix 8, Project Plans D E A. NOTICE INVITING FORMAL SEALED BIDS PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx PUBLIC NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Temple City invites sealed bids for the above stated project and will receive such bids in the office of the City Clerk, City of Temple City, 9701 Las Tunas Drive, Temple City, CA 91780, up to the hour of 2:00 PM on January 00, 2021. The bids received will be publicly opened approximately 15 minutes after the bid submittal deadline in the City Hall. This Notice Inviting Formal Sealed Bids will be advertised in a newspaper of general circulation, printed and published in the jurisdiction of the City of Temple City at least fourteen (14) calendar days before the bid opening date. Bid Submittal Procedure: Due to Covid-19, the City Hall is closed to public. To submit your sealed bids for the project, please ring the doorbell at the City Hall main entrance through Kaufmann Avenue, and the front desk receptionist will open the door, time stamp and accept the bid. Bids will be received from 8 am to 12 pm, and 1 pm to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. Bids for this project must be submitted up to the hour of 2:00 PM on January 00, 2021 Bid Opening Procedure: The bids received will be publicly opened virtually through GoToMeeting approximately 15 minutes after the bid submittal deadline. On your computer, please go to https://global.gotomeeting.com/join/?????????? to join the virtual bid opening. Pre -Bid Meeting: A non -mandatory pre -bid meeting is scheduled at project site (Located at: 5928 Primrose Avenue, Temple City, CA 91780) at 2 PM on December 17, 2020. The design team will be at the pre bid meeting to respond to questions. It is highly recommended that all interested bidders attend the pre -bid meeting. The City will abide by the current L.A. County Health Order and guidelines (subject to change). All attendees shall be required to wear face masks, maintain 6 feet social distancing, complete health check on -site, limit to no more than 1 representative per company, and all other applicable requirements. Attendees who do not follow proper procedures and City Staff directions may be removed from the meeting. Bidding and Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications Available: Copies of the Bidding and Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications can be obtained as follows: 1. Files will only be provided by email. Please e-mail your request with your contact information to: xxxxxxx@transtech.org. Upon receipt of your e-mail, you will be registered as a plan holder, and a pdf file of the Bidding and Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications will be e -mailed to you at no cost. 2. Hard copies will not be provided. Pre -Bid Inquiries: Page: A.1 All questions regarding this bid shall be directed via email, no later than 10 calendar days prior to the Bid due date and time, to xxxxxxx@transtech.org. Any questions received after this deadline will not be answered. It is the responsibility of the bidder to confirm transmission of correspondence. Responses will be emailed to all Plan Holders emailed no later than 3 calendar days prior to the Bid due date and time Scope of Work: The work consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals as described in detail in the Bidding and Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications to construct the project. Location of Work: Locations of work is shown on Appendix C -Project Plan. Estimated Cost of Work: Estimated cost is $0,000,000. Retention: The City will deduct a State -mandated 5 percent retention from all progress payments. Project Completion: The project shall be completed per the schedule specified in Section "B. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS", Subsection "CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, PROGRESS OF WORK, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES". Bid Bond: Bids must be accompanied by a bid bond, made payable to the City of TEMPLE CITY for an amount no less than ten percent (10%) of the bid amount. Required License Classification: Required License Classification is any of the following State of California Contractor Licenses: • A -General Engineering Contractor • B -General Building Contractor • C27 - Landscaping Contractor No bid will be accepted from a Contractor who has not been licensed in accordance with the provisions of the Business and Professions Code. SB 854 Requirements This project is subject to the requirements of SB 854. No prime contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project (submitted on or after March 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. No prime contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project (awarded on or after April 1, 2015) unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. The bid proposal must include a printout from the DIR registration website showing that the prime contractor and each subcontractor is currently registered. No bid proposals will be accepted, nor any contract entered with a prime contractor without proof of registration as required above. [Unless within the limited exceptions from this requirement for bid proposals only under Labor Code Section 1771.1(a)]. The prime contractor Page: A.2 will be required to post job site notices regarding Labor Code compliance as described in 8 California Code of Regulation section 16451(d). Prevailing Wages Required: Prevailing wages shall be paid to all workers in accordance with California Labor Code 1771. A copy of the prevailing wages schedule is on file with the City. Federal Funds: There are no Federal Funds utilized for this project. DBE: There is no mandatory DBE Participation requirement. All bidders are required to comply with all applicable competitive bidding and labor compliance laws including, but not limited to, active solicitation of subcontract bids from minority -owned businesses, women -owned businesses, and businesses owned by disabled veterans. The City hereby notifies all qualified bidders that it will affirmatively insure that qualified minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the basis of race, color, national origin, ancestry, sex, religion, or handicap in consideration for an award. Attention is directed to the provisions of Section 1777.5 (Chapter 1411, Statutes of 1968) and 1777.5 of the Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by the Contractor's or any such subcontractors under hire. The bidders and the selected Contractor shall not allow discrimination in employment practices on the basis of race, color, national origin, ancestry, sex, religion, or handicap. Bonds Required: A labor and materials payment bond is required in accordance with California Civil Code 9550 in a form approved by the City. Also, a performance bonds and public improvement warranty are required. See Sample Contract for the required bond forms. Substitution of Securities for Retention: The contractor may deposit securities in lieu of the 5% progress payment retentions in accordance with California Public Contracts Code 22300. Excavation Safety: If the work involves an excavation or trench five feet or deeper, the bid must contain a separate bid item for adequate sheeting, shoring, bracing and safety measures approved by the City. City Business License: The successful Contractor and his subcontractors will be required to possess business licenses from the City. In entering into a public works contract, or a subcontract, to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the Contractor, or subcontractors, offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title and interest in, and to, all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public work's contract or subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the parties. Page: A.3 Bids must be prepared on the approved Proposal forms in conformance with the Instructions to Bidders and submitted in a sealed envelope plainly marked on the outside. Bids must be accompanied by a bid bond, made payable to the City of Temple City for an amount no less than 10 percent of the amount of bid. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any irregularity, and to take all bids under advisement for a period of 60 calendar days. Any contract entered into pursuant to this notice shall become effective or enforceable against the City of TEMPLE CITY only when the formal written contract has been duly executed by the appropriate officers of the City. Submittal of your bid assumes that you have made a thorough and complete investigation of the project site and that you have discovered no apparent discrepancies between the scope of work set forth in the plans and specifications and the actual field conditions. If there are any questions regarding this project, please submit your questions to following e-mail: xxxxxxx@transtech.org BY ORDER of the City of Temple City, California. Page: A.4 B. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx LOCATION OF WORK The exact location of the project is outlined in this BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. PROPOSAL FORMS Bids shall be submitted in writing on the Proposal forms provided by the City. All information requested therein must be clearly and legibly set forth in the manner and form indicated. The City will not consider any proposal not meeting these requirements. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE Proposals must be accompanied by a proposal guarantee consisting of a bid bond payable to the City of Temple City in the amount not less than 10 percent of the total amount of bid. Any proposal not accompanied by such a guarantee will not be considered. If a bidder to whom a contract is awarded fails or refuses to execute the contract documents or furnish the required insurance policies and bonds as set forth in those documents, the proposal guarantee shall be forfeited to the City. The proposal guarantees of all bidders will be held until the successful bidder has properly executed all contract documents. DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL Proposals shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope plainly marked on the outside: PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P20-00 DO NOT OPEN WITH REGULAR MAIL Bid Submittal Procedure: Due to Covid-19, the City Hall is closed to public. To submit your sealed bids for the project, please ring the doorbell at the City Hall main entrance through Kaufmann Avenue, and the front desk receptionist will open the door, time stamp and accept the bid. Bids will be received from 8 am to 12 pm, and 1 pm to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. Bids for this project must be submitted up to the hour of 2:00 PM on January 00, 2021 It is the bidder's responsibility alone to ensure delivery of the proposal to the hands of the City's designated official prior to the bid opening hour stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Late bids will not be considered. Page: B.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, PROGRESS OF WORK, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES In accordance with the Standard Specifications, and/or as may be provided for within the herein Special Provisions, after notification of award and prior to start of any work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval its proposed Construction Schedule. At a scheduled date prior to commencement of work, the Contractor and all subcontractors shall attend a pre -construction conference at the City. The project shall be completed per the following schedule: Task No Description Date Step 1.Qty Task Contract award by the aty Council. Date 1 (= February 2, 2021) Step 2.Oty Task Qty will send out Contract to Contractor for signatures. Date 2 =Date 1 + 2 working days (= February 4, 2021) Step 3.Contractor Task Contractor shall retum signed Contract with required bonds and insurances to Qty. Date 3 = Date 2 + 5 waking days (= February 9, 2021 ) Step 4. City Task Qty will counter sign the Contract and provide a fully executed Contract to Contractor. Date 4 =Date 3 + 2 waking days (= February 11, 2021) Step 5. Joint Task A Pre -construction meeting will be held. Contractor shall submit its project schedule to the City at the Pre -construction meeting, with project start date established based on Date 6 shown in Task 6. Date 5 -Date 4 + 1 working day (= February 12, 2021) Step 6. City Task Q rm� City will issue to the Contractor MP (Notice to Proceed) to oo enoe with the project construction. Date 6 =Effective Date of for the start of construction (= March 1, 2021) Step 7. Contractor Task Contractor shall coniolete project within 120 working days Date 7A = Date 6 + specified duration. Note: If any Contactor tasks and the work described in this schedule are not corpleted by the contractor within the required durations, aty will assess $2,5W per calendar day as liquidated darnages. All durations above related to Contractor tasks shall remain the same regardless of City's completion of City tasks. The Contractor agrees that failure to complete work within the time allowed will result in damages being sustained by the City. Contractor and City agree that failure to complete the project will result in inconvenience to the citizens of the City. The parties also agree that failure to complete the project on time will prevent the City from having the use of the affected facilities. Therefore, the parties agree such damages among others are, and will continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine, but that $2,500 a calendar day is the minimum value of such costs to the City and is a reasonable amount that the Contractor agrees to reimburse the City for each calendar day of delay in finishing the work in excess of the time specified for completion, plus any authorized time extensions. Execution of the contract under these specifications shall constitute agreement by the Contractor and the City that the above indicated liquidated damage amount per calendar day is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the allotted time, that such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and that such sum may be deducted from payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs. Said amount may be reduced by the City if work is sufficiently completed within the/an allotted time so that the damages are minimized. Page: B.2 All construction graffiti shall be removed prior to the release of retention payment. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS A proposal may be withdrawn by a written request signed by the bidder. Such requests must be delivered to the City's designated official prior to the bid opening hour stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Proposals may not be withdrawn after the bid opening hour stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids without forfeiture of the proposal guarantee. The withdrawal of a proposal will not prejudice the right of the bidder to submit a new proposal, providing there is time to do so. IRREGULAR PROPOSALS Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to a proposal will render it irregular and may cause its rejection. The completed proposal forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative proposals will not be considered unless specifically requested. No oral, telegraphic, or telephonic proposal, modification, or withdrawal will be considered. TAXES No mention shall be made in the proposal of Sales Tax, Use Tax, or any other tax, as all amounts bid will be deemed and held to include any such taxes which may be applicable. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS In the event that any bidder acting as a prime contractor has an interest in more than one proposal, all such proposals will be rejected, and the bidder will be disqualified. This restriction does not apply to subcontractors or suppliers who may submit quotations to more than one bidder, and while doing so, may also submit a formal proposal as a prime contractor. No proposal will be accepted from a bidder who has not been licensed in accordance with the provisions of the State Business and Professions Code. DISCREPANCIES AND MISUNDERSTANDINGS Before submitting a Proposal, Bidders must satisfy themselves by personal examination of the work site, Plans, Specifications, and other contract documents, and by any other means as they may believe necessary, as to the actual physical conditions, requirements and difficulties under which the work must be performed, and shall include in the Proposal, the cost of all items necessary in the construction of the project. The Bidder shall not be allowed any extra compensation by reason of any matter or thing, concerning that which such the Bidder might have fully informed himself prior to the bidding. No bidder shall at any time after submission of a proposal make any claim or assertion that there was any misunderstanding or lack of information regarding the nature or amount of work necessary for the satisfactory completion of the job. Page: B.3 Any errors, omissions, or discrepancies found in the Plans, Specifications, or other contract documents shall be called to the attention of the City. Should a Bidder find any ambiguity, inconsistency or error in the plans and project manual, or be in doubt as to their meaning, the Bidder shall notify the City, in writing via e-mail as specified in the Notice of Inviting Bids Section. Issues requiring clarification will be addressed in a written addendum response, sent by facsimile to each Bidder, person or firm recorded by the City as having received plans. Any addenda issued by the City during the time of bidding are to be included in the proposal from the Bidder, and shall become a part of the Bid documents. The Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of addenda on the proposal form in the space provided. By submitting a bid, the Bidder shall be held to have personally examined the site and the drawings, to have carefully read the specifications, and to have satisfied itself as to its ability to meet all the difficulties attending the execution of the proposed contract before the delivery of this proposal, and agrees that if awarded the contract, will make no claim against the City based on ignorance or misunderstanding of the plans, specifications, site conditions and/or contract provisions. PERMITS AND LICENSES The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. No fee is charged for the Permit issued by the City for a public works project. The Contractor shall pay for and obtain a City Business License. CONTRACTORS LICENSE LAW The successful Bidder shall comply with and require all subcontractors to comply with all Federal, State and City Contractor License Laws and be dully registered and licensed thereunder as required. The successful Bidder is required to provide and pay for a performance and a payment bond. These bonds shall cover the faithful performance (100%) of the Contract for Construction and the payment of all obligations (100%) arising thereunder, in such form as the City may prescribe and with such sureties as they may approve. The successful Bidder shall require the attorney in fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his Power of Attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power. The City reserves the right to reject any proposed bonding company without stating cause. In this event the successful Bidder shall provide an alternate bonding company selection acceptable to the City. Bonds shall conform to state statutes regarding performance bond and labor and material payment bond with amount shown on each part equal to 100% of the total amount payable by terms of the Contract for Construction. The surety company shall be licensed to do business in state in which construction project is located and shall be acceptable to the City. Bond amount shall be increased to include any Change Order(s) added to the contract to 100% total value amount of each Change Order. Bonds will be recorded along with a copy of the construction contract in the County Recorder Records by the General Contractor with written proof submitted to the City. Page: B.4 LIABILITY INSURANCE The liability insurance coverage values shall be: 1. Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance in an amount of not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000); 2. Products/Completed Operations Hazard Insurance in an amount of no less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000); 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000); 4. Contractual General Liability Insurance in an amount not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000); 5. or GENERAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY in an amount of not less than TWO MILLION DOLLARS ($2,000,000). Automobile and lease vehicle insurance; owned, not owned and hired. Insurance to include bodily injury, sickness and death of any person and property damage owned and un-owned per occurrence. SOCIAL SECURITY ACT The successful Bidder agrees to comply with and to require all of his subcontractors to comply with all the provisions of the Act of Congress approved August 14, 1935, known and cited as the Social Security Act and also the provisions of the act of the State Legislature Approved, and known as the State Unemployment Compensation Law and all other laws and regulations pertaining to labor and workmen and all amendments to such data, and the contractor further agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the City of Temple City of and from any and all claims and demands made against it by virtue of the failure of the contractor or any subcontractors to comply with the provisions of any or all of said acts and amendments. SALES AND USE TAX The successful Bidder agrees to comply with and to require all of his subcontractors to comply with all the provisions of applicable state sales excise tax law and compensation use tax law and all amendments to same. The successful Bidder further agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the City of Temple City of and from any and all claims and demands made against virtue of the failure of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to comply with the provisions of any or all said laws and amendments. WAIVER OF LIENS The successful Bidder (General Contractor) is responsible for the payment of all bills for labor and materials furnished by the subcontractors, the suppliers, and the General Contractor on this project. The General Contractor shall deliver to the City, unconditional Lien Waivers and/or Releases from himself and from each of his subcontractors and suppliers, and at such time he shall certify that he is submitting such lien waivers for all subcontractors and suppliers involved. If any liens are filed against the City property, the City may, at its option, demand General Contractor Page: B.5 immediately provide a bond in accordance with state statutes. LEGAL RESPONSIBILITIES All proposals must be submitted, filed and executed in accordance with State and Federal laws relating to bids for contracts of this nature whether the same or expressly referred to herein or not. Any bidder submitting a proposal shall by such action thereby agree to each and all of the terms, conditions, provisions, and requirements set forth, contemplated, and referred to in the Plans, Specifications, and other contract documents, and to full compliance therewith. AWARD OF CONTRACT The award of contract, if made, will be to the lowest responsible bidder as determined solely by the City. The City of Temple City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any irregularity, and to take the bids under advisement for a period of sixty (60) calendar days, as may be required to provide for the best interests of the City. In no event will an award be made until all necessary investigations are made as to the responsibility and qualifications of the bidder to whom the award is contemplated. The Contractor shall submit a signed contract, bonds, insurance and all necessary documents to the City, within the required schedule. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES Attention is directed to the provisions in Section 1777.5 of the California Labor Code concerning employment of apprentices by the contractor or any subcontractor under him. The contractor and any subcontractor under him shall comply with the requirements of said section in the employment of apprentices; however, the contractor shall have full responsibility for compliance with said Labor Code section for all apprenticable occupations, regardless of any other contractual or employment relationships alleged to exist. CONFLICT OF INTEREST In the procurement of supplies, equipment, construction, and services by sub -recipients, the conflict of interest provisions in (State LCA-24 CFR 85.36 and Non -Profit Organizations — 24 CFR 84.4), OMB Circular A-110, and 24 CFR 570.611, respectively, shall apply. No employee, officer or agent of the sub -recipient shall participate in selection, or in the award or administration of a contract supported by Federal funds if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. SUBCONTRACTS Subcontracts shall comply with SECTION 2 -SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK, of the Greenbook (Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, latest edition). The Contractor is required to perform, with its own organization, contract work amounting to at least 51 percent of the Contract Price. Page: B.6 Failure to meet these requirements will result in disqualifying of the bid or termination of the contract. This provision supersedes any other provisions which specified a different subcontract requirement Proposed subcontractor names, a general description of the work to be performed by each subcontractor and the dollar amount for each subcontractor shall be submitted with the bid. PROJECT CLOSE OUT DOCUMENTS Within 10 calendar days of completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit project close out documents, including: Drawings showing as built conditions with red pencil; All warranties and guarantees; All paperwork required for labor compliance; All final lien releases; All other project related documents requested by the City. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS The bidder's attention is directed to the applicable provisions in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction requirements and conditions which must be observed in the preparation of the proposal form and the submission of the bid. 1. Examination of Site, and Specifications: Bidders shall examine the site of the work and acquaint themselves with all conditions affecting the work. By submitting a bid, the Bidder shall be held to have personally examined the site, to have carefully read the specifications, and to have satisfied itself as to its ability to meet all the difficulties attending the execution of the proposed contract before the delivery of this proposal, and agrees that if awarded the contract, will make no claim against the City based on ignorance or misunderstanding of the specifications, site conditions and/or contract provisions. 2. The Contractor shall have included in the contract price a sufficient sum to cover all items, including labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, that are implied or required for the complete improvements as contemplated by the contract documents. If there are any questions regarding this project, please submit your questions to following e-mail: xxxxxxx@transtech.org Page: B.7 C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx Bidder's Name: In accordance with the City of Temple City's Notice Inviting Sealed Bids, the undersigned BIDDER, hereby proposes to furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals required for the above stated project as set forth in the Plans, Specifications, and contract documents therefore, and to perform all work in the manner and time prescribed therein. BIDDER declares that this proposal is based upon careful examination of the work site, Plans, Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, and all other contract documents. If this proposal is accepted for award, BIDDER understands that failure to enter into a contract in the manner and time prescribed will result in forfeiture to the City of Temple City of the guarantee accompanying this proposal. BIDDER understands that a bid is required for the entire work. The contract will be awarded on the prices shown on the bid schedule. It is agreed that the unit and/or lump sum prices bid include all appurtenant expenses, taxes, royalties and fees. In the case of discrepancies in the amounts of bid, unit prices shall govern over extended amount, and words shall govern over figures. If awarded the Contract, the undersigned further agrees that in the event of the BIDDER'S default in executing the required contract and filing the necessary bonds and insurance certificates within ten working days after the date of the City of Temple City's notice of award of contract to the BIDDER, the proceeds of the security accompanying this bid shall become the property of the City of Temple City and this bid and the acceptance hereof may, at the City of Temple City's option, be considered null and void. BID SCHEDULE To the Temple City's City Council, herein called the "Council". Pursuant to and in compliance with your Notice Inviting Bids and the other documents relating thereto, the undersigned bidder, having familiarized himself with the work as per the paragraph, Discrepancies and Misunderstandings, contained in the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS section, and with the terms of the contract, the local conditions affecting the performance of the contract, and the cost of the work at the place where the work is done, and with the drawings and specifications and other contract documents, hereby proposes and agrees to perform, within the time stipulated, the contract, including all of its component parts, and everything required to be performed, and to provide and furnish any and all of the labor, materials, tools, expendable equipment, and all applicable taxes, utility and transportation services necessary to perform the contract and complete in a workmanlike manner, all in strict conformity with the Contract Documents on file at the office of the City Clerk of said City, per the following bid schedule: (Bidder shall provide a bid amount for each bid item listed below. Failure to provide a bid for each bid item shall render the bid non -responsive). BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.1 BID SCHEDULE PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Bid Amount Total Bid Amount 1 Mobilization (Total mobilization Bid Amount shall not exceed 5% of the Tola Bid Amount) 1 LS $ $ 2 Earthwork, Removal & Grading, Removal of Existing Pavement, Concrete Improvements Including Grading for Proposed Restroom Building 1 LS $ $ 3 4" Thick Asphalt Concrete Pavement 450 TON $ $ 4 4" Thick Crushed Miscellaneous Base 450 SF $ $ 5 Curb & Gutter (6") 400 LF $ $ 6 Curb (6") 650 LF $ $ 7 Curb Ramp with Detectable Warning Surface 5 EA $ $ 8 PCC Concrete Sidewalk 945 SF $ $ 9 Standard Alley Approach 680 SF $ $ 10 3' Wide Alley Gutter 230 SF $ $ 11 4" Dia. PVC SDR35 Drain Pipe 780 LF $ $ 12 6" Dia. PVC SDR35 Drain Pipe 160 LF $ $ 13 8" Dia. PVC SDR35 Drain Pipe 85 LF $ $ 14 12" Dia. PVC SDR35 Storm Drain Pipe 160 LF $ $ 15 18" x 18" Brooks Drain Box with Solid Cover 1 EA $ $ 16 12" x 12" Brooks Drain Box with Traffic Grate 2 EA $ $ 17 NDS900 Catch Basin with 9" Atrium Square Grate 36 EA $ $ 18 NDS900 Catch Basin with 9" Steel Traffic Grate 9 EA $ $ 19 Drain Inlet in Playground Area Per Landscape Plans 4 EA $ $ BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.2 20 MC -3500 Stormtech Unit 1 EA $ $ 21 4" VCP Sewer Service 140 LF $ $ 22 Sewer Cleanout Per APWA STD. 204-2 6 EA $ $ 23 1-1/2" Water Service with Gate Valve and Backflow Preventor 1 LS $ $ 24 1-1/2" PVC SDR35 Waste Line 45 LF $ $ 25 Traffic Striping Signage, Stop Sign & Post, EV Sign & Post and Wheel Stops 1 LS $ $ 26 Concrete Paving (4" Thick) 3291 SF $ $ 27 Integral Color Paving (4" Thick) 1790 SF $ $ 28 All Weather Surfacing 3791 SF $ $ 29 Rubber Play Surfacing 3112 SF $ $ 30 Decomposed Granite w/ Stabilizer 971 SF $ $ 31 Landscape Stone 300 SF $ $ 32 Landscape Boulder (18" X 12" X 12") 3 EA $ $ 33 Landscape Boulder (24" X 12" X 12") 5 EA $ $ 34 Landscape Boulder (36" X 18" X 18") 4 EA $ $ 35 Landscape Boulder (48" X 24" X 24") 1 EA $ $ 36 Concrete Curb (18" wide) 102 LF $ $ 37 Concrete Band (12" wide) 90 LF $ $ 38 Concrete Header (10" wide) 94 LF $ $ 39 Concrete Header (6" wide) 1412 LF $ $ 40 Tube Steel Fence - 7' High 286 LF $ $ 41 CMU Wall with Decorative Panel Fence - 7' High 83 EA $ $ 42 Gateway 'A' Double Swing Gate, Brick Walls, and CMU Breeze Walls 1 LS $ $ 43 Gateway 'B' Single Swing Gate and Brick Walls 1 LS $ $ 44 Monument Sign 1 LS $ $ 45 Additional CMU on existing wall 1 LS $ $ BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.3 46 Precast Park Bench without Backrest 10 E $ $ 47 Precast Concrete Picnic Tables and Benches 4 EA $ $ 48 Trash and Recycle Receptacles 11 EA $ $ 49 ADA Drinking Fountain with Bottle Filler 1 EA $ $ 50 Bicycle Rack 3 EA $ $ 51 Precast Concrete Bench P1.0 Custom 6' R: 18" x 72" x 18" HT (34 total) 1 LS $ $ 52 Precast Concrete Bench P1.1 Custom 12' R: 18" x 72"" x 18" HT (11 total) 1 LS $ $ 53 "Precast Concrete Bench P1.2 Custom 43' R: 18" x 72"" x 18" HT (16 total) 1 LS $ $ 54 Poured -in -Place Concrete Planter 'A' Custom Elliptical Planter 14'-8" x 26'-0"" w/10"" HT Bench and 12" Curb 1 LS $ $ 55 Poured -in -Place Concrete Planter 'B' Custom Elliptical Planter 9'-7" x 17'-0" w/18" HT Bench and 12" Curb 1 LS $ $ 56 Custom Water Feature 1 LS $ $ 57 Playground Equipment, Installation, Freight and Taxes 1 LS $ $ 58 Fitness Equipment, Installation, Freight and Taxes 1 LS $ $ 59 Soil Preparation and Fine Grading 1 LS $ $ 60 Weed Abatement 1 LS $ $ 61 Tree - 36" box 12 EA $ $ 62 Tree - 24" box 18 EA $ $ 63 Shrub - 15 gal 13 EA $ $ 64 Shrub - 5 gal 205 EA $ $ 65 Shrub - 1 gal 736 EA $ $ 66 Turf - Sod 3383 SF $ $ BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.4 67 Install Wood Mulch - 3" depth (6,885 SF) 61 CY $ $ 68 Ninety (90) Day Maintenance 1 LS $ $ 69 Irrigation 1 LS $ $ 70 Shade Structure - Cantilever (3 Panel: 10' x 15' x 10'- 6" HT) 1 LS $ $ 71 Shade Structure - Cantilever (5 Panel: 10' x 25' x 10'- 6" HT) 1 LS $ $ 72 Shade Structure - Cantilever (9 Panel: 10' x 45 x 10'- 6 HT) 1 LS $ $ 73 Shade Structure - Fan Shape (16' x 49'- 6" outside radius x 11' ht.) 1 LS $ $ 74 Underground Electrical 1 LS $ $ 75 Electric Vehicle Charger 4 EA $ $ 76 Service and Controls 1 LS $ $ 77 Fixture '51' with Pole & Footing 1 EA $ $ 78 Fixture 'S2' with Pole & Footing 5 EA $ $ 79 Fixture 'S3' with shared Pole & Footing 5 EA $ $ 80 Fixture 'S4' 18 EA $ $ 81 Fixture 'S5' 8 EA $ $ 82 Fixture 'S6' 7 EA $ $ 83 Fixture 'S7' 4 EA $ $ 84 Fixture 'S8' 10 EA $ $ 85 Fixture 'S9' 1 EA $ $ 86 Fixture 'S10' 4 EA $ $ 87 Fixture 'S11' 12 EA $ $ 88 Fixture 'F1' 2 EA $ $ 89 Fixture 'F2' 6 EA $ $ 90 Lighting Control Panel 1 EA $ $ 91 Weatherproof Receptacle Outlet 12 EA $ $ BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.5 92 THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Bond Act Sign (Project Construction Sign during constriction, to be installed on plywood. Sign Size 48" x 48") 1 EA $ $ 93 THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Bond Act Sign (Permanent Bronze Sign Plaque after Construction is completed to be installed on the wall at Park Entrance. Sign Size 12" x 12") 1 LS $ $ 94 THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Fifteen CCC Los Angeles Center Corps members will assist with installation of decomposed granite, irrigation, landscape plantings, and playground and bike rack installations. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the City and allow the indicated persons onto the site for the described work above. Contractor will not pay the above persons for his work. 0 0 $0.00 $0.00 95 THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Ten members of the Temple City Youth Committee, twenty-five members of the Temple City Key Club, HealthCare Partners volunteers, and Girl Scout of America Troop 5141 will help with planting shade trees or installation of community art. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the City and allow the indicated persons onto the site for the described work above. Contractor will not pay the above persons for his work. 0 0 $0.00 $0.00 BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.6 96 This is a City established Allowance for art work not included in the project scope of work. If such work is required by the City, City may use this allowance amount at City's sole discretion. 1 LS $30,000.00 $30,000.00 TOTAL BID AMOUNT (all items listed above) $ In the case of discrepancies, total bid will be based on calculated amounts based on quantities and Unit Bid Amounts. The bid prices shall include any and all costs, including labor, materials, appurtenant expenses, taxes, royalties and any and all other incidental costs to complete the project, in compliance with the Bid and Contract Documents and all applicable codes and standards. All other work items not specifically listed in the bid schedule, but necessary to complete the work per bid and contract documents and all applicable codes and standards are assumed to be included in various bid items and costs as applicable and as necessary. The City reserves the right to add, delete, increase or decrease the amount of any quantity shown and to delete any item from the contract and pay the contractor at the bid unit prices so long as the total amount of change does not exceed 25% (plus or minus) of the total bid amount for the entire project. If the change exceeds 25%, a change order may be negotiated to adjust unit bid prices. A bid is required for the entire work, that the quantities set forth in the Bid Schedule are to calculate total bid amount, and that final compensation under the contract will be based upon the actual quantities of work satisfactorily completed. BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.7 DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS BIDDER proposes to subcontract certain portions of the work which are in excess of one-half of one percent of the bid and to procure materials and equipment from suppliers and vendors as follows: Name, address, and phone number pf subcontractors, suppliers, and vendors Work to be Performed Contractor's License # DIR # Dollar Amount $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ Total Subcontract Amount (shall not exceed 60% of Total Bid Amount) $ BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.8 REFERENCES The City of Temple City is interested in obtaining bids from the most qualified and capable contractors with a proven track record able to perform work desired by the Public Works Department. Any and all references required to be provided by the bid specifications must be for projects constructed by the bidding company; references for other projects performed by principals or other individuals of the bidding company may not be included. The following are the names, addresses, and telephone numbers for 3 public agencies for which BIDDER has performed similar work within the past 5 years. Reference Contact Information Reference Project Contract Date Value (Contract Value shall not be less than $500,000) Name Completed Agency Name: $ Contact Name and Title: Contact Tel No: Agency Name: $ Contact Name and Title: Contact Tel No: Agency Name: $ Contact Name and Title: Contact Tel No: BONDS The following are the names, addresses, and telephone numbers for all brokers and sureties from whom Bidder intends to procure insurance bonds: SITE INSPECTION The Bidder declares that he/she has carefully read and examined the plans, specifications, bid documents, and he/she has made a personal examination of the site (indicate name of the person, representing the BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.9 bidder, who inspected the site and date below) and that he/she understands the exact scope of the Project WITHOUT QUESTION. Name of Person who inspected the site: Date of Inspection: ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda and has included their provisions in this Proposal: Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE BIDDER certifies that all previous contracts or subcontracts, all reports which may have been due under the requirements of any Agency, Site, or Federal equal employment opportunity orders have been satisfactorily filed, and that no such reports are currently outstanding. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CERTIFICATION BIDDER certifies that affirmative action has been taken to seek out and consider minority business enterprises for those portions of work to be subcontracted, and that such affirmative actions have been fully documented, that said documentation is open to inspection, and that said affirmative action will remain in effect for the life of any contract awarded hereunder. Furthermore, BIDDER certifies that affirmative action will be taken to meet all equal employment opportunity requirements of the contract documents. NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT BIDDER declares that the only persons or parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named herein: that no officer, agent, or employee of the City of Temple City is personally interested, directly or indirectly, in this proposal; that this proposal is made without connection to any other individual, firm, or corporation making a bid for the same work and that this proposal is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.10 BIDDER INFORMATION Bidder's Name: Address: Form of Legal Entity (i.e., individual, partnership, corporation, etc.) If a Corporation, State of Incorporation (i.e., Calif.) State Contractor's License No. and Class DIR Registration No.: (Also provide DIR No's for subcontractors as separate attachment) Contact Person Information: Name Title E-mail Tel The following are the names, titles, addresses, and phone numbers of all individuals, firm members, partners, joint venturers, and/or corporate officers having a principal interest in this proposal: The date(s) of any voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy judgements against any principal having an interest in this proposal are as follows: All current and prior DBA'S, alias, and/or fictitious business names for any principal having an interest in this proposal are as follows: Previous contract performance history: 1. Was any contract terminated previously: If the answer to the above is "yes", provide the following information: Contract/project name and number: Date of termination: Reason for termination: Owner's name: Owner contact person and tel. no.: 2. In the past ten years have you filed a claim for money against any public entity? If the answer to the above is "yes", provide the following information: BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.11 Contract/project name and number: Date of filing claim: Reason for filing claim: Owner's name: Owner contact person and tel. no.: 3. In the past ten years have you been a party to legal action by or against a public entity arising out of the performance of a public works contract? If the answer to the above is "yes", provide the following information: Contract/project name and number: Date of commencement of litigation: Reason for litigation: Owner's name: Owner contact person and tel. no.: IN WITNESS WHEREOF, BIDDER executes and submits this proposal with the names, titles, hands, and seals of all aforementioned principals this day of , 20_. BIDDER Subscribed and sworn to this day of , 201_. NOTARY PUBLIC BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.12 Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Contractor Registration Number Beginning July 1, 2014, contractors must register with the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) before bidding on public works contracts in California. For more information, please refer to this section of the Department of Industrial Relations Website: http://www.dir.ca.gov/Public-Works/PublicWorks.html. Per this requirement, provide the following information: Contractor Name Contractor Department of Industrial Relations Registration Number: Expiration Date of Registration Number *(THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH THE SEALED BID)* BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.13 PROPOSAL GUARANTEE/BID BOND PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that , as BIDDER, and , as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Temple City, in the penal sum of dollars ($ ), which is 10 percent of the total amount bid by BIDDER to the City of Temple City for the above stated project, for the payment of which sum, BIDDER and SURETY agree to be bound, jointly and severally, firm by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH that, whereas BIDDER is about to submit a bid to the City of Temple City for the above stated project, if said bid is rejected, or if said bid is accepted and a contract is awarded and entered into by BIDDER in the manner and time specified, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect in favor of the City of Temple City. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have set their names, titles, hands, and seals this day of , 20_. BIDDER* SURETY* *Provide BIDDER/SURETY name, address and telephone number and the name, title, address and telephone number for authorized representative. Subscribed and sworn to this day of , 201_. NOTARY PUBLIC: BIDDER SHALL COMPLETE AND SUBMIT ALL DOCUMENTS AND PAGES IN SECTION "C. BIDDER'S PROPOSAL" Page: C.14 D. GENERAL PROVISIONS PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx 1. GENERAL All work shall be performed in accordance with the "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction" (SSPWC), Latest Edition, "California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (CA MUTCD), "Caltrans Standard Specifications", "Caltrans Standards", "Standard Plans for Public Work Construction", the General Provisions and these Special Provisions. In case of conflict the more stringent requirement shall apply, except when the City makes an exception. The City has the right to make such exception at its discretion, and the contractor shall provide reasonable cost discount if the City decides to implement the lesser stringent option. 2. CONTRACTORS DUTIES: Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of work. 3. CONTRACTS: Construct entire work under one contract with the City. 4. SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS COMPLEMENTARY: The Specifications and Drawings are complementary, and what is called for in one shall be binding as if called for in both. 5. ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Subsection 2-5.2, "Precedence of Contract Documents", (SSPWC), revise the order of precedence and incorporate additional items as follows: a. Permits issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies. b. Change Orders and/or Supplemental Agreements; whichever occurs last c. Contract/Agreement d. Addenda e. Bid/Proposal f. Special Provisions (Section E) g. Plans h. General Provisions (Section D) Standard Plans Page: D.1 j. Standard Specifications k. Reference Specifications With reference to the Drawings the order of precedence is as follows: a. Figures govern over scaled dimensions b. Detail drawings govern over general drawings c. Addenda/Change Order drawings govern over Contract Documents d. Contract Documents govern over standard drawings e. Contract Drawings govern over shop drawings 6. DISCREPANCIES IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Any discrepancies, conflicts, errors or omissions found in the Contract Document shall be promptly reported in writing to the Engineer, who will issue a correction in writing. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any such discrepancies, conflicts, errors or omissions, but shall comply with any corrective measures regarding the same prescribed by the Engineer, and no additional payment or time shall be allowed therefor, except as provided in the Standard Specifications. If discrepancies are discovered between the drawings and the specifications, and no specific interpretation is issued prior to the bidding, the decision regarding this interpretation shall rest with the Engineer. The Contractor shall be compelled to act on the Engineer's decision as directed. In the event the installation is not in compliance with the direction of the Engineer, the installation shall be corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. In case of such discrepancies on the plan sheets, it is assumed that the bid included the cost for implementing/constructing the discrepancy that would have the highest dollar value. 7. ERRORS AND OMISSIONS: If the Contractor, in the course of the work, becomes aware of any claimed errors or omissions in the contract documents or in the City's field work, it shall immediately inform the Engineer. City Engineer shall promptly review the matter, and if he/she finds an error or omission has been made, he/she shall determine the corrective actions and advise the Contractor accordingly. If the corrective work associated with an error or omission increases or decreases the amount of work called for in the Contract, the City shall issue an appropriate Change Order. After discovery of an error or omission by the Contractor, any related work performed by the Contractor shall be done at its risk unless authorized by the Engineer. 8. CHANGED CONDITIONS: The plans for the work show conditions as they are believed by City Engineer to exist, but is not intended or to be inferred that the conditions as shown thereon constitute a representation by the City that such conditions are actually existent, nor shall the City be liable for any loss sustained by the Contractor as a result of any variance of the conditions as shown on the plans and the actual Page: D.2 conditions revealed during the progress of the work or otherwise. The word "conditions" as used in this paragraph includes, but is not limited to, site conditions, both surface and subsurface. The Contractor shall examine the site, compare it with the drawings and specifications and shall satisfy itself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. The Contractor shall ascertain and check the location of all existing structures, utilities and equipment which may affect its work. The Contractor shall be responsible to re-examine the site, as necessary, for performance of change orders or other proposed changes which may affect its work. No allowance shall subsequently be made on the Contractor's behalf for any extra expense or loss of time which incurred due to failure or negligence on its part to make such examination. 9. MARKUP: For extra work and change orders the following percentages shall apply: a. LABOR COSTS 1. Labor markup for employer taxes standard federal/state rates, approximately: 10% 2. Labor markup for fringe benefits (if fringe benefits are not included in the labor cost: 15% 3. Labor overhead markup: 10% 4. Profit markup: 10% b. MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, SUBCONTRACTOR COSTS Only 5% markup by prime contractor will be allowed on materials, equipment and subcontractor costs. No other additional markups (overhead, profit, etc.) will be allowed. c. After the total amount is established by adding the above items, an additional 2% markup for INSURANCE AND BONDING COSTS will be allowed. The subcontractor costs shall be established using the same cost accounting principal above. The markups mentioned hereinafter shall include, but are not limited to, all costs for the services of superintendents, project managers, timekeepers and other personnel not working directly on the change order, and pickup or yard trucks used by the above personnel, and other vehicles and/or equipment present at the job site but not directly used in actual construction activities. Incidental movements of labor, materials, supplies or equipment shall not be considered as use in actual construction activities. These costs shall not be reported as labor or equipment elsewhere, except when actually performing work directly on the change order and then shall only be reported at the labor classification of the work performed. The City shall not pay for the cost of foremen or vehicles used by foremen unless authorized in advance by the Engineer. 10. SITE SECURITY AND SAFETY The Contractor shall secure the project as well as the adjoining properties during the duration of the project. Page: D.3 11. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND CLAIMS a. Payment for Labor and Materials. The Contractor shall pay and cause the subcontractors to pay any and all accounts for labor, including Worker's Compensation premiums, State Unemployment and Federal Social Security payments and all other wage and salary deductions required by law. The Contractor also shall pay and cause the subcontractors to pay any and all accounts for services, equipment and materials used by it and the subcontractors during the performance of work under this contract. All such accounts shall be paid as they become due and payable. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately furnish the City with proof of payment of such accounts. b. Additional Work. Payment for additional work and all expenditures in excess of the bid amount must be authorized in writing by the City Engineer. Such authorization shall be obtained by the Contractor prior to engaging in additional work. It shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to obtain written approval from City Engineer for any change(s) in material or in the work proposed by suppliers or subcontractors. No payment shall be made to the Contractor for additional work which has not been approved in writing, and the Contractor hereby agrees that it shall have no right to additional compensation for any work not so authorized. c. Claims. The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any cause, including any act, or failure to act, by the City, or the happening of any event, thing or occurrence, unless he shall have given the City due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specifications. The written notice of potential claim shall set forth the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation will or may be due, the nature of the costs involved, and, insofar as possible, the amount of the potential claim. Said notice shall be submitted on a form approved by the City at least forty-eight (48) hours (two working days) in advance of performing said work, unless the work is of an emergency nature, in which case the Contractor shall notify and obtain approval from the Inspector prior to commencing the work. The City Engineer. may require the Contractor to delay construction involving the claim, but no other work shall be delayed, and the Contractor shall not be allowed additional costs for any said delay but may be allowed on extension of time if the City Engineer. agrees that the work delayed is a controlling element of the Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall be required to submit any supporting data (or a detailed written explanation justifying further delay) within five (5) Work Days of a request from the City Engineer, and shall be responsible for any delays resulting from late and/or incomplete submittals. By submitting a Bid, the Contractor hereby agrees that this Section shall supersede Sections 6-6.3 and 6-6.4 of the Standard Specifications. The City shall be the sole authority to interpret all plans, specifications and contract documents, and no claim shall be accepted which is based on the Contractor's ignorance, misunderstanding or noncompliance with any provision or portion thereof. The above provisions shall supplement Section 3 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide all data and to obtain all approvals required by said Specifications, including submittal of Daily Extra Work Reports. No claims or extras shall be approved by the City unless all work was done under the direction of and subject to the approval of the Inspector. Disputed work claims shall comply with Section 3 of the Standard Specifications, as modified Page: D.4 herein. It is the intention of this Subsection that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the Contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such matters may be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. The Contractor hereby agrees that it shall have no right to additional compensation for any claim that may be based on any such act, failure to act, event, thing or occurrence for which no written notice of potential claim as herein required was filed. d. Noncompliance with Plans and Specifications. Failure of the Contractor to comply with any requirement of the Plans and Specifications, and/or to immediately remedy any such noncompliance upon notice from the Engineer, may result in suspension of Contract Progress Payments. Any Progress Payments so suspended shall remain in suspension until the Contractor's operations and/or submittals are brought into compliance to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No additional compensation shall be allowed as a result of suspension of Progress Payments due to noncompliance with the plans or specifications. The Contractor shall not be permitted to stop work due to said suspension of Progress Payments. e. Request for Payment. Contractor shall submit all requests for payment on the City provided form. The City shall provide the form for use after Contract is awarded. Prior to submittal of said form, all items for which payment is requested shall be checked and approved in writing by the City Engineer. No payments will be made unless all back-up data is submitted with the payment request and the Progress Payment Invoice is signed by both Contractor and City Engineer. There shall be no separate payment for any relocations, barriers or forms, grading or temporary construction required to construct the improvements herein. Payment for these items shall be absorbed in the Bid Prices for the applicable work to which they are appurtenant, and no extra costs shall be allowed. The payment of amounts due to the Contractor shall be contingent upon the Contractor and subcontractors furnishing the City with a release of all claims against the City arising by virtue of the Contract related to said amounts. 12. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR The address given in the Bidder's Proposal is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communications to the Contractor will be mailed or delivered, except such notices and communications as shall be given by the City's Inspectors to the Contractor's designated Superintendent in the field. The mailing or delivering to said address of any notice, letter, or other communication, or the hand -delivery to said Superintendent, shall be deemed sufficient service thereof upon the Contractor. The date of such service shall be the date of such mailing or delivery. Said address may be changed at any time by a written notice signed by the Contractor and delivered to the Engineer. Page: D.5 13. NOTIFICATION The Contractor shall notify the City of Temple City and the owners of all utilities and substructures not less than 48 hours prior to starting construction. The following list of names and telephone numbers is intended for the convenience of the Contractor and is not guaranteed to be complete or correct: Agency Name and Title Tel City of Temple City Director of Community Development 626-285-2171 City of Temple City Ali Cayir, PE, City Engineer 714-883-8677 City of Temple City Bryan Ariizumi, Public Safety Officer 626-285-2171 City of Temple City, PD County Sheriff's Station 626-285-7171 City of Temple City, Fire Fire Department 626-287-9521 Electric Southern California Edison 626-303-8473 Gas The Gas Company 310-687-2020 AT&T Business Customer Service 626-570-5314 SPRINT Customer Service 800-211-4727 MCI Customer Service 888-624-5622 Refuse Athens Disposal Company 626-336-3636 Cable Charter Communications 626-430-3570 Water California American Water Co. 626-614-2534 Water East Pasadena Water Co. 626-793-6189 Water Golden State Water Company 626-287-5238 Water San Gabriel County Water District 626-287-0341 Water So. California Water Co. 626-446-1372 Water Sunny Slope Water Co. 626-287-5238 Underground Service Alert 811 14. CITY HOLIDAYS City offices are closed on the following days: New Year's Day; President's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veteran's Day; Thanksgiving (2 days) and Christmas Day. During these holidays, inspections will not be available. 15. EMERGENCY INFORMATION The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor and subcontractors, or their representatives, shall be filed with the Engineer and the City Police Department prior to beginning work. 16. FINAL ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance by CITY will be made when Contractor has provided 'as -built' drawings and satisfactorily completed all work and improvements as called for in the Contract Documents including reconciliation of materials. The CITY shall notify Contractor in writing of final acceptance of the work. Page: D.6 Failure or neglect on the part of CITY to reject inferior work during the construction period shall not be construed to imply acceptance of such work nor to preclude its right to reject it. Contractor shall be required to correct all defects which become evident at any time prior to final acceptance of Contractor's work by CITY. The cost of all such repairs, material, labor, and overheads shall be borne by Contractor. Ownership, custody, and control of the work and facilities shall pass to CITY only upon Final Acceptance. 17. WARRANTY The Contractor expressly represents and warrants that all work performed and all materials used are free from defects of workmanship and conform to the Contractor's Contract obligations. This warranty shall commence upon Final Acceptance and end one year from that date. The Contractor shall pay the actual cost to CITY for any breach of this warranty corrected by CITY (including labor, material and overheads). If CITY is unable to collect for the work after 30 days from completion, the actual cost may be deducted from the Contractor's refundable monies on deposit with CITY. CITY may recover such cost by claim against the surety on the performance or maintenance bond furnished by the Contractor. 18. AS- BUILT DRAWINGS Provide and record a complete "As Built" records set of blue line prints showing changes from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "As Built" locations, sizes and types of equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the City. Keep this set of drawings on the site and use only as a record set. Use these drawings as work progress sheets. With red pencil, make neat and legible annotations thereon as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually completed. Keep these drawings available at all times for inspection. Before the date of the final inspection, provide the "As Built" prints to the City. Please note, that failure to submit an "As Built" set of drawings as noted above will result in the retention payment being delayed. 19. PAYMENT Payment will be made under applicable bid items in the bid schedule. If no specific bid item is provided for a work item, it is assumed all work is included in various bid items as necessary. The bid prices shall include any and all costs, including labor, materials, appurtenant expenses, taxes, royalties and any and all other incidental costs to complete the project, in compliance with the Bid and Contract Documents and all applicable codes and standards. Page: D.7 E. SPECIAL PROVISIONS PRIMROSE PARK PROJECT (Located at: 5928 Primrose Avenue, Temple City, CA 91780) CITY PROJECT ID: P-20-xx 1. SCOPE OF THE WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The work consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals as described in detail in these Bidding and Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications to construct the project. 2. ALLOTTED WORKING SPACE The contractor shall be responsible for storing his materials and equipment and to use as work yard as necessary. The City will not allow keeping equipment, materials, vehicles, removed items, debris, etc. within this space with no liability to the City. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide adequate fencing, security of the yard and equipment to the Engineer's satisfaction, and to restore the assigned area to its original, pre -use condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the City. 3. ACCEPTANCE OF SITE The Contractor shall accept the site and the character of the work as they exist on the first day of work under this contract. 4. MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING PLANTINGS, IMPROVEMENTS AND FACILITIES The Contractor shall protect and maintain all existing trees and shrubs (plantings) to remain from the first day of work under this contract to acceptance. In similar fashion, Contractor shall protect and maintain all improvements and facilities in place to remain from the first day of work under this contract to acceptance. Contractor shall notify City Engineer of any damage to any existing plantings, improvements or facilities as soon as possible. Contractor shall replant or repair any damage to the satisfaction of City Engineer at no cost or extra burden to the City. 5. PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY Add the following to Section 7-10. "Public Convenience and Safety" of the SSPWC: • At the end of the Work Day the job site shall be left in a neat and orderly manner. • During construction the Contractor shall provide adequate access to each residence or business affected by this project to the satisfaction of the Engineer. • Should any change in these requirements be necessitated by extraordinary occurrences or requirements during the execution of the work, the Contractor shall obtain prior written approval of the Engineer. Page: E.1 6. WORK SITE MAINTENANCE Add the following to Section 7-8, "Work Site Maintenance" of the SSPWC: • Sanitary Conditions. The Engineer may from time to time prescribe rules and regulations for maintaining sanitary conditions along the work and the Contractor shall enforce observance of the same by its employees and the employees of the subcontractor, and, if the Contractor fails to enforce these rules and regulations, the Engineer shall have the authority to enforce them. • Water Pollution Control. The Contractor shall adhere strictly to Subsection 7-8.6 of the Standard Specifications through the entire project and add the following: o The Contractor, without limitation, shall be responsible to provide and implement Best Management Practices to comply with National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) standards and practices. The Contractor shall be responsible, to the fullest extent possible, not to permit any contaminants, including soil, to enter any drainage system. Contractor shall be responsible to be prepared to provide hay bales or similar devices to prevent erosion from being washed into the storm drain system. Contractor shall be responsible to maintain equipment so that oil, grease, gasoline, diesel fuel, et al., does not contaminate areas subject to run-off. The Contractor and its Surety shall fully indemnify the City for any pollution damage and/or cleaning costs. o All construction on off -site or on -site improvements shall adhere to NPDES (National Pollution Discharge Elimination System) Best Management Practices to prevent deleterious materials or pollutants from entering the City or County storm drain systems. The following are the areas to be addressed: ■ Handle, store and dispose of materials properly. ■ Avoiding excavation and grading activities during wet weather. ■ Construct diversion dikes and drainage swales around working sites. ■ Cover stockpiles and excavated soil with secured tarps or plastic sheeting. ■ Develop and implement erosion control plans. ■ Check and repair leaking equipment away from construction site. ■ Designate a location away from storm drains for refueling. ■ Cover and seal catch basins whenever working in their vicinity. ■ Use vacuum with all concrete sawing operations. ■ Never wash excess material from aggregate, concrete or equipment onto a street ■ Catch drips from paver with drip pans or absorbent material. ■ Clean up all spills using dry methods. ■ Sweep all gutters at the end of each working day. Gutters shall be kept clean after leaving construction site. ■ Call 911 in case of a hazardous spill. ■ Keep a running log of all activities in connection with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) ■ Name a person, on site, responsible for complying with S.W.P.P.P. CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY WITH THESE REQUIREMENTS AND CITY ENGINEER'S DIRECTIONS DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION. 7. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT AND RECYCLING PLAN The contractor shall submit a Solid Waste Management and Recycling Plan to the City Manager's Page: E.2 Office for review and approval prior to issuance of a demolition permit and/or grading permit for the project. Said plan shall indicate that the permittee/contractor shall provide documentation such as receipts from landfills, salvage and recycling facilities upon completion of the demolition/construction. Said plan shall identify: • Types of materials for recycling, reuse or sorting • Estimated quantities • Separation requirements • On site storage • Transportation methods • Destinations • Plan manager (contractor's representative) Prior to issuance of a demolition and/or grading permit, the permittee/contractor shall contact the California Integrated Waste Management Board (recycling hotline 800-553-2962) to obtain an approved recycler (processor and/or receiver) for demolition and construction waste. At the minimum the contractor shall recycle each of the following demolition and construction waste materials: • Asphalt paving: 75% • Concrete and concrete masonry units: 75% • Non -lead based painted wood wastes (dimensional lumber and broken crates and pallets): 50% • Metals: 60% • Toilets: 75% • Appliances: 75% • Copper cable/wire: 50% • Transformers and ballasts: 100% • Fluorescent lamps: 100% • Glass: 50% • Unpainted gypsum board: 50% A minimum of 50% of the total weight of the waste (demolition and construction wastes) shall be diverted from landfill. 8. REFUSE ROUTE SCHEDULE The Contractor shall accommodate and coordinate with the City's refuse pick-up service in the project area. The Contractor shall accommodate and coordinate with the City's street sweeping service in the project area. 9. SURVEY AND LAYOUT Contractor shall verify all dimensions on the drawings and shall report to the City Representative any discrepancies before proceeding with related work. Contractor shall perform all survey and precise layout work to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. Contractor shall establish final grades and extents for the improvements and preserve such work on as -built plans. Page: E.3 10. LIMITS OF WORK Limits of work shall be the legal property boundaries of the site unless modified by Contract limit lines indicated on the plans or as noted otherwise. 11. NOTICE TO PROCEED The Contractor shall not commence work until a Notice to Proceed has been issued by the City to the Contractor. Prior to the issuance of Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall provide the following: • The Contractor shall provide all required contract bonds and evidences of insurance to the City; • The Contractor shall submit a Construction Schedule to City Engineer; • The Contractor shall obtain a City of Temple City Business License; • Obtain a no -fee Construction Permit from the City Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall not be obligated to perform any work and the City shall not be obligated to accept or pay for any work performed by the Contractor prior to delivery of a Notice to Proceed. The City's knowledge of work being performed prior to delivery of the Notice to Proceed shall not obligate the City to accept or pay for such work. 12. PROJECT SCHEDULE The Contractor shall submit a Construction Schedule to the Engineer prior to Notice To Proceed is issued. No work may be started until the Schedule has been approved in writing. The work shall be scheduled to assure that construction will be completed within the specified time in Section "B. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS", Subsection "CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, PROGRESS OF WORK, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES". The Contractor shall be held responsible for coordination of all phases of the operation so that the time schedule can be met. If the Contractor desires to make a major change in its method or operations after commencing construction or if its Schedule fails to reflect the actual progress, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a revised Construction Schedule. Said Schedule shall be submitted in advance of the beginning of the revised operations or within two (2) working days after notification by the Engineer. The Engineer may suspend all progress payments if the Contractor fails to comply. 13. CONTRACT TIME The Contractor shall submit evidence to the City that all materials have been purchased by the date indicated in the construction schedule in INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION of these specifications. The date construction shall begin will be specified in a Notice to Proceed, by the date indicated in the construction schedule in INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION of these specifications. Except as otherwise specified, working hours in traffic lanes will be restricted to between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 3:00 p.m., and, except as otherwise stated in the Special Provisions or approved by Page: E.4 the City Engineer, working hours for areas not affecting traffic are between 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, excluding legal holidays and weekends. During periods when weather or other conditions are unfavorable for construction, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of the work as shall not be damaged thereby. No portions of the work whose acceptable quality or efficiency will be affected by any unfavorable conditions shall be constructed while those conditions exist. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the City that the Contract time for completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time taking into consideration the average climatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the work. 14. DELAY IN OBTAINING MATERIALS No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the inability to obtain materials unless the Contractor either obtains advance written approval from City Engineer or obtains from the supplier and furnishes to the Engineer documentary proof that such materials could not be obtained due to war, government regulations, labor disputes, strikes, fires, floods, adverse weather conditions necessitating the cessation of work, or other similar action of the elements. The Contractor is required to order materials in a timely manner as specified in the "Instruction to Bidders". 15. RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor shall maintain at the job site a copy of all required permits, one (1) set of plans, standard plans and specifications and contract documents. At the end of each working day, the Contractor shall submit to the Inspector an accurate "as -built" drawing of any changes that occurred from the approved plans and drawings, including Change Order work, changed conditions in the field, and/or claimed extra work. The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain the Inspector's written approval of the accuracy of said drawing. No invoice will be accepted for processing until all work included therein is accurately shown on the record drawings. 16. MATERIALS Material Specifications: Whenever any material is specified by name and number thereof, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating a description of the materials and establishing the quality of the materials to be used. All materials shall be new and the best of their class and kind. No substitution will be permitted which has not been approved in writing by the Engineer. Material List: A complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. Catalog data and full descriptive literature and manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions shall be submitted whenever the use of items different than those specified is requested. The material list shall be submitted using the following sample layout (double spaced between each item). Item No. Description Manufacturer Model Number Page: E.5 1. material ABC Corp. XXX Approval of Substitutes: Approval of any items, alternates or substitutes indicates only that the product(s) apparently meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications on the basis of the information and/or samples submitted. Contractor's Responsibility: Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of liability under these Specifications. Such warranties only shall supplement the Contractor's responsibility. 17. INSPECTION AND TESTING All materials furnished and all work performed under the Contract shall be subject to review and inspection by the Engineer. Such review may include mill, plant, shop, nursery, or field inspection as required. City Engineer shall be permitted access to all parts of the work, including plants where materials are manufactured or fabricated, and shall be furnished with such materials, information and assistance by the Contractor and its subcontractors and suppliers as is required to make a complete and detailed inspection. The Contractor shall request inspection 24 hours in advance by calling the City Engineer or his designee. Submittal shall be provided by the Contractor per Subsection 2-5.3 Submittals of the Standard Specifications for Public Work Construction (SSPWC). The City will provide standard progress building and public works inspection at no cost to the Contractor. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all other inspections required by ordinance or governing authorities, including tests in connection therewith, as may be assigned to it in other sections of the specifications. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain Inspection in a timely manner prior to proceeding with any phase of construction. The Contractor shall neither allow nor cause any of its work to be covered or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer. City Engineer will make, or have made, such inspections and tests as he deems necessary to see that the work is being accomplished in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. In the event such inspections or tests reveal non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall bear the cost of such corrective measures deemed necessary by the City Engineer, as well as the cost of the subsequent re -inspection and re -testing. It shall be understood and agreed that the inspection or making of tests shall not constitute an acceptance of any portion of the work nor relieve the Contractor from compliance with the terms of the Contract. Public works inspections shall be requested by the Contractor at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of an anticipated inspection. Work done in the absence of prescribed inspection may be required to be removed and replaced under the proper inspection, and the entire cost of removal and replacement, including the cost of all materials which may be furnished by the City and used in the work thus removed, shall be borne by Page: E.6 the Contractor, regardless of whether the work removed is found to be defective or not. Work covered without the authority of City Engineer shall, upon order of the City Engineer, be uncovered to the extent required, and the Contractor shall similarly bear the entire cost of performing all the work and furnishing all the materials necessary for the removal of the covering and its subsequent replacement. 18. CONSTRUCTION STAKING Locations of new sign posts, signage, pavement marking, lines and striping as shown on the plans are approximate and the exact locations shall be established by the Contractor with approval by Engineer in the field. The Contractor shall be responsible for construction staking. Unless otherwise provided in the special provision, lines and grades for the construction shall be the responsibility of the contractor, with the following provisions: Unless directed otherwise during construction by the City Engineer, all work under this contract shall be built in accordance with the existing street lines and grades. Field survey for establishing these, and for the control of construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All such survey work including construction staking shall be done on all items ordinarily requiring grade and alignment, at intervals normally accepted by the agencies and trade involved. All Survey Monuments such as centerline monuments and Bench Marks removed and/or altered during the construction shall be reset and certified "corner records" shall be submitted by the Land Surveyor, to the Engineer prior to the final acceptance of the construction. 19. UTILITIES The Contractor shall provide coordination with all the utility companies involved and shall provide protection from damage to their facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement to said facilities made necessary by its failure to provide required protection. The Contractor is required to include utility requirements in the Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall notify all utility agencies and owners of all facilities within the area of construction a minimum of five (5) work days in advance of performing any work within said area. The Contractor shall protect all utilities and other improvements which may be impaired during construction operations. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain the actual location of all existing utilities, including service laterals, and other improvements indicated on the drawings that will be encountered in its construction operations, and to see that such utilities or other improvements are adequately protected from damage due to such operations. The Contractor shall take all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to provide for uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be solely responsible to check all utility record maps, books, and/or other data in the possession of the City, other agencies, and/or all utility companies, and no allowance shall be Page: E.7 made for any failure to have done so. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to completely remove all "construction graffiti" (spray paint or other marking for utilities, survey points and construction limits) prior to acceptance of the work as completed. 48 hours prior to any excavation, the Contractor shall call "Underground Service Alert -Southern California" for utility locating in all public right-of-ways by calling 811. List of Utility Owners are listed in the Section D General Provisions of these contract documents and sheet 1 of the plans. All utility structures, whether shown or not, within the street pavement rehabilitation shall be adjust to grade as follows: • Storm Drain and Sewer manhole frames and covers shall be adjusted to grade by the Contractor; • Water valves shall be adjusted to grade by the Contractor in coordination with the respective water company. The respective water company may provide new water valve covers otherwise the contractor will adjust the existing water cover; • SCE, Gas and Communication structures shall be adjusted by the respective purveyor. It shall be the Contractor responsibility to coordinate and notify the purveyors for the needs of their adjustment work. 20. TRAFFIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall provide a Traffic Control Plan prepared and signed by a licensed Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, install and maintain such devices which are necessary to provide safe and efficient passage for the traveling public through the work area, for the safety of personnel present in the work area, and to minimize inconvenience to adjacent properties. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, install and maintain such devices which are necessary to provide safe and efficient passage for the traveling public through the work area, for the safety of personnel present in the work area, and to minimize inconvenience to adjacent properties. All work and materials to implement construction staging and traffic control shall comply with the California Manual of Uniform Traffic Controls Device (CAMUTCD). Signs, markings, striping, barricades, delineators and all materials shall conform to applicable Caltrans standards and specifications. Arrow boards and other devises must comply with the City of Temple City requirements for nighttime noise standards at adjacent private property lines. The use of flagmen may be required if deemed so by the Engineer. Adequate flagmen, construction sign barricades, delineators, and arrow boards shall be used to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Adequate traffic control shall be maintained at all times through the construction zone, in compliance with the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify affected businesses and residences within the project in writing within 10 days prior to the start of construction. Page: E.8 Traffic control through the project area shall conform to the requirements of Section 7-10, "Public Convenience and Safety," (SSPWC). 21. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The following paragraphs shall be added to Subsection 300-1.3, Removal and Disposal of Materials of the SSPWC: • CONTRACTOR shall remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Cleanup of spillage will be at CONTRACTOR's expense. • Unless noted otherwise elsewhere on the contract documents, all materials indicated to be removed shall be recycled immediately at the CONTRACTOR's expense at a site approved by the Engineer, per the requirements highlighted in Subsection E.7 above. No demolished materials shall be stored in the Work Area or Staging Area at any time, but instead shall be removed and recycled immediately. • Contractor shall not start any removal work unless it is prepared to perform reconstruction work immediately without interruption from the time removals begun, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 22. PAVEMENT STRIPING AND MARKERS All work shall conform to the latest edition of Caltrans Standard Plans, Standard Specifications, and California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CAMUTCD). Traffic striping, raised pavement markers, reflective materials, the application of thermoplastic striping and pavement markings, and the installation of raised pavement markers shall conform to the provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Sections 84, "Traffic Stripes and Pavement Markings" and Section 85, "Pavement Markers". Striping details, pavement legends and symbols shall conform to those in Caltrans Standard Plans. Pavement legends and symbols shall be white, unless noted otherwise. Lane line and/or centerline pavement delineation, where existing or called for on the Plans, shall be provided at all time for traveled ways open to public traffic. Whenever the Work causes obliteration of pavement delineation, temporary pavement delineation or permanent traffic stripes of the appropriate color and detail shall be in place. In the locations shown on the Plans, prior to opening the travelled way to public traffic. Striping shall be cat tracked and approved by the City Inspector prior to final installation. All conflicting existing striping, painted symbols and raised pavement markers shall be removed. The removal of painted markings and raised pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. Thermoplastic pavement marking materials and installation shall conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 84-2. Materials shall consist of extruded Alkyd Binder Thermoplastic in conformance with State Specification 8010-19A. Application shall be by ribbon or extruded methods Page: E.9 only (no spraying). Page: E.10 Attachment A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENTS Project Number: XS -19-233 Project Name: Primrose Park Agency: City of Temple City THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Fifteen CCC Los Angeles Center Corps members will assist with installation of decomposed granite, irrigation, landscape plantings, and playground and bike rack installations. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the City and allow the indicated persons onto the site for the described work above. Contractor will not pay the above persons for his work. THIS IS A SPECIAL FUNDING REQUIREMENT: Ten members of the Temple City Youth Committee, twenty-five members of the Temple City Key Club, HealthCare Partners volunteers, and Girl Scout of America Troop 5141 will help with planting shade trees or installation of community art. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the City and allow the indicated persons onto the site for the described work above. Contractor will not pay the above persons for his work. Project will meet 10% requirement for recycled construction materials. Wood used for the project's permanent construction will be Forest Stewardship Council certified. Attachment B CITY STANDARD PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT TO BE EXECUTED CITY OF TEMPLE CITY PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT PROJECT THIS AGREEMENT ("Agreement") is made and entered into this day of , by and between the CITY OF TEMPLE CITY, a Municipal Corporation located in the County of Los Angeles, State of California ("CITY"), and , [a corporation/partnership/limited liability company corporation, located at ("CONTRACTOR"), collectively referred to as the Parties. RECITALS A. CITY, by its Notice Inviting Bids, duly advertised for written bids to be submitted on or before , for the following: in the City of Temple City, California ("Project"). B. At on said date, in the Temple City Council Chambers, the bids submitted for the Project were opened. C. At its regular meeting held on , the City Council of CITY accepted the bid of CONTRACTOR for the Project as being the lowest responsive bid received and directed that a written contract be entered into with CONTRACTOR. OPERATIVE PROVISIONS NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises and of the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, the parties do hereby agree as follows: 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. This Agreement consists of the following documents ("Contract Documents"), all of which are made a part of this Agreement: (a) Notice Inviting Bids (b) Instructions to Bidders (c) Bid Form (d) Bid Proposal and/or Contract Proposal, as accepted, including the Certificate of Bidders' Experience and Qualifications and the List of Subcontractors 1 (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) U) (k) (I) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) Information Required by Bidder Notice of Award Notice to Proceed This Agreement Verification of California Contractor's License Contractor's Certificate Regarding Workers' Compensation Security for payment (labor and materials) Security for performance Certificate(s) of Insurance General Conditions/Specifications Special Provisions Plans and Standard Drawings Prevailing Wage Scales (r) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, including subsequent addenda and supplements (s) Change orders issued by the City and signed by the Contractor pertaining to the Contract after the Contract is awarded to Contractor (t) All addenda issued by the City with respect to the foregoing prior to the opening of bids, including, Addenda Nos. (u) Other documents (list here or delete) In the event there is a conflict between the terms of the Contract Documents, the more specific or stringent provision shall govern. 2 2. SCOPE OF WORK. CONTRACTOR agrees to perform all work required for the Project and to fulfill all other obligations as set forth in the Contract Documents ("Work"). Except as specifically provided in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR must furnish all of the labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and transportation necessary to perform all of the Work. CONTRACTOR must perform all of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. COMPENSATION & PAYMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive and accept the total amount of Dollars ($ ), based upon those certain unit prices set forth in CONTRACTOR's Bid Schedule, a copy of which is attached hereto as Exhibit "A" and incorporated herein by this reference, as full compensation for the Work. Said compensation shall cover all expenses, losses, damages, and consequences arising out of the nature of the Work during its progress or prior to its acceptance, including those for well and faithfully completing the Work in the manner and time specified in the Contract Documents, and also including those arising form actions of the elements, unforeseen difficulties or obstructions encountered in the prosecution of the Work, suspension or discontinuance of the Work, and all other unknowns or risks of any description connected with the Work. CITY shall retain five percent (5%) of the compensation until the provisions of Section 14 herein have been met. CITY hereby agrees to pay CONTRACTOR at the time, in the manner, and upon the conditions set forth in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 4. UNAUTHORIZED ALIENS. CONTRACTOR promises and agrees to comply with all of the provisions of State and Federal law with respect to the employment of unauthorized aliens, including without limitation the Federal Immigration and Nationality Act (8 USCA 1101, et seq.), as amended. Should CONTRACTOR employ one or more unauthorized aliens for the performance of the Work, and should the Federal Government impose sanctions against the CITY for such use of unauthorized aliens, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to, and shall, reimburse CITY for the cost of all sanctions imposed, together with any and all costs, including attorney's fees, incurred by the CITY in connection therewith. 5. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES. CONTRACTOR hereby represents and warrants that: (a) It is not currently, and has not at any time within the past five (5) calendar years been, suspended, debarred, or excluded from participating in, bidding on, contracting for, or completing any project funded in whole or in part by program, grant or loan funded by the federal government or the State of California; and (b) CONTRACTOR currently has, and for the past five (5) calendar years has maintained in good standing, a valid California contractor's license; and (c) CONTRACTOR is registered with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform services on public works projects as required by Labor Code section 1725.5. 3 CONTRACTOR agrees to complete and execute any statement or certificate to this effect as may be required by the City or by any federal or State of California program, loan or grant utilized on this Project. 6. TIME TO PERFORM THE WORK. CONTRACTOR shall commence the Work on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed to be issued to CONTRACTOR by the Director of Public Works of CITY, and shall complete work on the Project within ( ) days after commencement. 7. NONDISCRIMINATION. CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate in its recruiting, hiring, promotion, demotion or termination practices on the basis of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, martial status, sex, age, or sexual orientation in the performance of this Agreement, and shall comply with the provisions of the California Fair Employment and Housing Act as set forth in Part 2.8 of Division 3, Title 2 of the California Government Code; the Federal Civil Rights Act of 1964, as set forth in Public Law 88-352, and all amendments thereto; Executive Order 11246; and all administrative rules and regulations issued pursuant to such acts and order. 8. LABOR CODE REQUIREMENTS. (a) CONTRACTOR is aware of and agrees to abide by the provisions of California Labor Code Sections 1720, et seq., as well as Sections 1771, 1773, 1773.1, 1773.6, 1773.7, 1774, 1775, 1776 and 1777, pertaining to the obligation to pay prevailing wages with respect to the performance of work ("Prevailing Wage Laws"). Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages and the general prevailing rate for holiday and overtime work for each craft are available upon request from the City. A copy of the prevailing rate of per diem wages shall be posted at the job site. If such posting is not possible, a copy shall be posted at the business of the CONTRACTOR. (b) CONTRACTOR acknowledges that under California Labor Code sections 1810 and following, eight hours of labor constitutes a legal day's work. CONTRACTOR will forfeit as a penalty to City the sum of $25.00 for each worker employed in the execution of this Agreement by CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of Labor Code section 1810. (Labor Code § 1813.) (c) CONTRACTOR must comply with Labor Code section 1771.1(a), which provides that CONTRACTOR is only eligible to perform the Work if CONTRACTOR is registered with the Department of Industrial Relations as required by Labor Code Section 1725.5, and that CONTRACTOR may award subcontracts for work that qualifies as a "public work" only to subcontractors which are at the time of award registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code Section 1725.5. CONTRACTOR must obtain proof of such registration from all such subcontractors. 4 (d) CONTRACTOR, and any subcontractor engaged by CONTRACTOR, must pay not less than the specified prevailing rate of per diem wages to all workers employed in the execution of this Agreement. (Labor Code § 1774.) CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with Labor Code section 1776 relative to the retention and inspection of payroll records. (e) CONTRACTOR must comply with all provisions of Labor Code section 1775. Under Section 1775, Contractor may forfeit as a penalty to City up to $50.00 for each worker employed in the execution of the Agreement by CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor for each calendar day, or portion thereof, in which the worker is paid less than the prevailing rates. Contractor may also be liable to pay the difference between the prevailing wage rates and the amount paid to each worker for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for which each worker was paid less than the prevailing wage rate. (f) Nothing in this Agreement prevents CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor from employing properly registered apprentices in the execution of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with Labor Code section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable occupations. This statute requires that contractors and subcontractors must submit contract award information to the applicable joint apprenticeship committee, must employ apprentices in apprenticeable occupations in a ratio of not less than one hour of apprentice's work for every five hours of labor performed by a journeyman (unless an exception is granted under §1777.5), must contribute to the fund or funds in each craft or trade or a like amount to the California Apprenticeship Council, and that contractors and subcontractors must not discriminate among otherwise qualified employees as apprentices solely on the ground of sex, race, religion, creed, national origin, ancestry or color. Only apprentices defined in Labor Code section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeship standards and who have written apprentice contracts, may be employed on public works in apprenticeable occupations. (g) CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and hold the CITY, its elected officials, officers, employees and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of any failure or alleged failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws. 9. PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS. (a) CONTRACTOR shall, without disturbing the condition, notify CITY in writing as soon as CONTRACTOR, or any of CONTRACTOR's subcontractors, agents or employees have knowledge and reporting is possible, of the discovery of any of the following conditions: (i) The presence of any material that the CONTRACTOR believes is hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code; (ii) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated in the specifications; or, 5 (iii) Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of this character provided for in this Agreement. (b) Pending a determination by CITY of appropriate action to be taken, CONTRACTOR shall provide security measures (e.g., fences) adequate to prevent the hazardous waste or physical conditions from causing bodily injury to any person. (c) CITY shall promptly investigate the reported conditions. If CITY, through its Director of Public Works, or his or her designee, and in the exercise of its sole discretion, determines that the conditions do materially differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and will cause a decrease or increase in the CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, then CITY shall issue a change order. (d) In the event of a dispute between CITY and CONTRACTOR as to whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date, and shall proceed with all work to be performed under the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall retain any and all rights which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the parties. 10. INDEMNITY. CONTRACTOR shall assume the defense of and indemnify and hold harmless the CITY, its elective and appointive boards, officers, agents and employees, from all claims, loss, damage, injury and liability of every kind, nature and description, directly or indirectly arising form the performance of the Work, regardless of responsibility of negligence; and from any and all claims, loss, damage, injury and liability, resulting directly or indirectly from the nature of the Work covered by this Agreement, regardless of responsibility of negligence. (a) CITY does not, and shall not, waive any rights against CONTRACTOR which it may have because of the acceptance by CITY or the deposit with CITY by CONTRACTOR, of any of the insurance policies hereinafter described in this Agreement. (b) The indemnity provided by CONTRACTOR shall apply to all damages and claims for damages of every kind suffered, or alleged to have been suffered, by reason of any of the Work by CONTRACTOR, or any subcontractor, regardless of whether insurance policies are applicable to any of the damages or claims for damages. (c) The provisions of this section do not apply to claims occurring as a result of the City's sole negligence or willful acts or omissions. (d) The provisions of this section will survive the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement. 6 11. BONDS. CONTRACTOR, before commencing the Work, shall furnish and file with CITY a bond, or bonds, in a form satisfactory to the CITY, in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the compensation amount stated in Section 3 of this Agreement conditioned upon the faithful performance of this Agreement and a bond, or bonds, in a form satisfactory to the CITY, in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the compensation amount stated in Section 3 of this Agreement conditioned upon the payment of all labor and materials furnished in connection with this Agreement. 12. INSURANCE. CONTRACTOR shall not commence the Work until CONTRACTOR has obtained all insurance required by the Contract Documents and such insurance has been approved by CITY as to form, amount and carrier. CONTRACTOR shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor have been obtained and approved. (a) Workers' Compensation. CONTRACTOR shall take out and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Worker's Compensation Insurance (Statutory Limits) with Employers Liability Insurance (with limits of at least $1,000,000) for all of CONTRACTOR's employees employed at the Project site; and, if any work is sublet, CONTRACTOR shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide Worker's Compensation Insurance for all of the latter's employees, unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by CONTRACTOR. If any class of employees engaged in Work under this Agreement at the Project site is not protected under any Workers' Compensation law, CONTRACTOR shall provide and shall cause each subcontractor to provide adequate insurance for the protection of employees not otherwise protected. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify CITY for any damage resulting from failure of either CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor to take out or maintain such insurance. CONTRACTOR shall submit to Agency, along with the certificate of Insurance, a Waiver of Subrogation endorsement in favor of the Agency, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. (b) Comprehensive General Liability, Products/Completed Operations Hazard, and Contractual General Liability Insurance. CONTRACTOR shall take out and maintain during the life of this Agreement such comprehensive general liability, products/completed operations hazard, comprehensive automobile liability and contractual general liability insurance as shall protect CITY, its elective and appointive boards, officers, agents and employees, CONTRACTOR, and any subcontractor performing work covered by this Agreement, from claims for damage for personal injury, including death, as well as from claims for property damage which may arise from CONTRACTOR's or any subcontractor's operations under this Agreement, whether such operations be by CONTRACTOR or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor, and the amounts of such insurance shall be as follows: 7 (i) General Liability Insurance in an amount of not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000) per occurrence; (ii) Products/Completed Operations Hazard Insurance in an amount of not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000) per occurrence; and (iii) Contractual General Liability Insurance in an amount of not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000) per occurrence. General aggregate limits in an amount of not less than TWO MILLION DOLLARS ($2,000,000) shall be considered equivalent to the required minimum limits set forth hereinabove. (c) Comprehensive Automobile Liability. CONTRACTOR shall take out and maintain during the life of this Agreement, comprehensive automobile liability insurance as shall protect CITY, its elective and appointive boards, officers, agents and employees, CONTRACTOR, and any subcontractor performing work covered by this Agreement, from claims for damage for personal injury, including death, as well as from claims for property damage which may arise from CONTRACTOR's or any subcontractor's operations under this Agreement, whether such operations be by CONTRACTOR or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor, and the amounts of such insurance shall be as follows: (i) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount of not less than ONE MILLION DOLLARS ($1,000,000) combined single limit per accident. (d) Proof of Insurance. The insurance required by this Agreement shall be with insurers which are California Admitted and Best A rated or better. CITY shall be named as "additional insured" on the general liability and automobile liability required hereunder, and CONTRACTOR shall furnish CITY, concurrently with the execution hereof, with satisfactory proof of carriage of the insurance required, and adequate legal assurance that each carrier will give CITY at least thirty (30) days' prior notice of the cancellation of any policy during the effective period of this Agreement. (e) Umbrella or excess liability insurance. required]. Contractor shall obtain and maintain an umbrella or excess liability insurance policy with limits that will provide bodily injury, personal injury and property damage liability coverage at least as broad as the primary coverages set forth above, including commercial general liability and employer's liability. Such policy or policies shall include the following terms and conditions: (Optional depending on limits . A drop down feature requiring the policy to respond if any primary insurance that would otherwise have applied proves to be uncollectible in whole or in part for any reason; . Pay on behalf of wording as opposed to reimbursement; 8 . Concurrency of effective dates with primary policies; and . Policies shall "follow form" to the underlying primary policies. . Insureds under primary policies shall also be insureds under the umbrella or excess policies. (f) Requirements not limiting. Requirements of specific coverage features or limits contained in this Section are not intended as a limitation on coverage, limits or other requirements, or a waiver of any coverage normally provided by any insurance. Specific reference to a given coverage feature is for purposes of clarification only as it pertains to a given issue and is not intended by any party or insured to be all inclusive, or to the exclusion of other coverage, or a waiver of any type. If the CONTRACTOR maintains higher limits than the minimums shown above, the Agency requires and shall be entitled to coverage for the higher limits maintained by the CONTRACTOR. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the Agency. (g) Primary/contributing. Coverage provided by the CONTRACTOR shall be primary and any insurance or self-insurance or maintained by Agency shall not be required to contribute to it. The limits of insurance required herein may be satisfied by a combination of primary and umbrella or excess insurance. Any umbrella or excess insurance shall contain or be endorsed to contain a provision that such coverage shall also apply on a primary and non-contributory basis for the benefit of Agency before the Agency's own insurance or self-insurance shall be called upon to protect is as a named insured. (h) Notice to Proceed. The CITY will not issue any notice authorizing CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor to commence the Work under this Agreement until CONTRACTOR has provided to the CITY the proof of insurance as required by this Section 12. 13. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. The parties agree that it would be impractical and extremely difficult to fix the actual damages to the CITY in the event the Project is not commenced and/or completed on or before the dates specified for commencement and completion of the Project in the Contract Documents. The parties have considered the facts of a breach of this Agreement and have agreed that the liquidated damages sum hereinafter set forth is reasonable as liquidated damages in the event of a breach, and that said sum shall be presumed to be the amount of the damages sustained by the CITY in the event such work is not begun and/or completed and accepted by the times so specified in the Contract Documents. The sum of ONE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($1,000.00) shall be presumed to be the amount of damages suffered by the CITY for each day's delay in the starting and/or completion and acceptance of the Project after the dates specified in the Contract Documents for the start and/or completion thereof, and CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to pay said sum of ONE THOUSAND DOLLARS ($1,000.00) as liquidated damages for each day of delay in the starting and/or completing and acceptance of said Project beyond the dates specified in the 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Any and all such liquidated damages assessed shall be done in accordance with that certain edition of the Standard Specification for Public Works Construction currently in effect on the execution date of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR CITY OF TEMPLE CITY By By Date: Date: 14. NOTICE OF COMPLETION. Upon completion of PROJECT and acceptance of same by the City Council of the CITY, the City Manager of the CITY shall cause to be recorded a Notice of Completion with the office of the Los Angeles County Recorder; and, after thirty-five (35) days from the date said Notice of Completion is recorded, the Director of Finance of CITY shall release the funds retained pursuant to Section 3 hereof; provided there have been no mechanics' liens or stop notices filed against the Work which have not been paid, withdrawn or eliminated as liens against said work. 15. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. In performing the Work, CONTRACTOR must comply with all applicable statutes, laws and regulations, including, but not limited to, OSHA requirements and the Temple City Municipal Code. Contractor must, at Contractor's sole expense, obtain all necessary permits and licenses required for the Work, and give all necessary notices and pay all fees and taxes required by law, including, without limitation, any business license tax imposed by City. 16. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is and will at all times remain as to CITY a wholly independent contractor. Neither the CITY nor any of its officers, employees, or agents will have control over the conduct of CONTRACTOR or any of CONTRACTOR's officers, employees, agents or subcontractors, except as expressly set forth in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may not at any time or in any manner represent that it or any of its officers, employees, agents, or subcontractors are in any manner officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of CITY. 17. GENERAL PROVISIONS. (a) Authority to Execute. Each Party represents and warrants that all necessary action has been taken by such Party to authorize the undersigned to execute this Agreement and to bind it to the performance of its obligations. (b) Assignment. CONTRACTOR may not assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of CITY, which consent may be withheld in the CITY's sole discretion since the experience and qualifications of CONTRACTOR were material considerations for this Agreement. (c) Binding Effect. This Agreement is binding upon the heirs, executors, administrators, successors and permitted assigns of the Parties. 10 (d) Integrated Agreement. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, is the entire, complete, final and exclusive expression of the Parties with respect to the Work to be performed under this Agreement and supersedes all other agreements or understandings, whether oral or written, between CONTRACTOR and CITY prior to the execution of this Agreement. (e) Modification of Agreement. No amendment to or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless made in writing and approved by CONTRACTOR and by the City Council or City Manager of CITY, as applicable. The Parties agree that this requirement for written modifications cannot be waived and that any attempted waiver will be void. (f) Counterparts and Facsimile Signatures. This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, and all of which, when taken together, constitute one and the same instrument. Amendments to this Agreement will be considered executed when the signature of a party is delivered by facsimile transmission. Such facsimile signature will have the same effect as an original signature. (g) Waiver. Waiver by any Party of any term, condition, or covenant of this Agreement will not constitute a waiver of any other term, condition, or covenant. Waiver by any Party of any breach of the provisions of this Agreement will not constitute a waiver of any other provision, or a waiver of any subsequent breach or violation of any provision of this Agreement. Acceptance by City of any Work performed by CONTRACTOR will not constitute a waiver of any of the provisions of this Agreement. (h) Interpretation. This Agreement will be interpreted, construed and governed according to the laws of the State of California. Each party has had the opportunity to review this Agreement with legal counsel. The Agreement will be construed simply, as a whole, and in accordance with its fair meaning. It will not be interpreted strictly for or against either party. (i) Severability. If any term, condition or covenant of this Agreement is declared or determined by any court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Agreement will not be affected and the Agreement will be read and construed without the invalid, void or unenforceable provision. (j) Attorneys' Fees. The prevailing party in any action to resolve a dispute concerning this Agreement shall be entitled to have and recover from the losing party the reasonable attorneys' fees and costs of such action. (k) Venue. In the event of litigation between the parties, venue in state trial courts will be in the County of Los Angeles. In the event of litigation in a U.S. District Court, venue will be in the Central District of California, in Los Angeles. 11 (I) Notices. All written notices required or permitted to be given under this Agreement will be deemed made when received by the other Party at its respective address as follows: To CITY: To Contractor: City of Temple City 9701 Las Tunas Drive Temple City, California 91780 Attention: (Tel.) (Fax) Attention: (Tel.) (Fax) Notice will be deemed effective on the date personally delivered or transmitted by facsimile. If the notice is mailed, notice will be deemed given three days after deposit of the same in the custody of the United States Postal Service, postage prepaid, for first class delivery, or upon delivery if using a major courier service with tracking capabilities. Any Party may change its notice information by giving notice to the other Party in compliance with this section. 12 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this contract to be executed on the day of , 20 , by their respective officers duly authorized in that behalf. CITY OF TEMPLE CITY, a municipal corporation ATTEST: By Peggy Kuo, City Clerk Date: APPROVED AS TO FORM: Eric S. Vail, City Attorney , a [state type of entity] By By 13 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document, to 'which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document_ State of California County of Los Angeles On before me, (irmart flb'na of Notary Pi:b,Mr and TMio) personally appeared who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the persons) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signatures} on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted: executed the i rrgtrument_ I certify under PENALTY Or PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct WITNESS my hand and official seal_ Signature Nam iamr Sinn' Aixitre f5 r,ot„i Cif Notary Puy) OPTIONAL Tfrougria the information ;s not required by taw, it may prove vahiabie to persons retying on the document and std prevent fraerduierat remova? vat and reattachment of this form to another docurnen[_ Daip ion of Attached Document Title of Type of Document. Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above : CapadIy(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signers Name: El Individual ❑ Corporate Officer - Title (s): ❑ P'artner ❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator El Other: S finer is Representing: Number of Pages. Signer's Name: D Individual D Corporate Officer - Title(s): D Partner El Limited D Genera D Attorney in Fact El Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer is Representing: CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document, to wh idi this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness,. accuracy, or validity of that document_ State of California County of Los Angeles On before me, ifriAcrtName of Mat] reArhWci3 Trtiaj personally appeared who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person (s) whose names) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the carne in his/her/their authorized capacily{ies), and that by his/her/their signatures) on the instrument the persori(s), or the entity upon behalf of'which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY CIF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct_ WITNESS my hand and official seal_ Maar Netrrry looMbaire Signature ingrat,rre of Nlotwy RI Mc) OPTIONAL Though() the rn#r'rmation rs not rerp red by ,ra w, ,may pnave hrabke to persons retying orr the document cent arnd coVid prevent fracidulent removal and reattachment of this form to anotherdocument_ Description of Attached Document Trtle of Type of Daournerrt- 0 unrent Date: Signals) Other Than Named Above: C apadty{ies) CIairned by Signers) Signer's Name: ❑ Individual El Corporate Officer - Trtle (5): El Partner D Limited El General El Attorney in Fact El Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer is Representing: Number of Pages Signer's Name: p Inditiridwa I ❑ Corporate Officer - Trtle(s): p Partner El Limited p General El Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other: Signer is Representing: Appendix 1, Technical Specs TEMPLE CITY 9701 E Las Tunas Dr, Temple City, CA 91780 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRIMROSE PARK 5928 Primrose Avenue, Temple City, CA 91780 Prepared By: David Volz Design Landscape Architects Inc. 151 Kalmus Drive, Suite M-8 Costa Mesa, CA 92626 Phone: 714-641-1300 November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK TABLE OF CONTENTS CIVIL ENGINEERING Mobilization Bid item 1 Traffic control (Not a Bid item) Demolition and site clearing (Not a Bid item) Earthwork, removal and grading, removal of existing pavement, concrete improvements, and excavation of proposed structural section, including restroom building Bid item 2 Water pollution control (Not a Bid item) 4" Thick Asphalt Concrete Pavement Bid Item 3 4" Thick Crushed Miscellaneous Base Bid Item 4 Concrete improvements Bid item 5 to 10 Pvc drain pipe and drain inlet box Bid item 11 to 19 Mc -3500 Stormtech unit Bid item 20 4 -inch vcp sewer service and sewer cleanout Bid item 21 and 22 1'/2 -inch water service Bid item 23 11/2 -inch waste line Bid item 24 November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK Traffic striping and signage, wheel stops Bid item 25 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE Section 02 87 50 — Decorative Steel Shelters Section 02 88 20 - Playground Equipment Section 03 11 13 - Concrete Formwork Section 03 30 53 - Miscellaneous Concrete Section 04 21 00 - Clay Brick Unit Masonry Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units Section 05 73 13 - Ornamental Tubular Steel Fences & Gates Section 09 96 23 - Nonsacrificial Anti -graffiti Section 12 93 00 - Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials Section 32 15 40 - Decomposed Granite Surfacing Section 32 18 16 - Synthetic Resilient Surfacing Section 32 84 00 — Irrigation Section 32 90 00 — Landscaping Section 32 92 23 — Sod ARCHITECTURAL METHODS AND MATERIALS Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Form Work Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing Section 04 20 00 - Concrete Masonry Units Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Section 06 16 00 - Framing and Sheathing November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control Section 08 11 00 - Standard Steel Doors Section 08 12 00 - Standard Steel Frames Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware Section 09 67 00 - Epoxy Resinous Flooring Section 09 90 00 - Painting Section 10 80 00 - Toilet and Bath Accessories Section 22 00 00 — Plumbing ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 26 00 10 - Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices 26 21 00 - Low -Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 23 00 - Low -Voltage Switchgear 26 24 13 — Switchboards 26 24 16 — Panelboards November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices 26 28 13 — Fuses 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK TECHNICAL PROVISIONS GENERAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The Standard Specifications for the construction materials and construction methods as set forth in the "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", 2018 Edition shall be the Standard Provisions for all the Work to be done and the provisions of the Contract for the Work. In case of conflict between the Standard Specifications and these Technical Provisions, the Technical Provisions shall take precedence over and prevail over such conflicting portions. MOBILIZATION BID ITEM 1: Mobilization shall consist of preparatory work and operations including all of the labor, equipment, tools, supplies, costs, arrangements, and others that are necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, materials, and incidentals to the project site necessary for work on the project and for all other work and operations which must be performed including, but not limited to, bonds, insurance, securing an adequate storage site for equipment and materials, and financing prior to beginning work on the various contract items on the project site. The cost of time, materials, and labor to move the necessary construction equipment to and from the site, supervisory time on the job by the Contractor's personnel to keep the construction site in a safe condition, and all other related work as required at all times and for all non -working days during the construction period shall have been included in the bid. PAYMENT Payment for the preceding shall be included in the LUMP SUM for mobilization and shall be considered full compensation including the cost for obtaining all of the required business licenses and permits. TRAFFIC CONTROL (NOT A BID ITEM) 1.1 DESCRIPTION Traffic control, construction signing and traffic maintenance shall comply with the provisions of Subsection 7-10 of the Standard Specifications and the current requirements set forth in the "Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones" published by the Department of Transportation, State of California, these Technical Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. 1.2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect work and prevent accidents during any and all phases of the work. The Contractor shall repair all damaged new improvements as a result of vandalism (i.e., vehicle tracks, footprints, writing, etc.). If deemed necessary by the City, the Contractor shall repair, at its cost, the defective area in accordance with these Technical Provisions. 1 Primrose Park — Temple City 1.3 CONSTRUCTION SIGNING Construction signing shall consist of furnishing, installing, maintaining and removing construction signs and barricades as required by the "Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones". The traffic control system shall be installed prior to starting work and shall not be removed until all work has been completed. Also in conjunction to the public relations effort, Contractor shall supply and erect project construction information signs at the designated locations as determined by the City. Such signs shall conform to the City's specifications. Specific verbiage to be determined by the City. There shall be a minimum of four (4) such signs posted. 1.4 TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE The Contractor shall be responsible for handling vehicular and pedestrian traffic in accordance with Subsection 7-10 of the Standard Specifications and these Technical Provisions. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer relative to handling traffic through all work areas and shall make his own arrangements relative to keeping the working area clear of parked vehicles and maintaining clear access to driveways. Contractor's equipment and personal vehicles of the Contractor's employees shall not be parked on the traveled way at any time. Overnight parking of construction equipment in the work zone or on adjacent roads is not permitted. Parking of construction equipment shall be confined to the approved storage site. 1.5 STRIPING Temporary striping and marking for traffic control if required shall conform to Section 310-5.6.5 of the Standard Specifications. Temporary striping and marking which has no further use shall be removed by wet sandblasting, and all sand used in sandblasting shall be removed without delay as the sandblasting operation progresses. 1.6 RESTRICTIONS ON CLOSURE OF STREETS AND TRAFFIC LANES The Contractor shall conduct all operations so as to provide reasonable access to the existing park facilities and have no greater length or quantity of work under construction that can be properly constructed with a minimum of inconvenience to the public. PAYMENT Payment for traffic control shall be included in various other items of work and shall be considered full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Standard Specifications and these Technical Provisions. 2 Primrose Park — Temple City DEMOLITION AND SITE CLEARING (NOT A BID ITEM) Perform demolition work in a pre -planned, systematic, efficient, and orderly manner. Deploy customary and acceptable methods as required to complete the Work indicated on the Plans in accordance with governing regulations. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by City and County Air Pollution Control District and the Southern California Air Quality Management District. 1.1 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS All removed materials not salvaged or reused shall be removed from the project site no later than the end of each work day and transported legally for disposal at a qualified site. If hazardous materials are encountered, notify the City Inspector immediately. Burning of removed materials is not permitted. 1.2 ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING SANITARY SEWERAGE, WATER, GAS, ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS All existing utility facilities, i.e. manholes, vaults, irrigation boxes, valve cans, etc. may or may not have been indicated on the plans. While these items are not expected on this project, the Contractor is nevertheless hereby made aware that such encounter will require the Contractor to bear the cost to raise ALL to finished grade at no additional cost to the City. Drawings show existing major underground utilities using the best information available. Verification of existing utilities and the actual locations are the Contractor's responsibility. Any utility inadvertently damaged by the Contractor shall be immediately called to the City's attention for shutoff and then be immediately repaired by the Contractor at its own cost within 4 hours. 1.3 CLEANUP AND REPAIR The Contractor, at the end of each work day, shall dispose of all removed materials from the site. The Contractor also shall protect the site and the new improvements from vandals or other damages at all times until City acceptance. PAYMENT Payment for demolition and site clearing shall be included in various other items of work and shall include all of the costs for labor, equipment, supplies, tools, haulers, permit and disposal dump fees, security personnel, and other items of work to dispose of all unwanted materials and to clear, protect, and maintain the jobsite at no additional cost to the City. 3 Primrose Park — Temple City EARTHWORK, REMOVAL AND GRADING, CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS, AND EXCAVATION OF PROPOSED STRUCTURAL SECTION, INCLUDING RESTROOM BUILDING BID ITEM 2: Earthwork, removal and grading, removal and disposal of unclassified excavation, structural excavation, removal of asphalt concrete pavement, sidewalk, driveways, fences, etc. for proposed improvements shall conform to the applicable portions of Section 300 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction and recommendations of a Geotechnical Report prepared by Strata -Tech, Inc, dated September 18, 2019. Such work shall include all the cost of all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, and all other costs required to: • Arrange with DigAlert to mark all potential interfering underground wet and dry utilities within the work limits; • To the extent possible search, identify, and mark other underground utilities that were not identified by DigAlert; • Expose, cut, and cap all existing irrigation lines and components along the excavate limits; • Excavate, remove, and properly dispose of existing interfering soil and landscape materials. Includes overexcavation for restroom building and hardscape areas per attached Geotechnical Report prepared by Strata -Tech, Inc; • Extend limits of excavation and disposal to 3 -feet beyond the new building footprint; • Remove and dispose of all interfering tree roots and organic matters. Root prune as described on the Landscaping Plan; • Excavate and disposal required for StormTech unit shall be paid per Bid Item 20; • Grade to the elevations shown on plans. Backfill all voids and holes with similar and clean materials. Import as needed. PAYMENT Payment for this item shall be made per the contract LUMP SUM bid price for removal and disposal/export of excavated material and no additional compensation for this item of work shall be made. WATER POLLUTION CONTROL (NOT A BID ITEM) Construction activities will be conducted in a manner to protect channels, storm drains, and bodies of water from pollution. Water pollution control work shall consist of activities necessary to meet the requirements of the City's National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Area wide Urban Storm Water Runoff Permit, the County's Drainage Area Management Plan (DAMP), The State's General Construction Activities Permit (Order No. 2009- 0009-DWQ, NPDES No CAS000002, adopted September 2, 2009 and effective July 1, 2010), and as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate water pollution control work with all other work done on the contract. The Contractor shall be required to comply with all requirements of the NPDES Permit, including preparation and implementation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic copy of the SWPPP shall be submitted to the City for review 4 Primrose Park — Temple City and approval. A hard copy of the SWPPP shall be retained on -site at all times as long as the contractor is responsible for the project site conditions. Implementation of the SWPPP shall not reduce effectiveness of existing storm drain system or interfere with traffic on public streets. The Contractor will implement the SWPPP and make changes both to the SWPPP and in the field as conditions warrant it. The Contractor will be solely responsible to prevent any pollutants from leaving the site. The Contractor shall notify the City of Temple City's Stormwater/Wastewater Compliance Specialist immediately upon request from any regulatory agency to enter, inspect, sample, monitor, or otherwise access the project site or the Contractor's records pertaining to stormwater pollution control work. The Contractor shall provide copies of correspondence, notices of violation, enforcement actions, or fines proposed by regulatory agencies to the City's Stormwater/Wastewater Compliance Specialist. Failure to update, implement and maintain the SWPPP will result in withholding of any progress payment(s) to the Contractor. Re -inspection staff costs due to NPDES non-compliance will be billed to the Contractor in 15 -minute increments if the Contractor fails to maintain the site, water pollution testing data, Contractor inspection forms, and/or reports as detailed in the WPCP and as site conditions warrant. Contractor will also be responsible for any enforcement actions and penalties enacted on the City by the State Water Resources Control Board, Regional Water Quality Control Board, and/or any other agency due to Contractor's non-compliance with applicable water pollution regulations. Progress payments and/or final payments may be withheld to cover enforcement liabilities which include, but are not limited to, maximum financial penalties, legal costs, staff costs, and economic savings from violations and/or costs associated with corrective actions as required by enforcing agency. Contractor shall install erosion and sediment control measures as indicated on Improvement Plans. PAYMENT Payment for water pollution control and complying with NPDES requirements shall be included in various other items of work and shall be full compensation for all items of work and all appurtenant work including installation of all erosion and sediment control measures and furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals. 4" THICK ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT BID ITEM 3: Asphalt concrete (AC) shall conform to provisions of Sections 203 (except Section 203-6.4.2), 302-5 and 400 of the Standard Specifications, except where superseded by these and these Special Provisions. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course shall be Type III/C2 (PG64-10). Asphalt Concrete Base Course shall be Type III/B2 (PG64-10). Coarse aggregate shall consist of material of which at least 75% by weight shall be crushed particles. Asphalt concrete shall consist of minimum 15% RAP but shall not exceed 20% RAP. The Contractor shall submit for Engineer approval the mix design for asphalt concrete covering the specific materials to be used. Performance graded (PG) asphalt binder shall be PG -64-10 and shall conform to Section 92 of the State Standard Specifications. 5 Primrose Park — Temple City The sand equivalent and stabilometer-value requirements of Section 400-4.3 shall be the moving average requirements. Individual test requirements for sand equivalent and S -value shall be as determined by the laboratory designated by the City. Base course asphalt shall be placed on the prepared subgrade by approved spreading devices, which will deposit a uniform layer of materials. Surface course shall be placed in one lift with an approved self-propelled asphalt paver. Any surface irregularities will be corrected in the aforementioned manner as directed. Upon completion, the pavement shall be true to grade. Automatic screed control system with minimum 30 feet long ski device shall be used. The ski device shall be a rigid one-piece unit and entire length shall be utilized in activating the sensor. If in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory riding surface cannot be attained on the surface course, the Contractor shall be required to spot dump, grade and roll or heat and plane off asphalt concrete following placement of base course to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Add to Subsection 302-5.5 of the Standard Specifications, "Distribution and Spreading", the following: Tarpaulin shall be used to cover all loads when directed by the Engineer. In lieu of the Standard Specifications, in place density shall be achieved by utilizing the compaction method as specified in Section 39-3 of the State Standard Specifications. Rolling shall be performed so that cracking, shoving, or displacement will be avoided. Provided it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the sole risk and expense of the Contractor, that one roller can perform the work, the required minimum rolling equipment specified above may be reduced to one 2 -axle tandem roller weighing at least 8 tons, for each paver, under the following conditions: A. When asphalt concrete is placed at a rate of 50 tons or less per hour at any location. B. When asphalt concrete is placed at a rate of 100 tons or less per hour at the locations or under the conditions as follows: 1. Placed on miscellaneous areas in accordance with the provisions in Section 39, "Miscellaneous Areas", of the State Standard Specifications. 2. When the width to be placed is less than 8 feet. 3. In alleys. Alternative compacting equipment, approved by the Engineer in accordance with California Test 113, may be used for the initial breakdown compaction if operated according to the procedures and under the conditions designated in the approval. Except when leveling or when asphalt concrete less than 0.20 feet in compacted thickness is being placed on existing surfacing, additional compaction with pneumatic -tired rollers will not be required when approved alternative equipment has been used for the initial compaction. A vibratory roller may be used as the finish roller provided that it meets the requirements of a finish roller and is operated with the vibratory unit turned off. 6 Primrose Park — Temple City Upon completion of rolling operations, if ordered by the Engineer, the asphalt concrete or asphalt concrete base shall be cooled by applying water. Applying water shall conform to the provisions in Section 17, "Watering", of the State Standard Specifications. The completed surfacing shall be thoroughly compacted, smooth, and free from ruts, humps, depressions, or irregularities. Any ridges, indentations, or other objectionable marks left in the surface of the asphalt concrete by blading or other equipment shall be eliminated by rolling or other means. The use of any equipment that leaves ridges, indentations, or other objectionable marks in the asphalt concrete shall be discontinued, and acceptable equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. When a straightedge 12 feet long is laid on the finished surface and parallel with the centerline, the surface shall not vary more than 0.01 foot from the lower edge of the straightedge. The transverse slope of the finished surface shall be uniform to a degree such that no depressions greater than 0.02 foot are present when tested with a straightedge 12 feet long laid in a direction transverse to the centerline and extending from edge to edge of a 12 -foot traffic lane. 1.1 ASPHALT EMULSION The tack coat between overlays or between overlay and existing pavement shall be a SS -1 emulsified asphalt product. Tack coat shall be applied per Section 203-3 of the Standard Specifications and shall be applied at the approximate rate of 0.10 gallons per square yard and shall conform to the provisions of Section 203-3 of the Standard Specifications. A tack coat shall also be applied to all vertical surfaces of existing pavement and curbs and gutters against which additional materials are to be placed. PAYMENT Payment for asphalt concrete and full depth AC shall be at the contract unit price per TON and shall include full compensation for all labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all work. Final quantities shall be measured in the field and based upon a legible copy of a Weighmaster's certificate showing gross, tare and net weight of each truckload of asphalt concrete mixture. This payment shall also be full compensation for furnishing and placing all liquid asphalt used for tack coat. Payment is for asphalt concrete used in permanent trench resurfacing and for asphalt concrete outside of the trench areas. Payment for liquid asphalt and asphalt emulsion will be included with asphalt concrete and no separate payment shall be made. 4" THICK CRUSHED MISCELLANEOUS BASE BID ITEM 4: Crushed aggregate base shall conform to Section 200 of the Standard Specifications. Subsection 200-2.9 is hereby added to Section 200 of the Standard Specifications. Materials used for untreated aggregate base and sub -base will be as follows: Crushed aggregate base will consist of entirely crushed rock and rock dust conforming to the requirements of Subsection 200-1.2 for %-inch crushed aggregate, of the Standard Specifications. Percentage of wear and grading will conform to Subsections 200-2.2.1 and 200- 2.2.2 of the Standard Specifications. Maximum size aggregate will be %-inch. 7 Primrose Park — Temple City Samples of the proposed crushed aggregate base to be used on the project will be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to placement by the Contractor. PAYMENT Payment for crushed aggregate base shall be per TON, complete in place, and shall be in conformance with the provisions of Subsection 301-2.4, "Measurement and Payment" of the Standard Specifications. Full compensation for labor, materials, and equipment to complete the construction is considered as included in the price paid, and no additional compensation shall be made. CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS BID ITEM 5 to 10: Work shall be performed in accordance with provisions of Sections 201, 303, and 400 of the Standard Specifications. If not specified, concrete shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 201-1 of the Standard Specifications. Subgrade preparation shall conform to the provisions of Section 301-1 of the Standard Specifications. A relative compaction of 90% is required for subgrade and 95% for aggregate base. Each location shall be inspected prior to placement of the concrete. Remove and replace defective concrete work with new materials. Permission to patch any defective areas shall not be a waiver of the Engineer's right to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work. No advertising impression, stamp, or mark of any description will be permitted on the surface of any concrete or cement finish. The Contractor shall ensure that the street is swept clean upon vacating the stockpile site. No excavated or removed dirt or concrete shall be stockpiled. The Contractor shall notify the fronting resident/business 24 hours prior to stockpiling as approved. The Contractor shall remove all debris and perform all cleanup work to the satisfaction of the Engineer within 3 working days after forms have been removed at any location. The Contractor shall submit the concrete design mix to the City Engineer for approval. 1.1 COARSE AGGREGATE FOR PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE All concrete aggregate shall be per Section 200-1.4 of the Standard Specifications. 1.2 INSPECTIONS The Contractor shall call for inspections during all form work prior to pouring. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer one working day prior to pouring any concrete. Any work covered prior to inspection shall be opened to view by the Contractor at his/her expense. 8 Primrose Park — Temple City 1.3 CURB Curb shall be constructed in accordance with APWA Standard Plan 102-2, Type A1-6. 1.4 CURB AND GUTTER Curb and gutter shall be constructed in accordance with APWA Standard Plan 102-2, Type A2- 6. 1.5 SIDEWALK Concrete sidewalk shall be constructed in accordance with APWA Standard Plan 113-2. 1.6 ALLEY APPROACH Alley approach shall be constructed in accordance with APWA Standard Plan 130-2. 1.7 CURB RAMP Curb ramp shall be constructed in accordance with APWA Standard 111-5, type indicated on Plans. Concrete shall be saw cut along all removal lines. The locations for access ramp are shown on the plans. The Contractor is responsible for inspecting each location prior to submitting a bid. Detectable warning surface for the access ramps shall be cast -in -place or surface mounted tactile tiles by Armor Tile or approved equal. The color shall be yellow at all locations. Detectable warning surface shall be installed in conformance with APWA Standard Plan, these Special Provisions, and the manufacturer's recommendations. The finished surface shall be free from blemishes. Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature describing products, installation procedures and routine maintenance. B. Samples: Submit two tile samples of the kind proposed for use (minimum size 6" by 8"). C. Shop Drawings: For fabrication details; composite structural system; tile placement plans including joints, materials to be used and installation materials and procedure. D. Materials Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating that materials proposed for use are in compliance with requirements and meet the properties indicated. All test reports shall be conducted on a cast -in -place tactile tile system as certified by a qualified independent testing laboratory. E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of manufacturer's specified maintenance practices for each type of tactile tile and accessory as required. The manufacturer shall provide a written five year warranty for prefabricated detectable warning surfaces, guaranteeing replacement when there is defect in the dome shape, color fastness, 9 Primrose Park — Temple City sound -on -cane acoustic quality, resilience, or attachment. The warranty period shall begin upon acceptance of the project. PAYMENT Payment for curb, and curb and gutter shall be at the contract unit price per LINEAR FOOT in place. Payment shall include full compensation for all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete all work and no additional compensation shall be made. Payment for sidewalk and alley approach shall be at the contract unit price per SQUARE FOOT measured in place. Payment shall include full compensation for all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete all work including the cost of sawcutting, excavation, removal and disposal of existing materials and no additional compensation shall be made. Payment for access ramp and installing detectable warning surface shall be at the contract unit price per EACH in place. Payment shall include full compensation for all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete all work and no additional compensation shall be made. PVC DRAIN PIPE AND DRAIN INLET BOX BID ITEM 11 to 19: These items are for the construction of drainage improvements shall conform to Standard Specifications and to the details shown on Improvement Plans. PAYMENT Payment for installation of PVC SDR 35 drain pipe shall include excavation, backfill and backfill compaction and shall be paid at the contract unit price bid per LINEAR FOOT and no additional compensation shall be made. Payment for construction of 18x18 Brooks drain boxes, NDS1212 catch basins, drain inlets in playground area per plans, and NDS 12 -inch square catch basin atrium grates shall be paid at the contract unit price bid per EACH and no additional compensation shall be made. Payment for catch basin shall include the construction of local depression per APWA Standard plan 313- 3 (Case B). MC -3500 STORMTECH UNIT BID ITEM 20: The work shall consist of installing MC -3500 StormTech unit with 24 -inch nyoplast manhole and isolator per detail on Plans and per manufacturer's specifications. PAYMENT Payment for this item shall be at the contract unit price per EACH and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools and equipment and incidentals, and for doing all work complete in place including excavation to bottom of unit as indicated on Plans and hauling and disposal of excavated material, and no additional compensation shall be allowed. 10 Primrose Park — Temple City 4 -INCH VCP SEWER SERVICE AND SEWER CLEANOUT BID ITEM 21 AND 22: The contractor shall construct a 4 -inch VCP sewer service connecting from the sewer POC to proposed bathroom to the existing stubout in the alley. Sewer construction shall conform to Sections 207-8, 207-9, 208-2, and 306 of the Standard Specifications and these special provisions. Sewer cleanout shall be free from cracks, chips and surface imperfection. Precast cleanouts shall conform to Costa Mesa Sanitation District standards. 1.1 COMPACTION Compaction for all underground conduits and appurtenances bedding and cover materials shall be done in accordance with Section 306-1.3 of the Standard Specifications, these special provisions and as shown on the plans. Trench backfill material for bedding, around pipe, and up to 12" from the bottom of asphalt concrete shall be compacted to a relative compaction of not less than 90%, in accordance with Section 301.1 of the Standard Specifications. Backfill around manholes and cleanouts shall be compacted to 90% relative compaction from the bedding up to 6" from finished grade. Upper 12" of backfill shall be compacted to 95% relative compaction. Soil tests for bedding and backfill material shall be conducted per Section 211 of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish Soil Engineer's certification or gradation certification for all backfill material prior to use on the job. The Contractor shall provide for backfill compaction and sand equivalence testing for purposes of certifying compliance with these provisions. This shall include scheduling and coordinating field tests with the City Inspector. The City Inspector will specify the number and location of tests to be taken. The testing of material or of any portion of the job under construction shall be at the option of the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish without charge any material requested for testing. The Contractor shall also provide access to any area of the job for testing purposes and shall furnish, without cost, any assistance necessary to perform the testing. 1.2 PIPELINE All vitrified clay pipe and fittings shall be extra -strength and shall conform to the requirements of Section 207-8 of the Standard Specifications. Repair couplings shall have shear bands. 1.3 VCP JOINTS All VCP joints shall conform to the requirements and provisions of Section 208 of the Standard Specifications. VCP joints shall be factory made to provide a cast polyurethane elastomer bell and spigot with the joint seal being formed by the compression of the bead portion of the bell with the spigot casting when the joint is assembled. The joint shall conform in all respects to ASTM designation C 425. 11 Primrose Park — Temple City Where existing sewers are to be joined, Type D rubber couplings with shear bands shall be used. 1.4 PIPE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Excavation and backfill for all sewer pipe, and appurtenances shall be done in accordance with Sections 306-1.1 and 306-1.3 respectively, of the Standard Specifications, the project plans, and these special provisions. No excavated native material can be re -used for backfill unless approved by the City Engineer. All excavated native material shall be removed and disposed of, off site, at the end of each day. PAYMENT Payment for 4 -Inch VCP sewer service shall be made at the contract unit price per LINEAR FOOT and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all the work involved, including locating existing stubout for connection invert elevation, control of ground and surface water, preparation of subgrade, compaction, testing, excavation including pavement removal, bedding, backfill, sheeting, and shoring and bracing. Payment for sewer cleanout shall be made at the contract unit price per EACH and shall be per APWA Standard Plan 204-2. 11/2 -INCH WATER SERVICE BID ITEM 23: This item shall construct 1% -inch water piping and its appurtenances to serve the new restroom building and fountain as shown on the Plans. Water connections shall be made at the existing water meter as per approved Water Improvement Plans. 1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS The components to be furnished and installed, at a minimum, shall include 1'/2 -inch copper service, bends, "T"s, gate valves, backflow device, thrust blocks, hardware, fittings, and other appurtenances required for a functional system complete in place. 1.2 PIPELINE Pipeline for 1'/2 -inch water shall be copper. The Contractor at his own cost may substitute a higher strength pipeline product for the Engineer's consideration and approval. 1.3 PIPELINE JOINTS All pipeline joints shall be made and tested leak free prior to trench placement. 1.4 BRACING AND SHORING The Contractor as a part of the Work shall brace and shore the work site if the installation work requires a trench that is 5 -feet or deeper. 12 Primrose Park — Temple City 1.5 PIPE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL The Contractor, with the Engineer's prior approval, may reuse excavated clean native material as backfill. Backfill shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction prior to placing topsoil for resurface restoration per the Plans. Where the water line is to be installed below and across existing concrete improvements, the Contractor at its sole expense may request approval from the Engineer to perform trenchless construction to avoid making concrete replacements as a part of the price bid. 1.6 DISINFECTION The Contractor shall disinfect the installed system in accordance to the applicable County and State Rules and Regulations. Such disinfection work shall be witnessed by the Engineer and/or his designee. PAYMENT Payment for 1% -inch water service shall include gate valve and backflow preventer and shall be made at the contract LUMP SUM bid price and shall have included full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all of the listed and unlisted work for a functional system complete in place. The contract bid price includes trenching necessary for connection to existing water main and abandonment of existing facilities as called out on the Plans. 11/2 -INCH WASTE LINE BID ITEM 24: This item shall construct a 1% -inch PVC SDR-35 waste line from proposed water tank to existing sewer main. The Contractor shall pothole the existing 6 -inch sewer main shown on the Plans to obtain the sewer invert elevation at which the new 1% -inch waste line will be connected and to video/note the condition of the existing sewer main at the point of connection (POC). The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the proposed sewer main POC condition and invert elevation prior to any construction. The waste line and sewer cleanouts installation and the sewer main connection work shall conform to the applicable portions of the Standard Specifications and these Technical Provisions. 1.1 COMPACTION Bedding and backfill materials acceptance and testing shall be performed per the Standard Specifications Compaction for bedding and cover materials shall conform to the Standard Specifications and these Technical Provisions. Trench backfill material for bedding, around pipe, and up to 12" from the bottom of asphalt concrete roadway surfacing shall be compacted to at least 90% relative compaction. 13 Primrose Park — Temple City Trench resurfacing shall be performed per the City of Temple City Standards and as directed by the Engineer. 1.2 PIPELINE Pipeline shall be PVC SDR-35. The Contractor at its own cost may substitute a higher strength pipeline product for the Engineer's consideration and approval. 1.3 PIPELINE JOINTS All pipeline joints shall be made and tested leak free prior to trench placement. 1.4 PIPE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Excavation and backfill for all waste line pipes and appurtenances shall be done in accordance with Sections 306-1.1 and 306-1.3 respectively, of the Standard Specifications, the Project Plans, and these Technical Provisions. No excavated native material can be re -used for backfill unless approved by the Engineer. All excavated native material shall be removed and disposed of, off site, at the end of each day. PAYMENT Payment for PVC waste line shall be made at the contract LINEAR FOOT bid price and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all the work involved, including preparation of subgrade, compaction, testing, excavation, native and subgrade removals, bedding, backfill, furnishing and installing the waste line, and connecting the new line to the sewer main. The cost of all other customary labor and appurtenances and the clearing all obstructions encountered during the work not shown on the Plans but must be completed for a functional system complete in place shall have been included in the bid price and no additional compensation shall be made. TRAFFIC STRIPING AND SIGNAGE, AND WHEEL STOPS BID ITEM 25: This work shall consist of installing pavement striping, legends, markers and installing signage as shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer. All work shall conform to the Section 214 of the Standard Specifications. 1.1 MATERIAL All traffic stripes and pavement markings material shall conform to Section 84 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions. Thermoplastic traffic stripes and pavement markings, as shown on the Plans, shall conform to Section 84-2 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. 1.2 CONSTRUCTION 14 Primrose Park — Temple City All pavement striping, legends, markers and signing shall conform to the size, dimensions and layouts as designated in the Caltrans Standard Plans and the latest version of the California MUTCD. Pavement legends shall conform to City of Temple City stencils. Final striping shall begin within 36 hours after final paving is in place and continue uninterrupted until complete. Failure to complete centerline and lane line restriping in a timely manner will result in the work being completed by the City at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall "cat track" all striping, marker, crosswalk, arrows, and legend layouts for the approval of the Engineer, prior to placement of any final striping. All crosswalks, legends, stripes and arrows shall be reflective alkyd thermoplastic, 1.5mm to 2.55mm thick. All lines shall be clean and sharp as to dimensions. Ragged ends of segments, fogginess along the sides or objectionable dribbling along the unpainted portions of the stripe shall be painted out with black paint to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to protect the thermoplastic during drying time and shall be required to paint out all objectionable tracking. No work shall be done when weather conditions restrict visibility to less than one mile or causes the pavement to be damp, or when designated by the Engineer. 1.3 PAINT REMOVALS Paint removals shall be performed by wet sandblasting technique, meeting the latest requirements and restrictions of the State Pollution Control Agency. The Contractor shall be responsible for the immediate removal of sandblasting materials by vacuum or mechanical street sweeping devices. All striping that is to be removed must be removed by wet sandblasting method. No "Blacking Out" or temporary covering will be allowed. Alternate methods of paint removal require prior approval of the Engineer. Obliteration of traffic striping with black paint shall be done only with prior approval of the Engineer and shall be only a temporary measure, requiring later removal as specified. Where blast cleaning is used for the removal of painted traffic stripes and pavement markings and such removal operation is being performed within 10 feet of a lane occupied by public traffic, the residue, including dust, shall be removed immediately after contact between the sand and the surface being treated. Such removal shall be by vacuum attachment operating concurrently with the blast cleaning operation, or by other methods approved by the Engineer. 1.4 STENCILS The Contractor shall use legend stencils that are provided by the City. The Contractor shall notify the City a minimum of 72 hours in advance of the date the stencils are needed. The Contractor shall return stencils within 48 hours. The Contractor shall pick up stencils at the City's Maintenance Yard. If the City does not have the required stencil, the Contractor shall provide the stencil and construct per State of California Standard Plans, 2010, Edition. 15 Primrose Park — Temple City 1.5 WHEEL STOPS The Contractor shall install wheel stops per detail shown on the plans PAYMENT Payment for traffic striping and signage and installation of wheel stops as shown on Plans shall be at the contract LUMP SUM price and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved as specified in these Special Provisions. 16 Primrose Park — Temple City SECTION 02 87 50 — DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Prefabricated steel picnic shelters. B. Related sections. Section 03 11 13 Concrete Formwork C. The Standard Specifications_for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the Engineer. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City. 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: 1. The product shall be designed and fabricated at a facility operated and directly supervised by the supplier. 2. The supplier shall have at least 5 years of experience in the design and fabrication of pre-engineered steel shelters. 3. Membership in American Institute of Steel Construction. 4. Membership in American Welding Society. 5. Full time on -staff licensed Professional Engineer. 6. Full time on -staff quality control manager. SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -1 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI Minimum Tensile Strength; 2007a. C. ASTM F 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 50 and 105 KSI Yield Strength; 2007a D. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. E. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007. F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2008. G. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process; 2008. H. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)(Latest Edition). I. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specifications for Cold Formed Members. J. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM). K. American Welding Society (AWS). L. OSHA Steel Erection Standard 29 CFR 1926.750 Part R. M. SSPC-SP 2 —Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000. N. SSPC-SP 10 -Near-White Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000. O. ICC Evaluation Service, ESR-2233, Structural Insulated Panels. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Standard Design Loads: California Building Code (CBC latest Edition), 20 P.S.F. (Live Load), 85 M.P.H., Exposure C, Seismic Design Category 4. B. Column to footing connection to be in compliance with OSHA Steel Erection Standard CFR 1926.750 Part R, which requires a minimum of four (4) anchor bolts per column. C. Design Method shall be per applicable local building code requirements. Manufacturer's design shall utilize a three-dimensional structural analysis to determine all member loads and forces. Design and detailing shall be in compliance with AISC 341, Part I or III. D. The pre-engineered package shall be shipped as a pre-cut (except for standing seam roof panels) and pre -fabricated package that shall include the structural framing members, roof panels, fasteners, and trim as well as the installation instructions. The structure shall be shipped un-assembled for minimum shipping charges. E. Field labor shall be only for the assembly of the pre -fabricated parts. No onsite welding shall be required or permitted. Tube frame connection bolts and fasteners shall be concealed, within the tubing or hidden, except at the baseplate. All rafter tails SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -2 shall be factory welded into place as well as all compression ring/tube covers. On multi -tiered buildings the rafter risers shall be welded to the lower rafters for ease of installation. No openings near the base of the column with screwed on cover plates. No through bolting shall be allowed for any connections due to the possibility of the deformation of the tube steel parts. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit (4) sets of shop drawings along with (2) sets of structural calculations stamped and wet -signed by a Professional Engineer in the state of California. B. Manufacturer shall provide site specific foundation design signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the state of California. Generic or "typical" foundation details and design shall not be acceptable. C. Structural calculations shall show the conformance to the local building code information: 1. California Building Code (CBC latest Edition) a. 20 P.S.F. (Live Load) b. 85 M.P.H., Exposure C c. Seismic Design Category 4 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery requirements with Owner and other installers. B. Store products in manner to prevent damage prior to installation. Where products need to be stored outdoors, store off the ground and place so that water will drain C. Inspect parts within 48 hours of delivery, compare with manufacturer's bill of materials and report any missing or non -conforming parts to the manufacturer within this time frame. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard Ten (10) year warranty. SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SHELTER MODEL NUMBERS: See Construction Plans. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Plas-Tal Steel Construction Contact: Craig Lebow Phone: 562-945-0013 B. Substitutions must be approved a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Any approval of alternate manufacturers shall be through an addendum prior to the bid date and shall not be allowed without written notification. C. Alternate suppliers shall meet the requirements shown in Section 1.02. Alternate suppliers must provide proof of: equivalency of the shot blast, e -coat and powder -coat process and finish. Structural design shall include all loads to the foundation and shall not exceed the loads specified in the chart on the installation drawings. Designs using wood, light gauge metal framing or sheet metal other than roof/wall panels and related trim and flashing shall not be approved. 2.03 APPLICATIONS A. Shelters: Pre-engineered, prefabricated all -steel framed shelters; column, rafter, and purlin structure, with steel roof panels or T&G roof deck or Sandwich Panel roof deck, all flashing, trim, accessories, and fasteners required for a complete installation. B. Structural framing (Columns, tie -beams, etc.) shall be Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) meeting ASTM A500 grade B. "I" beams, tapered columns, open "C" channels, cold -formed box sections or wood products shall not be accepted. C. Compression rings shall be made of structural channel sections or welded plate sections that meet ASTM A36 grade steel. D. Structural connections shall be made with A325 high -strength bolts and A563 structural nuts, ASTM F1554 grade 36 anchor bolts, self -drilling screws and pop - rivets. E. Metal Roof Panel: 24 -gauge galvalume roof panel with a Kynar 500 paint finish. The ribs shall be 1-3/16" high and 12" on center. Roof panel coverage shall be 36" wide; all angles shall be factory cut. The ribs shall run with the slope of the building for proper drainage. SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -4 1.08 ACCESSORIES E. Electrical Access 1. Access holes to be placed in the connections plates to allow electrical wiring from the column base up to the peak. 1.09 FABRICATION F. All columns, rafters, tie -beams, purlins, compression rings shall be factory welded assemblies with provisions for bolted connections in the field. There will be no field welding required for any connections. All base plates, stiffener plates, rafter clips and end plates shall be factory welded in place. G. Factory welded connections shall be made by certified welders in accordance with the latest edition of AWS D1.1 and D1.3 Specifications. All welders shall be AWS certified. H. Factory Frame Finish: Powder coated per the following procedure; the steel shall be shot -blasted to the specification of SSPC-SP10 (shot -blasted to near white condition), this will remove all oil residue, mil scale, weld spatter and slag. The second step the steel is washed and zinc phosphate in an eight -stage electro deposition pretreatment process. Then it is immersed in a liquid epoxy and coated to uniform 0.7-0.9 mils, this E -coat process totally encapsulates the part preventing rusting, no welding shall be allowed after the E -coating has been applied. Then a double coat of TGIC polyester powder is applied, one coat of color and one clear coating for a final finish that is 8-12 mils thick. All materials shall be inspected to meet 100% coating, proper cure, film thickness and impact resistance. Color to be selected form the manufacturer's standard color chart. No wet -coat powder -coat alternatives shall be accepted. PART 3: EXECUTION I. When unloading, pad the forks and use other precautions to protect the powder -coated finish. Do not use chains to move materials. Handle all materials carefully in the field to avoid scratching the powder -coat finish. Before installing the roof, clean the steel and touch up any scratches and chips in the powder -coat finish using touch up paint from the manufacturer. J. The shelter shall be set on prepared footings or concrete slab (provided by others). Footing details shall be designed by an engineer (retained by other than the manufacturer), based on load information as provided on the manufacturer's supplied SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -5 drawings. Foundation shall be constructed to all local building code requirements and per good construction practices for the specific site conditions. K. In accordance with OSHA Steel Erection Standard 29 CFR 1926.750 Part R, anchor bolts shall be installed for proper column stability and shall have a minimum of four (4) anchor bolts per column. L. Install all parts and pieces per the manufacturer's supplied installation instructions and these specifications. The underside of the tongue and groove decking or sandwich panel roof deck shall be sealed before installation as specified and approved by the landscape architect or owner. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 SHADE STRUCTURE 3 PANEL — 10' x 15' x 10'- 6" ht. Payment for Shade Structure 3 Panel — 10' x 15' x 10'- 6" ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.02 SHADE STRUCTURE 5 PANEL — 10' x 25' x 10'- 6" ht. Payment for Shade Structure 5 Panel — 10' x 25' x 10'- 6" ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.03 SHADE STRUCTURE 9 PANEL — 10' x 45' x 10'- 6" ht. Payment for Shade Structure 9 Panel — 10' x 45' x 10'- 6" ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.04 SHADE STRUCTURE 22 PANEL — 16' x 49'- 6" outside radius x 11' ht. Payment for Shade Structure 22 Panel — 16' x 49'- 6" outside radius x 11' ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. END OF SECTION SECTION 02 87 50 - DECORATIVE STEEL SHELTERS -6 SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Prefabricated steel picnic shelters. B. Related sections. Section 03 11 13 Concrete Formwork C. The Standard Specifications_for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the Engineer. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City. 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: 1. The product shall be designed and fabricated at a facility operated and directly supervised by the supplier. 2. The supplier shall have at least 5 years of experience in the design and fabrication of pre-engineered steel shelters. 3. Membership in American Institute of Steel Construction. 4. Membership in American Welding Society. 5. Full time on -staff licensed Professional Engineer. 6. Full time on -staff quality control manager. SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -1 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI Minimum Tensile Strength; 2007a. C. ASTM F 1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 50 and 105 KSI Yield Strength; 2007a D. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. E. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007. F. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2008. G. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process; 2008. H. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)(Latest Edition). I. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specifications for Cold Formed Members. J. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM). K. American Welding Society (AWS). L. OSHA Steel Erection Standard 29 CFR 1926.750 Part R. M. SSPC-SP 2 —Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000. N. SSPC-SP 10 -Near-White Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 2000. O. ICC Evaluation Service, ESR-2233, Structural Insulated Panels. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Standard Design Loads: California Building Code (CBC latest Edition), 20 P.S.F. (Live Load), 85 M.P.H., Exposure C, Seismic Design Category 4. B. Column to footing connection to be in compliance with OSHA Steel Erection Standard CFR 1926.750 Part R, which requires a minimum of four (4) anchor bolts per column. C. Design Method shall be per applicable local building code requirements. Manufacturer's design shall utilize a three-dimensional structural analysis to determine all member loads and forces. Design and detailing shall be in compliance with AISC 341, Part I or III. D. The pre-engineered package shall be shipped as a pre-cut (except for standing seam roof panels) and pre -fabricated package that shall include the structural framing members, roof panels, fasteners, and trim as well as the installation instructions. The structure shall be shipped un-assembled for minimum shipping charges. E. Field labor shall be only for the assembly of the pre -fabricated parts. No onsite welding shall be required or permitted. Tube frame connection bolts and fasteners shall be concealed, within the tubing or hidden, except at the baseplate. All rafter tails SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -2 shall be factory welded into place as well as all compression ring/tube covers. On multi -tiered buildings the rafter risers shall be welded to the lower rafters for ease of installation. No openings near the base of the column with screwed on cover plates. No through bolting shall be allowed for any connections due to the possibility of the deformation of the tube steel parts. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit (4) sets of shop drawings along with (2) sets of structural calculations stamped and wet -signed by a Professional Engineer in the state of California. B. Manufacturer shall provide site specific foundation design signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the state of California. Generic or "typical" foundation details and design shall not be acceptable. C. Structural calculations shall show the conformance to the local building code information: 1. California Building Code (CBC latest Edition) a. 20 P.S.F. (Live Load) b. 85 M.P.H., Exposure C c. Seismic Design Category 4 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery requirements with Owner and other installers. B. Store products in manner to prevent damage prior to installation. Where products need to be stored outdoors, store off the ground and place so that water will drain C. Inspect parts within 48 hours of delivery, compare with manufacturer's bill of materials and report any missing or non -conforming parts to the manufacturer within this time frame. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard Ten (10) year warranty. SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -3 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SHELTER MODEL NUMBERS: See Construction Plans. 2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Plas-Tal Steel Construction Contact: Craig Lebow Phone: 562-945-0013 B. Substitutions must be approved a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Any approval of alternate manufacturers shall be through an addendum prior to the bid date and shall not be allowed without written notification. C. Alternate suppliers shall meet the requirements shown in Section 1.02. Alternate suppliers must provide proof of: equivalency of the shot blast, e -coat and powder -coat process and finish. Structural design shall include all loads to the foundation and shall not exceed the loads specified in the chart on the installation drawings. Designs using wood, light gauge metal framing or sheet metal other than roof/wall panels and related trim and flashing shall not be approved. 2.03 APPLICATIONS A. Shelters: Pre-engineered, prefabricated all -steel framed shelters; column, rafter, and purlin structure, with steel roof panels or T&G roof deck or Sandwich Panel roof deck, all flashing, trim, accessories, and fasteners required for a complete installation. B. Structural framing (Columns, tie -beams, etc.) shall be Hollow Structural Sections (HSS) meeting ASTM A500 grade B. "I" beams, tapered columns, open "C" channels, cold -formed box sections or wood products shall not be accepted. C. Compression rings shall be made of structural channel sections or welded plate sections that meet ASTM A36 grade steel. D. Structural connections shall be made with A325 high -strength bolts and A563 structural nuts, ASTM F1554 grade 36 anchor bolts, self -drilling screws and pop -rivets. E. Metal Roof Panel: 24 -gauge galvalume roof panel with a Kynar 500 paint finish. The ribs shall be 1-3/16" high and 12" on center. Roof panel coverage shall be 36" wide; all angles shall be factory cut. The ribs shall run with the slope of the building for proper drainage. F. Metal Roof Trim: Roof trim shall match the color of the roof and shall be formed from 26 -gauge painted galvalume steel as follows: SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -4 1. Metal ridge caps shall be preformed with a single central bend to match the roof slope. The trim shall be hemmed on both sides. 2. Roof peak cap shall be supplied on all buildings that do not include a framed cupola. 3. Edge of the roof deck shall have a preformed "C" channel eave trim, the channel shall be applied along all the eaves to trim and straighten the eave. The "C" shall have weep holes at 6" on center for roof drainage. 4. High side trim shall be in a "" shape and shall supplied for all tiered buildings. 1.08 ACCESSORIES G. Electrical Access 1. Access holes to be placed in the connections plates to allow electrical wiring from the column base up to the peak. 1.09 FABRICATION H. All columns, rafters, tie -beams, purlins, compression rings shall be factory welded assemblies with provisions for bolted connections in the field. There will be no field welding required for any connections. All base plates, stiffener plates, rafter clips and end plates shall be factory welded in place. I. Factory welded connections shall be made by certified welders in accordance with the latest edition of AWS D1.1 and D1.3 Specifications. All welders shall be AWS certified. J. Factory Frame Finish: Powder coated per the following procedure; the steel shall be shot -blasted to the specification of SSPC-SP10 (shot -blasted to near white condition), this will remove all oil residue, mil scale, weld spatter and slag. The second step the steel is washed and zinc phosphate in an eight -stage electro deposition pretreatment process. Then it is immersed in a liquid epoxy and coated to uniform 0.7-0.9 mils, this E -coat process totally encapsulates the part preventing rusting, no welding shall be allowed after the E -coating has been applied. Then a double coat of TGIC polyester powder is applied, one coat of color and one clear coating for a final finish that is 8-12 mils thick. All materials shall be inspected to meet 100% coating, proper cure, film thickness and impact resistance. Color to be selected form the manufacturer's standard color chart. No wet -coat powder -coat alternatives shall be accepted. PART 3: EXECUTION K. When unloading, pad the forks and use other precautions to protect the powder -coated finish. Do not use chains to move materials. Handle all materials carefully in the field to avoid scratching the powder -coat finish. Before installing the roof, clean the steel and touch up any scratches and chips in the powder -coat finish using touch up paint from the manufacturer. SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -5 L. The shelter shall be set on prepared footings or concrete slab (provided by others). Footing details shall be designed by an engineer (retained by other than the manufacturer), based on load information as provided on the manufacturer's supplied drawings. Foundation shall be constructed to all local building code requirements and per good construction practices for the specific site conditions. M. In accordance with OSHA Steel Erection Standard 29 CFR 1926.750 Part R, anchor bolts shall be installed for proper column stability and shall have a minimum of four (4) anchor bolts per column. N. Install all parts and pieces per the manufacturer's supplied installation instructions and these specifications. The underside of the tongue and groove decking or sandwich panel roof deck shall be sealed before installation as specified and approved by the landscape architect or owner. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 SHADE STRUCTURE 3 PANEL — 10' x 15' x 10' ht. Payment for Shade Structure 3 Panel — 10' x 15' x 10' ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.02 SHADE STRUCTURE 5 PANEL — 10' x 25' x 10' ht. Payment for Shade Structure 5 Panel — 10' x 25' x 10' ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.02 SHADE STRUCTURE 9 PANEL — 10' x 45' x 10' ht. Payment for Shade Structure 9 Panel — 10' x 45' x 10' ht. will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. END OF SECTION SECTION 02 87 50 - PREFABRICATED STEEL SHELTERS -6 SECTION 02 88 20 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and necessary incidentals for the complete installation of all play structures, stand-alone play equipment, and rope climbing equipment. B. Related sections. Section 03 30 53: Section 12 93 00: Section 32 18 16 Concrete Formwork Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials Synthetic Resilient Surfacing— Play Areas C. Provide playground certification. 1. The contractor shall retain a certified playground safety inspector at his own expense and provide a playground safety certification report. 2. Any discrepancies found in the playground safety report shall be resolved to the satisfaction of the city prior to acceptance of the playground and prior to the start of the maintenance period. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings describing the fabrication and installation of equipment proposed for use. SECTION 02882 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT - 1 C. Samples: Submit the manufacturer's standard palettes for the selection of color. D. Calculations: 1. Provide Structural calculations for all materials proposed as required by local building code. 2. Design Data: Submit engineering' calculations confirming the design of the play equipment, structures, and protective devices proposed for use. a. Calculations for framing members, steel supports, and anchorage to the structure shall be prepared and signed by a Structural Engineer currently licensed to practice in the State of California. E. A Certificate of Insurance shall be provided by all equipment manufacturers. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit three (3) sets of a typewritten list of equipment and materials as specified to the Engineer within twenty-one (21) days after award of contract. This list shall give the name, model number, and manufacturer, and shall be accompanied by cut sheets or reproductions of catalog pages for all of the equipment and material to be installed. B. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. Pay at Contractor's sole expense for all changes caused by approved substitutions which affect other items of work. C. Substitutions will be rejected if materials proposed do not meet or exceed those specified on the plans or within the contract documents. Comparison for proposed substitutions shall be provided in writing by the contractor. 1. Product equivalency shall be base on maintaining the design intent as well as a qualitative analysis of strength and durability, Finishes, UV Exposure, warranty, and cost and savings to city. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all field measurements prior to the installation if the play equipment and the surrounding hardscape. B. The contractor shall be responsible for making any adjustments necessary to ensure the safety fall zones with -in the play areas. SECTION 02882 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT - 2 C. Any discrepancies within the layout of the design shall be immediately brought to the attention of the City Engineer, designer, and play equipment manufacturer's representative. D. Improper installation of play equipment resulting in a compromise or safety shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the city. E. All fall zone distances shall be field verified by the contractor prior to the installation of the adjacent hardscape and again prior to the installation of the synthetic grass surfacing. Fall zones shall be marked on the finished grade and reviewed by the City's designated representative. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide product warranty information for all items included in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design, play value, materials, and warranty are based on the use of products manufactured by: 1. RecWest Contact: Nate Stutz Phone: 818-661-9181 Landscape Structures 601 7th Street South Delano, MN 55328 Phone: 888-438-6574 E-mail: info@playlsi.com 2.02 MATERIALS See Construction Details for specific playground components. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installing contractor shall provide proof experience with references showing 5 similar projects constructed within the past 5 years. B. General: Install the playground equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Equipment shall be rigid, SECTION 02882 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT - 3 straight, plumb and level. Secure equipment with manufacturer's fastening devices. C. Foundations: Support holes shall be filled with concrete to the full required depth. The top of the concrete shall be 6" below finished grade. Primary supports shall be temporarily supported until concrete has sufficiently cured. D. Metal Connectors: Secure with pins or spot welding to prevent loosening of the connection. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of equipment thoroughly and leave ready for intended use. 3.03 CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall retain an independent certified playground safety inspector to review the play equipment after installation. The Playground inspector shall be certified by CPSI with no less than 5 years experience. The Playground safety inspector shall submit a letter report detailing any deficiencies or accessibility issues related to the design and manufacturing, or installation of the structure. B. Any deficiencies in the playground as noted for immediate correction by the certified playground inspector shall be reconciled by the contractor prior to acceptance at no additional cost to the city. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.01 PLAY EQUIPMENT (INCLUDING INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS, TAX, FREIGHT, AND INSTALLATION) Payment for Play Equipment (including individual components, tax, freight and installation) will be made at the lump sum contract price as set forth in the bid schedule. END SECTION SECTION 02882 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT - 4 SECTION 03 11 13 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General Provisions shall apply to all Concrete Formwork operations. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. Related Section. Section 03 30 53: Miscellaneous Concrete C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the City. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable local, state, federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. B. Manufacturer's directions, specifications and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications. C. The work included in this Section shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The decision by the Engineer as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final. SECTION 03 11 13 - CONCRETE FORMWORK - 1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Where finish concrete is below grade, plywood or sawed lumber formwork shall be constructed of substantial material as selected by the Contractor. B. Where finished concrete is above grade and scheduled to be exposed, use Ply form Class I and II B -B, EXT-DFPA. C. Form coating shall be a non -grain -raising and non -staining type that will not leave residual matter on the surface of the concrete or adversely affect bonding to concrete of paint, plaster, or other applied materials. D. Portland cement shall be Type V, ion alkali and shall conform to ASTM C150. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All concrete above grade shall be cast in plywood or sawed lumber forms. B. Concrete below grade may be poured directly against earth in open trenches. C. All forms shall be constructed true to line and level, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and shall conform exactly to the dimensions of the finished concrete as shown on the drawings. Forms for curved surfaces shall be so constructed and placed that the finished surface shall not deviate from the arc of the curve; flat spots will not be accepted. D. Where studs in formwork are spaced not over 12" o.c., 5/8" minimum plywood shall be used. Where studs are spaced not over 16" o.c., 3/4" minimum plywood shall be used. E. Place long dimension of plywood sheets perpendicular to direction of studs. F. Forms and metal reinforcement shall be checked and approved by the Engineer before concrete is placed. 3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has developed enough strength to safely sustain its own weight and the superimposed loads above. After concrete is placed, the following minimum time periods shall elapse before the removal of forms. SECTION 03 11 13 - CONCRETE FORMWORK - 2 ITEM FORMS SHORING Sides of walls and edge of slabs and footings 3 days 5 days PART 4: PAYMENT Concrete formwork will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 11 13 - CONCRETE FORMWORK - 3 SECTION 03 30 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General Provisions shall apply to all miscellaneous concrete work operations. Provide labor, materials, tools, transportation, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. Related Sections. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork Section 12 93 00 - Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials C. The Standard Specifications_for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", 2018 edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the Engineer. D. References Refer to Geotechnical Investigation Document(s) Refer to American Concrete Institute Refer to State of California Department of Transportation (Cal Trans) Standard Specifications (DTSS) Refer to applicable ASTM Specifications E. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable local, state, federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. B. Manufacturer's directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 1 C. The work included in this section will be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The decision by the Engineer as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final. D. Material quality standards and testing procedures shall be in accordance with all ASTM standards and testing procedures and shall be the latest requirements. 1. All tests shall be made by a testing laboratory acceptable and approved by the Engineer. 2. One mechanical analysis and one decantation test shall be made of the sand and coarse aggregate proposed for the work. 3. Concrete specimens shall be taken when directed by the Engineer. At least one pair of specimens shall be taken from each pour of concrete or from each one -hundred cubic yards of concrete or major fraction thereof. One cylinder from each pair shall be tested at seven (7) days. One from each pair shall be tested at twenty-eight (28) days. Concrete for specimens shall be taken from place of deposit. Specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance with the latest ASTM specifications. 4. Additional tests shall be made when and as directed by the Engineer. Cost of additional tests shall be borne by Contractor. 5. Should concrete strengths do not attain the minimum specified at twenty- eight (28) days, the area of substandard work shall be examined by the Engineer. The defective concrete shall be removed between expansion joint and replaced or the work shall be strengthened in a manner as directed by the Engineer. 6. The cost of all examination and testing of defective material, as well as corrective measures, shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Reinforcing Steel: All steel shall be Grade 60 billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit for concrete slabs showing dimensioned locations and types of construction and expansion joints. B. Mock-up / Samples: Prepare minimum 4 -foot square samples of each required slab finish excluding only monolithic trowel and float finishes. Include a transverse expansion joint, scoring, and edging. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 2 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to existing site improvements and utilities and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the site and be thoroughly familiar with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field. Protect all existing improvements to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. Repair at its sole cost, all damages resulting from its operations or negligence. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete flatwork and headers shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2,500 psi. B. Concrete walls have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi. C. Portland Cement shall be Type V, low alkali, and shall conform to ASTM C150. D. Concrete aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33. All aggregate shall be well graded and selected from a source that has a proven history of non -reactivity. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/4 inch. E. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed natural sand having hard, strong and durable particles and which does not contain more than 2% by weight of clay, loam, shale, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. F. Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, fine grained, sound crushed rock or gravel, which does not contain more than 5% by weight of flat, chip -like, thin, elongated, friable or laminated pieces. Any piece having a major dimension in excess of two and one-half (2 1/2) times the average thickness and which will adversely affect the strength of the concrete shall not be used. G. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. H. Each component of the concrete mix shall be supplied from the same source for the entire project. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 3 2.02 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING A. The concrete shall be composed of cement, sand and coarse aggregate in the proportions as determined by the testing laboratory. Cost of mix design shall be borne by Contractor. B. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at time of placing does not exceed the following slumps when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessary for workability required by part of structure being cast. Part of Structure Maximum Slump Inches Maximum Water - Cement Ratio Footings, foundation walls, and mass concrete, not reinforced 4 0.6 Slabs on grade, reinforced and non- reinforced 3 0.45 Reinforced concrete over 8" thick 4 0.5 Reinforced concrete 8" or less thick 4-1/2 0.5 All other concrete 4 0.5 C. The concrete shall be mixed as follows: 1. Each transit mixer shall be equipped with automatic devices for recording the number of revolutions of the drum prior to completing the mixing, with peripheral drum speed of approximately 200 feet per minute. 2. Transit -mix concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than ten (10) minutes. At least three (3) minutes of the mixing period shall be immediately prior to discharging at the job. 3. Transit -mix concrete shall not be delivered to the work with the total specified amount of water incorporated therein. Two (2) gallons of water per cubic yard shall be withheld, and may be incorporated in the mix, before the concrete is discharged from the mixer truck. 4. The concrete, at time of placing, shall be in such condition that it can be properly placed. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 4 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE A. Concrete Footings B. Concrete Flatwork with Topcast Top -Surface Retarder Finish C. Concrete Flatwork with Heavy Sand Blast Finish PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING CONCRETE A. Before the placing of any concrete, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and wet. Concrete shall be poured into forms immediately after it is mixed, and so that no separation will occur. No concrete which has stood for more than fifteen (15) minutes after leaving the mixer shall be used. Concrete shall be rejected if not placed in final position within ninety (90) minutes after water is first added to the batch. B. Maximum free drop of concrete shall not be more than 5'-0". Use tremies in deep sections. C. The location of all stoppages shall be approved by the Engineer. D. The flow surface of the freshly poured concrete shall be level whenever any pour is stopped, and tight dams shall be built as necessary to accomplish this result. Construction joints shall be made only when unavoidable, and then only at the point determined by the Engineer. Details of such joints shall be as directed by the Engineer. E. Before the placing of any concrete, the surface of the previously poured concrete shall be wet. F. Install concrete and cement finish work true to lines, dimensions, levels, and finish with smooth unblemished surfaces for exterior finishes specified on Plans. G. Remove and replace defective concrete or cement work with new materials. Permission to patch any defective area shall not be a waiver of the right of the City to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work. H. No advertising impression, stamp, or mark of any description will be permitted on surface of concrete or cement finish. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 5 3.02 CEMENT FINISH A. Compact and tamp concrete as specified to bring 3/8" of mortar to surface, wood float to straight edges and screeds, and apply following finishes. Do not use steel or plastic floats of any kind for initial floating operations. Unless otherwise specified, do not apply finishes until surface water disappears and surface is sufficiently hardened. Remove any bleed water and laitance as it appears. B. The color for concrete paving shall be as shown on the plans. 3.03 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS A. Expansion joint material shall be as noted on the Plans. B. Locate expansion and control joints to least impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In no case place an intersecting construction joint in such a way that two intersecting walks are separated by a construction or control joint at the point of intersection. Transition curves shall be part of a continuous pour of the intersection slab. 1. Expansion joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20') apart, with control joints a maximum of ten feet (10') apart. Exception to this are specialty work joints which will be laid out as shown on the Plans. 2. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of layout showing proposed location of joints before pouring concrete. C. Caulking of expansion joints where called for on the Plans shall be done with a non -tracking, multi -part flow type, self -leveling, polyurethane sealant manufactured by Chem -Seat, Grace, 3-H or approved equivalent. 1. Color shall match the color of the concrete where the expansion joint occurs unless shown otherwise on the plans. 2. Caulking shall be done by an experienced applicator in a workmanlike manner, in smooth straight runs, after thoroughly cleaning and priming joints. 3. All work shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not permit traffic to travel over seated joints until sealer has fully cured. 4. A light dusting of fine sand will be required over wet sealer. Contractor to discuss option with City Engineer. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 6 3.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Smoothness tolerance exterior cement finish surfaces shall be of such smoothness and evenness that they shall contact the entire length of a 10' straight edge laid in any direction, with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch. Any operations necessary to achieve this result shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. B. Inspections will be provided as necessary. Call for inspection two (2) working days prior to need. C. The Contractor shall call for inspection during specific phases of construction. They shall include: 1. All form work prior to pouring. 2. All footings prior to pouring. 3. Subgrade prior to pouring. 4. Drag form approval. D. Contractor shall notify the Engineer twenty-four (24) hours prior to pouring any concrete. E. Any work covered prior to inspection shall be opened to view by the Contractor at his expense. 3.05 TESTING A. Compression tests of concrete shall be made as required by the Building Code except that compression tests of any grade of concrete shall be made whenever the quantity of that grade used in the project exceeds 25 cubic yards. At least two identical cylinders of each grade of concrete shall be taken of each 100 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof placed in the work. The cylinders shall be tested in a testing laboratory and test reports submitted to the City. B. Storage of test cylinders on the site and after delivery to the testing shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation C31. 1. Should the strength by test fail, the mix shall be adjusted so that the resulting concrete shall comply with the minimum requirements, and all additional expense resulting from such adjustment shall be borne by the Contractor. SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 7 2. Should the strength of any grade by test fall below minimum, concrete from the defective pours which is in place may be tested by the core method. If such tests show the concrete to be defective, the concrete shall be removed and replaced or adequately strengthened as required under the governing Code. All expenses involved shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 CONCRETE FOOTINGS Payment for concrete footings for various walls, planters, and site furnishings will be considered as included in other items of work and no additional payment will be made, therefore. 4.02 CONCRETE FLATWORK WITH TOPCAST TOP -SURFACE RETARDER FINISH Payment for Concrete Flatwork with Topcast Top -Surface Retarder Finish will be made at the contract unit price per square foot as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.03 CONCRETE FLATWORK WITH HEAVY SAND BLAST FINISH Payment for concrete flatwork with sand blast finish will be made at the contract unit price per square foot as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 30 53 -MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE- 8 SECTION 04 21 00 — CLAY BRICK UNIT MASONARY PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to complete stonework as indicated on the plans and as herein specified. A. Work in This Section: Principal items include: 1. Clay Brick 2. Setting materials, including cramps, dowels, bolts and other items required to attach stone in place 3. Sealants for the work of this Section 4. Water and stain repellant sealer on stone B. Related Work Not in This Section: 1. Sealants other than specified in this Section 2. Concrete masonry units supporting stone veneer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 91: Specification for Masonry Cement. B. ASTM C 150: Specification for Portland Cement. C. ASTM C 177-71: Test Method for Thermal Conductivity by Means of Guarded Hot Plate. D. ASTM C 207: Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes E. ASTM C 270: Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit three full sized samples for each type material used for approval. B. Submit three copies of manufacturer's data and cut sheets. SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -1 C. Submit three copies of manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company experienced in the installation of manufactured stone and brick veneers of the types specified, with a minimum of 5 years' experience. B. Qualifications of Installer: Employ a stone installer having at least 5 years continuous operation in installation of stonework like those specified herein. Submit list of representative installations to substantiate qualifications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect stone against damage of all sort during fabrication, storage, and installation. B. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, spoiling or other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid materials. Lift with wide -belt type slings wherever possible; do not use wire rope or ropes containing staining substances. C. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non -staining, waterproof membrane. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stones. Protect stored stone from staining with waterproof, non -staining covers permitting air to circulate freely. D. Protect mortar and other moisture -sensitive materials and stonework accessories from weather in protected enclosures; avoid exposure to moisture and contamination with foreign materials. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect materials from rain, moisture and freezing temperatures prior to, during and for 48 hours after completion of work. B. Allow no construction activity on opposite side of wall during installation and for 48 hours after completion of work. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty. SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIERS A. Stone shall be from the following suppliers or approved equal: Pacific Clay 14741 Lake Street (951) 674-2131 2.02 MATERIALS A. 1112 (Norman) Paver or approved equal (masonry grade) shall be used as wall brick on vertical surfaces of uniformed thickness to achieve desired veneer. 1. Size: 3-1/2" x 11-1/2" x 2-3/16" B. Fasteners: Brick anchors to concrete block material and metal framing shall be designed and engineered by Dur-O- Wall, Inc., Rockworks or approved equal. C. Mortar 1. Portland Cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or masonry cement (Type N), ASTM C 91. 2. Masonry sand. 3. Lime: ASTM C 207 4. Iron oxide pigments (if required) D. Masonry Sealer: If specifying use: breather type (non -film forming) sealer. E. Weather -Resistant Barrier: Kraft waterproof building paper, UBC Standard No. 14-1 or equal. F. Metal Lath: 18 gage galvanized woven wire mesh, 2.5 lb. Or 3.41b. Flat diamond mesh. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Shipping Weight of Manufactured Units: 14 lb./sq. ft. SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -3 B. Compressive Strength: Tested in accordance with UBC Standard No. 26- 10, Parts I and IV. C. Shear (adhesion) strength: tested in accordance with ASTM C 482 using a unit thickness approximately the same as the stone unit. D. Thermal Resistance: K factor 2.82 in accordance with ASTM C 177. R factor is .355 per 1 inch of thickness. E. Fire Hazard Test on 1 7/8 inch thick Sample: Flame spread of 0, smoke development of 0 in accordance with UL723 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect related work verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify that this work may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations and original design. C. In the event of any discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Open Studs: Install paper backed metal lath to studs using galvanized nails or staples which penetrate a minimum of 1 inch and place 4 inches on center. Apply 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch scratch coat and allow to dry 48 hours. Wrap weather resistant barrier and metal lath a minimum of 16 inches around all outside and inside corners. B. Sheathed Surfaces: Install one layer of weather -resistant barrier with lap joints 4 inch shingle fashion. Apply code approved metal lath, attach with galvanized nails or staples which penetrate a minimum of 1 inch. Apply 6 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Wrap weather resistant barrier and metal lath a minimum of 16 inches around all outside and inside corners. C. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces, New, Clean and Untreated: (no preparation needed) Examine newly poured concrete closely to ensure that its finished surface contains no releasing agents (form oil). If it does contain form oil, etch surface with muriatic acid, rinse thoroughly and/or SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -4 score with a wire brush, or use high pressure water or sandblasting to remove. D. Existing Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: If required remove paint, coatings, sealers and dirt as recommended in 3.01 C, or apply metal lath to surfaces, attach with galvanized concrete nails. 3.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C 270, Type N. B. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Apply 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch of mortar to lath and/or dampened masonry, stucco or concrete surfaces, covering a maximum of 10 square feet at one time. Press the units firmly into position in soft mortar bed, jiggle and apply slight pressure to unit to ensure firm bonding causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges of units. C. Install hearth pieces in full 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch deep mortar bed. D. Place units with uniform mortar joints. Stone joints should be over 3/4 inch in width. When installing pre -fitted stone textures such as; Profit Ledge stone, Carolina ledge stone and European Castle Stone, units should be fitted with no allowance for mortar joints. Brick joints should be uniform 3/8 inch in width, with horizontal joints level; with head joints of brick evenly spaced and centered above unit below. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. E. Plan to work to minimize job site cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. F. Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to set up on face of units. Tool joints before mortar has set. Clean and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION: Adequately protect all work from damage by subsequent construction operations. Refinish or replace damaged as directed by Engineer. SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -5 3.06 CLEAN-UP: At all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by the work of this section. Mortar spills shall be cleaned -up immediately. Clean stone according to supplier's instructions. PART 4 - PAYMENT Payment for Stone Veneer will be made at the lump sum (LS) contract price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall be considered full compensation for furnishing labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in furnishing and installing, complete in place, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 75 00 - STONE VENEER -6 SECTION 04 22 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and install concrete masonry units (CMU) including reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. Related Section. Section 03 11 13: Concrete Formwork Section 03 30 53: Miscellaneous Concrete Section 12 93 00: Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the City. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the current edition of the California Building Code. B. Mortar and grout mix design: 1. The Contractor shall employ and pay for, an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to design the mortar and grout mixes required. SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 1 2. The mixes shall be designed by the testing laboratory to produce mortar and grout of the strengths shown on the Drawings. Refer herein for tests to be used in determining masonry strengths. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A 82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. F. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ASTM A 580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. H. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I. ASTM C 55 - Concrete Building Brick. J. ASTM C 90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. K. ASTM C 652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). L. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. M. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of City specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units. D. Samples: Submit CMU samples to illustrate size, color, texture and extremes of color range. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for masonry construction. SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CMU: Size and Finish noted in detail C. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II or III. D. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Aggregates: 1. For grout: ASTM C 404. Modify coarse aggregate grading requirements so that not more than 5% pass a No. 8 sieve and 100% passes a 3/8 in. sieve. 2. For mortar: ASTM C 144. F. Mortar coloring pigments: Chemically inert, color -fast, finely ground limeproof pigment by LM Scofield & Co., or equal, of the color selected to match Engineer approved sample. G. Admixture for grout: Sika Grout -Aid by the Sika Corp. or equal. H. Water: Potable and fresh. I. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A 615, grade shown. J. Miscellaneous materials: As hereinafter specified and as necessary to complete this work. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Mix in the proportions designed by testing laboratory. B. Use admixtures according to their manufacturer's printed instructions. Secure manufacturer or distributor initial supervision by a qualified field representative to assure proper use of admixture. C. Mix by placing 1/2 of water and sand in operating mixer. Then add cement, lime, admixture and the remainder of sand and water. After all ingredients are in the mixer, mix mechanically for not less than three minutes. Do not hand -mix ingredients. D. Use grout for placing of consistency as fluid as possible for placing without segregation of constituent parts. SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 3 E. Mortar may be retempered with water as required to maintain high plasticity. F. Retemper on mortar boards only by adding water within a basin formed with the mortar and rework the mortar into the water. G. Discard mortar and grout which are unused after 1-1/2 hour from initial mixing time. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SHORES AND CENTERING A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain shoring and centering for temporary support of cobble elements. B. Construct true to required shape, size and form, well braced and made rigid in all parts and capable of supporting and sustaining the loads to which they are subjected. C. Leave shores and centering in place until cobble can safely carry its own weight and the added loads of construction. D. Brace Pilaster adequately to withstand all forces they will be subjected to during construction. Walls are not designed to be self-supporting for lateral loads until attached to floor and roof elements. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Erect pilaster plumb, square, straight and true to indicate lines, position and dimensions, in level courses with joints properly aligned. B. Use sound, dry, clean cobble units free from cracks when placed in the structure. C. If it is necessary to move a unit after it as been once set in place, remove the unit from the wall, clean and set in fresh mortar. D. Do not exceed the tolerances contained in ACI 117 for completed work. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT Embed reinforcement completely in grout with minimum coverage specified below. 3.04 BONDING A. For bonding the cobble to the foundation, clean top surface of concrete foundation, SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 4 remove laitance and expose aggregates before starting masonry construction. B. Lay-up sides in straight uniform courses. C. Corners shall have a standard bond by overlapping units and grouting solid. 3.05 JOINTS A. Lay the starting joint on foundations with full mortar coverage on the bed joint. Keep area where grout occurs free from mortar so that grout will contact the foundation. B. Mortar surfaces between cobbles shall be smooth and uniform cobble to produce a dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the cobble on each side where exposed in the Work. C. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. Use a tool which compacts the mortar, pressing excess mortar out of joint rather than dragging it out. D. Rake out joints which are not right at the time of tooling, point and then tool. E. Set capping units and bearing plates in a full bed of mortar. F. Do not wet the cobbles units except that in very dry weather the contact surfaces of the units shall be moistened immediately before laying. 3.06 GROUTING A. Keep mortar droppings out of or remove from the grout space before grouting. B. Perform grouting from the inside of the cobble. Vibrate grout after initial absorption of water, but before plasticity is lost, to encase steel and to insure contact. Encase reinforcement in minimum of 1/2 in. of grout between cobble and reinforcement. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Testing Agency will test mortar and grout as required by governing [CAC] [Los Angeles Building Code]. B. The Testing Agency shall make the following tests in accord with these Specifications and the requirements of the [Los Angeles Building Code] [CAC]. The minimum acceptable test results are listed below. C. At the beginning of masonry work, at least 2 test samples of mortar grout shall be taken and prepared for each 50 cu. yds. or fractional part hereof, and continuously SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 5 stored in most air until tested. The compressive strengths shall meet the minimum strengths specified. Perform tests in compliance with the following: D. Compression test strengths: 1. Mortar compression tests: On 2 in. x 2 in. cubes tested in compliance with ASTM C 109. a. 7 day: 1800 psi. b. 28 day: 3000 psi. 2. Grout compression tests: On cylinders made and cured in compliance with ASTM C 31. Compressive strength shall be determined in compliance with ASTM C 39. a. 7 day: 2000 psi. b. 28 day: 3300 psi. E. Additional samples shall be taken whenever any change in materials or job conditions occurs or whenever, in the judgment of the Engineer, such tests are necessary to determine the quality of the material and installed work. F. In making mortar test specimens, the mortar shall be taken from the unit soon after spreading. After molding, the molds shall be carefully protected by a covering which shall be kept damp for at least 24 hours, after which the specimens shall be stored and tested as required for concrete cylinders. G. In making grout test specimens, remove molds after the grout has taken its set but before it has hardened. Store cylinders as required for concrete cylinders and test in the vertical position. H. The compressive strength of masonry work shall be established by preliminary tests made in advance of the operations, using prisms of similar materials under the same conditions and insofar as possible, with the same bonding arrangement, mortar composition and joint thickness as for the structure. In building the prisms, the moisture content of the unit at time of laying, the consistency of the mortar, the workmanship and curing conditions shall be the same as will be used in the structure. I. Test specimens shall be large enough to approximate the actual conditions in the finished structure, but small enough to facilitate handling and cutting to the size prisms required to fit the testing machines available. All tests shall be made in accord with the [UBC] [CAC]. SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 6 J. Whenever there is any evidence that materials to be used in masonry construction do not conform to the Specifications, the material shall be tested for compliance before being used in the work. K. All tests shall be made by the Testing Agency of record. L. Testing of mortar and grout shall e at the discretion of the Engineer. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove grout scum and grout stains from the pilaster and all other surfaces immediately. B. After pilaster is constructed, do not saturate with water for curing or any other purpose. C. Where atmosphere is dry, dampen pilaster surface with a very light fog spray for 3 days. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 8' PROPERTY LINE BLOCK WALL Payment for 8' Property Line Block Wall will be made at the unit price per linear foot as set forth in the bid schedule. 4.02 COLUMN 'A' Payment will be considered included in the contract bid price for '6' Column' and no additional compensation will be made therefor. 4.03 COLUMN 'B' Payment will be considered included in the contract bid price for '6' Column' and no additional compensation will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS - 7 SECTION 05 73 13 — ORNAMENTAL TUBULAR STEEL FENCES AND GATES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Tube Steel Fence and Gate. B. Related Sections Section 03 11 13 — Concrete Formwork Section 03 30 53 — Miscellaneous Concrete C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", latest edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the City. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City. 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. 3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specification are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Layout of fence and gates with dimensions, details and finishes of component accessories and post foundations. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalogue cuts indicating material compliance and specified options. C. Samples: Color selections for finishes. If requested, samples of materials, (e.g. finials, caps, and accessories). SECTION 05 73 13 - ORNAMENTAL TUBULAR STEEL FENCES AND GATES - 1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Products from qualified manufacturers having a minimum of 5 years experience manufacturing ornamental picket fencing. B. Ornamental Picket Fence: Style: Per detail - see plans Height: Per detail — see plans 2.02TUBE STEEL PICKETS, RAILS AND POSTS A. Pickets: Per plan -see detail B. Rails: Per plan -see detail C. Posts: Per plan -see detail D. Finish: Galvanneal 1. In accordance with ASTM A123 Grade 85, for steel and iron products; use ASTM A153, Class B2, for steel and iron hardware. 2. Fabricate items for galvanneal finish in one piece in greatest extent possible for separate panels. Field welding of main components will not be permitted. 3. Surfaces shall be free of icicles, spangles and puddling. Provide venting holes at all enclosed sections; Drilled holes are acceptable. Locate venting holes at a low point to prevent rainwater from entering and standing water. See drawings and schedules for extent of steel items to be provided with a galvanized finish. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations. B. Ensure concrete alignment and elevations are clearly established. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fence in accordance with these plans and specifications. B. Space posts uniformly at on center, as indicated in detail. SECTION 05 73 13 - ORNAMENTAL TUBULAR STEEL FENCES AND GATES - 2 C. Concrete Set Posts: All post will be set in a concrete footing as indicated in detail. Construct concrete footing as indicated in detail. D. Gate Posts and Hardware: Not applicable on this project E. Check each panel for vertical and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operation. 3.03 CLEANING Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from site. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.015' HT. TUBE STEEL FENCING Payment for 5' HT. tube steel fencing will be made at the unit price per linear foot as set forth in the bid schedule. 4.02ORNAMENTAL 12' WIDE DOUBLE SWING GATE Payment for ornamental 12' wide double swing gate will be made at the lump sum price as set forth in the bid schedule. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 73 13 - ORNAMENTAL TUBULAR STEEL FENCES AND GATES - 3 SECTION 09 96 23 — NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and field apply the Non -sacrificial Anti -Graffiti coating as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. C. Related Documents. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. Low- sheen refers to a finish with a gloss range between 30 and 40 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. B. General: Standard anti -graffiti properties defined in ASTM D 6578 apply to this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit three (3) sets of a typewritten list of each component of the coating system as specified to the Engineer within twenty-one (21) days after award of contract. This list shall give the name, catalog number, and manufacturer, and shall be accompanied by cut sheets or reproductions of catalog pages for all of the equipment and material to be installed. The submittal shall include a manufacturer's certification that all products supplied comply with the requirements indicated that limit the number of VOCs in coating products. B. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Specifications only indicate the quality and workmanship to be performed rather than a detailed description of the performance of the work. Install said site components, materials and equipment in a functional manner and in which they were intended in the drawings. B. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed anti -graffiti coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. D. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each substrate required. E. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. Architect will select one area or surface of each different substrate to represent surfaces and conditions for application. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m), or as directed by Architect, of wall surface for each different substrate. F. Apply coatings to each surface as specified. Provide the required sheen of each surface. G. After finishes are accepted, City Engineer will use the surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. H. Final approval of coatings will be from benchmark samples. I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements. J. In the event of any discrepancies between the Plans and the Specifications, the final decision as to which will be followed shall be made by the Engineer, or his designated representative. In the event the installation is contradictory to the direction of the Engineer, the installation shall be rectified by the Contractor at no additional cost to City. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 2 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information: Name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Contents by volume, for vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a temperature range between 40 and 95 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 85 deg F. B. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit coatings to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. C. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for more than 28 days. Rain is not predicted within 24 hours. Application proceeds more than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. D. Windy conditions do not exist that may cause anti -graffiti coatings to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. E. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 3 F. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain graffiti repellency within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL & MANUFACTURERS A. Whenever a material or process is delineated or specified by patent, proprietary name or process, or manufacturer's name, such specifications are used for the purpose of facilitating the description of material or process desired. Approved equals are acceptable. B. Information pertaining to the product as to the manufacturer, material, model, color, finish, etc. is shown on the plan. 2.02 GENERAL MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various anti - graffiti coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable. C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 4 D. VOC Classification: Provide anti -graffiti coating materials, including primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 100 g/L or less 2.03 EXTERIOR ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEMS A. Provide the following 3 coat application over exterior cast -in -place concrete; concrete and brick masonry vertical surfaces; and where indicated per plans: a. Primer: Acrylic/Silicon UV stable bonding primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. SCS-002SP Sealer Prime Waterborne Sealer; Seicoat Corporation 323-263-4575 www.seicoat.com. b. Intermediate Coat: One component nanotechnological anti -graffiti coating applied at spread rate recommended by manufacturer to a dry film thickness of 1.0. Product must be a Level 1 Antigraffiti coating as specified by ASTM D6578. 1. GPA-300 Graffiti Proofer; Seicoat Corporation 323-263- 4575 c. Finish Coat: One component nanotechnological anti -graffiti coating applied at a spread rate recommended by manufacturer to a thickness of 2.0 mils. Product must be a Level 1 Antigraffiti coating as specified by ASTM D6578. 1. GPA-300 Graffiti Proofer; Seicoat Corporation 323-263- 4575 Product must meet Anti -graffiti test defined in ASTM D 6578. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout and site are compatible. C. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which anti -graffiti coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application requirements. D. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 5 E. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area. F. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item; provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and coating. B. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Cleaning: Before applying anti -graffiti coatings, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. D. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. F. Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cast stone surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces. G. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer. H. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. I. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 6 K. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. L. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using. M. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits. N. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of coating system components. O. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of components being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. P. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply anti -graffiti coatings until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving coatings have been installed and cured. Q. Anti -graffiti coating work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, anti -graffiti coatings, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. R. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of anti -graffiti coatings and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. General: Apply anti -graffiti coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied. Do not apply anti -graffiti coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. Coating surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, covers for finned -tube radiation, SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 7 and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. D. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. E. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. F. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. G. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. H. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. I. Application Procedures: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating as permitted by manufacturers written instructions and governing regulations. K. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. L. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. M. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. N. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated by others. 0. Recoat primed and sealed substrates immediately if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 8 P. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for shade and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Immediately clean anti -graffiti coatings from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING Non -Sacrificial Anti -Graffiti Coating will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 96 23 - NON -SACRIFICIAL ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING - 9 SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and install Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. Related Section. Section 03 30 53 - Miscellaneous Concrete. C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", 2018 edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each component and each item of site furniture. Shop drawings shall indicate layouts, component locations, dimensions, set -backs, details of assembly, anchors, footing details and all appurtenances required to assemble components. Three (3) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the City within twenty-one (21) calendar days after award of contract. B. Product Data: Provide data on all site furniture, equipment and materials, including accessories, utility characteristics, connection requirements and product cut -sheets. Three (3) sets of product data shall be submitted to the City within twenty-one (21) calendar days after award of contract. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide three (3) sets of the manufacturer's installation instructions to the City within twenty (21) calendar days of award after the contract. D. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHING AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - 1 Store and protect all site furnishings. Contractor shall be responsible for all site furnishings and in the event of missing or stolen items, they shall be replaced at the CONTRACTOR'S sole expense. 1.04 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain all permits (except permanent easements) and licenses and give notice and pay for all fees necessary to complete work under this Section as delineated or specified at no additional cost to City. B. Manufacturer's directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where the articles used furnish directions and cover points not delineated on the Plans or in the Specifications. C. The Specifications only indicate the quality and workmanship to be performed rather than a detailed description of the performance of the work. Install said site furnishings, materials and equipment in such a manner that they will operate efficiently and evenly. D. In the event of any discrepancies between the Plans and the Specifications, the final decision as to which will be followed shall be made by the Engineer, or his designated representative. In the event the installation is contradictory to the direction of the Engineer, the installation shall be rectified by the Contractor at no additional cost to City. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The work shall conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission -Public Playground Handbook for Safety, California Disabled Access Regulations -Title 24 and the State Play Equipment Guidelines (SB 2733). The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance and provide written documentation for compliance to the Engineer upon installation of all equipment and material governed by said regulations. B. All work shall conform to the City standards for public construction and any other agency's standards for public construction having jurisdiction over the work. C. Provide certificate(s) of compliance from authority(s) having jurisdiction over the work. The certificate(s) shall indicate approval of products and their installation. Comply with all applicable local, state, federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. 1.06 SAMPLES AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. All workmanship, equipment, materials, and articles incorporated shall be the best available grade of their respective kind. SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHING AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - 2 B. Provide a sample of each component specified. Accepted samples may be used in the Work, subject to approval by the Engineer. Submit three (3) sets of a typewritten list of equipment and materials as specified to the Engineer within twenty-one (21) days after award of contract. This list shall give the name, model number, and manufacturer, and shall be accompanied by cut sheets or reproductions of catalog pages for all of the equipment and material to be installed. C. Approval of substitutions will not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. Pay at Contractor's sole expense for all changes caused by approved substitutions which affect other items of work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL Whenever a material or process is delineated or specified by patent, proprietary name or process, or manufacturer's name, such specifications are used for the purpose of facilitating the description of material or process desired. Approved equals are acceptable. 2.02 COMPONENTS 1. Precast Concrete Benches 2. Precast Concrete Picnic Table and Benches 3. Precast Concrete Trash & Recycle Receptacles 4. Drinking Fountain 5. Bicycle Rack 6. Precast Concrete Water Feature SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHING AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - 3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout and site are compatible. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Layout and stake locations of components for approval by Engineer prior to installation. B. Review layout requirements with other affected work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with City standards and manufacturer's instruction. B. Provide concrete footings for site furnishings as detailed on the Plans or as herein specified. C. Place decomposed granite in moist condition and placed in a minimum 3" layer. Compact with a sod roller. Contractor to submit one cubic foot sample for approval. 3.04 SITE CONDITIONS Promptly repair damage to facilities caused by construction operations. Cost of repair at Contractor's sole expense. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 PRECAST CONCRETE BENCHES Payment for Precast Concrete Benches will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.02 PRECAST CONCRETE TRASH & RECYCLE RECEPTACLES Payment for Precast Concrete Trash & Recycle Receptacles will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHING AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - 4 4.03 DRINKING FOUNTAIN Payment for Drinking Fountain will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.04 BICYCLE RACK Payment for Bicycle Rack will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 4.05 PRECAST WATER FEATURE Payment for Precast Water Feature will be made at the contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. END OF SECTION SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHING AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS - 5 SECTION 32 15 40 - DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation and incidentals to provide and install decomposed granite surfacing as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. RELATED SECTIONS: Section 31 22 00 "Grading". 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C136 — Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS B. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit samples of the following: a. One pound sample of each type and color of decomposed granite surfacing material. C. Certification: 1. Installer Qualifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of decomposed granite surfacing from single source. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bulk Materials: Each load of decomposed granite surfacing material arriving at the job site in bulk shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket containing the following minimum information: 1. Quarry of origin. SECTION 32 15-40 — DECOMPOSED GRANITE 2. Amount, weight and type of material. 3. Brand name and manufacturer's identification. D. Protect decomposed granite surface materials from contamination until ready for installation. Store under cover. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surfaces to receive decomposed granite surfacing shall be frost free and free of oil or any other foreign matter, which may impair the proper installation of the surfacing system. C. Perform work in dry weather when subgrade is sufficiently stable to be properly compacted. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING MATERIALS A. Decomposed Granite and Crushed Stone Aggregate: Provide high quality materials consisting of sound, angular, durable stone particles, free from clay lumps, organic materials, frozen materials, or other deleterious substances. B. Gradation: Manufacturer's standard mix of well -graded materials in accordance with ASTM C136. Blends of coarse sand and rock dust are not acceptable. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.02 PREPARATION A. Excavation: Excavate to depth required so edges of decomposed granite surfacing will match adjacent grades and have a maximum cross -slope of 2 percent. Ensure edges and bottom of excavation are in a smooth and even line. B. Subgrade Preparation: Plow, harrow and mix the entire surface of the in -place subgrade to a depth of at least 6 -inches. After the material has been thoroughly mixed, the subgrade shall be brought to line and grade and compacted to 90% of the maximum laboratory dry density. SECTION 32 15-40 — DECOMPOSED GRANITE 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SUBGRADE A. Subgrade: Proof -roll the subgrade with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to locate unstable areas and to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. 2. The surface of the completed subgrade shall be bladed to a smooth and uniform texture. 3. The finished subgrade shall be uniform and free from deleterious debris such as organic materials, nails, stones and loose soil. B. Compaction: Compact each lift of the subgrade, and final finish decomposed granite surfacing materials with a one to three -ton roller or compactor. In small areas that are difficult to access with compaction equipment, hand tamping may be performed with multiple passes to achieve the required density. 1. Lightly spray surface area following compaction. Do not disturb aggregate surface with spray action. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING A. Spread decomposed granite surfacing material in 3 to 4 -inch lifts. Spread evenly and smoothly before compacting. Allow for 20-25% compaction. Screed if possible. B. Wet the mix to ensure water has penetrated the full depth of the decomposed granite surfacing material, and roll each lift to form a uniform, smooth surface with a cross slope of 2% maximum. Compact each lift to a minimum 90% density. C. Grade and smooth to the required elevation; compact final lift with 1-3 ton drum roller or compactor. D. Surface shall follow grades per plans. Remove crown, allow 1-2% cross pitch. E. Completed surface shall be of consistent quality and shall not have depressions or humps greater than 1/4 -inch in 10 -feet. SECTION 32 15-40 — DECOMPOSED GRANITE 3.05 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Decomposed Granite Surfacing Thickness: Allow for 20-25% compaction. B. Decomposed Granite Surfacing Smoothness: Produce a surface smoothness within 1/4 -inch tolerance when measured with a 10 -foot straightedge. 1. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowed variance from template is 1/4 -inch. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Thoroughly clean all areas where work has occurred. Remove from site excess material, debris and rubbish. B. Take all precautions necessary to protect completed work until Substantial Completion of project. END OF SECTION SECTION 32 15-40 — DECOMPOSED GRANITE SECTION 32 18 16 — SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Poured -in -place playground surfacing system. B. Related Sections a. SECTION 03 30 53 - Miscellaneous Concrete b. SECTION 11 68 13 - Playground Equipment 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. 2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. 3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. 4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. 5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester. 6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. 7. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Poured -in -place playground surfacing system is based on "Playbound System" available through Surface America, Inc. over aggregate sub -base. PO Box 157, Williamsville, NY 14231. Phone: (800) 999-0555, SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 1 A. Performance Requirements: Provide a 2 -layer rubber -polyurethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria: 1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292): a. Gmax: Less than 200. b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000. 2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass. 3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa). 4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%. 5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second. 6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard verification samples of 9" x 9" (229 x 229 mm) minimum. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificate of qualifications of the playground surfacing installer. E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty documents specified herein. 2. Certificate of Installation by an independent third -party certified playground safety inspector 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of the playground surfacing system, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section. SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 2 B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the playground surfacing system. C. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Do not install in steady or heavy rain. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion of work PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POURED -IN -PLACE PLAYGROUND SURFACING SYSTEM A. Resilient Rubber Surfacing shall be from the following suppliers or approved equal: Surface America, Inc. PO Box 157 Williamsville, NY 14231 Phone: (800) 999-0555 or (716) 632-8413 SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 3 Fax: (716) 632-8324 E-mail: info@surfaceamerica.com Website: www.surfaceamerica.com PlayCore 544 Chestnut Street Chattanooga, TN 37402 Phone: (877) 762 7563 Fax: (423) 425-3124 info@playcore.com Regional Representative: TotTurf Phone: 714-904-8219 Fax: 855-700-8780 Contact:Vince Brantley E-mail: vbrantley@playcore.com Website: www.totturf.com SpectraTurf 555 S. Promenade Avenue, Suite 103 Corona, CA 92879 Phone: 800-875-5788 or 714-814-7594 Fax: 951-734-3630 Contact: Kassi Hove Email: kassi.hove@spectraturf.com Website: www.spectraturf.com B. Products/Systems. Poured -in -place playground surfacing system, including the following: 1. PlayBound Poured -In -Place Primer: a. Material: Polyurethane. 2. PlayBound Poured -in -Place Basemat: a. Material: Blend of 100% recycled SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) and polyurethane. b. Thickness: 2 1/2" (64 mm), per working drawings. c. Formulation Components: Blend of strand and granular material. 3. PlayBound Poured -In -Place Top Surface: a. Material: Blend of recycled EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) and polyurethane. b. Thickness: 1/2", per working drawings c. Material: Alaphatic binder. Blend with EPDM course. SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 4 d. Color: Refer to Plans for color selection. e. Dry Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 1.0. f. Wet Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.9. g. Dry Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 89. h. Wet Skid Resistance (ASTM E303): 57. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: Requests of materials offered as equivalents to those specified must be submitted and approved a minimum of five working days prior to the opening of bids. 2.03 MIXES A. Required mix proportions by weight: 1. Basemat: minimum 14% polyurethane, (86% rubber). 2. Top Surface: minimum 18% polyurethane, (82% rubber). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the playground surfacing manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify fall zones and clearances prior to installing sub -base. B. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions are suitable for installation of the playground surfacing system. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsuitable conditions are corrected. D. After installation of the play equipment and rubberized surfacing, the contractor shall submit to the city a playground safety report as prepared by an independent certified playground safety inspector. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 5 equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L). 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed. B. Basemat Installation: 1. Using screeds and hand trowels, install the basemat at a consistent density of 29 pounds, 1 ounce per cubic foot (466 kg/m3) to the specified thickness. 2. Allow basemat to cure for sufficient time so that indentations are not left in the basemat from applicator foot traffic or equipment. 3. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the basemat surface until it is sufficiently cured. C. Primer Application: Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the basemat perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L). D. Top Surface Installation and Security: 1. Using a hand trowel, install top surface at a consistent density of 58 pounds, 9 ounces per cubic foot (938 kg/m3) to a nominal thickness of 1/2" (12.7 mm). 2. Provide streamer barrier and traffic easles to protect Top Surface to cure. 3. Allow top surface to cure for a minimum of 48 hours. 4. Do not allow foot traffic or use of the surface until it is sufficiently cured. 5. Provide evening and overnight security from a bonded and insured security agency for the protection of the top surface. a. Security Agency (or equal) PACWEST Security Services (800) 372-2937 (714) 429-1300 (213) 413-3500 SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 6 6. At the end of the minimum curing period, verify that the top surface is sufficiently dry and firm to allow foot traffic and use without damage to the surface. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent construction activity on the site. B. Provide security over night to protect the top surface installation. PART 4 PAYMENT 4.01 PLAYGROUND PLAY SURFACE Payment for "Playground Play Surface" shall be paid for at the contract price per lump sum (LS) as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.02 SECURITY Payment for the security will be considered as included in other items of work and no additional payment will be made, therefore. END OF SECTION SECTION 32 18 16 - SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING- 7 SECTION 32 84 00 - IRRIGATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A It is the intent of these Specifications that any adjustments or modifications to the existing irrigation system shall be done so that the systems remains complete and be fully operable during construction and after construction is complete. All modifications to the pressure mainline will be done to the satisfaction of the City. B The work shall include, but not limited to, coordination with the City's Authorized Representative to determine the extent of any adjustments, all labor and materials, including pot holing services to determine water line locations, transportation, and equipment necessary to perform the work. C Irrigation modifications shall include, but not limited to, the re -alignment of the existing pressure main line to avoid conflict with the proposed improvements. The City will be responsible for modifications made to the non -pressure lateral lines including the layout and installation of non -pressure lateral piping, spray heads and valves D The removal and disposal of existing piping and/or irrigation equipment determined by the City as not useful in making the irrigation system complete. E Related Sections. Section 32 90 00: Landscaping F. Do not willfully modify the existing irrigation system when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that will not result in a workable irrigation system. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the City's Authorized Representative as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed the Contractor will bare all costs to correct the problem. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION -1 B. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used furnishes directions covering points not shown in the Drawings and Specifications. C. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to the installation of a irrigation pressure main lines are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these Specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these Specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations of the same. However, when these Specifications and Drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and Drawings shall take precedence. D. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to City. E. Obtain the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the work of this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of City specifications. B. Product Data: Provide data for all installed items. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Prior to excavating for new construction, the Contractor shall meet with the City Authorized Representative in the field to verify and be familiar with the possible locations and crossings of the existing pressure main lines. B. Prior to cutting into the soil, locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground and it shall take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between the obstacles and the proposed work, promptly notify the City's Authorized Representative who will arrange for relocations. C. Protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. The Contractor will repair, solely at their cost, all damage resulting from its operations or negligence. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 2 1.05 INSPECTIONS A. Permit the City's Authorized Representative to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such visits. B. Where the Specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until accepted by the Engineer. Notify the City's Authorized Representative, a minimum of 48 hours in advance of where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor's sole expense. C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. Extent of repair and/or re -alignment of any portion of the existing pressure main line. 2. Testing any new connections to the existing main line 3. Prior to backfilling trenches. E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be re -tested. Hourly rates and expenses of the City's Authorized Representative for re -inspection or re -testing will be paid by the Contractor at no additional expense to City. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the City. B. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load. 1.07 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Do not bury waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. Remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by his work and workmen at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the Engineer. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 3 B. At the time of completion the entire site will be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off -site in a disposal area that is fully and legally licensed. 1.08 COMPLETION A. At the time of the pre -maintenance period inspection, the City's Authorized Representative and governing agencies will inspect the work and, if not accepted, prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. At the time of the post - maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re -inspected and final acceptance will be in writing by the Engineer. B. The City Engineer shall have final authority on all portions of the work. C. Without any additional expense to the City, repair any settling of trenches, which may occur during the maintenance and establishment period following acceptance, to the City's satisfaction. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work. 1.09 GUARANTEE A. The entire sprinkler system shall be unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following the filing of the Notice of Completion. The guarantee shall be valid unless existing equipment utilized on the project fails within the guarantee period. B. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period, and at no additional expense to City, correct it within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of written notice from City. When the nature of the repairs as determined by the City constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the City may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the owner by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the City. A. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractors own letterhead as follows: GUARANTEE FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse, or neglect excepted. We shall repair or replace any defective material during the period of one year after date of filing of the Notice SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 4 of Completion and also repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notification by the owner. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of written notice from owner, we authorize the owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 SUMMARY Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type satisfactory to the City. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet City standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at no expense to the City. 2.02 PIPE A. All pressure supply lines downstream of backflow prevention unit shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to ASTM 1785. 2.03 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion. B. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785. C. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 40 and shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466. D. All threaded nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads and shall conform to ASTM D1785. E. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be of a fluid consistency, not gel -like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 5 F. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non -lead base teflon paste, tape, or approved equal. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNIT 1. Backflow preventer shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the Drawings. 2.05 VALVES A. Gate Valves 2. Gate valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the Drawings. 3. Gate valves shall be constructed of a bronze body, gate and stem with a malleable iron hand wheel. Gate valves shall have threaded connections. 4. All gate valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 psi and shall conform to AWWA standards. B. Quick Coupler Valves: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand normal working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. Valves shall have 1" female threads opening at base, with two-piece body. Valves shall be operated only with a coupler key designed for that purpose. Coupler key shall be inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve. C. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the Drawings. 2. Automatic control valves shall be electrically operated. 2.06 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather -resistant plastic material resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils. B. The valve box cover shall be green in color and secured with a hidden latch mechanism or bolts. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 6 C. The cover and box shall be capable of sustaining a load of 1,500 pounds. D. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box. E. Automatic control valve boxes shall be 16"x11"x12" rectangular size. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number "heat branded" onto the cover in 2 inch high letters / numbers. F. Gate and quick coupler valve boxes shall be 10" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with either "GV" or "QCV" "heat branded" onto the cover in 2 inch high letters. 2.07 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Automatic controller shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. B. Stainless steel controller enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2.08 ELECTRICAL A. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations. B. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances. 2.08 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING A. Remote control wire shall be direct -burial AWG-UF type, size as required by the City and in no case smaller than 14 gauge. B. Connections shall be either epoxy -sealed packet type or Penn-Tite connectors. C. Ground wires shall be white in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" Plans located on controller door). SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 7 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspections: 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the City's Authorized Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have been resolved. C. Grades: 1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. 2. The Engineer shall accept final grades before work on this Section will be allowed to begin. D. Field Measurements: 1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in accordance with the City requirements. Coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other work. 2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Repair damages to utilities, which are caused by Contractor's operations or neglect, at no additional cost to City. E. Layout: 1. Prior to installation, stake out all pressure supply lines and routing. Locate all pressure supply lines in planted areas. 2. Cap and mark the locations of capped non -pressure lateral lines for future identification. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 8 F. Water Supply: Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be as required by the City. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to the City. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout as coordinated with the City requirements to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade. B. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches on pressure supply lines. C. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches for control wires. D. Trenching across streets shall be done in accordance City standards. The method of installing piping under pavement will be approved by the City Engineer. Repair and/or replacement of damaged pavement including Curb and Gutter will be done per City standards and to the satisfaction to the City Engineer. E. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have a 6 -inch minimum space between pipes. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2 inch in diameter. B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4 -inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to 90% relative compaction and shall conform to adjacent grades. C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed. D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill. E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 6 inches over and under all piping under paved areas. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION - 9 3.04 PIPING A. The method to install piping under existing pavement will be approved by the City Engineer. Jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving will be considered. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement. B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted. C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification. D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe Sections. E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6 inches from each other and 12 inches from lines of other trades. F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other. G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling. H. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. I. Centerload all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing. J. All threaded plastic -to -plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or Teflon paste. K. For plastic -to -metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non - hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic -to -metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic -to -metal connections shall be made with plastic female adapters. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the requirements of the City using best standard practices. B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 12 inches from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable. SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION -10 3.06 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM A. The Contractor will flush the pressure supply line daily, when new connections are made. B. Not used 3.07 TESTING AND OBSERVATION A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this Section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Engineer. B. Notify the City's Authorized Representative a minimum of 48 hours in advance where and when the work is ready for testing. C. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from City requirements or where the system has been willfully installed as required by the City when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the City's Authorized Representative. This test shall be accepted by the City's Authorized Representative and accomplished before starting any planting. 3.08 COMPLETION CLEANING Clean-up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. PART 4 —PAYMENT 4.01 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM Payment will be made at the lump sum contract price as set forth in the bid schedule. 4.02 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL Payment for trenching, backfilling repair and/or replacement of damaged AC paving, PCC paving and Curb and Gutter shall be considered included in the bid item for "Automatic Irrigation System" and no additional compensation will be made therefore. END OF SECTION SECTION 32 84 00 IRRIGATION -11 SECTION 32 90 00 - LANDSCAPING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The general requirements apply to all Landscaping work operations. Provide labor, materials, tools, transportation and all incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook", 2018 edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the "Greenbook", unless otherwise determined by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable local, state, federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. B. Manufacturer's directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications. C. The work included in this section will be done to the satisfaction of the City and the decision by the City as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final. D. All drop slips for landscape materials (including plants, fertilizers, pesticides, seed mixes) shall be given to the Engineer. 1.03 AGRONOMIC SOILS TESTING A. All soil samples shall be taken in the field by a qualified soil technician from a testing agency registered by the State for agricultural evaluation. B. Take two (2) samples of site soil at a depth of 6 to 12 inches, within proposed planting area, after completion of grading and prior to weed control and soil preparation. Sample areas shall be selected by the Engineer. C. Request two (2) tests for fertility and suitability analysis with written recommendations for soil amendment, fertilizer and chemical conditioners, application rates for soil preparation, planting backfill mix and post -maintenance SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 1 fertilization programs. Soils report recommendations shall take precedence over the amendment and fertilizer application rates specified in this Section. D. Testing laboratory shall be Soil and Plant Laboratory, Inc., 1594 N. Main, Orange, CA 92667 (714) 282-8777 or Wallace Laboratories, 365 Coral Circle, El Segundo, Ca 90245, Phone (310) 615-0118. Tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. E. Submit testing laboratory's interpretation, recommendations, and comments to Engineer within 7 days after the completion of rough grading. F. For bidding purposes, the Contractor shall provide the following soil amendments for soil preparation and backfill mix. 1. Soil preparation per 1,000 s.f. of planting area: a. 4 cubic yards Nitrolized Redwood Sawdust b. 200 lbs. Gro Power c. 20 lbs. Soil Sulphur 2. Backfill Mix: a. 6 parts by volume on -site soil b. 4 parts by volume Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment c. 181b. Gro Power per cu. yd. of mix d. 2 lbs. Iron Sulphate per cubic yard of mix 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install landscape materials when ambient temperatures may drop below 45 degrees F (12 degrees C) or above 95 degrees F (39 degrees C). B. Do not install landscape materials when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr). PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z60.1 - Nursery Stock. B. California State Department of Agriculture - Regulations for nursery inspections, rules, and grading. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 2 2.02 TOPSOIL Topsoil if required in planting areas shall be Class A Topsoil. Topsoil shall be as specified in Section 212-1.1.2 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 2.03 PLANT MATERIAL A. Trees, shrubs, ground cover and vines shall be grown by an established nursery having been in the business of growing trees, shrubs, ground cover a minimum of five (5) years. At the option of the Engineer, plants shall be inspected and tagged at the nursery prior to shipment to the planting site. 1. Trees: All trees shall be of the specified container size and of the species specified. 2. Shrubs: Shrubs shall be of the specified type and size, selected from high quality, well -shaped nursery stock. 3. Flatted Plants: Ground cover plants and other flatted plants shall be grown and remain in the flats until transplanted at the site. Soil that does not crumble with sufficient moisture, normal spacing of plants in the flat and well rooted plants shall be required to ensure the minimum disturbance of the root system at time of transplanting. 4. Grass Plugs: Plugs shall be grown and remain in their containers until transplanted on the site. All plugs shall be planted within eight (8) hours upon arrival. B. Plant names indicated or listed in the "Plant Legend" on the Plans, conform to the approved names given in "An Annotated Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon, and Washington, Manual 4091 ", published by the University of California (1979). Except for names not covered therein, the established custom of the nursery shall be followed. C. Condition of plants shall be in accordance with the California State Department of Agriculture's regulations for nursery inspections, rules, and grading and shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species, sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease, insect pests, or their eggs, and shall have healthy normal root systems, well filling their containers, but not to the point of being root bound. D. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery, except as authorized by the City. In no case shall trees be topped before delivery. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 3 E. The size of the plants shall correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock, or as specified on the Plans. The minimum acceptable size of all plants, measured before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform with the measurements, if any, specified on the Plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the City, but the use of larger plants will not serve as the basis for a change order. F. All plant material shall be subject to the inspection and acceptance of the City before planting. A representative number of plants as determined by the City may be inspected for size and condition of root growth, insects, injuries and defects. Plants not accepted are to be removed from the site immediately and replaced with suitable plants. The City reserves the right to reject entire lots of plants represented by defective samples. 2.04 FERTILIZERS, SOIL CONDITIONING MATERIALS AND WATER A. General. 1. Fertilizing and soil conditioning materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of the State Food and Agricultural Code. All materials shall be packaged first grade, commercial quality products identified as to source, type of material, weight, and manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Fertilizing and soil conditioning material shall not contain toxic ingredients or fillers in quantities harmful to human life, animals, or plants. 2. Furnish a Certificate of Compliance stating that the material substantially meets the specifications. 3. Exact fertilizing and conditioning materials and the required composition and quantities shall be determined by agronomic soils test. B. Commercial Fertilizer. I. Commercial fertilizer shall be a palletized or granular product having a chemical analysis as specified on the Plans or in the Specifications. Commercial fertilizer shall be free -flowing material delivered in unopened sacks. Material which becomes caked or otherwise damaged shall not be used. 2. Exact composition and type of fertilizer to be determined by the agronomic soils test and will be supplied by the contractor at no additional cost to the City. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 4 C. Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Soil Amendment. Organic soil amendment shall be redwood sawdust free of shavings or particles of other woods such as fir or pine, supplied in bulk and .5% nitrogen stabilized by standard techniques. An acceptable substitute is nitrogen stabilized fir or cedar sawdust ground to 0-1/4" particle size and 1.0% nitrogen stabilized. D. Water. 1. Water shall be clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants 2. Water shall be supplied at Contractor's sole expense at no additional cost to City through the end of the maintenance period. 2.05 HERBICIDE A. Non -selective herbicide for weed abatement shall be Round -Up, Rodeo or approved equal. B. Pre -emergent herbicide shall provide nine (9) month control. 2.06 MULCH A. Mulch shall be "Cover ES -2" Available from or equal to: Agromin Mulch Company Contact Greg Jackson 714-475-8672 201 Kinetic Drive Oxnard CA 93030 B. The mulch shall consist of fibrous, woody bark mixture of varied particle size with the following characteristics: Percent Passing Sieve Size 90-100 25.4 mm (1") 80-100 12.7 mm (1/2") 20-60 6.35 mm (1/4") C. Mulch shall be packaged in bales or bags unless the City approves a bulk source in advance of delivery to the site of the work. The Contractor shall submit one sample of three (3) different mulch materials. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 5 D. The Engineer has the right to reject all samples and request additional samples until a suitable mulch material is approved. 2.07 PRE -EMERGENCE WEED CONTROL In areas of woody ornamental plants use Ronstar, Weedban, or approved equal. 2.08 SAMPLES A. Samples of products and materials shall be required by the City. Submittals for inspection shall be stored on the site until furnishing of material is complete. B. Delivery of products and materials may begin upon acceptance of samples or as directed by the City. 2.09 PLANT TABLETS A. Plant tablets shall be Scotts Agriform, Growpower or approved equal, 20-10-5 applied at the following rates: Tablet Size 21 Gram 5 Gram Container Size 1 Gallon and 10" pots 5 Gallon 15 Gallon 24" Box 36" Box and Larger Ground Cover Plants Application Rates (No. of Tablets) 1 3 8 20 One Tablet per each foot of height 1 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Earthwork and topsoil placement shall include the preparation for and the spreading, densification, cultivation, and raking of topsoil, including fertilization and conditioning. 1. Unless otherwise provided, curbs, walks, irrigation systems, and similar improvements required by the Plans or Specifications shall be constructed following rough grading and before landscaping. 2. Planting holes and backfill shall be as herein specified. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 6 3. Preliminary rough grading and related earthwork, prepare areas for landscaping work to within one -tenth foot (0.1') of finish grade, or to subgrade for Class "A" topsoil if required. 3.02 TOPSOIL PREPARATION AND CONDITIONING A. General. 1. Planting areas shall be free of weeds and other extraneous materials to a depth of twelve inches (12"). 2. Soil shall not be worked when it is so wet or so dry as to cause excessive compaction or the forming of hard clods or dust. 3. The existing soil below subgrade for approved fill shall be scarified to a depth of six inches (6") prior to spreading fill material. B. Fertilizing and Conditioning Procedures. 1. The planting area shall be brought to finish grade before spreading the fertilizers or conditioning materials specified. 2. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the City, shall make one (1) additional soils test per acre of all planting areas before and upon completion of excavation, backfilling, and grading to determine compliance with fertilizing and conditioning. The Contractor shall coordinate soil testing with the City. 3. Fertilizing and conditioning materials shall be mechanically spread at a uniform rate. The quantities of materials necessary for the planting area shall be at the site and shall be verified by delivery tickets furnished to the Engineer before spreading. 4. After spreading, the fertilizing and conditioning materials shall be uniformly cultivated into the upper six inches (6") of soil by suitable equipment, rototiller or equal, operated in at least two directions approximately at right angles. The resulting soil shall be a friable condition. 5. Fertilizer and soil amendment guidelines under agronomic soils testing shall be used for bidding purposes for planting areas, however, the Contractor shall amend it as necessary per the soils test report at no additional cost to the City. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 7 3.03 WEED ABATEMENT A. The weed abatement program shall proceed upon the completion of the following: 1. Installation of all pressure main line, quick coupler valves, irrigation valves, drip irrigation valves, non -pressure spray laterals and irrigation heads have been completed and accepted. (Prior to the installation of the drip line.) 2. After all existing weeds and growth has been removed from the planting areas. 3. After the controller or a temporary controller has been installed. B. Water all areas four (4) times daily for twenty-one (21) consecutive days and until weed seeds have germinated. Cease watering for three (3) days. Spray a non- selective herbicide (Roundup) to eradicate the germinated weeds. Allow herbicide to kill all weeds. Rake or hoe off all dead weeds to a depth of 1/4 inch below the surface of the soil. If perennial weeds or grasses still exist, re -water four (4) times daily for fourteen (14) consecutive days until new growth appears. Reapply a non -selective herbicide with a dye indicator. Remove weeds after herbicide has had sufficient time to kill. 1. Water turf areas utilizing the irrigation controller. 2. Water all drip zones manually utilizing the quick coupler valves. 3.04 FINISH GRADING A. After fertilizing and conditioning, the soil shall be watered and allowed to settle to provide a stable surface, not overly densified to the extent that it will prevent aeration and water infiltration. After the soil has dried out to a workable condition, the planting areas shall be regraded, raked, and smoothed to the required grades and contours. Finish surfaces shall be clean and suitable for planting. B. The finish grade shall be smooth, uniform, and free of abrupt grade changes and depressions to ensure surface drainage. C. The finish grade below adjacent paving, curbs, or headers shall be one inch (1") in lawn areas and two inches (2") in shrub or ground cover areas. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 8 3.05 PLANTING GENERAL A. All sprinkler/irrigation work shall be inspected and accepted by the City, prior to start of any work of this subsection. B. Location of utility, structures and lines. 1. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of stakes, locate all utilities, electric cables, conduits, irrigation lines, heads, valves and valve control wires, and all utility lines so that proper precautions may be taken not to damage such improvements. 2. In the event of a conflict between utilities and plant locations, promptly notify the Engineer who will arrange for one or the other to be relocated. If contractor fails to follow this procedure it shall repair all damages resulting from the work at contractor's sole expense. C. All plants will be inspected by the Engineer prior to planting, including plants previously approved at the nursery. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all plants, planted or otherwise, until acceptance. D. Quantities. 1. Plant materials shall be furnished in the quantities and/or spacing as shown or noted for each location, and shall be of the species, kinds, sizes, etc., as symbolized, and/or described in the Plant Legend, as indicated on the Plans. 2. Verify all sizes and quantities on the Plans. Promptly report any discrepancy to the Engineer. E. Substitution. 1. Any plant material or any development materials specified by trade name or equal, shall be according to these Plans and Specifications. 2. Installation and use of substitute items shall not be made until the Contractor is in receipt of written approval from the Engineer. Substitution proposals for plant material must be accompanied by written proof of non -availability within a five -hundred -mile radius of the project site for material originally specified and proof that material was ordered in a timely manner upon award of contract. F. Protection and Storage. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 9 1. Regularly water all nursery stock in containers and place them in a cool area protected from sun and drying winds. 2. Do not allow plants to dry out before or while being planted. Keep exposed roots moist by means of wet sawdust, peat moss or burlap at all times during planting operations. Do not expose roots to the air except while being placed in the ground. Wilted or diseased plants, whether in place or not, will not be accepted and shall be replaced at the Contractor's sole expense. 3. Plugs: All plugs shall be kept moist and placed in a shady area prior to planting. DO NOT ALLOW PLUGS TO DRY OUT. G. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to installing plant material. H. Install plant material immediately after delivery to site, within 24 hours after harvesting to prevent deterioration. I. Water landscaped areas immediately after installation. J. Layout and Plant Location. 1. Planting areas, borders and boundaries, will be surveyed and staked by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 2. Detailed layout within the planting areas shall be performed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to planting. 3. Locate first row of plants in areas designated for center to center spacing of plants shall be located at one-half of designated spacing from the edge of the area. 3.06 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Planting Holes. Planting holes shall be approximately square for container grown plants. The holes shall be twice the width of the plant container or ball, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. The holes shall be one -and -half times the depth of the root ball, or as shown on the Plans. The hole shall be larger, if necessary, to permit handling and planting without injury or breakage of the root ball or root system. Any plant having a broken or cracked root ball before or during planting shall not be planted. B. Underground Obstructions. In the event that underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in the planting operation, alternate locations for SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 10 plant material will be selected by the City. Operation shall be done at no extra cost to the City. C. Planting Procedures. 1. The following material shall be thoroughly blended and used as a backfill mix. 6 parts by volume on -site soil 4 parts by volume Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment 181b. Gro Power per cu. yd. of mix 2 lbs. Iron Sulfate per cubic yard of mix The actual material and amounts, as determined by the agronomic soils test, shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City. No mixing for individual planting holes is permitted. Mix planting soil prior to backfilling and stockpile at the site. Iron sulfate shall not contact cement surfaces because severe staining could occur; repair or replace stained cement at Contractor's sole cost. 2. Remove all plants from their containers and set so that, when settled, they bear the same relation to the required grade as they bore to the natural grade before being transplanted. Plant each plant in the center of the pit and backfill with prepared soil. Compact the backfill mix around the ball or roots. Do not use soil in muddy condition for backfilling. Do not fill around trunks or stems. Cut off all broken or frayed roots. 3. Thoroughly water each plant when the hole is one-half filled. 4. After watering, backfill the remainder of the hole and tamp the soil in place until the surface of the backfill is level with the surrounding area and the crown of the plant is at the finished grade of the surrounding area. 5. After backfilling, a basin shall be constructed around each plant. Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least six inches (6") of water. Basins shall be the same size as the container size of each individual plant. The basins shall be constructed of amended backfill material. 6. Set the plant tablets to be used with each plant on the top of the root ball so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified. Bury tablets upon approval by the Engineer. 7. Immediately after planting, apply water to each tree and shrub by means of a hose. Apply water in a moderate stream in the planting hole until the SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 11 material about the roots is completely saturated from the bottom of the hole to the top of the ground. 8. Apply water in sufficient quantities and as often as seasonal conditions require to keep the planted areas moist at all times, well below the root system of grass and plants. 9. Basins around shrubs and trees in slopes shall be permanently maintained. In turf areas, basins shall be maintained thirty (30) days following tree planting. They shall be removed at that time, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. D. Pruning. Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-third of the branching structure. Upon approval of the Engineer, pruning may be done before delivery of plants, but not before plants have been inspected and approved. E. Staking. All trees shall be staked per the planting details on the Plans. Staking shall be done immediately after planting. 3.07 GROUND COVER PLANTING A. Soil preparation and fine grading shall be completed prior to ground cover planting. B. Ground cover shall be planted in moist soil and spaced as indicated on the Plans. C. Each plant shall be planted with its proportionate amount of flat soil to minimize root disturbance. Soil moisture shall be such that the soil does not crumble when removing plants. D. Following planting, ground cover areas shall be regraded to restore smooth finish grade and to ensure proper surface drainage. Mulch shall be spread over the planted areas. Watering shall begin immediately following mulching. E. When necessary to prevent plant damage from pedestrian traffic during the initial growing stage, erect temporary protective fencing to be removed at the end of the maintenance period. F. Contractor shall hand water with a watering hose all grass plugs individually and immediately following planting. Apply enough water to saturate soil. After 3 weeks, hand water plugs every other day and after 4 weeks hand water plugs every 2 days. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 12 G. All grass plugs shall be planted in -ground eight (8) hours after being delivered to the site. Any plugs not planted within 8 hours after being delivered shall be rejected and replaced with new and fresh plugs at no cost to the City. 3.08 MULCHING Mulch trees, shrubs and ground cover areas after planting with three inches (3") of mulch. 3.09 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT A. Maintenance period will be a minimum of ninety (90) days after "Date of Acceptance of Installation" of all planting areas. Request in writing from the Engineer notification of the date of the start of the maintenance period. At the acceptance of all planting areas, request in writing from the Engineer notification of the date of the completion of the maintenance period. The maintenance period shall not officially begin or end without written notification from the Engineer. B. Construction fencing shall remain until after the maintenance period is complete or as directed by the Engineer. C. Maintain all planted areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during the progress of the work and during the establishment and maintenance period and shall continue to maintain them until final acceptance in accordance with the following. 1. Water, weed, fertilize, mow, edge, prune, spray and apply topdressing as necessary to promote a healthy growing condition. All planted areas shall be kept free of debris and shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals not to exceed ten (10) days. Keep project neat and attractive throughout the maintenance period. 2. Apply herbicides for weed control, as needed or directed by City, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable laws and regulations. Pre -emergent herbicide shall be required in all planter, shrub and ground cover areas. Remedy damage resulting from the use of herbicides. 3. Exterminate rodents and insects as required and in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. 4. Adjust the irrigation system to sufficiently saturate root zone without rotting trees, shrubs, and ground cover. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 13 5. Repair or replace any damaged item caused by vehicles, vandals, bicycles, or foot traffic during the maintenance period. 6. All planted areas, unless otherwise specified will receive the following fertilization program: Fertilize with "Gro-Power Plus" at 30 lbs./1,000 s.f. every thirty (30) calendar days (twice during the maintenance period), or as indicated by the agronomic soils test. Apply "Gro-Power Controlled Release Nitrogen" five (5) calendar days before the end of the maintenance period, or as indicated by the agronomic soils test. The Contractor shall adhere to fertilization requirements of the soils tests at no additional cost. D. Maintenance period shall be extended if plant material is not in a healthy growing condition. When all maintenance work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer will issue to the Contractor a written notice of completion of maintenance. 3.11 INSPECTION A. All inspections herein specified shall be made by the City. Request inspection at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance of the time the inspection is required. Requested inspections, subsequently canceled without twenty-four (24) hours notice, will be billed to the Contractor. B. Inspection is required for, and not necessarily limited to, the following parts of the work. 1. At completion of the incorporation of soil amendments and fine grading. 2. Prior to digging plant pits for trees and shrubs. 3. During backfilling of plant pits with amended backfill. 4. Final inspection at the end of the maintenance period. PART 4: PAYMENT 4.01 SOIL PREPARATION AND FINE GRADING Payment for soil preparation, including fine grading, will be made at the contract unit price per square foot as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 14 4.02 WEED ABATEMENT Payment for weed abatement will be made at the contract unit price per square foot as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.03 TREE — 24" BOX Payment for Tree - 24" Box will be made at the contract unit price per each as set forth in the bid schedule schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.04 TREE — 36" BOX Payment for Tree - 36" Box will be made at the contract unit price per each as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.05 SHRUB - #15 CONTAINER Payment for Shrub - #15 Container will be made at the contract unit price per each as set forth in the bid schedule schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.06 SHRUB - #5 CONTAINER Payment for Shrub - #5 Container will be made at the contract unit price per each as set forth in the bid schedule schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.07 SHRUB - #1 CONTAINER Payment for Shrub - #1 Container will be made at the contract unit price per each as set forth in the bid schedule schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 15 4.08 WOOD MULCH (3" THICK) Payment for Wood Mulch (3" thick) will be made at the contract unit price per cubic yard as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. 4.09 PRE -EMERGENCE WEED CONTROL Pre -Emergence weed control will be considered as included in other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. 4.10 (90) DAY MAINTENANCE Payment for (90) day maintenance will be made at the lump sum contract unit price as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved to complete in place. END OF SECTION SECTION 32 90 00 — LANDSCAPING - 16 SECTION 32 92 23 - SOD PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The General Provisions shall apply to all Sod work operations. Provide all labor, materials, tools, transportation, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified. B. Related Sections. Section 32 84 00 Irrigation Section 32 90 00 Landscaping C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "Greenbook" 2018 edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the Standard Specification, unless otherwise determined by the Engineer. D. Definitions. 1. City: Temple City 2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer's designated representative. E. All vendors, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives and the associated addresses, phone and fax numbers on the Plans and in the Specifications are listed for convenience only. They are subject to change and their inclusion in no way constitutes an endorsement by the City. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable local, state, federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. B. Grower's directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications. C. The work included in this section will be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The decision by the Engineer as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final. Section 32 92 23 SOD - 1 D. All drop slips for sod fertilizers shall be given to the Engineer. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sod when ambient temperatures may drop below 45 degrees F (12 degrees C) or above 95 degrees F (39 degrees C). B. Do not install sod when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr). PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z60.1 - Nursery Stock. B. California State Department of Agriculture - Regulations for nursery inspections, rules, and grading. 2.02 SOD A. Sod shall be Celebration 'Big Rolls" or approved equivalent grown by an established sod nursery having been in the business of growing sod a minimum of five (5) years. Sod shall be free of turf disease, insects, or weeds, and capable of healthy, vigorous growth. B. Sod shall be grown in a blown sand medium. It shall be cut with a 1/2" to 3/4" thickness of soil that completely covers the root zone. Sod shall be wide cut, big roll. The sod shall arrive vigorous and have a lush appearance, uniform texture and dark green color throughout with no dead or dying edge. The sod shall be sufficiently dense to bear handling and placement without tearing. C. Nylon mesh in sod will not be accepted. D. Sod may be obtained from: A -G Sod Farms 30932 Palm Avenue Nuevo, CA 92567 Phone: (800) 233-5254 Section 32 92 23 SOD - 2 2.03 FERTILIZERS, SOIL CONDITIONING MATERIALS AND WATER A. General. 1. Fertilizing and soil conditioning materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of the City's Standards and Specifications. All materials shall be packaged first grade, commercial quality products identified as to source, type of material, weight, and manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Fertilizing and soil conditioning material shall not contain toxic ingredients or fillers in quantities harmful to human life, animals, or plants. 2. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer the Certificate of Compliance stating that the material substantially meets the City's specifications. 3. Exact fertilizing and conditioning materials and the required composition and quantities shall be determined by the agronomic soils test. B. Commercial Fertilizer. 1. Commercial fertilizer shall be a palletized or granular product having a chemical analysis as specified on the Plans or in the Specifications. Commercial fertilizer shall be free -flowing material delivered in unopened sacks. Material which becomes caked or otherwise damaged shall not be used. 2. Pre -planting fertilizer composition to be 6-20-20. Post -planting composition shall be 6-20-20XB. Fertilizer shall provide one pound of P and K per 1,000 square feet. Nitrogen shall not exceed 1/3 pound per 1,000 square feet. Exact composition and type to be determined by agronomic soil test. 3. Fertilizer available from: J.R. Simplot Lathrop, CA 95330 Phone: (209) 858-2511, Fax: (209) 858-2519 C. Water. 1. Water shall be clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants. 2. Water shall be supplied at Contractor's expense at no additional cost to the City through the end of the maintenance period. Section 32 92 23 SOD - 3 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FERTILIZING A. Two to three days prior to sodding, fertilize with J.R. Simplot Best 6-20-20 at one pound of P and K per 1,000 square feet. Exact quantity shall be determined by the agronomic soil test Adequately irrigate after application. B. Fifteen days after sod installation is complete, fertilize as above with J. R. Simplot Best 16-20-20XB 3.02 INSTALLING SOD A. Soil conditioning and fine grading shall be completed before sodding. No heavy equipment shall operate over the subgrade after grading is completed. B. The subgrade shall be moist but not wet when sod is laid. Sod shall be laid with closely fitted joints, and the ends of the trips shall be staggered. Openings shall be plugged with sod. C. Within two hours after installing sod and before rolling, the sod shall be adequately irrigated with a minimum of 1/2" of water. All seams and joints shall then be rolled until the sod is well bonded to the subgrade. D. The area shall then be watered thoroughly with 2 to 4 inches of water to penetrate the subsoil at least 8 inches. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep the sod moist until rooted into the subgrade. Sodded areas shall be protected against foot traffic until the sod is well established. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance period will be a minimum of ninety (90) days after Date of Acceptance by the City of all sod installation. B. Maintenance includes: 1. Water, weed, fertilize, mow, edge and spray as necessary to promote a healthy growing condition. Keep project neat and attractive throughout the maintenance period. 2. Applying herbicides for weed control, as needed or directed by City, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from the use of herbicides. Section 32 92 23 SOD - 4 3. Exterminate rodents and insects as required. 4. Adjust irrigation system scheduling to sufficiently saturate root zone. 5. Repair or replace any damaged item caused by vehicles, vandals, bicycles, or foot traffic during the maintenance period. 6. (During growing season) fertilize turf every four weeks with one pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet in a complete fertilizer product (4-1-4 ratio). B. Maintenance period may be extended if turf grass and other plant material is not in a healthy growing condition. When all maintenance work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor will be released through written notification by the Engineer. C. Mow turf a minimum of two (2) times a week with the first mowing to be completed seven (7) days after installation of sod. Maintain a mowing height of 3/8" to 3/4" inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at anyone mowing. Grass shall be mowed with a sharp power -driven reel mower. Clippings shall be collected and removed. 3.04 DAMAGED TURF REPLACEMENT Payment for damaged turf replacement will be made at the contract unit price per square foot (SF) as set forth in the bid schedule and shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for doing all work involved. 3.05 SOD MAINTENANCE Payment for SOD MAINTENANCE will be included under Section 32 90 00 Landscaping and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION Section 32 92 23 SOD - 5 SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Form accessories. C. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. This section not used 1.07 MOCK-UP A. This section not used SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORM WORK - 1 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. This section not used. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for exposed concrete surfaces: Plywood, metal, metal-framed/plywood faced, or FRP which will provide continuous, flat or curved as applicable, smooth exposed concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings, where indicated. B. Forms for concealed concrete surfaces: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. 2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Provide Form Liner By "Symons" or approved equal as specified on Architectural drawings. Use according to manufacturers instructions and directions. Refer to "Symons" Former Liner Application Guide. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. This section not used. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 FORM TYPES A. General: Comply with the applicable provisions of ACI 347, Guide to Formwork for Concrete, and APA Design/Construction Guide, Concrete Forming. B. The design and construction of forms and shorings is the Contractor's responsibility but shall comply with specified requirements. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORM WORK - 2 C. Form contact surfaces shall be clean, free from dents, holes and other imperfections. D. Establish and maintain benchmarks, lines and controls necessary to achieve specified tolerances. Take an accurate survey of the form location just prior to concrete pour. E. Concrete surfaces which will remain exposed in the Work: 1. Fill voids, fastener heads, and other imperfections in form contact surfaces with body putty sanded smooth. 2. Seal joints between plywood panels flush with compound specifically designed to seal forms, or other approved material to prevent concrete paste leakage. 3. Provide sharp, clean corners at form intersecting planes, without visible edges and offsets. Back joints with additional studs or girts. 4. Form recesses and projections with smooth finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 5. Drill holes accurately in forms to fit ties used. Prevent leakage of concrete around tie holes. Do not drive ties through undersized or improperly prepared holes. 6. Kerf backside of wood inserts used for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and similar treatments, to allow wood to swell without spalling concrete, and to assure easy removal. F. Re -use of forms: 1. Form materials may be re -used if they produce finished surfaces equal to finished surfaces where new form materials are used. 2. Before re -use, thoroughly clean, recondition in every respect, suitable for their re -use purpose. 3.3 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Construction: 1. Rigidly support and construct forms to the lines, surfaces and profiles necessary to produce concrete of the design indicated. 2. Construct forms to be removable without prying against concrete. 3. Make forms tight, without cracks or holes, to prevent leakage of mortar or loss of fine particles from concrete. 4. Cover or fill holes that are not used, and cracks that have opened up, flush with adjacent surfaces. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORM WORK - 3 3.4 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Thoroughly clean forms and coat with release agent prior to initial use (except when mill -oiled) and before each reuse. B. Apply form coating in compliance with its manufacturer's printed instructions and coverage rates. C. Coat steel forms with a non -staining, rust -preventative material. Rust -stained steel formwork is not acceptable. D. Provide a coating of uniform thickness. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in -place concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. E. Apply form coating before reinforcement is placed. 3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.6 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORM WORK - 4 C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean -out ports. 3.7 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Cast -in -place concrete shall not exceeding the tolerances specified in Section 03 30 00, except support form facing material to limit deflection to L/360 between supports for concrete exposed to view, and L/270 for all other concrete. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Not used. 3.9 FORM REMOVAL A. Remove forms only after concrete has developed sufficient strength to not be damaged by form removal operation, and to safely sustain its own weight and superimposed loads, as determined by testing field cured concrete cylinders, but not sooner than specified in ACI 347. B. Take care when removing forms that concrete surfaces are not marred or gouged, that corners are true, sharp and unbroken. Do not pry against concrete when removing forms. C. Cut-off nails flush in concealed concrete surfaces. Cut back tie wires and nails in exposed concrete surfaces at least 1-1/2 in. Remove rod and cone ties and separators or similar devices and pull inward away from finished surfaces. PART 4: PAYMENT Concrete formwork will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORM WORK - 5 SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast -in -place concrete. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03 30 00 — Cast In Place Concrete. C. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFENCENCE A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP -66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual. D. ASTM A 82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ASTM A 184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A 496 - Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM A 497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. I. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ASTM A 616 - Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. K. ASTM A 617 - Axle Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. L. ASTM A 704 - Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. M. ASTM A 706 - Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -1 N. ASTM A 767 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 0. ASTM A 775 - Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. P. ASTM D 3963 - Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Steel. Q. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel. R. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcement Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. S. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute - Manual of Practice. T. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. U. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.04 SUMITTALS A Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings are required for reinforcement deviating from that shown on the Drawings. 2. Submit bar drawings and schedules with the corresponding placing diagrams. Drawings shall be complete for any specific area of Project when submitted. 3. Copies of mill reports and test data for reinforcing steel sampled and tested, prior to starting this work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welders' Certificates: Submit Manufacturer's Certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. B. The Contractor shall ensure that the material delivered for use is that represented by the mill reports and obtain copies of mill reports, examine them, certify whether the material represented complies with Specifications requirements, and make distribution of reports as required. Report chemical composition of each heat, as determined by ladle analysis. C. Where materials proposed for use cannot be identified, pay for an approved testing laboratory to make one series of tests (tensile and bend) from each 2.5 tons, or SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -2 fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel. Include 2 samples, minimum, of sufficient length to allow tests to be made on the as -rolled bar. 1.06 HANDLING A. Comply with the combined recommendations of AWS and the electrode manufacturer for storage of electrodes. Do not use electrodes that have been wetted. B Deliver reinforcement to the site bundled, tagged and marked; handle to prevent damage to material. Use metal tags indicating size, length and other markings shown on placement drawings. Maintain tags after bundles are broken. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A 615, grade indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcing mesh: ASTM A 185. Provide welded wire fabric in flat sheets, not rolls. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Welding electrodes: AWS A5.1 E70XX Series, low hydrogen, having a minimum yield point of 60,000 psi. B. Tie wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gage (minimum) annealed steel wire. C. Supports for reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire -bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. D. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs, or precast concrete block chairs with embedded wire ties. E. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2). F. Over waterproof membranes and vapor barriers, use precast concrete chairs to prevent puncturing of membrane. SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -3 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Except as modified by the Drawings and the Specifications, comply with Chapter 7 of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for fabrication of reinforcing steel. B. Bending and forming: 1. Fabricate steel bars, wire and fabric of indicated sizes, lengths and gages, and accurately form to shapes indicated by methods that will not injure the materials. 2. Heating reinforcement for bending is prohibited. Do not install bars with unscheduled kinks or bends. C. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify conditions and measurements affecting the work of this Section at site. Make sure that detrimental conditions are corrected before proceeding with installation. B. Placement of reinforcing steel shall be inspected prior to concrete pour. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Placement inspection: Place reinforcement under the continuous inspection of the Engineer or his designated representative. B. Cleaning: Clean reinforcement of loose mill scale, excessive rust, oil, and other coating that might destroy or reduce its bond before placing it. C. Placing: Comply with the listed reference standards as applicable. 1. ACI 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. 2. CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice. 3. AWS D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. D. Spacing of reinforcement: Space reinforcement to maintain the proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -4 E. Floor system reinforcement: Do not place until concrete in walls and columns has been placed and forms and projecting steel have been thoroughly cleaned. F. Splices: 1. Do not splice reinforcing bars except where indicated. Bars shall be in contact, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, at lapped splices and shall be firmly wired together before placing concrete. 2. Extend stubs and dowels required to receive and engage subsequent work a sufficient length to develop the strength of the bar. Place dowel and stub bars in the forms and secure against displacement during placing of concrete. G. Clearance: Maintain clear distances between reinforced steel and face of concrete indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 WELDING A. Welding: Comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4. Before welding, determine the weldability of reinforcing bars by laboratory chemical analysis of the steel. Only steel conforming to the chemical requirements specified in AWS D1.4 may be welded. B. Welded splices: Use full penetration butt welds made by the electric -arc method unless indicated otherwise. C. Use only welders who have passed the AWS standard qualification tests within the previous year. D. Weld splices shall develop 125% of the specified yield strength of the reinforcing bars, or of the smaller bar in transition splices. E. Clean bars of oil, grease, dirt and other foreign substances, and flame -dry before welding. F. Prepare ends of bars in compliance with AWS D1.4. Preheat bars before welding. PART 4: PAYMENT Concrete reinforcement will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 20 00 -CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -5 SECTION 03 35 00 - CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete finishes. This Section supplements Section 03 30 00. B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener, sealer, and slip resistant coatings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish; control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices. B. Section 07 95 00 - Expansion Control C. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ASTM E 1155 - Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F -Number System (Inch -Pound Units). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturer's data, including installation instructions where applicable, for the following items before proceeding with this work. B. Curing and curing/hardening compounds. C. Curing paper. D. Bonding agents. E. Patching and surfacing compounds. F. Abrasive aggregates. SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -1 G. Expansion joint filler. 1.05 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Not used. 1.07 HANDLING/JOB CONDITIONS A. Comply with the provisions of the same Articles in Section 03 30 00. B. In addition protect adjacent surfaces from staining and damage by covering them with impermeable coverings securely taped in place. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete materials: As specified in Section 03 30 00. B. Water: Fresh, clean, and free of oil and other materials injurious to concrete. C. Expansion joint materials: 1. Joint filler: Homex Expansion Joint by Homasote Co. or equal non -bituminous product compatible with sealant specified in Section 07 90 00. Use in combination with plastic joint cap made by Greenstreak or equal. 2. Joint sealant and back-up rod: As specified in Section 07 90 00. D. Curing and protection paper: Non -staining paper equal to "SK -10" by Fortifiber Corp. or equal. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX FOR COLORED CONCRETE A. Not used. PART 3: EXECUTION SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -2 3.1 PREPARATION A. Expansion joints: 1. Set premolded expansion joint strip below finished surface with a slightly tapered, dressed, wood strip, temporarily secured to top of expansion strip to provide space for sealant, or use an approved extruded plastic strip. 2. Install expansion joints in straight or curved lines as indicated. 3. After concrete finishing operations are completed, and concrete is cured, fill void formed by the strip with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00. Provide joints where indicated and in all cases where concrete flatwork abuts vertical elements such as walls, columns and curbs. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Finish concrete surfaces to produce a uniform appearance throughout area involved and throughout adjacent areas with the same treatment. B. Where concrete finishing occurs adjacent to finished metal and similar surfaces, particularly where serrated or indented surfaces occur, remove all traces of cement film before allowing concrete to harden. C. Use no troweling machines within 12 in. of electrical junction and outlet boxes set to finish flush with concrete floors. D. Float and trowel such areas by hand with wood floats and steel trowels, using caution so that concrete is finished flush with box cover and matches adjacent surfaces. E. Concrete finish will be considered defective and shall be repaired, when the results are acceptable to the Engineer, or removed and replaced with proper work conforming to Contract Documents, at no additional cost to Agency, when: 1. It does not match approved samples. 2. It is not true to lines and planes. 3. It is not properly troweled and surfaced as required, and varies in excess of 1/8 in. along a 10 ft. straightedge (except for surfaces to receive a topping slab). 4. Is scuffed or has a rough surface, except where required. 5. Does not connect properly to adjoining work. 6. Does not slope to drains. 7. Is not properly cured. 3.03 MARKINGS SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -3 A. At expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated, provide markings with a rounded edging or marking tool, to a 1/4 in. radius. In textured work, edge and mark with a combination edging and smoothing tool approximately 1-1/2 in. wide. B. Where indicated, provide cut markings sawn into surface of cured concrete with a diamond tipped or other abrasive saw within 12 hours after placing slabs. Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid damage to adjacent vertical or horizontal surfaces. C. Make marking lines straight, or curved where required by the Drawings, equally spaced and parallel to adjacent lines and walls, edges and other construction, and of uniform depth and cross section, with intersections accurately formed. 3.04 BUILT-IN ITEMS A. Set items furnished under this or other Sections and finish to floor fixtures and other floor features as indicated. Adjust finish to properly connect and fit to other work. Slope floor to drain where indicated. B. Floor drains and other items furnished and installed under other Sections: Finish concrete surface flush with rims unless detailed otherwise. C. Exercise particular care with respect to drains to ascertain that they are installed at proper elevations to permit drainage. Do not proceed until corrective work has been performed and accepted. 3.05 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. General: 1. Remove fins, laitance and loose materials from concrete surfaces when forms are removed. 2. Repair honeycombs, rock pockets, sand runs, spalls and other damaged surfaces by removing the damaged or unsatisfactory area to sound concrete, with slightly undercut edges, and filling -in with the same mix as the adjacent concrete minus the coarse aggregate. 3. Fill-in tie holes with the same mix as the adjacent concrete minus the coarse aggregate. 4. Tamp and float, or trowel patches flush with adjacent surface and to match adjacent concrete texture. B. Rough form finish: SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -4 1. Provide as -cast rough form fmish to formed concrete surfaces that are to be concealed in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Standard rough form finish shall be the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 in. in height rubbed down or chipped off. C. Smooth form finish: 1. Provide as -cast smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a material applied directly to the concrete, or a material bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing, dampproofmg, painting and similar system. 2. Provide smooth form finish by selecting form material to impart a smooth, hard, uniform texture and arranging the orderly and symmetrical with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with all fins or other projections completely removed and smooth. D. Smooth rubbed finish: 1. Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 2. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. E. Grout cleaned finish: 1. Provide grout cleaned fmish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. 2. Combine one part Portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fme sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Blend standard Portland cement and white Portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that the final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent concrete surfaces. 3. Thoroughly wet the concrete surface and apply grout uniformly by brushing or spraying immediately to the wetted surfaces. Scrub surface with cork float or stone to coat surface and fill surface holes. Remove excess grout by scraping, followed by rubbing with clean burlap and remove any visible grout film. Keep grout damp during setting period by means of fog spray at least 36 hours after final rubbing. Complete any area in the same day it is started, with the limits of any area being natural breaks in the finished surface. SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -5 H. Curing: 1. Wet the tops and exposed portions of formed concrete and keep moist until forms are removed. 2. If forms are removed before 14 days after concrete is cast, coat concrete with curing compound as specified for flatwork below. 3.06 COMPACTING AND FLOATING FLATWORK A. Bring slabs with monolithic finish to proper level using screeds and strike off with a straightedge. Remove excess water and laitance. B. Compact and consolidate to embed coarse aggregates. C. Float and test surfaces with a 10 ft. straightedge and eliminate high and low spots to comply with tolerances specified. D. From this point, use the methods and tools necessary to produce surface finish specified. E. Use continuous screeds of such type and construction and so spaced and located as to produce surface tolerances specified. 3.07 SPECIAL PLACING REQUIREMENTS FOR COLORED CONCRETE A. Not used 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 in. in 10 ft. 3.09 METHODS OF FINISHING AND CURING A. Keep concrete continuously moist for 14 days minimum. Leave paper in place as temporary protection as long as possible. 3.10 MOISTURE CONTROL A. In addition to fmishing requirements specified, use a water fog spray to reduce plastic shrinkage cracks during flatwork fmishing operations when conditions of low humidity and high temperature exist. SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -6 B. Immediately after wet concrete has been leveled, or sloped as required, and the shiny film of moisture disappears, start fog spraying and continue until final troweling, by applying a light film of moisture with an atomizing type sprayer. C. Use frequent light applications of moisture rather than excessive amounts at any one time. Adjust the amount and frequency of fog spray as required by variable conditions of weather, wind, temperature and humidity. 3.11 FLATWORK FINISHES A. Integral smooth steel trowel finish: Use for surfaces to receive carpet, resilient flooring, and surfaces which have no other specific fmish specified. B. Trowel surface until the slabs are finished to a smooth, hard, burnished surface. C. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface plane tolerance specified. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 3.12 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Protect exposed concrete work as necessary to prevent damage resulting from impact or from subsequent work or rubbish. B. Protect adjacent work from damages by this work with heavy kraft paper or polyethylene film. C. Maintain protection in effective condition for as long as need for protection exists. D. Control use of water within the building so that no damage to previously installed work or existing structures and fmish occurs. PART 4: PAYMENT Concrete floor finishing will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 03 35 00 -CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING -7 SECTION 04 20 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for concrete work including dowels in footings. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A 82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. F. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. G. ASTM A 580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. H. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I. ASTM B 370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. J. ASTM C 55 - Concrete Building Brick. K. ASTM C 90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. L. ASTM C 652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). M. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -1 N. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units. C. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the current edition of the California Building Code. B. Mortar and grout mix design: 1. The Contractor shall employ and pay for, an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer to design the mortar and grout mixes required. 2. The mixes shall be designed by the testing laboratory to produce mortar and grout of the strengths shown on the Drawings. Refer herein for tests to be used in determining masonry strengths. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for masonry construction. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -2 A. CMU: Medium weight load -bearing units, conforming to ASTM C 90, Grade N- 1, except for special shapes. All units from the same plant. CMUs which will remain exposed shall have a uniform texture and color. Provide special shapes such as open-end units and channel blocks, as required by job conditions. B. Masonry units shall have cured for not less than 28 days when placed in structure. C. Masonry units shall have a maximum linear shrinkage of 0.06% from saturated to oven dry condition, when tested according to methods published in the Quality Control Standards of CMA. D. Decorative Block Units: ASTM C 90, color as selected. E. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II or III. F. Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. G. Aggregates: 1. For grout: ASTM C 404. Modify coarse aggregate grading requirements so that not more than 5% pass a No. 8 sieve and 100% passes a 3/8 in. sieve. 2. For mortar: ASTM C 144. H. Mortar coloring pigments: Chemically inert, color -fast, finely ground limeproof pigment by LM Scofield & Co., or equal, of the color selected to match Engineer's approved sample. I. Admixture for grout: Sika Grout -Aid by the Sika Corp. or equal. J. Water: Potable and fresh. K. Reinforcing steel: ASTM A 615, grade shown. L. Miscellaneous materials: As hereinafter specified and as necessary to complete this work. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Mix in the proportions indicated on the Drawings. B. Use admixtures according to their manufacturer's printed instructions. Secure manufacturer or distributor initial supervision by a qualified field representative to assure proper use of admixture. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -3 C. Mix by placing 1/2 of water and sand in operating mixer. Then add cement, lime, admixture and the remainder of sand and water. After all ingredients are in the mixer, mix mechanically for not less than three minutes. Do not hand -mix ingredients. D. Use grout for placing of consistency as fluid as possible for placing without segregation of constituent parts. E. Mortar may be retempered with water as required to maintain high plasticity. F. Retemper on mortar boards only by adding water within a basin formed with the mortar and rework the mortar into the water. G. Discard mortar and grout which are unused after 1-1/2 hour from initial mixing time. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 SHORES AND CENTERING A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain shoring and centering for temporary support of masonry elements. B. Construct true to required shape, size and form, well braced and made rigid in all parts and capable of supporting and sustaining the loads to which they are subjected. C. Leave shores and centering in place until masonry can safely carry its own weight and the added loads of construction. D. Brace CMU walls adequately to withstand all forces they will be subjected to during construction. Walls are not designed to be self-supporting for lateral loads until attached to floor and roof elements. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Erect masonry plumb, square, straight and true to indicate lines, position and dimensions, in level courses with joints properly aligned. B. Use special units as required to form bond beams, openings and offsets, and maintain a proper bond throughout entire length of wall. C. Fractional parts of masonry units are prohibited in the work where whole units can be used. Chinking of interstices with fragments and bats is prohibited. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -4 D. Use sound, dry, clean masonry units free from cracks when placed in the structure. E. Cut units accurately to fit openings for other work. Cut and patch holes neatly and accurately. F. If it is necessary to move a unit after it as been once set in place, remove the unit from the wall, clean and set in fresh mortar. G. Where necessary to cut CMU in order to conform to adjacent construction and/or to indicated joint pattern, saw blocks with masonry saw to produce a straight, sharp edge without spalling or other defects. Cut units as required to maintain uniform joint widths throughout. H. Do not exceed the tolerances contained in ACI 117 for completed work.. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. When a foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical core, do not slope more than 1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Grout dowels into a core in vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent cell to the vertical wall reinforcement. B. Embed reinforcement completely in grout with minimum coverage specified below. 3.04 BONDING A. For bonding the masonry to the foundation, clean top surface of concrete foundation, remove laitance and expose aggregates before starting masonry construction. B. Lay-up walls in straight uniform courses with regular running bond. C. Corners shall have a standard masonry bond by overlapping units and grouting solid. 3.05 JOINTS A. Lay the starting joint on foundations with full mortar coverage on the bed joint. Keep area where grout occurs free from mortar so that grout will contact the foundation. B. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean and uniform in width. Tool with a round bar to produce a dense, slightly concave surface well bonded to the block on each side where masonry will remain exposed in the Work. Masonry which will be concealed from view shall have joints struck flush. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -5 C. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. Use a tool which compacts the mortar, pressing excess mortar out of joint rather than dragging it out. D. Rake out joints which are not right at the time of tooling, point and then tool. E. Unless otherwise detailed, make joints 3/8 in. thick with full mortar coverage on face shells and on the webs surrounding cells to be filled. F. Butter vertical head joints well for a thickness equal to the face shell of the unit and shove these joints tightly so that the mortar bonds well to both units. G. Set lintels, capping units and bearing plates in a full bed of mortar. H. Do not wet the masonry units except that in very dry weather the contact surfaces of the units shall be moistened immediately before laying. 3.06 GROUTING A. Keep mortar droppings out of or remove from the grout space before grouting. B. Perform grouting from the inside of the masonry. Vibrate grout after initial absorption of water by the CMU, but before plasticity is lost, to encase steel and to insure contact with masonry cells. Encase reinforcement in minimum of 1/2 in. of grout between block and reinforcement. C. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous unobstructed cell area. Grout beams over opening in one continuous operation. D. Grout bolts and anchors inserted in the wall solidly so that there is a minimum of 1 in. of grout between the bolt and the masonry unit. E. Grout unit masonry in heights of 4 ft. or less, unless high lift grout procedures are submitted to, and accepted by the Architect and/or Engineer, and the Contractor reimburses the Agency for the added inspection costs. 3.07 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Locate frames accurately, erect plumb and anchor securely to floor. Brace in position prior to start of masonry erection. B. Frames are specified to be furnished with adjustable anchors. Adjust anchors to coincide with horizontal joints in masonry. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -6 C. Fill frames solid with mortar or grout as erection progresses. D. Provide temporary wood spreaders from jamb to jamb to ensure that jambs do no bow in or distort from straight line as frames are filled with mortar. E. Provide temporary shores to support heads of metal frames and prevent deflection from superimposed loads during erection. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Engineer or his representative will test mortar and grout as required by governing Building Code. B. Special inspection is required unless noted otherwise on Structural Drawings. C. The Engineer shall make the following tests in accord with these Specifications and the requirements of the governing Building Code. The minimum acceptable test results are listed below. D. At the beginning of masonry work, at least 2 test samples of mortar grout shall be taken and prepared for each 50 cu. yds. or fractional part hereof, and continuously stored in most air until tested. The compressive strengths shall meet the minimum strengths specified. Perform tests in compliance with the following: E. Compression test strengths: 1. Mortar compression tests: On 2 in. x 2 in. cubes tested in compliance with ASTM C 109. a. 28 day: 1800 psi. 2. Grout compression tests: On cylinders made and cured in compliance with ASTM C 31. Compressive strength shall be determined in compliance with the UBC. a. 28 day: 2500 psi. F. Additional samples shall be taken whenever any change in materials or job conditions. G. In making mortar test specimens, the mortar shall be taken from the unit soon after spreading. After molding, the molds shall be carefully protected by a covering which shall be kept damp for at least 24 hours, after which the specimens shall be stored and tested as required for concrete cylinders. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -7 H. In making grout test specimens, remove molds after the grout has taken its set but before it has hardened. Store cylinders as required for concrete cylinders and test in the vertical position. I. The compressive strength of masonry work shall be established by preliminary tests made in advance of the operations, using prisms of similar materials under the same conditions and insofar as possible, with the same bonding arrangement, mortar composition and joint thickness as for the structure. In building the prisms, the moisture content of the unit at time of laying, the consistency of the mortar, the workmanship and curing conditions shall be the same as will be used in the structure. J. Test specimens shall be large enough to approximate the actual conditions in the finished structure, but small enough to facilitate handling and cutting to the size prisms required to fit the testing machines available. All tests shall be made in accord with the current governing building codes. K. Ultimate compressive strength of the prisms shall be 2000 psi minimum. L. Whenever there is any evidence that materials to be used in masonry construction do not conform to the Specifications, the material shall be tested for compliance before being used in the work. M. All tests shall be made by the Agency's Testing firm.. N. If cores are removed from portions of the structure for testing, the holes shall be drypacked or otherwise repaired as instructed and the finish surfaces restored to original condition. In exposed finished concrete block surfaces, this shall require the removal of all block cut or otherwise damaged by the coring operation and the replacement of complete new CMU as approved. 0. If the member or portion of the structure fails to pass the tests, the Contractor shall make such changes or modifications as are necessary to provide strength required by the applicable codes as approved by the Code Authority. P. All testing and replacement shall be paid for in accord with the Contract requirements. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove grout scum and grout stains from the CMU walls and all other surfaces immediately. B. After CMU wall is constructed, do no saturate with water for curing or any other purpose. SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -8 C. Where atmosphere is dry, dampen CMU wall surface with a very light fog spray for 3 days. PART 4 PAYMENT Concrete masonry units will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 04 20 00 -CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS -9 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. 1.2 FURNISH THE FOLLOWING FOR INSTALLATION BY OTHER TRADES A. Abrasive stair nosing's. B. Other miscellaneous items not mentioned but shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Paint finish. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. C. Section 04 20 00 - Concrete Masonry Units: Placement of metal fabrications in CMU. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. B. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. C. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. D. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements. G. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. H. ASTM A 53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. I. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS J. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. K. ASTM A 283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. L. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. M. ASTM A 500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. N. ASTM A 501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. O. ASTM B 26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings. P. ASTM B 85 - Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings. Q. ASTM B 177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use. R. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. S. ASTM B 210 - Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. T. ASTM B 211 - Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. U. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. V. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. W. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. X. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under the provisions specified by the owner. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare structural calculations, signed by a California -licensed structural engineer, to demonstrate Code compliance for railings. B. Welders Certificates: Certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in compliance with AWS "Qualification" requirements of AWS D1.1. B. Verify that welders to be employed in this work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualificationtests. B. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. D. Engineering responsibilities: 1. Certain metal assemblies are not fully detailed on the Drawings which indicate desired profile and design intent. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to engineer, fabricate and install these assemblies, and their connections, to conform to the profiles indicated and other requirements of the Contract Documents, and to satisfy applicable Codes. These connections shall not cause torsional stresses in supporting members. 3. If required by the Building Department, the Contractor shall obtain its approval and pay fees incurred thereby before start ofinstallation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MA'I'LRIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Wire rod for grating cross bars: ASTM A 510. E. Plates: ASTM A 283 F. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B G. Uncoated structural steel sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as follows. H. Cold -rolled structural steel sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless otherwise required by design loading. I. Hot -rolled structural steel sheet: ASTM A 570, Grade 30, unless otherwise required by design loading. SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS J. Uncoated steel sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as follows. K. Cold -rolled steel sheet: 1. ASTM A 366. 2. Rolled steel floor plate (Checkered): ASTM A 786, Pattern No. 1, 4 or 5. Use same pattern throughout the Project. L. Hot -rolled steel sheet: ASTM A 569. M. Galvanized steel sheet: 1. Structural quality: ASTM A 446, grade A, G90 designation, unless another grade required for design loading. 2. Commercial quality: ASTM A 526, G 90 coating designation. N. Fasteners: 1. Drilled -in expansion anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII expansion anchors, Type I internally threaded tubular expansion anchors; and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5, by Hilti, Inc., ITW Ramset/Red Head, Star Expansion Co., or The Rawlplug Co., Inc. 2. Shot pins: FS FF-P-395 by Hilti, Inc. or ITW Ramset/RedHead. 0. Concrete inserts: 1. Threaded or wedge type galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron complying with ASTM A 47, or cast steel complying with ASTM A27. 2. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 153. P. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 galvanized to ASTM A 153 for galvanized components. Q. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. R. Ladder rungs: Solid slip -resistant rungs; Slip -Not Round Ladder Rung by WS Molnar Co., Rugged Rungs by Safe -Walk, Inc., or Mebac by IKG Borden. S. Shop and Touch -Up Primer and Paint: 1. Shop primer for ferrous metal: Manufacturer or fabricator standard, fast -curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for compatibility with finish paint SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS systems specified in Section 09 90 00 and complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P645. 2. Galvanizing repair paint: Tneme-Zinc 90-97 by Tnemec Co., Amercoat 68HS by Ameron Protective Coating Division, or MZ-4 by Valspar Corp. 3. Bituminous paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers. 2.2 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: galvanized to ASTM A 153. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.3 MANUFACTURED ITEMS A. This section is not used. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent fmish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniformradius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and fmish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/16 in. maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 in. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 in. SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS D. Maximum Bow: 1/16 in. in 48 in. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 M. in 48 in. 2.6 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding isrequired. D. Prime paint items with two coats. E. Non-structural Items: Galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 123. Provide minimum 2.0 oz./sq. ft. galvanized coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on Drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 in. per story,non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 in. C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 in. PART 4 PAYMENT Metal Fabrication will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 16 00 - FRAMING AND SHEATHING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural roof framing. B. Roof sheathing. C. Preservative treatment of wood. D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Masonry Units. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHA (American Hardboard Association) A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. D. APA (American Plywood Association). E. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. F. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. G. NFPA (National Forest Products Association). H. RIS (Redwood Inspection Service). I. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau). J. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). SECTION 06 16 00- FRAMING AND SHEATHING -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut -sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products conform to specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. In lieu of grade stamping exposed to view lumber and plywood, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Framing lumber: 1. S4S grade -marked Douglas Fir/Larch, of the grades and sizes indicated on the Drawings, manufactured and graded according to WCLIB or WWPA rules. 2. Sizes indicated are nominal. Actual sizes shall conform to PS 20. 3. Lumber up to 2 in. thick shall be seasoned to a moisture content of 19% or less and be stamped "S -Dry." Lumber over 2 in. thick can be shipped unseasoned and stamped "S -Green." 4. For exposed framing lumber provide material complying with the following requirements: SECTION 06 16 00- FRAIVIING AND SHEATHING - 2 a. Definition: Exposed framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other construction and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. b. Grading: Material hand -selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated below that complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading Rule; issue inspection certificate of inspection agency for selected material. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide lumber of same species and grade as indicated for structural framing. B. Grade stamp: 1. Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For lumber which will remain exposed, furnish pieces with grade stamp applied to ends or back of each piece; or omit grade stamp entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 2.02 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Plywood sheathing: APA grade -stamped Douglas fir plywood of the grades indicated on the Drawings and complying with US Product Standard PS -1. Plywood used as a substrate for elastomeric coating must be tongue & grooved. 2.03 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Lumber and plywood in contact with concrete or masonry and at other locations required by Code shall be pressure treated in compliance with AWPA C-2 for lumber, and AWPA C-9 for plywood, using water -borne preservatives (LP -2). B. Kiln -dry to 15% moisture content after treatment. Each piece of wood shall be stamped by the wood preservative applicator to indicate and identify its treatment. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Builder's rough hardware: Verify that fasteners for pressure -treated wood will not corrode due to treatment materials used in the manufacture or present at time of use when in the presence of moisture. Use hot -dip galvanized or stainless steel fasteners where carpentry will remain exposed to the weather. SECTION 06 16 00- FRAMING AND SHEATHING - 3 B. Nails and staples: Size and type complying with Code unless otherwise indicated. Use annular or screw nails for floor sheathing. C. Bolts, washers, lag bolts and wood screws: Galvanized or cadmium -plated steel of standard manufacture. D. Metal framing accessories: 1. Code approved galvanized or cadmium -plated steel joist hangers, framing anchors, fasteners and other such connection devices of standard manufacture and of the types indicated. Use offset and skewed hangers, as required. 2. Nails to be used with framing accessories shall be those furnished by the manufacturer with the framing accessories. 3. Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307, non -headed type. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Place horizontal members, crown side up. D. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices. 3.02 SHEATHING A. Secure roof sheathing with longer edge perpendicular to framing members and with ends staggered and sheet ends over bearing. B. Fully engage tongue and groove edges. SECTION 06 16 00- FRAMING AND SHEATHING - 4 PART 4: PAYMENT Framing and sheathing will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 06 16 00- FRAMING AND SHEATHING - 5 SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overflow scuppers. B. Gravel stops. C. Gutters, conductor heads and downspouts. D. Copings. E. Pitch pans. F. Roof drain lead flashings. G. Flashing collars for roof screen supports. H. Air intake louver. I. Elevator shaft gravity roof vents. J. Prefabricated counterflashing assemblies and curbs. K. Prefabricated sheet metal roof expansion joint covers. L. All other flashings and sheet metal items shown or required to make the building weathertight and not specified in other Sections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS B. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: finish painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture. B. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. C. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM -1 D. ASTM B 32 - Solder Metal. E. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B 370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. G. ASTM B 486 - Paste Solder. H. ASTM D 226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. I. ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. J. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications. K. CDA - Copper Roofing - A Practical Handbook. L. FS O -F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid. M. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. N. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's data: Submit printed specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for installation of prefabricated assemblies. B. Shop drawings: Submit the following. 1. Large scale, dimensioned shop drawings for all sheet metal work showing details of fabrication and installation, methods of joining and fastening, and all other pertinent data. 2. For interface between flashings with different profiles, and conditions difficult to illustrate in 2 -dimension, furnish isometric drawings. 3. Detail interface with adjacent materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 2 A. Reference standard: The applicable provisions of the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) govern the work of this Section, except as noted. B. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years experience. C. Design criteria: 1. Design (within the dimensional limitations indicated), engineer, fabricate and install to meet Code requirements. 2. Obtain the Building Department's approval of the shop drawings and structural calculations before submitting. 1.06 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed [and prefnushed] material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.08 COORDINATION B. Coordinate all work with the other trades. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet steel: Commercial quality carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 526, except A 527 for lock -forming; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 525, G 90; 24 gage minimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet steel: Stainless steel, ASTM A 167, dead soft, fully annealed, AISI No. 2D non -reflective finish, 0.015 in. thick unless noted otherwise. C. Zinc -alloy: ASTM B 69, not less than 95% zinc, 0.6% Copper and 0.14% titanium; standard (soft) temper), cold -rolled, 0.032 in. thick. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 3 D. Copper: ASTM B 370, cold -rolled, 16 oz./sq. ft., CDA 2B finish. E. Aluminum: 1. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B 209. 2. Aluminum extrusions: ASTM B 229. F. Sheet lead for roof drains: 4 lbs./sq. ft., ASTM B 29 desilverized pig lead. G. Nails: 1. For attaching sheet steel to wood: Large flat head "stronghold" type roofing nails with barbed point, formed of hot -dip galvanized steel of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 in. into the wood nailer. 2. For attaching sheet steel to concrete: 1-1/4 in. x 8d hot -dip galvanized hardened steel nails with lead washers. H. Sheet metal fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel rivets, screws and bolts. I. Sheet metal fasteners: Stainless steel rivets, screws and bolts. J. Fasteners for copper: Copper or bronze nails, rivets and bolts. K. Solder and flux: 50-50 lead/tin solder complying with ASTM B 32, used with a non -corrosive flux. L. Solder and flux: Complying with ASTM B 32, as recommended by the stainless steel producer, used with a non -corrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. M. Stainless steel welding rods: Type recommended by the stainless steel producer. N. Insect screens: 14 x 18 mesh, 0.063 in. diameter aluminum wire crimped screen material. 0. Strainer units for conductor heads: Removable bee -hive design fabricated from 0.062 in. diameter galvanized steel wire or wire mesh with openings not more than 1/2 in. P. Sealant and back-up: As specified in Section 07 90 00. Q. Roofing cement: Asphalt base complying with ASTM D 2822, Type I. 2.02 PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLIES SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 4 A. Counterflashing assemblies: Springlok Flashing System by Fry Reglet Corp., or equal by Keystone Flashing Co., or CF Cheney Flashing Co., formed of 24 gage galvanized sheet steel, of the profiles shown on the Drawings, complete with factory -formed internal and external corners, and end closures. B. Gravity roof vents: Extruded and cold -formed aluminum assemblies by Bristol Fiberlite Industries or equal. Provide with insect screen in removable aluminum steel frame. Refer to Drawings for model number. C. Sheet metal curbs: 1. Of the sizes and profiles indicated, by Thybar Corp., Pate Co. or Custom Curb, Inc., with an 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base plate fully welded, factory installed insulation, and continuous wood nailer. 2. Reinforce curb as required to safely support the equipment thereon. D. Extruded aluminum copings: 1. Custom extrusions formed to the profiles and dimensions indicated in the longest possible length. Make curved sections of uniform profile without causing grain separation. 2. Miter and weld corners with adjacent joints a minimum of 2 ft. from the corner. Make all joints with concealed splice plates. 3. Fabricate so that when assembled the fasteners will be concealed from public spaces. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Shop fabricate flashings and sheet metal work to comply with profiles and sizes indicated on the Drawings and standard SMACNA detail plates of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. Form sheet metal on bending brake with straight, sharp edges. Shape, trim, and hand seam sheet metal on bench; keep job site forming to a minimum. 3. Comply with metal producers' recommendations for tinning, soldering, and cleaning flux from metal. 4. Fabricate with joints and corners accurately machined, filed and fitted, and rigidly framed together and connected. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 5 B. Tinning and soldering: 1. Tin edges on both sides of sheet steel to be soldered. 2. Perform soldering slowly, thoroughly heating seams and completely sweating solder through full width of seams. C. Exposed edges: Neatly double back sheet metal 1/2 in. to stiffen edges and to provide a finished appearance. D. Provisions for attachment to structure: Furnish supports, hangers, bracing, anchors and other devices shown, specified or necessary for reinforcement and proper attachment of flashings and sheet metal to building. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify conditions and measurements affecting the work of this Section at site. Make sure that detrimental conditions are corrected before proceeding with installation. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for handling and installing prefabricated sheet metal assemblies. B. Install counterflashing assemblies at a constant height above the roof. C. Make sure that counterflashing is securely anchored into reglet by friction, or provide lead wedges spaced 2 ft. o.c. maximum. D. Use manufacturer's standard splice plates and preformed corners for a weathertight assembly. E. Install curbs and gravity roof vents level and square with tight, waterproof joints; attach securely to deck. F. Coordinate this work with other trades whose work penetrates, intersects and adjoins flashings and sheet metal work, to permit the correct sequencing and the watertightness of the assemblies. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 6 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with the approved shop drawings and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations for installation. 2. Attach this work securely to supporting construction, plumb, level, with tight, flush joints. 3. Install with lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. 4. Fold exposed edges neatly to form a 1/2 in. hem on the concealed side; hem all exposed edges, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Assemble work so that face of metal in contact have hairline joints, except where required for expansion or fitting. 6. Conceal fastenings and reinforcement where they would be visible by the public and the building occupants. B. Soldering: Clean material and tin prior to soldering. Solder with heavy coppers properly tinned before use. 1. Solder slowly. Heat the seams thoroughly, and completely fill with solder. 2. Make exposed soldering on finish surfaces neatly, full flowing and smooth. 3. Wash acid flux with a soda solution after soldering and remove soldering flux on exposed surfaces. C. Nailing: 1. Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum width of 18 in. Nailing of flashings shall be confined to one edge only. 2. Space nails evenly not over 12 in. o.c., and approximately 1/2 in. from edge. 3. Face nailing is not permitted. 4. Where sheet metal is applied to surfaces other than wood, furnish detailed shop drawings showing locations of required sleepers and nailing strips. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 7 D. Cleats: 1. Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 in. and over in width. Space cleats evenly not over 12 in. o.c. 2. Make cleats not less than 2 in. wide x 3 in. long, and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being installed. 3. Secure one end of the cleat with 2 nails and the cleat folded back over the nail heads. Lock the other end into the seam. Pre -tin cleats for soldered seams. E. Bolts, rivets, and screws: 1. Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. 2. Provide compatible washers to protect surface of sheet metal and to provide a watertight connection. F. Dissimilar material protection: 1. Protect sheet metal in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, masonry and plaster with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, approved separation tape, or building felt or paper. 2. Set copings and other sheet metal assemblies supported by pressure -treated wood on building paper or felt attached to the wood nailer. G. Seams: 1. General: Make seams straight, and uniform in width and height with no solder showing on the face. 2. Flat -lock seams: Finish not less than 3/4 in. wide made in the direction of water flow. 3. Lap seams: Finish soldered seams not less than 1 in. wide. Overlap seams not soldered not less than 3 in. 4. Loose -lock expansion seams: No less than 3 in. wide, designed to provide minimum 1 in. movement within the joint. Fill joint completely with sealant applied at not less than 1/8 in. thick bed. 5. Standing seams: Not less than 1 in. high, double locked without solder. SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 8 H. Expansion and contraction: 1. Provide for thermal and building movement without overstressing the material, breaking connections or producing wrinkles and distortion in finished surfaces. Make sheet metal installations weathertight at all locations. 2. Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 40 ft. intervals, except that where the distance between the last expansion joint and the end of the continuous run is more than half the required interval spacing, provide an additional joint. Where expansion and contraction joints are exposed to view. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be free from visible wave, warp, and buckle. 4. Vulcanize joints of the roof expansion joint covers and lap the sheet metal portion, after sealing for watertightness. I. Completed work: Completed flashings and sheet metal work shall be watertight, free of tool marks, dents, scratches and other damages, with joints and corners accurately machined, filed and fitted, and rigidly framed together and connected. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM - 9 SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non -traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Joints between architectural precast concrete units. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints of stonework, except those set with mortar. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and glazed assemblies. f. Other joints as indicated and required to make the building weathertight. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non -traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Joints between tops of non -load -bearing unit masonry walls and underside of cast -in -place concrete slabs and beams. d. Tile control and expansion joints. e. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. g. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. h. Other joints as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 20 00: Sealants required in conjunction with Concrete masonry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 1 B. ASTM C 804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. C. ASTM C 834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM C 919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. E. ASTM C 920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. G. ASTM D 1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open -Cell Foam). H. SWRI (Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's data sheets and published instructions for each type of sealant, backing, bond breaker, and other accessory materials, together with statement that the proposed materials comply with these Specifications. B. Sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, backing rods, and other materials proposed for use in the application of sealants, are chemically compatible with the materials which will come in contact with the sealants and will not cause deterioration, premature aging and staining of adjacent materials, or the sealants. C. Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut -sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. D. Cured samples of the various types and colors of materials proposed for use, approximately 12 in. long, mounted on hardboard backing. Note that final color selection of sealants for exterior locations will be made at the job site as specified below. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: All sealants used in or on the exterior walls of the building shall be made by the same manufacturer. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 2 B. Installer's qualifications: Firm with a minimum 5 years of experience with joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Color selection: 1. Final color selection of sealants to be used for exterior locations will be made by the Engineer from job -applied samples on in -place materials. 2. Locations and extent of these samples will be selected by the Engineer, but length of sealant joints will not exceed 20 ft. for vertical surfaces and 10 ft. for horizontal surfaces. 1.06 HANDLING A. Store sealant containers in a protected location in compliance with their manufacturer's printed instructions until their use. Do not store at temperature higher than 80 deg. F. B. Do not use sealants whose shelf life has expired. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are beyond manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Proceed with the installation only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper sealant cure and development of early bond strength. C. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range, so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress at low temperatures. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warrant sealants against defective materials and work- manship for 5 years after Substantial completion. B. Warranty shall further state that installed sealants are warranted against the following: 1. Water leakage through sealed joints. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 3 2. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant. 3. Staining of adjacent surfaces caused by migration of sealants or primer. 4. Chalking or visible color change of the cured sealants. C. Make repairs during the warranty period at no cost to the Agency. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Colors: Match sealant color to color of adjacent materials as closely as possible using colors selected from the manufacturer's standard palette, as approved by the Engineer. B. Compatibility: Verify that selected sealants will not cause staining, degradation and premature aging of the adjacent surfaces and the sealant itself when in contact with these surfaces. C. Bulk sealants: 1. For interior and exterior horizontal application subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic: One of the following with a cured Shore A hardness of 35 minimum. a. Mameco International, Inc.: Vulkem 227. b. Pecora Corp.: Dynatred. c. Tremco Mfg. Co.: THC-900/901. d. Sika Corp.: Sikaflex-2c SL. e. Bostick Construction Products Div.: Chem -Calk 550 or 950. 2. For all other exterior applications: a. General Electric Corp.: Silpruf b. Dow Corning Corp.: 790 or 795. c. Pecora Corp.: 890 or 895. d. Tremco Corp.: Spectrem I or Spectrem II. 3. For interior damp, wet and semi -wet locations, other than floors, such as toilet rooms where a mildew -resistant sealant is required: Provide white sealant, unless otherwise noted. a. General Electric Corp.: 1700. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 4 b. Dow Corning Corp.: 786. c. Sonneborn Building Products: Sonolastic OmniPlus. d. Pecora Corp.: 898. e. Tremco: Proglaze. 4. Acoustical sealant: a. Pecora Corp.: BA -98. b. US Gypsum Co.: Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant. c. Tremco, Inc.: Acoustical Sealant. d. WW Henry Co.: Henry 313. 5. For interior stone veneer: Same as specified for exterior vertical surfaces. 6. For all other interior vertical applications: a. Tremco: Acrylic Latex 384. b. Pecora Corp.: AC -20. c. Sonneborn Building Products: Sonolac. D. Tape sealants: 1. Norton Specialties Plastics Div.: Norsea1730 or 770. 2. Protective Treatments Inc.: PTI 606. 3. Or equal. E. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Joint cleaner, primer and sealer: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for the surfaces to be cleaned, primed or sealed. 2. Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene or other plastic tape recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent 3 -sided adhesion where backer rod cannot be used. Use self -adhering tape wherever possible. F. Sealant backer rod: 1. Compressible rod stock formed of closed -cell polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non -absorptive material recommended by the sealant manufacturer. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 5 2. Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify conditions and measurements affecting the work of this Section at site. Make sure that detrimental conditions are corrected before proceeding with installation. 3.02 JOINT PREPARATION A. Surface cleaning of joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following. B. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. C. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. D. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. E. Clean metal, glass, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other non -porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. F. Do not proceed with sealant installation over surfaces that have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water-repellent or other coating unless specifically approved in writing by the sealant manufacturer. G. Use masking tape or other protection to limit coverage of sealant to joints to be sealed. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 6 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C 1193, except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. At the Engineer's option, ASTM C 1193 may also be used for rejection of unacceptable installations. B. Prime or seal surfaces when recommended by the sealant manufacturer; when the manufacturer's instructions on priming are optional, prime the surface. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjacent surfaces. C. Install backer rod for all sealants, except (a) for exterior sealants subject to traffic (verify that joint filler in paving is installed at the proper depth), (b) where the size of joint prevents the insertion of a backer rod, and (c) where recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer. D. Install backer rods with blunt or rounded tools to avoid puncturing the material. E. Do not twist, stretch or braid the backer rod. F. Install bond breaker tape where space limitation does not permit use of a backer rod. G. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that sealants are installed in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets and with complete "wetting" of the rabbet surfaces equally on opposite sides. H. Fill rabbets to a slightly concave surface just below adjacent surfaces. I. Where horizontal joints occur between horizontal and vertical surfaces, fill joints to form a slight cove to prevent trapping moisture and dirt. J. Immediately after sealant application and prior to beginning of skinning or curing, tool all sealants using tooling agents that will not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces and are approved by sealant manufacturer. K. Install sealants as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead. L. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasions and indentation exposures: Fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but not less than 3/8 in. deep or more than 5/8 in. deep. M. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic: Fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not less than 1/4 in. deep or more than 1/2 in. deep. SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 7 N. Size sealant tape to be at least twice the size of the joint to be sealed, unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. O. Do not allow sealants or other compounds to overflow, spill or migrate into voids of adjacent construction. P. Remove excess sealant spillage promptly as this work progresses. Clean adjacent surfaces by recommended means to remove sealant, but not damage the surfaces. 3.04 CURING/PROTECTING A. Cure sealants in compliance with their manufacturer's printed instructions to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and durability. B. Protect sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. C. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut-out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. PART 4: PAYMENT Joint sealers will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 90 00 - JOINT SEALERS - 8 SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor surfaces. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint assembly frames in formwork. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Expansion and contraction joints in exterior concrete joints and junction of concrete slab -on -grade and perimeter walls. B. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: Expansion and control joint finishing utilizing a sealant and bond breaker. 1.04 REFERENCES A. No references this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work, affected adjacent construction, anchorage locations. B. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices available colors and finish. C. Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut -sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. PART 2: PRODUCTS SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES -1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. BoMetals, Inc. or equivalent 2.02 MATERIALS A. Resilient Filler: Extruded vinyl. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Joint Covers: resilient vinyl filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus 50 percent joint movement with full recovery, flush mounted. B. Provide joint components in single length wherever practical. Minimize site splicing. 2.04 FINISHES A. Floors: Mill finish. C. Resilient Filler Exposed to View: Gray. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES - 2 A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces until materials have completely cured, General Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a continuous protective surface. B. Provide removable surface protection to protect fmish surface at all times until new surfaces have completely cured and are ready to except traffic. PART 4: PAYMENT Expansion Joints will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES - 3 SECTION 08 11 00 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 12 00 - Standard Steel Frames. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Field painting of doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A 525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process [Metric]. D. ASTM C 236 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot -Box. E. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. G. DM (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. H. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. I. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. J. SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. K. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. SECTION 0811 00 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS- 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and finishes. C. Samples: Submit two samples of door face metal, 6"x 6" inches in size illustrating pre -finished door colors and surface texture. Note: Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut - sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Product meets or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Packing: Deliver doors cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors. B. Delivery: 1. Inspect doors, and accessories delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store, as specified, with a minimum of handling. 2. Replace doors damaged before installation. Do not install damaged doors. C. Storage: 1. Store doors carefully under cover. Provide a minimum of 1/2 in. space between doors. Do not stack doors. 2. The storage spaces shall be dry and accessible, adequately ventilated and free from dust or water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. 3. Do not use non -vented plastic or canvas shelters that create a humidity chamber. 4. If doors are shipped with fiberboard wrapper and it becomes wet, remove it immediately. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS SECTION 0811 00 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS- 2 A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE AND MANUFACTURE A. Types: The following complying with SDI 100, Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames, except as noted. B. Hollow metal doors: 1. Refer to architectural drawings for gage and type and model of doors. 2. Provide exterior doors with a U factor of 0.24 BTU/hr. x sq. ft. x deg. F when tested in compliance with ASTM C 236. C. Manufacturer: 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot -rolled steel sheets and strips: Commercial quality, Class 1 carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 366, A 568 and ASTM A 620. B. Cold -rolled steel sheets: Commercial quality, Class 1 carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized steel sheets: Commercial quality, Class 1, zinc -coated carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, A 60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize all items in exterior walls. E. Paints: 1. Shop primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames", and compatible with finish paint system specified in Section 09900. 2. For touch-up of damaged galvanized surfaces: SSPC Paint No. 20, Type 11 (Organic), by Tnemec, Porter International, Valspar Corp., Ameron Protective Coatings, or DuPont Co. F. Door filler: In compliance with SDI 100, except use UL listed materials in fire -rated doors. SECTION 0811 00 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS- 3 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Do not begin fabrication until the hardware schedule approved by the Engineer and submitted by the hardware supplier has been received by the fabricator. 2. Fabricate work of this Section to required profiles by rollforming, brake -forming and welding to produce hollow metal work with straight and square edges, with surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, oil -canning and other defects. 3. Comply with SDI 100 and SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. Conform to AWS standards for welding. 5. Fabricate doors at the following locations from galvanized steel; exterior walls, toilet rooms and shower rooms. Fabricate hollow metal doors at other locations from non -galvanized steel. 6. Locate hardware as recommended in Table V of SDI 100, except where ADA regulations are in conflict, in which case comply with ADA regulations. 7. Provide 16 gage reinforcement for pull plates and bars; through bolts are not permitted. 8. Provide minimum 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 9. Close the top and bottom of outswinging exterior doors with an inverted flush channel to provide weather closure. B. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware as specified in SDI 100. C. Shop priming: After assembly, clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before painting. Grind welds and fabrication marks flush and smooth with parent metal. Fill depressions with metal filler before applying the shop primer. D. Acid -etch galvanized surfaces before pre -treating. E. Apply shop primer, within time limits recommended by pretreatment manufacturer, to provide a smooth coat of even consistency and to produce a dry film thickness of not less than 1-1/2 mils. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION SECTION 0811 00 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS- 4 A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in compliance with its manufacturer's templates and printed instructions. B. Hang doors in compliance with their manufacturer's instructions, and adjust to the clearances specified in SDI publication 100, paragraph 2.2.1, except where more stringent clearances are indicated on the Drawings or required by UL listing for fire -rated doors. C. Do not install doors warped, bowed, dented or otherwise damaged. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 11 20 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. E. Adjust hardware so that doors operate freely for their entire travel, but not loosely, without sticking or hinge binding, with all hardware adjusted and functioning properly. 3.03 TOUCH-UP A. Clean damaged primer, sand smooth, reclean and spot -prime with a paint compatible with the primer and the scheduled finish coats. B. Before application of primer, touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc -rich coating where zinc coating has been removed or damaged. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 0811 00 -STANDARD STEEL DOORS- 5 SECTION 0812 00 - STANDARD STEEL FRAMES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel frames. B. Exterior frames. C. Supplementary parts and components, such as inserts, clips, fasteners, anchors, and other miscellaneous supports and accessories required for a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 00 - Standard Steel Doors. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ASTM A 525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM A 525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process [Metric]. D. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. I. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration and finishes. SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 1 B. Shop drawings: Show the following. C. Door frame schedule indicating opening identification symbol, frame types, sizes, thickness, swing, and label requirements. E. Frame elevations, materials, construction, finish, anchoring for each wall condition, conditions of openings. D. Location and size of reinforcement for finish hardware. E. Locations of field splice joints, including associated details to assure proper assembly at Project site. F. Identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. G. Use same reference numbers for openings and details as Contract Drawings. H. Samples: Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut -sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. I. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. J. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Packing: Deliver frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-fuushed frames. B. Delivery: 1. Inspect frames, and accessories delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store, as specified, with a minimum of handling. 2. During delivery, provide temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each frame. C. Replace frames damaged before installation. Do not install damaged frames. D. Storage: 1. Store frames carefully under cover. Do not stack frames. SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 2 2. The storage spaces shall be dry and accessible, adequately ventilated and free from dust or water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. 3. Do not use non -vented plastic or canvas shelters that create a humidity chamber. 4. If frames are shipped with fiberboard wrapper and it becomes wet, remove it immediately. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE AND MANUFACTURE A. Types: The following complying with SDI 100, Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames, except as noted. B. Hollow metal door frames, and fixed interior window frames: Fabricate of steel 2 gages heavier than door face in same opening, minimum with corners reinforced, mitered, interlocked and/or welded, and faces continuously welded and ground smooth. C. Manufacturer 1. Refer to Architectural drawings and associated schedules 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot -rolled steel sheets and strips: Commercial quality, Class 1 carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 366, A 568 and ASTM A 620. B. Cold -rolled steel sheets: Commercial quality, Class 1 carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized steel sheets: Commercial quality, Class 1, zinc -coated carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, A 60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Inserts, bolts and fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize all items in exterior walls. E. Paints: 1. Shop primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A 224.1, "Test Procedure and SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 3 Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames," and compatible with fmish paint system specified in Section 09 90 00. 2. For touch-up of damaged galvanized surfaces: SSPC Paint No. 20, Type II (Organic), by Tnemec, Porter International, Valspar Corp., Ameron Protective Coatings, or DuPont Co. Contractor to supply City with touch-up paint at turnover. See paint specs "Extra Material". 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Do not begin fabrication until the hardware schedule approved by the Engineer and submitted by the hardware supplier has been received by the fabricator. 2. Fabricate work of this Section to required profiles by rollforming, brake -forming and welding to produce hollow metal work with straight and square edges, with surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, oil -canning and other defects. 3. Comply with SDI 100 and SDI 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. Conform to AWS standards for welding. Frames shall be face welded with exposed welds ground flush and smooth with parent metal. 6. Fabricate frames at the following locations from galvanized steel; exterior walls, toilet rooms and shower rooms. Fabricate hollow metal frames at other locations from non -galvanized steel. 7. Locate hardware as recommended in Table V of SDI 100, except where ADA regulations are in conflict, in which case comply with ADA regulations. 8. Provide 16 gage reinforcement for pull plates and bars; through bolts are not permitted. Provide reinforcement for closers on all door frames. 9. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames. 10. Provide minimum 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 4 B. Shop priming: After assembly, clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before painting. Grind welds and fabrication marks flush and smooth with parent metal. Fill depressions with metal filler before applying the shop primer. C. Acid -etch galvanized surfaces before pre -treating. D. Apply shop primer, within time limits recommended by pretreatment manufacturer, to provide a smooth coat of even consistency and to produce a dry film thickness of not less than 1-1/2 mils. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLING FRAMES A. Set frames accurately in their scheduled locations, plumb, straight, square and rigid. B. Comply with the Drawings and SDI 105, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, these Specifications, the approved shop drawings and UL tested procedures for fire -rated openings; when in conflict, the most restrictive provision applies. Brace frames to prevent their displacement during erection of adjacent walls. C. Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction with related trades. Refer to Section 04 20 00 for frames in CMU walls. D. Provide a minimum of 2 anchors for head of double door frames. E. Provide a minimum of 3 anchors per jamb for frame with doors under 81 in. high; provide one additional anchor for doors in frame over 81 in. F. Attach jamb anchors to studs with a minimum of four 3/8 in. diameter self -tapping screws of bolts (2 per side). G. Provide UL tested adjustable floor clips for all frames. Anchor clips to floor with powder -driven pins or bolts in expansion shields. H. In -place concrete or masonry: 1. Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8 in. concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts at 6 in. from top and bottom and 26 in. o.c., unless otherwise shown. Space anchors symmetrically and equally along jambs. 2. Reinforce frames at anchor locations. SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 5 I. Leave frame spreader bars intact, wherever possible, until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and all anchors are securely attached and grouted where required. 3.03 TOUCH-UP A. Clean damaged primer, sand smooth, reclean and spot -prime with a paint compatible with the primer and the scheduled finish coats. B. Before application of primer, touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc -rich coating where zinc coating has been removed or damaged. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 12 00 -STANDARD STEEL FRAMES- 6 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel doors. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 10 — Standard Steel Doors 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. C. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. B. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. C. Samples: Product samples need not be submitted to the Engineer if the item to be used is listed in the specifications, however, the supplier or manufacture cut -sheets for all specified items is required for submittal. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE -1 A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years documented experience. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a qualified person to assist in the work of this section. 1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. B. Deliver keys to the agency by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers. 1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE - 2 1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 2 extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISHES A. Finishes: Per Architectural drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE - 3 SECTION 09 67 00 - EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.02 DESCRIPTION/SUMMARY A. Work Included The work includes, but is not limited to, providing all materials, labor, equipment and transportation to provide an epoxy resinous flooring system complete as indicated and as specified herein. Surface preparation Primer, base coat and cove base B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Note: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections to properly execute the work and maintain satisfactory progress of work of other sections including: Section: 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete Section: 07 90 00 Joint Sealers Section: 15 40 00 Plumbing 1.3 REFERENCES References made herein to published specifications; standards, methods of testing and recommended methods of trade, industry and governmental organizations shall apply to the year of original adoption or the year of the latest revision or approvals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit samples, manufacturers literature and installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator shall have minimum of five years experience in application of the specified type of flooring. SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING -1 B. Provide certification from the manufacturer that the applicator is approved for installation of the flooring. 1.05 WARRANTY Provide one (1) year guarantee for material and installation. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND DELIVERY Deliver all material in manufacturers sealed containers and store under cover in a well -ventilated area. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Sunbelt Flooring, Inc., 3340 Riverside Drive, Suite A, Chino, Ca. 91710, (909) 628-1090 (909) 628-1280 Fax. B. System: The Sunbelt Flooring System as installed by Sunbelt Flooring, Inc., including: Preparation and installation on the "Heavy -Duty Sunbelt Flooring No. 1100 Chemical Resistant Industrial Floor" The General Contractor shall coordinate scheduling with adequate advance notice prior to floor installation as agreed upon with Sunbelt Flooring, Inc. C. Products: Primer as recommended for conditions. Chemical Resistant Industrial Flooring No. 1100 (Color to be selected by Architect from the Sunbelt Flooring, Inc., sample boards as submitted) and installed only by Sunbelt Flooring, Inc. System shall be solids, an angular translucent quartz grains, coated, pigmented, inorganic ceramic film. D. Sunbelt 1100 Flooring System Physical Properties Test Physical Properties Compressive Strength (Kpsi) 18.5 ASTM C579 Tensile Strength (psi) 2000 ASTM C-307 Flexural Strength (Kpsi) 6.15 ASTM C-580 SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING - 2 Flexural Modulus of Elasticity (psi) 2.2x105 ASTM D790 Hardness (Shore D) 86 ASTM D-2240 Bond Strength (psi) 600 ASTM D-454 Indentation (mil/Kpsi) 11 ASTM Mil D -3124F Abrasion Resistance (mg/Kcyc) 597.4 ASTM C-501 Coefficient of Friction >0.9 ASTM D-2047 (No visible indentation) Flammability Burning time (sec) 104 (Self extinguishing) Extent of burning (mm) 6.5 ASTM D-635 Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion (in/in °C) 25° to 65°C 65°C to 135°C 135°C to 220°C ASTM E-831 Water Absorption (%) ASTM C-413 Heat Resistance limit (°C) ASTM N/A Impact Resistance Mil D-3134 Indention Weather Resistance Mil D-3134 200 Hr Exposure Resistance to Elevated Temperatures 2.6x10-5 5.7x10-5 2.3x10-5 .1% 300° 5x10-4 in. No visible cracking or deterioration SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING - 3 A sample of the flooring was warmed to 158 degrees. There was no discernable softening. After cooling sample showed no measurable slip or flow. Toxicity U.S.D.A Approved Fungus/Bacteria Resistance Will not support growth of fungus or bacterial when subject to mildew and bacteria test specified in Tt-P-34 Electrical Conductivity Electrically non-conductive ***All tests have been conducted and recorded by an independent testing laboratory. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSPECTION A. Insure structural substrate to receive flooring is designed to prevent random cracking and/or deflection. Provide adequate control and expansion joints. Finish shall be "light steel trowel finish." B. Concrete to receive flooring shall be wet cured for a minimum of 28 days. Do not permit use of chemical surface curing agents that may interfere with adhesion. C. Ensure substrate is sound, dry, and free of dust, dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreign substances. D. Substrates in contact with ground must have an effective vapor barrier to prevent potential problems resulting from hydrostatic or capillary moisture pressure. E. Variations in substrate level should not exceed 1/8" in ten feet. Ensure deviations or deteriorated concrete is corrected prior to start of this work. F. Advise other trades of finished, fixtures and fittings not to be installed until decking is cured, such as: Painting, floor supported equipment, caulking, plumbing fixtures, etc. G. Dirt, dust, plaster, oil, grease, tar, paint or any substrate that might impair adhesion must be thoroughly removed with suitable cleaners. SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING - 4 H. All cracks, holes broken and crumbling areas must first be cut out, cleaned and repaired with sand filled Sunbelt 1100. I. Moving of settling cracks shall be cut or routed out and filled with fiexi- caulk or resilient caulk and reinforced with 20 by 20 fiberglass tape. J. Building shall be encased with roof, walls, windows and doors prior to floor installation. Exceptions shall be agreed upon, in writing, by flooring installer and architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Mix Sunbelt Flooring No. 1100 industrial flooring liquids with manufacturers approved equipment. B. Troweled apply Sunbelt 1100 self -priming epoxy for the first build coat. C. Add clean, dry aggregates as recommended by manufacturer. Allow to dry. D. Sand to remove all laitance and vacuum clean. E. Apply finish coat with trowels to a tight flat surface. F. If a skid resistant surface is required by Architect or indicated on drawings, non-skid aggregates shall be broadcast onto surface of second coat finish back rolled for sealing. G. Allow to cure thoroughly before opening floor to normal use. Use of heating equipment or infrared lamps is suggested if the seal coat cannot be given more than twelve hours of curing time before normal use. H. Protection: Supply barricades and precautions to allow traffic after and during start of installation, and for the cure period of the final coat. Sunbelt Flooring 1100 Chemical Resistance Table ASTM D —1308-57 Test involved completely submerged a cured disk of Sunbelt 1100 in each of the following solutions. Maximum submersion time was 30 days. Most actual commercial SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING - 5 applications are far less demanding, particularly where solvents and other evaporating materials are concerned. Chemical Acetic Acid 5% Acetic Acid 10% Deterioration Acetone Ammonium Hydroxide 10% Blood Boric Acid Brake Fluid Calcium Chloride Carbolic Acid Acid 5% Detergent Solution Gasoline Hydrochloric Acid 10% Jet Fuel Lactic Acid 5% Methanol Mineral Spirits Nitric Acid 5% Phenol Seawater Skydrol Sodium Hydroxide 50% Sodium Hypo chlorite Sugar Solution Sulfuric Acid 25% Toluene Vegetable Oil Urine Vinegar Xylene PART 4: PAYMENT Results No Effect Ok 3 days then very slow Ok 3 days then slight deterioration No Effect No Effect No Effect Very minor swelling over 30 days No Effect Ok 2 days then slow dissolve No Effect No Effect No Effect No Effect No Effect No Effect Ok 3 days then Minor surface attack No Effect No Effect Ok 2 days then slow dissolve No Effect Very minor swelling over 30 days No Effect No Effect No Effect No Effect Ok 3 days then very minor effect No Effect No Effect No Effect Ok 3 days then very minor effect Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 67 00 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING - 6 SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C204 - Chlorinated Rubber -Alkyd Paint Systems for the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Piping. D. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - D 102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks. E. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting. F. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. G. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual. H. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Materials: 1. Submit copies of a complete materials list, identified by manufacturer's name and product label or stock number. SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 1 2. Prepare list in the form of a repetition of the specified paint finishes, with the addition of the specific product intended for each coat. B. Color samples: 1. Submit 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. samples of each color for painted finishes. 2. For transparent finishes, submit the samples on wood specie which will be used for the Project; 12 in. for lumber and 12 in. square for veneered panels. D. Certification: Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's affidavit with each shipment of materials delivered to the job site certifying that each material furnished complies with specified requirements. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UBC for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Compliance with air quality regulations: VOC of coatings used for this work shall not exceed limits prescribed by law. 1.07 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample of each type and color of paint. B. Apply sample paint finishes approximately 10 ft. square of each color scheme to wall areas, as directed by the Engineer. C. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample panels before proceeding further. Approved sample panels will be used as a standard for the Project, and if properly identified may remain a part of the Work. D. Final acceptance of colors will be from job -applied samples. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 2 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45°F and a maximum of 90°F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. D. Take all necessary precautions to prevent fire. Remove soiled rags and other waste items from premises at end of each day's work. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with paint manufacturer's recommendations for environmental conditions regarding paint application. Provide adequate heating and ventilating to maintain environmental conditions recommended by paint manufacturer. B. Do not apply fmish in areas where dust is being generated. C. Provide drop cloths, shields, barricades and other protection necessary to safeguard adjacent surfaces not to be painted. D. Post signs immediately after painting. E. Provide and maintain protection as required to protect finished work from damage until its acceptance. F. Illuminate work area during installation to provide the same or greater level of illumination, as required to properly perform the work, as will occur in the room or space after the building is in operation. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. With close-out submittals deliver one identified unopened gallon of each type and color of paint material used on the Project to the Engineer for future paint touch-up. B. Identify with items to be painted, type of paint, color and sheen, as applicable, for future identification. 1.11 WARRANTY SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 3 A. Color of exterior surfaces painted as part of the Work of this Section shall, at the end of one year, have remained free from serious fading when compared to a control sample of the original paint. B. Paint shall have its original adherence at the end of one year and there shall be no evidence of blisters, running, peeling, scaling, chalking, streaks, or stains at the end of this period. C. Washing painted surfaces with alkali -free soap and water shall remove surface dirt from painted surfaces without producing deteriorating effects. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT A. Definition: The term "paint" as used in this Section means all coating system components, including primers, emulsions, enamels, varnishes, stains, lacquers, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coat. B. Quality and manufacture: Insofar as practicable each paint shall be factory -mixed to match approved samples and colors, and be of a consistency permitting immediate application. Use best quality grade regularly manufactured by one of the following: 1. Ameritone Paint Corp. 2. Dunn -Edwards Corp. 3. Frazee Paint Co. 4. Sherwin Williams Co. 5. Sinclair Paint Co. 6. Vista Paint Co. C. Paint uniformity and compatibility: 1. Provide fmish coats compatible with the prime coats used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications, in which prime coats are specified, and manufacturer's data for shop -primed surfaces to be painted. SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 4 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the compatibility of the total coating system. 4. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primer or remove and reprime. 5. Products of more than one approved manufacturer may be used, except that all products applied on a surface shall be by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 2.03 FINISHES A. Refer to paint specifications and fmishes in Architectural drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply fmishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 5 1. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12%. 2. Interior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016. 3. Exterior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer. G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. H. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. I. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. J. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry. K. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 6 L. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. M. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. N. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 0. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. P. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Q. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. R. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. S. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. T. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. U. Glue -Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt. V. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 7 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply fmishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required fuush. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear fmishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. C. Contractor to provide owner with 10 gallons of graffiti removal solvent upon completion of work. 3.06 PAINT FINISH SCHEDULE A. Refer to architectural drawings for paint manufacturer and finish information. An equal process is acceptable using other manufacturers listed in this section. SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 8 PART 4: PAYMENT Painting will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING - 9 SECTION 10 80 00 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and washroom accessories. B. Grab bars. C. Attachment hardware. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. No related sections 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. B. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. D. ASTM A 269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. E. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM B 456 - Electro-deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. G. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts and data sheets, complete parts list, and installation requirements for each accessory specified. B. Furnish the Agency operating instructions and keys for equipment and locks, with closeout submittals. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 10 80 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES - 1 A. Conform to governing Codes and Title 24 code for access for the handicapped. B. Compliance with ADA requirements for accessories and their attachments is the Contractor's responsibility. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2..01 MANUFACTURERS A. These Specifications are based on accessories made by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. and Acorn Engineering, Inc. or approved equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless steel: AISI Type 302/304 complying with ASTM A 167. B. Sheet steel: Cold -rolled commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 336, 20 gage minimum. C. Galvanized steel: ASTM A 527, G 60 zinc coating, 20 gage minimum. D. Mounting devices: Galvanized steel. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel where exposed; may be galvanized steel where concealed. Provide spanner head design where exposed. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units with seamless one piece flanges on exposed faces. B. Miter corners, weld and grind smooth and flush with parent metal so that welds are invisible on exposed surfaces. C. Open joints (not fully welded) on exposed surfaces are not acceptable. D. Conceal anchoring devices. E. Hang doors or panels on continuous stainless steel piano hinges. F. Master -key locked dispensing units. Key coin boxes of coin -operated dispensing units separately from the lock on the unit. G. Grind smooth all edges, both inside and out. H. Finish exposed surfaces with an AISI No. 4 finish running in the same direction (horizontal or vertical) for all accessories, except where a knurled surface is specified for grab bars. SECTION 10 80 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES - 2 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect adjacent construction and supports. B. Make sure that openings are within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, clean, will provide a solid anchoring surface, and that other conditions detrimental to the proper or timely completion of this work are corrected before proceeding with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Drill holes to correct size and location. Install accessories plumb, level and equally spaced (when applicable). B. Attach accessories securely with screws or bolts to steel studs or backing plates. Do not use molly or toggle bolts in gypsum board. C. Adjust accessories for proper operation. After completion of installation, clean and polish exposed surfaces after removal of protective coverings. 3.03 KEYING A. Supply keys for each accessory to Engineer. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 10 80 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES - 3 SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, testing, transportation and equipment necessary for and reasonably incidental to the completion of all plumbing and fire protection piping as indicated on drawings and specified herein. Work materials and equipment not indicated or specified which is necessary for the complete and proper operation of the work of this Section in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the contract documents shall be provided and incorporated at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Requirements: All work covered by this Section shall conform to the latest requirements of the State Division of Industrial Safety, Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC), National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 13, UBC 38-1 and the requirements of any other legally constituted body having jurisdiction thereof. B. Nothing in the Specifications or drawings shall be construed to permit deviation from the requirements of governing codes unless approval for said deviation has been obtained from the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction and from the Owner's representative. 1.03 DRAWINGS A. Because of the small scale drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the conditions surrounding installation of his work, furnishing the necessary piping fittings, valves, traps, and other devices which may be required to complete the installation. B. The general arrangement indicated on the drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate with the Architectural, Structural, Fire Protection, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings prior to installation of piping fixtures and equipment to verify adequate space is available for installation of the work shown. In the event a field condition arises which makes it impossible or impractical to install the work as indicated, submit, in writing, the proposed departures to the Architect for his approval. Only when Architect's approval is given, in writing, shall Contractor proceed with installation of the work. C. In case of a difference in the specifications or between the specifications and the drawings, the Contractor shall figure the most expensive alternative and, after award of contract, shall secure directions form the Architect. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 1 1.04 PERMITS, LICENSES AND INSPECTIONS A. All permits, licenses and inspections required by the legally constituted authorities for installation of the work according to the plans and specifications shall be obtained and paid as a part of the work of this section. 1.05 UTILITIES A. See Drawings for Points of Connection. B. Certain site utilities are to be connected to and extended. Before laying of any pipe or digging of any trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and measurement exact location and depth of lines to which he is to connect. In event depth of lines is not sufficient to permit connection in manner indicted, Contractor shall obtain direction from the Owner's representative before proceeding with this work. C. Verify that utility companies size their services and meters to suit ultimate demand indicated on the drawings. D. Gas Service and Meter Assembly: The Contractor shall arrange with the serving utility company for the installation of new gas service with complete meter assembly of the capacity indicated and in the location as shown on the drawings. All items serviced with gas shall be operated at full fire and adjusted by the Contractor. In cooperation with gas company, make all required adjustments to main gas pressure regulator. The Contractor shall pay for all required fees. E. Sanitary Sewer: The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in connecting into the sanitary sewer street main or lateral to property as indicated on the drawings, with the exception that all required frontage fees, and capacity fees shall be paid for by the Owner. The installation shall be in accordance with the serving utility company's standards. F. Water Service (Fire and/or Domestic): The Contractor shall arrange with the serving utility company for the installation of a water meter assembly and detector check assembly, including the service main and vaults with all required appurtenances all as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with serving utility standards and frontage fees shall be paid for by the Owner. Contractor shall provide necessary tap -in connections in water main for sterilizing of domestic water system. Contractor shall connect into the main water service line as indicated on the drawings. The installation shall be in accordance with the serving utility company's standards. 1.06 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A. Before bidding on this work, Contractors shall make a careful examination of the premises and shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract. By the act of submitting a proposal for the work included in this SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 2 contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have made such study and examination, and that he is familiar with and accepts all conditions of the site. 1.07 PROTECTION A. All work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times. Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his own workmen. Contractor shall also protect his own work from damage. He shall close all pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. He shall protect all his equipment and materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. Upon completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a new condition. B. Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to equipment and materials until he has received written notice from the Architect or Engineer that his work has been accepted. 1.08 LOCATIONS A. The locations of apparatus, piping and equipment indicated on the drawings are approximate. Piping and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstruction, preserve headroom, and keep openings and passages clear. The locations of and mounting heights of all fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural plans and room elevations. B. Clearances and Openings: Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all other trades to avoid confliction and permit for a neat and orderly appearance of the entire installation. The Contractor shall, in advance of the work, furnish instructions to the General Contractor as to his requirements for equipment and material installation of any kind, whether or not specifically mentioned on drawings or in the specifications, and shall include recesses, chases in walls, and all required openings in the structure. Should furnishing this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional cuttings are found to be required, the cost of the same shall be charged to this Contractor. 1.09 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Furnish all at one time, within the time noted below, six (6) bound copies of valid submittal data on all fixtures, material, equipment and devices. The Contractor shall make all presentations and clarifications although he may bring suppliers representatives for technical assistance to meetings called by the Architect. Each submitted item shall be indexed and referenced to these specifications and to pub identification numbers on fixtures and equipment schedules. Submittals not complying with this paragraph shall be rejected. B. Submittals are required on all items to insure the latest and most complete manufacturer's data is available for review. Manufacturer's submittal literature and shop drawings often contain information not available in design literature; requirements of the submittals and engineer's submittal notes are a part of the work of this Division except that engineer's notes may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of work of this Division. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 3 C. Submittals will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project, but the review does not guarantee quantities shown and does not supersede requirements of this Division to properly install work. D. A list of names is not a valid submittal. To be valid, all submittals must: 1. Be delivered to the Architect's office within thirty-five (35) days of award of the contract. Corrections or changes in submittals returned as inadequate or incomplete shall be accomplished within this time limit. 2. Include all pertinent construction, installation, performance and technical data. 3. Have all copies marked to indicate clearly the individual items being submitted. 4. Have each item cross-referenced to the corresponding specified item and be marked to show how differences will be accommodated. 5. Contain calculations and other detailed data justifying how the item was selected for proposal. Data must be completed enough to permit detailed comparison of every significant characteristic for which the specified item was analyzed during design. 6. Include, for every item which differs in size, configuration, way, a drawing to the same (or larger) scale as to the pertinent portions of the contract drawings. In this drawings show a complete layout of the system except that which is identical to the contract drawings, unless the unchanged portions must be shown to indicate such things as clearances. This drawing, together with the contract design drawings must show the complete system as revised to accommodate the proposed alternate. 7. In addition to the material and equipment submittals, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings of water meter complete with all appurtenances and indicate exact location by dimensions to grading plan, submit for approval prior to installation. 1.10 SUBSTITUIONS A. The Contractor assumes full responsibility that alternate items and procedures will meet the job requirements and is responsible for cost of redesign and of modifications to this and other parts of work caused by alternate items furnished under work in this Section. In view of these responsibilities, it is the purpose of these specifications to establish procedures which insure that the Contractor has considered all the ramifications of proposed alternates before submitting them for review. Submittals which do not comply with the requirements of these specifications or which indicate proposed alternates were selected without proper regard to the requirements of the job, will not be approved. No more than one proposed alternate will be considered for each item. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 4 B. Alternate items installed without Engineer's review and acceptance will be replaced with specified items at Contractor's expense. C. Provide or perform tests required by Engineer for purpose of judging acceptability of proposed substitutions. D. This Contractor is responsible to provide sufficient information to allow the Engineer to analyze any proposed alternate. If inadequate information is provided, the proposal will not be accepted and resubmittal will not be allowed. 1.11 UNINSPECTED WORK A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of his work to be covered up before it has been duly inspected, tested and approved by the Owner, Architect or any other authorized inspectors having legal jurisdiction over his work. Should he fail to observe the above, he shall uncover the work and, after it has been inspected, tested and approved, recover it at his own expense. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as -built" record set of blueline prints which shall show every change from the original drawings and the exact "as -built" locations and sizes of the work provided under this Section of the specifications. This set shall include locations, dimensions, depth of buried piping, cleanouts, shut-off valves, sewer invert locations, plugged wyes, tees, etc. On completion of the work, this set of prints shall be delivered to the Architect. 1.13 GUARANTEES A. Contractor shall guarantee the entire plumbing and piping systems unconditionally for a minimum period of one (1) year after final acceptance except where noted otherwise. If, during this period, any materials, equipment, or any part of the systems fail to function properly, the Contractor shall make good the defects promptly and without any expense to the Owner. B. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks in pipelines or equipment furnished and installed under this Section for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance of his work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT (See Schedules on Drawings) A. General: All materials, as specified or required in the work, shall be new, free from defects and imperfections. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Soil and Waste Piping: SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 5 a. Soil and waste piping inside of the building within five feet (5') of the foundation, and within the building itself, shall be no -hub cast iron service weight pipe and fittings, asphaltum coated, free from defects, and shall comply with C.I.S.P.I. Standard 301-85. Fittings shall be made up with "Husky" Series 4000 or "Tyler" Wide Body stainless steel four - band couplings. b. Except where otherwise indicated on the plans, building sewer piping from five feet (5') outside of the building to connections at the sewer shall be extra strength Bell & Spigot vitrified clay pipe with approved flexible compression joints by Pacific Clay Products or Wedge -lock Joint. At the contractor's option PVC SDR-35 sewer pipe with locked -in gasket may be provided in lieu of VCP pipe. 2. Vent Piping: a. Concealed or underground vent piping shall be cast iron pipe and fittings as specified for soil and waste piping. c. Exposed vent piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A120 or ASTM A53, with black cast iron recessed drainage fittings. 3. Water Piping: a Piping within the building and above grade shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing with wrought copper sweat fittings. b. Outdoor underground piping in sizes 2-1/2" and 3" shall be Type "L" hard drawn Copper as specified for water piping within the building. Piping 2" and smaller shall be Type "K" hard drawn copper. Piping in sizes 4 inches and larger shall be PVC Class 150 DR -18 with ring-tite joints. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all underground fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. c. Piping below the floor shall be Type "L" soft annealed copper tubing with no fittings below the slab. 4. Fire Piping: a. Outdoor underground piping shall be ductile iron, cement lined with mechanical joint fittings, Class 250, flanged or mechanical joint, in accordance with ANSI-AWWA C111/A21.11, Class 52. Provide concrete thrust blocks at all underground fittings per manufacturer's recommendations. At the Contractor's option, the main water service concealed below grade, PVC pipe, approved for fire service, Class 200 DR -14 with cast iron, ring-tite fittings as required (complete with concrete thrust blocks) all installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe under structural footings, and within vault shall be ductile iron. 5. Gas Piping: a. Concealed gas piping within the building shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 using 150 pound banded SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 6 malleable iron screwed fittings for piping 2" and smaller and weld type steel fittings for piping 2-1/2" and larger. b. Exposed gas piping outside the building shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 using galvanized 150 pound banded galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings for piping in sizes 2" and smaller and seamless weld type steel fittings for all medium pressure gas piping and piping 2-1/2" and larger. All outdoor welded black steel pipe and fittings shall be painted with oil base prime coat and oil base enamel finish coat. c. Underground gas piping shall be Schedule 40 SDR-11 Polyethylene PE2406 (Yellow) as manufactured by Plexco. Fittings shall be socket fusion weld Polyethylene as manufactured by Plexco or Central, PE2406 (Yellow) complying with ASTM, D2513. Where required provide "Lyco" or Double "0" seal transition fittings between steel and polyethylene as manufactured by Central, all identified and approved for gas service. A No. 18 copper tracer wire shall be installed with and attached to PVC piping and shall terminate above grade at each end. Gas piping extending to above grade, within valve yard boxes, below structures such as porches, steps, roofed patios, covered walks or similar structures, covered or uncovered shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 150 pound buttweld fittings. Steel pipe and fittings below grade shall be wrapped with 20 MIL identified polyethylene tape, two (2) layers, half -lapped for a total thickness of 80 MILS. Underground polyethylene piping shall be installed by personnel certified by the pipe manufacturer as having received instructions directly from the pipe manufacturer's field representative. Contractors not having certified personnel will be required to have a factory representative of the pipe manufacturer visit the site at the time of underground pipe installation and provide the required instructions. All required cost for training and certification will be paid for by this Contractor. Upon completion of the gas piping underground installation, this Contractor shall submit a written report directly to the Architect stating that all materials installed are as specified and approved, that installation was done by factory certified personnel, that where required, steel pipe buried had received a minimum of 80 mils thick pipe wrap and finally that the entire system was wire traced, installed to a depth of thirty inches (30") within a sand bed and tested to 60 P.S.I. 6. Storm Drain Piping: a. All concealed storm drain pipe and fittings shall be cast iron as specified for soil and waste piping. b. All exposed storm drain pipe and fittings shall be galvanized steel pipe as specified for exposed vent piping. 7. Indirect Waste Piping: Shall be Type "L" copper as specified for water piping. 8. All exposed piping at plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated yellow brass except exposed pipes in shop or utility areas. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 7 9. Unions or flanges shall be furnished and installed at each threaded connection to all equipment or valves. The unions or flanges shall be located so that the piping can be easily disconnected for removal of the equipment, tank, or valve, and shall be of the type specified in the following schedule. a. Unions: 1) Black Steel Pipe: 250 pound screwed black malleable iron, ground, joint, brass to iron seat. 2) Galvanized Steel Pipe: 250 pound screwed galvanized malleable iron, ground joint, brass to iron seat. 3) Copper or Brass Tubing: 150 pound cast bronze or copper, ground joint, nonferrous seat with ends, by Walseal, NIBCO or Mueller. b. Flanges: Shall be 150 pound class, bronze, forged steel or cast iron as required, complete with gasket of the type required for the service. 10. All piping on roof shall be anchored to 4" x 4" redwood blocking with pipe straps. Blocking shall be set in mastic at 6'-0" on center. C. Valves: 1. General: a. Piping systems shall be supplied with valves arranged so as to give complete and regulating control of piping systems throughout the building. b. Valves shall be installed with the best of workmanship, with neat appearance and grouping, so that all parts are easily accessible and maintained. c. Solder and valves are not acceptable. 2. Domestic water valves shall be "Nibco" or approved equal. VALVE TYPES NIBCO Ball 2-1/2' & Smaller T-585-70 (2 -Piece) Gate 2" & Smaller T-113 Gate 2-1/2" to 3" F-617-0 Check 2" & Smaller T -413-Y Check 2-1/2" to 3" F -918-B SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 8 For underground valves 4" and larger provide Mueller No. A-2380-20, Class 200 AWWA double valves, flanged or ring-tite type complete with traffic weight cast iron valve box with cast iron cover and wrench. 3. Fire Service Valves: (UL/FM Approved) a. Control valve shall be iron, double disc, bronze mounted gate valve with adjustable indicator post. Post shall be compatible with valve, and be field painted as required by serving fire department. Mueller No. A-2052 valve with No. A-20800 post or approved equal with tamper switch. b. Check valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, horizontal swing check. As acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, iron body, bronze disk wafer check may be used. Check valve shall be U.L./F.M. approved for fire protection use, and recommended by the manufacturer for direct bury where such installation is to required. Iron body, bronze disk threaded or grooved swing check may be installed at Fire Department Connection, and located as acceptable to serving fire department. 4. Gas Valves: For gas lines one and one-half inch (1-1/2") and smaller, provide Crane company 125 pound bronze cocks, square head with operating wrench. For lines two inches (2") and larger, provide lubricating plug type suitable for minimum working pressure of 125 psig, Rockwell-Nordstron No. 142 or 143. 5. Hose Bibbs: Shall be Acorn or Chicago a. Hose bibs located outside of the building shall be rough brass, have loose key 3/4" hose end with 1/2" female inlet and vacuum breaker. b. Hose bibs located inside building shall be rough chromium of nickel plated, have loose key 3/4" hose end with 1/2" female inlet and vacuum breaker. c. Recessed Hose Bibbs: See schedule on drawings. 6. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Shall be McDonnell, Watts, or approved equal. 7. Trap Primers: Shall be P.P.P. Model P-2 or approved equal with engraved model number and screwdriver adjuster. D. Traps, Strainers and Tailpieces. Every sanitary fixture, unless otherwise specified, shall be provided with a seventeen (17) gauge tailpiece chromium tailpiece, a Los Angeles, pattern chrome plated cast -brass trap, and wall flanges. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 9 Provide chromium plated brass casing between the trap and wall flanges with each fixture. All sanitary waste system floor drains and floor sinks shall have cast iron "P" traps. E. Cleanouts: Shall be J.R. Smith, Zurn or Josam 1. Wall Cleanouts: J.R. Smith No. 4765 prime coated for painted plaster walls. J.R. Smith No. 4760 prime coated for all other painted walls. J.R. Smith No. 4563 stainless steel for all ceramic tile walls. 2. Floor Cleanouts: J.R. Smith No. 4043 or 4048, bronze plug and non-skid nickel bronze top. Zurn A-1405-12 in carpeted floors. 3. Cleanouts to Grade: J.R. Smith No. 4258 or J.R. Smith No. 4353 with X -H bronze plug and X -X -H non-skid cover with lifting device set flush with surface for concrete areas. Asphalt or nonsurfaced areas shall be installed with ring of concrete poured around the bottom flange six inches (6") below surface. Use cast iron soil pipe on cleanout risers. For cleanouts in non - traffic areas, terminate cleanout plug in concrete yard box. F. Access Panels: J.R. Smith, Zurn or Josam. Wall access panels shall be minimum 12" x 12" for concealed valves and other equipment unless otherwise specified or indicated. Ceiling access panels shall be 18" x 18" minimum. 1. Wall Panels: J.R. Smith No. 4762 with AKL, stainless steel finish for all walls. 2. Ceiling Panels: J.R. Smith No. 4760 with AKL, prime coated fro plaster, dry wall ceilings, J.R. Smith No. 4790 with AKL acoustical tile ceilings. G. Yard boxes: For service shut-off valves on gas, domestic water and for cleanouts, shall be Brooks Products with vandalproof cast iron cover and name of service clearly marked on cover. Box shall be of size to permit easy removal of valve. H. Roof Flashing: Stoneman No. 1100-5, one (1) piece, four (4) pound, series with reinforcing steel boot counterflashed with cast iron flashing sleeve and with vandalproof hood. I. Flues: flues shall be double wall type "B" Metalbestos or approved equal, complete with tee, support, pipe collar, roof flashing, storm collar and top. J. Fire Hydrants: See Drawings for make and mode. Provide and install fire hydrants complete with individual shut-off valves of type as described hereinabove, less post indicator. K. Fire Department Connection: Provide single clapper, 4" x 2-1/2" two-way, Siamese fire department connection. Potter -Roemer No. 5761 or equal is acceptable. Finish shall be as required by serving fire department. Provide check valve. L. Escutcheons: Shall be chrome plated brass with locking device. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 10 M. Water hammer Arresters: Shall be P.P.P. model P-2 or approved equal with engraved model number and shall be sized per the manufacturer's recommendations. Install at all quick closing valves, clotheswashers and dishwashers behind access panel. N. Dielectric Isolators: Where incompatible materials come in contact, isolate from each other with material best suited for the characteristics of materials to be isolated. Dielectric coupling for connection piping or non -compatible materials shall be of standard commercial design. O. Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be as follows: 4. The Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous iron work including angles, channels, etc., required to appropriately support the various piping systems. Hanger spacing and location shall conform to Uniform Plumbing Code requirements. 5. All horizontal runs of piping within the building to be supported from the structural framing with steel rods and split ring hangers, Fee & Mason, Grinnell Company, or approved equal. Steel rods shall be secured to overhead framing with side beam connectors. Where necessary, install angle iron between framing to accommodate hanger rods. Where several pipes are running together, Unistrut channels with clamps maybe used in lieu of individual pipe hangers, and supported from structure as herein specified. Submit test data for type of hanger supports to be provided. For support conditions other than specified herein, the Contractor shall submit method of support for approval prior to any installation. 6. Pipe Hanagers: Shall be Grinnell No. 104, Fee & Mason No. 199 or equal Super Strut. 7. Hanger Rods and Spacing shall conform to the following table: Pipe Sizes Spacing Rods 2 Inch and Smaller 6 Feet 3/8 Inch 2-1/2 Inch to 3 Inch 8 Feet 1/2 Inch 4 Inch and Larger 8 Feet 5/8 Inch 8. Hangers and Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be placed within 18 inches of joint. Support shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection. 9. At Contractor's option, "Accousto-Plumb System" may be provided as a support system when securing piping direct by the wall framing. 10. Provide lateral bracing for all piping to prevent swaying or movement in accordance with SMACNA " Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Piping SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 11 Systems". Piping smaller than indicated in the guidelines shall be provided with bracing as specified for the smallest size indicated. The entire water distribution system shall be properly braced and will not move due to the action of quick closing of valves. 11. Vertical Pipe Lines. Malleable iron or steel pipe clamps, bolted around pipes shall be used for these supports. 12. Miscellaneous Supports, Wall Brackets, Etc. Provide where required in accordance with the best standard practices of the trade. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated supports. 13. Isolators. All piping which is not isolated from contact with the building by its insulation shall be installed with a manufactured type isolator. Isolators shall be Super Strut, Semco "Trisolator", or approved equal. Piping shall be installed and supported in a manner to provide for expansion without strains. Guides shall be properly installed to insure this requirement. P. Insulation: 1. Hot Water Pipe Insulation: All hot water supply and return piping, except exposed connections to plumbing fixtures, flanges and unions shall be insulated with "Manville", APT2000 lap lock bonded with metalized polyester reinforced scsrim kraft jacket. "K" Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. (0.033 at 24 degrees C.) maximum service temperature 850 degrees F. (454 degrees C). 1" thick for sizes up to 2" and 1-1/2" thick for sizes 2" and larger. Insulated piping exposed in occupied areas and equipment rooms shall be covered with "Childers" 0.0016 inch thick aluminum jacket installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation shall have a flame spread of not more than 25 and a smoke density not exceeding 50 per UMC Sec. 2127(8). 2. Storage Tank Insulation: Shall have a thermal resistance of R-6. Insulation shall have a flame spread of not more than 25 and a smoke density not exceeding 50 per UMC Sec. 2127(8). 3. Condensate Pipe Insulation: All condensate piping above the ceiling shall be insulated with "Armstrong" "Armoflex insulating tape. 4. Indirect Waste Pipe Insulation: All indirect waste drains from refrigerated kitchen equipment shall be insulated with "Armstrong" Armoflex" insulating tape. 5. All insulation shall be continuous through supports and hangers. Q. Equipment and Fixtures: 1. See schedule on drawings. 2. Fixtures: a. Fixtures shall be as manufactured by American Standard, Kohler or Eljer, and as noted on the drawings. b. Furnish complete with necessary trim, including stops. All trim and exposed fittings shall be chrome plated brass including handles, supply tailpieces, traps and escutcheons. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 12 c. Connections to fixtures shall be in accordance with code requirements except as exceeded herein or on the drawings and in no case less than the supply stop size. Minimum waste sizes shall be four inch (4") for water closets and two inch (2") for lavatories. d. Steel plate supports shall be provided for all wall hung fixtures. Supports shall be 3/8 inch thick x 6 inch wide steel plates recessed and lag screwed to wood studs or welded to steel studs and tapped for fixture bolts. Length and number of plates as required to satisfactorily support the fixtures installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Locations and Accessibility: Install equipment for ease of maintenance and repair. If changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are made by the Contractor, they shall be made without additional charges. B. Openings: Furnish information to the other trades on size and location of openings which are required in walls, slabs, roof, for piping and equipment at the proper times. C. Closing -In of Uninspected Work: Do not allow or cause any of the work to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested, and approved the Architect. Any work enclosed or covered prior to such inspection and test shall be uncovered and, after it has been inspected, tested, and approved, make all repairs with such materials as may be necessary to restore all work, including that of other trades, to its original and proper condition. D. Before laying of any pipe or digging of any trenches, Contractor shall determine by actual excavation and measurement exact locations and depth of existing utility and service lines to which he is going to connect. In event depth of existing sewer main is not sufficient permit installation of piping as detailed on drawings or to make connection in manner indicated, Contractor shall confer with the Architect, Owner's representative and Engineer for Direction. E. Excavation, Trenching and Backfill: Do all necessary trench excavation, shoring, backfilling and compaction required for the proper laying of the pipe lines. 1. Backfill shall be clean soil free from rocks and debris. Compact to ninety percent (90% of surrounding soil. All piping shall be installed in a minimum 6" sand bed and covered with 6" of sand prior to backfill. Continue backfill with materials free of rocks and debris, properly moistened and mechanically tapered and compacted to 90% of surrounding soil. 2. Soil and waste piping shall have 24 inches of cover minimum, gas piping shall have 30 inches of cover minimum, domestic water piping 24 inches SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 13 of cover minimum, fire lines 36 inches of cover minimum and all other piping shall have not less than (18") of cover, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Offset gas and water piping as required to permit crossover of piping systems. 3. Bottoms of Trenches: Cut to grade and excavate bell holes to insure the pipes bearing for their entire length upon the outside periphery of the lower third of the pipe. 4. Trees: When it is necessary to excavate adjacent to exiting trees, the Contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and roots. Where a ditching machine is run close to trees having roots smaller than 2" in diameter, the wall of the trench adjacent to the trees shall be hand trimmed making clean cuts through the roots. All cuts through roots '/2" and larger in diameter shall be painted with "Tree -Seal", or equal. Trenches adjacent to trees should be filled within 24 hours after excavation, but where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas. Stockpiling of earth or building materials within the drip line of trees if prohibited. Where any roots 2" and larger are encountered, the Contractor shall and tunnel under root and protect it by burlap wrapping. 5. Water piping shall not be run in the same trench with sewer or drainage piping unless separated as required by the UPC. 6. No piping shall run in, through or above any electrical equipment rooms or spaces at any time. 7. Horizontal soil and waste piping shall be installed to a uniform grade of not less than one-fourth inch (1/4") per foot, unless otherwise indicated or directed. 8. All piping shall be concealed in finished portion of the building except where otherwise indicated or directed at the time the work is done. All piping shall be installed to clear all framing members and beams, even if drawings do not indicate same. Contractor shall constantly check the work of other trades so as to prevent any interference with the installation of this work. 9. All piping into stem walls and footings shall be double half lap wrapped with 1/8" thick "Armoflex" insulation. The Contractor shall also provide blocked out areas in stem wall and footing and required for the installation of the piping. All piping shall avoid the lower 8" of the footing and the Contractor shall coordinate and provide dropped footings as required for the installation of the underground piping. 10. Unions shall be installed on one side of all screwed shut-off valves, at both sides of screwed automatic valves and on all by-passes, at all equipment connections and elsewhere as indicated or required for ease of installation and dismantling. 11. Connections between copper tubing and equipment shall be with Mueller Brass Company, or approved equal, brass stream line copper to P.P.S. ground joint unions. 12. Hot and cold water supplies to lavatories and sinks shall be provided with ninety degree (90 degree) drop -ear copper to pipe thread elbows. SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 14 Bolt securely to backing plates located between wall studs to provide a rigid anchor for exposed supply pipes and stops. F. Sleeves: Shall be plastic or galvanized steel where pipes pass through concrete walls or floor slabs. 1. Isolate pipes through ground floor slabs with Kraft paper, plastic tape or similar materials unless conduit is specified or indicated. 2. Sleeves for pipes through exterior walls shall be standard weight galvanized pipe. Pack space between pipe and sleeves with ceramic fiber rope so as to be absolutely watertight. 3. Sleeves in or through fire rated walls shall be per U.L. Fire Resistance System No. 147. See architectural plans for all locations of rated walls. G. Contraction and Expansion 1. Install all work in such a manner that its contraction and expansion will not do any damage to the pipes, the connected equipment, or the building. Install off -sets, swing joints, expansion joints, seismic joints, anchors, etc., as required to prevent excessive strains in the pipe work. All supports shall be installed to permit the materials to contract and expand freely without putting any strain or stress on any part of the system. Provide anchors as necessary. H. Pipe Joints and Connections: 1. Copper Tubing and Brass Pipe with Threadless Fittings: a. Solder joints for copper shall be made with 95/5 lead free solder in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the service intended. b. Use threaded adapters on copper tubing where threaded connections are required. 2. Welded Joints: All welding to be performed by welders certified as passing ASME Boiler and Pressure Code (Section IX). I. All closet bends shall be adequately blocked and secured. Trap arms and similar connections installed below the floor level or under concrete slabs shall be adequately supported and anchored to prevent motion in any direction. All piping installed above grade within buildings shall be secured to structural framing with Unistrut or pipe clamps to provide a rigid installation. Piping utilizing gaskets as a seal shall be given prime consideration to providing adequate stability through proper supports and anchors because of its flexible nature. J. Flexible piping of any kind will not be permitted. K. Each pipe penetration of the roof shall be separated from other piping and any roof equipment by a minimum of 18" to insure a proper pipe flashing installation SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 15 L. Floor, Wall land Ceiling Plates: Where pipes pierce finished surfaces, C.P. brass split flanges with set screw lock shall be provided. M. Roof Flashings: Extend pipe a minimum of seven inches (7") above finished roof line, except where specifically required to exceed this dimension by the local authority due to snow conditions. N. Installation of Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Install each fixture at the exact height and location shown on the Architectural Drawings. 2. Set fixtures, supplies, trap and trap outlet square with the wall, in line with fixture outlets without any offsets, angles, or bends. 3. Grout joint between the fixtures and the walls or floors with polysulfide or silicone sealant to be smooth, even and watertight. 4. Watertight joints for drainage connections to all fixtures shall be made in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. O. Completion of Installation: 1. Cleaning and Flushing: Clean all equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surface to be painted smooth and clean, ready for painting. 2. Flush each unit of water supply and distribution system thoroughly with clean water at the highest velocities attainable. 3. Clean all piping, valves, traps, water heaters, fixtures and other devices thoroughly and flush or blow out until free of scale, oil silt, sand, sediment, pipe dope and foreign matter of any kind. 3.02 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER LINES A. Sterilize water lines by filling with a solution containing fifty (50) parts of chlorine per million parts water and holding the solution therein for at least eight (8) hours with a water head of at least five feet (5') above the highest point in the system. Unless otherwise directed, thoroughly flush each line prior to sterilization. Introduction of sterilizing solution or materials into the lines shall be such as to provide thorough and uniform distribution throughout the system. B. Operate all valves during the retention period. Following retention period, the heavy chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clean water. C. Continue flushing until the residual chlorine is approximately, but not more than, two -tenths parts per million. D. All work and certification of performance must be done by an approved laboratory utilizing qualified applications and personnel. 3.03 TESTING SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 16 A. No piping work shall be concealed or covered until piping has been tested, inspected and approved by the Inspector. All piping for plumbing systems shall be completely installed and tested as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code and National Fire Protection Association, N.F.P.A.-13. Test pressures and times indicated are a minimum only. All tests shall be as required by the governing authority as well. 1. Water lines at 100 psig for (4) hours. 2. Fire lines at 200 psi for (4) hours. 3. Gas lines at 60 psi for (4) hours. 4. Waste, vent and storm drain lines at 10 ft./head for (4) hours. 3.04 OPERATION INSTRUCTION A. Prior to occupancy or prior to the date of final inspection, whichever may occur first, the Contractor shall prepare two (2) sets of typewritten instructions for the operation of all equipment, valves, etc., specified and furnished as a part of the work under this section, and shall assign a competent person, thoroughly familiar with the job, to demonstrate and instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation of the equipment. The time of said demonstration and instructions shall be arranged with the Owner's representative approximately one (1) week in advance. Verbal instructions shall include shut-off location of gas and water. The Contractor shall assemble all operation and maintenance data supplied by the manufacturers of the various pieces of equipment, all keys and special wrenches required to operate and service the equipment (including keys for yard boxes, gas stops and fixture stops), and all equipment warranties and deliver same to the representative of the owner on date of said instructions. 3.05 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Each operating and service line shut-off valve shall be identified by a brass tag with type of service identified, complete with hole and brass chain mounted on valve stem or handle. Tag shall be a minimum of one and one-half inch (1-1/2") in diameter. B. All equipment shall be provided with name plate indicating all pertinent information on it. PART 4: PAYMENT Sheet metal flashing and trim will be considered as included on other items of work and no additional payment will be made therefor. END OF SECTION SECTION 22 00 00 — PLUMBING- 17 SECTION 26 00 10 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The work required under this division is not limited to the electrical specifications and drawings. Refer to all bid documents including Civil, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical documents which may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete and operable electrical system, which shall include all documents that are a part of the entire Project Contract. 1. Work included: Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, skilled supervision necessary for, and incidental to, performing operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of the work in this division complete as shown or noted on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to all sections in the general contract conditions, Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements. C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: 1. The electrical work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished by others unless otherwise noted or detailed. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Guarantee See General Conditions: 1. Except as may be specified under other Sections in the specification, guarantee equipment furnished under the specifications for a period of one year, except for equipment required to have a longer guarantee period, from date of final completion. Guarantee all work against defective workmanship, material, and improper installation. Upon notification of failure, correct deficiency immediately and without additional cost to the Owner. 2. Standard warranty of manufacturer shall apply for replacement of parts after expiration of the above period. Manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts to the Owner or his service agency as approved. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, printed manufacturer's warranties complete with material included and expiration dates, upon completion of project. Conform to Division 01. B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 1 recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety. C. Codes and Regulations: 1. Design, manufacturer, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following: a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE b. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL d. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA e. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM f. American National Standards Institute - ANSI g. California Electrical Code - CEC, Title 24, Part 3 h. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5 i. California Building Code-CBC, Title 24 Parts 1 &2 j. State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area k. Occupational Safety & Health Administration - OSHA 1. California State Fire Marshal m. California Fire Code- CFC, Title 24 Part 9 n. National Electrical Testing Association - NETA 2. The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes, Permits, and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent shall apply. The most stringent condition shall be as interpreted by the Engineer. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 2 a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the Contractor at his expense shall obtain the Work, unless otherwise specified. b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work. E. Shop Drawings: 1. See Division 01 for additional requirements. 2. Time Schedules for Submission and Ordering: The Contractor shall prepare, review and coordinate his schedule of submissions carefully, determining the necessary lead time for preparing, submitting, checking, ordering and delivery of materials and equipment for timely arrival. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the overall construction schedule. 3. Submittals will be checked for general compliance with specifications only. The Contractor shall be responsible for deviations from the drawings or specifications and for errors or omissions of any sort in submittals. 4. Submit a complete list of materials and equipment proposed for the job, including manufacturers names and catalog numbers. 5. Shop drawings shall be submitted in completed groups of materials (i.e., lighting fixtures or switchgear). The Contractor shall add and sign the following paragraph on equipment and materials submitted for review. "It is hereby certified that the (equipment) (material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into the project; is in compliance with the Contract Drawings and specifications and can be installed in the allocated spaces". Failure to add the above written statement for compliance will result in return of submittals without review. a. Bind catalog cuts, plate numbers, descriptive bulletins and drawings, 11" x 17" (275 mm x 435 mm) or smaller, in sets with covers neatly showing titles. b. The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to Code compliance for fit prior to submitting shop drawings for approval. c. Where current limiting devices are specified, submit technical data to substantiate adequate protection of equipment cascaded downstream. Submittals shall not be reviewed unless supporting calculations and data are submitted therewith. d. Include complete catalog information such as construction, ratings, insulation systems, as applicable. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 3 e. For any material specified to meet UL or trade standards, furnish the manufacturers or vendor's certification that the material furnished for the work does in fact equal or exceed such specifications. f. Reference listings to the specifications' Sections and Article to which each is applicable. g. Equipment Floor Plans: After approval of material is secured prepare a floor plan of each electrical and communication equipment space, room or yard, drawn to scale at 1/2 inch equals 1 foot and submit for approval in the same manner as for shop drawings. The layout drawings shall be exact scale. 6. Contractor shall prepare coordinated drawings when required by Division 01 or where noted otherwise. F. Interpretations: The Contractor through the Architect must make Requests for interpretations of drawings and specifications. Any such requests made by equipment manufacturers or suppliers will be referred to the Contractor. G. Standard of Quality 1. The contract Drawings and Specifications establish the "MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY" each product and/or system must meet to be considered acceptable. Products of other manufactures will be considered if the product and/or system meet or exceed the "MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY" established by this Contract Document. 2. Items for similar application shall be of the same manufacturer. 3. The label of listing by UL shall appear on all materials and equipment for which standards have been established by the agency. 4. Where codes as listed in Section General Requirement Section of the Specifications that establish label or approved requirements, furnish all materials and equipment with either the required labels affixed or the necessary written approval. 5. Provide the type and quantity of electrical materials and equipment necessary to complete Work and all systems in operation, tested and ready for use. 6. Provide and install all incidental items that belong to the Work described and which are required for complete systems. 7. All switchboards, distribution boards, panel boards and circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer. 8. All wiring devices such as switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer. H. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 4 I. Submit comprehensive material list, shop drawings and complete technical data for the following equipment and materials: 1. General Requirements: a. Main service and distribution switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. Conduits d. Conductors, include all selected insulation types. e. Fuses f. Disconnect switches and Starters. g. Pullboxes, manholes and handholes. h. Standard lighting fixtures, specially fabricated fixtures, ballasts and lamps, with samples and sample of standard finish available (where requested). i. Control devices, standard and special receptacles, switches, outlets and finish device plates. j. Cabinets for signal and telephone system, special terminals and cabinets. Include all cabinet dimensions. k. Fire alarm system. 1. Transformers J. Record Drawings: Refer to Division 01, Contract Closeout. K. Work Responsibilities: 1. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of conduit runs, outlets, junction boxes and equipment and are to be followed. Execute the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of his work. Where conflicts occur in plans and/or specifications, the most stringent application shall apply and shall be part of the base bid. 2. Locations shown on architectural plan or on wall elevations shall take precedence over electrical plan locations, but where a major conflict is evident, notify the Architect. 3. In the event minor changes in the indicated locations or arrangement are necessary due to developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment or due to interference with other trades, such changes shall be made without extra cost. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 5 4. Verify dimensions and the correct location of Owner -Furnished equipment before proceeding with the roughing -in of connections. 5. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work carefully check and verify dimensions and sizes with the drawings to see that the furnished equipment will fit into the spaces provided without violation of applicable Codes. 6. Should any changes to the work indicated on the drawings or described in the specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the Architect. 7. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of coordinated drawings when required by the Architect. 8. Replace or repair, without additional compensation any work which does not comply with or which is installed in violation of any of these requirements. L. Installation General: For special requirements, refer to specific equipment under these requirements. 1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specifications, do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work. 2. Locations of Openings: Locate chases, shafts and openings required for the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure. Do any additional cutting and patching required. Cutting or drilling in any structural member is prohibited without approval of the Architect. Furnish all access panels to make all boxes, connections and devices accessible as required by CEC. 3. Location of Sleeves: Where conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs or metal deck floors, install sleeves of adequate size to permit installation of conduit. Sleeves shall be installed prior to pouring of concrete and shall have ends flush with the wall or extend 2 inches above floor surfaces. Verify locations. 4. Wherever conduit extends through roof, install flashings in accordance with drawings and details. 5. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching which may be required for the proper installation of the electrical work. 6. Protect work, materials and equipment and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Storage outdoors shall be weather protected and shall include space heaters to prevent condensation. Provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment before requesting final acceptance. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 6 7. Conduit and Equipment to be Installed: Clean thoroughly to remove plaster, spattered paint, cement and dirt on both exterior and interior. All underground conduits shall be mandrelled prior to pulling wire. 8. Conduit and Equipment to be Painted: Clean conduit exposed to view in completed structure by removing plaster and dirt. Remove grease, oil and similar material from conduit and equipment by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents in preparation for paint. 9. Items with Factory Finish: Remove cement, plaster, grease and oil, and leave surfaces, including cracks and corners, clean and polished. Touch up scratched or bare spots to match finish. 10. Site Cleaning: Remove from site all packing cartons, scrap materials and other rubbish on a weekly basis. Vacuum out all cabinets, switchgear and panels and junction boxes prior to pulling any conductors. 11. Electrical equipment and materials exposed to public and in finished areas shall be finish - painted after installation in accordance with the Painting Section. All exposed screw -type fasteners, exterior, or interior in restrooms, shall be vandal -resistant spanner type; include tool. M. Excavation, Cutting and Patching: 1. Excavating, trenching and backfilling required for the work of this Division in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 2. Excavating and backfilling connected with electrical work, repaving cuts and providing and maintaining protective measures for the electrical work excavation required by the governing authorities having jurisdiction shall be performed as a part of the work of this Division. 2. Verify openings indicated on the drawings. Provide all cutting, patching and reinforcement of the construction of the building as required to install electrical work. N. Tests 1. Equipment and systems for which the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) has an approved or recommended procedure, shall be tested in accordance with that procedure. Test values shall equal values recommended by NETA. Copies of test reports shall be submitted as required under shop drawing submittals. 2. Resistance to ground tests shall be accomplished by a qualified independent testing firm to measure resistance to ground at grounding electrodes. Make tests before slabs or affected areas are poured in order that corrective measures, if required, may be taken. Submit a report showing the results of these measurements. If the resistances exceed values specified elsewhere or NETA test procedure recommendations, perform corrective measures required to reduce resistance to acceptable values. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 7 3. Prior to energizing any motor, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean. 4. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions and submit to the engineer a report showing the results of these measurements. 5. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test. Conduct the test in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner's Representative. Demonstrate system and equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from electrical and mechanical defects. Provide systems free from short circuits and grounds and show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than the requirements of the governing electric code. Test circuits for proper neutral connection. 6. Complete tests prior to final inspection of project, including corrective work based on the results of the tests. 7. Perform special tests on systems and equipment as specified herein using personnel qualified to perform such tests. O. Protection: Protect finish parts of the materials and equipment against damage during the progress of the work and until final completion and acceptance. Cover materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred. Keep moving parts clean, dry and lubricated. P. Cleaning Up: 1. Upon completion of the work and at various time during the progress of the work, remove from the building all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Division. 2. Thoroughly clean switchgear including busses, apparatus, exposed conduit, metal work including the exterior and interior, and accessories for the work of this Division, of cement, plaster and other deleterious materials; remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent; carefully wipe surfaces and scrape cracks and corners clean. Q. 3. Thoroughly polish chromium or plated work. Remove dirt and stains from lighting fixtures. 4. Leave the entire installation in a clean condition. Completion: 1. The work will not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer's literature, panel directories and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted or installed and final cleaning of equipment and premises has been completed. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 8 2. When the installation is complete and adjustments have been made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time demonstrate that systems are completed and operating in conformance with the specifications. R. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit complete and at one time, prior to acceptance of the installation, 4 copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists. As specified in Division 01 S. Inspection and Acceptance Procedures: The Architect will submit observation reports periodically during the construction phase detailing Contract deficiencies. The Contractor is responsible for making corrections immediately. Notice of Completion of the project will not be made until all items have been corrected. T. Final Completion of Electrical Systems: 1. Prior to Final Completion of operating electrical systems, the Contractor shall: a. Provide materials of the type and quality specified and as necessary for proper operation, tested and ready for use. b. Furnish the required Operating and Maintenance Data/Manuals. c. Clean up of the project pertaining to this Division of the work. d. After installation has been completed and adjustments made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time, demonstrate to the Architect that systems are complete and operating in conformance with Contract Documents. e. Conduct tests required and as specified in this Division and submit test reports and corrective actions taken. f. Submission of warranties and guarantees. 2. Final Completion of Work Shall be Contingent On: a. Contractor replacing defective materials and workmanship. b. Upon completion of work and adjustments made, Contractor shall conduct an operating test for each system for approval at such time as Architect directs. Conduct test in presence of authorized representative of Architect and demonstrate that systems and equipment do operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and are free from electrical and mechanical defects. c. Contractor shall provide the necessary training programs and instructions to the Owner's representative. Number of hours shall be a minimum of four (4) hours for each system or days as required under separate Sections of these Specifications. Complete operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to training. Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 9 d. Submit copies of manufacturer's instructions and maintenance of electrical equipment including replacement parts lists. Each set shall include one set of shop drawings of equipment installed. U. Submittals for Change Orders: When changes are made during the construction phase, deletions and additions shall be presented in a manner that will indicate the cost of each item of material and corresponding labor. Markup shall be then added in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions. V. The Contractor at a time convenient to the Owner shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The instructors shall have received factory training and shall be thoroughly familiar with the equipment installed. The operating personnel shall receive the number of days instruction as indicated in other sections. 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record Drawings: CAD: Use a computer aided drafting (CAD) system in the preparation of record drawings for this Project. Acceptable CAD systems shall be capable of producing files in AutoCAD Version 2004 compatible DWG or DXF format. Owner's consultant will furnish CAD backgrounds for use by the Contractor after construction is 85% complete except where prohibited by Contract. B. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set of Drawings as a Field Record Set. Also maintain at least one copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved submittals, correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data in good order and readily available to Architect and Owner. C. Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show changes made during the construction process at the time the changed work is installed. No such changes shall be made in the work unless authorized by the Architect. D. Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 01 requirements. E. Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the work indicated on the Field Record Set to the record set. Changes shall be neatly and clearly drawn and noted by skilled draftsmen, and shown technically correct. F. Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, submit the Final Record Drawings to the Architect for review, and make such revisions as may be necessary for Final Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of the work. G. Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit instruction, operation, and maintenance manuals as required and to the extent required under other Sections. H. At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies, a complete separate, clean, undamaged set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals. As work progresses, maintain records of "as installed" conditions on this set in Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 10 suitable ink or chemical fluid. Update the set daily. After successful completion of Project Site testing specified herein, and after completion of Punch List corrections, copy all records of "as installed" conditions on to originals. I. Quantity: 1. Review sets:As for Shop and Field Drawings. 2. Record set:Refer to Division 01. J. Content: All drawings required under "Field and Shop Drawings". Show "as installed" condition. Where room designations according to Project permanent signage differ from construction designations in the Contract Documents, show both designations. K. Warranty Certificates: Comply with Division 01. END OF SECTION Basic Electrical Requirements 26 00 10 - 11 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Wiring connectors. C. Electrical tape. D. Heat shrink tubing. E. Wire pulling lubricant. F. Cable ties. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2013 (Reapproved 2018). B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft 2011 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin -Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020). D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation 2004 (Reapproved 2020). E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low -Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure -Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape 2017. F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi -Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes 2013. G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy 2009. I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems 2017. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 1 J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 44 - Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 486A -486B - Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic -sheathed cable is not permitted. D. Underground feeder and branch -circuit cable is not permitted. E. Service entrance cable is not permitted. F. Armored cable is not permitted. G. Metal -clad cable is not permitted. 2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation. D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. E. Comply with NEMA WC 70. F. Thermoplastic -Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. G. Thermoset -Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. I. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 3 a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet ( 23 m ): 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet (46 m ): 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet (46 m ): 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. J. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. 2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 4 b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle. c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle. d. Rome Wire and Cable. e. Okonite Wire f. Pirelli Wire and Cable g. Carol Cable B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. 2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A -486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist -on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 5 2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3. Where over -sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required. D. Do not use insulation -piercing or insulation -displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation. E. Do not use push -in wire connectors as a substitute for twist -on insulated spring connectors. F. Twist -on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F ( 105 degrees C) for standard applications and 302 degrees F ( 150 degrees C) for high temperature applications; pre -filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set -screw type. H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 2.5 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil ( 0.18 mm ); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F ( 105 degrees C ). 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil ( 0.18 mm ); resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C ) and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F ( 105 degrees C ). 3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil ( 0.76 mm ); suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F ( 90 degrees C ) and short-term 266 degrees F ( 130 degrees C) overload service. 4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber -based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil (3.2 mm ); suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F ( 80 degrees C ). 5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all- weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil (2.3 mm ). Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 6 B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy -wall, split -resistant, with factory -applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft ( 3.0 m) of location indicated. 5. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted. 6. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 7 C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). D. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. 2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits. G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches ( 300 mm) of slack at each outlet. H. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet (1.5 m) of slack. I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 8 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. N. Field -Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. O. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53. P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section Firestopping. Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 9 B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19 - 10 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ««««< UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. 2.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System 2012. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems 2017. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 2.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete -encased electrode. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components. B. Field quality control test reports. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1 2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. D. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. 2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall -of -potential" method. E. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. 2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 2 a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet ( 3.0 m) at an accessible location not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. 3. Metal In -Ground Support Structure: a. Provide connection to metal in -ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Concrete -Encased Electrode: a. Provide connection to concrete -encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet ( 6.0 m) of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance. F. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non -current -carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO SUBPARAGRAPHS BELOW -- 3. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 4. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 6. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 3 7. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 3.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 4 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 4.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 5 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2016a. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 2019. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1 B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel (strut) framing systems. B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supportedwith a minimum safety factor of 5 times the applied force. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted. 6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2 a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc -plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc -Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One -hole or two -hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory -fabricated continuous -slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field -assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. 2. Channel Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc -plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc -plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. New Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts. 3. Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors. 4. Solid or Grout -Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 6. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 7. Steel: Use welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19 21 23 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP -69. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3 8. Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 9. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic -restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface -mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 4 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface -mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor -mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. I. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. J. Remove temporary supports. 3.3 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000 -psi (20.7-MPa), 28 -day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete or Cast -in -Place Concrete (Limited Applications)" as applicable. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturers written instructions. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 5 SECTION 26 05 33.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS «« UPDATE NOTES SPECIFYING STRATEGY 2.1 STEP 1: REVIEW OPTIONAL "CONDUIT APPLICATIONS" ARTICLE UNDER PART 2. 2.2 STEP 2: REVIEW "CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS" ARTICLE UNDER PART 2. 2.3 STEP 3: REVIEW CONDUIT PRODUCT ARTICLES UNDER PART 2. A. Links for some products should already be activated according to selections made in "CONDUIT APPLICATIONS" article, if included. 2.4 STEP 4: REVIEW PART 3. 2.5 STEP 5: REVIEW PART 1. A. Pay particularly close attention to "RELATED REQUIREMENTS" article for conduit requirements that might need to be specified elsewhere. PART 1 GENERAL 3.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. G. Conduit fittings. H. Accessories. 3.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) 2015. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT -S) 2015. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 1 D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT) 2013. E. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC) 2017. F. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014. G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl -Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018. H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 2013. I. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2016. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 360 - Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing -Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 3.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 2 B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 3.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger. 3.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 4.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct -Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit. 3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduitlarger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. 5. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm -centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 3 6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches ( 100 mm) on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 8 feet ( 2.4 m ), except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. J. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. K. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m ). M. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: a. Transformers. b. Motors. N. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 4 4.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size. 5. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size. D. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 4.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. B. Fittings: 1. Non -Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 4.4 PVC -COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil ( 1.02 mm ). C. PVC -Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC -coated conduit to be installed. 2. Non -Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 5 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil ( 1.02 mm ). D. PVC -Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil ( 0.38 mm ). 4.5 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. B. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set -screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 4.8 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 6 Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. B. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 4.9 ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion -resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. C. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound -force ( 890 N ). PART 3 EXECUTION 5.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. D. Install PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. F. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 7 5. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet ( 46 m) between pull points. 8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches ( 150 mm ) between conduits and piping for other systems. 11. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches ( 300 mm) between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. 12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. G. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface -mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface -mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 8 8. Use non -penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where approved). 9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted. 10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. H. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc -rich paint or conduit joint compound on field -cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. I. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 7. Make penetrations for roof -mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 9 maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. J. Underground Installation: 1. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- 2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches ( 610 mm ). b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches ( 300 mm) to bottom of slab. 3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length. K. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete -encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section Concrete with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches ( 76 mm) on all sides unless otherwise indicated. L. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. M. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. N. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches ( 300 mm) at each end. O. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. P. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53. Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 10 5.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. B. Where coating of PVC -coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 5.3 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 5.4 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. A. END OF SECTION Conduit for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.13 - 11 SECTION 26 05 33.16 - BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches ( 1,650 cu cm ), including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches ( 1,650 cu cm). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014. D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 2013. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 508A - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels 2018. J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 1 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush - mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for floor boxes and underground boxes/enclosures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches ( 1,650 cu cm ), Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet -steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 2 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush -mounted in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush -mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through -wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 8. Sheet -Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single -piece construction. Do not use field -connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted. 12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1- 1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. b. Communications Systems Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch (100 by 54 mm) trade size. c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. 13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches ( 1,650 cu cm ): 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches ( 1,650 cu cm ): Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 3 a. Provide screw -cover or hinged -cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush -mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface -mounted. G. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section Access Panels as requiredwhere approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 7. Do not install flush -mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches ( 150 mm) horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 8. Acoustic -Rated Walls: Do not install flush -mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches ( 610 mm) horizontal separation. 9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush -mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 4 a. Do not install flush -mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches ( 610 mm) separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush -mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches ( 0.0103 sq m) or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches ( 0.0645 sq m) for any 100 square feet ( 9.29 sq m) of wall area. 10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 33.13. 11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings. b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. c. Electrical rooms. d. Mechanical equipment rooms. H. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. I. Install boxes plumb and level. J. Flush -Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch ( 6 mm) or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch ( 3 mm) at the edge of the box. K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 5 L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. N. Close unused box openings. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.16 - 6 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Voltage markers. E. Underground warning tape. F. Warning signs and labels. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. B. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre -marked wallplates. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs 2011. B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels 2011. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 2018. E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Switchboards: 1) Identify ampere rating and name. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.Identify spares and spaces. b. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating and name. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2 4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.Identify spares and spaces. c. Transformers: 1) Identify kVA rating and name. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. 3. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following. a. Service equipment. b. Industrial control panels. c. Motor control centers. d. Elevator control panels. e. Industrial machinery. 4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches ( 89 mm by 127 mm ). b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent. B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3 3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present. c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. 4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors. C. Identification for Raceways: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet ( 6.1 m ). 2. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight. 3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location. 4. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways. D. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present. 2. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed. a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels. E. Identification for Devices: 1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate. 3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall -mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall -mounted control devices installed at one location. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4 F. Identification for Luminaires: 1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system. 2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 2. Plastic Nameplates: Two -layer or three -layer laminated acrylic or electrically non- conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm ); engraved text. a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch ( 3 mm) when any dimension is greater than 4 inches ( 100 mm ). 3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm ); engraved or laser -etched text. 4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch ( 0.8 mm ); engraved or laser -etched text. 5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch ( 25 mm) high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. 2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine -printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch ( 25 mm) by 2.5 inches ( 64 mm ). 2. Legend: a. Equipment designation or other approved description. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5 4. Minimum Text Height: a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch (13 mm ). b. Other Information: 1/4 inch ( 6 mm ). 5. Color: a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. D. Format for Caution and Warning Messages: 1. Minimum Size: 2 inches ( 51 mm) by 4 inches ( 100 mm ). 2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch (13 mm ). 5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated. E. Format for Receptacle Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm ) by 1.5 inches (38 mm ). 2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch ( 5 mm ). 5. Color: Black text on clear background. F. Format for Control Device Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm ). 2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch ( 5 mm ). 5. Color: Black text on clear background. 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap -around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap -around self-adhesive vinyl self -laminating, heat -shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip -on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6 B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine -printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch (3 mm ). F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap -around type markers. B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers. C. Minimum Size: 1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified. 2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches (29 by 110 mm ). 3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches (13 by 57 mm ). D. Legend: 1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Materials: Use non -detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. B. Non -detectable Type Tape: 6 inches ( 152 mm ) wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil (0.1 mm ). C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. D. Color: 2.6 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 7 1. Materials: 2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches ( 178 by 254 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine -printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine -Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches (51 mm by 102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface -Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush -Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free -Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 8. Boxes: Outside face of cover. 9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 10. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 8 E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches ( 75 mm) below finished grade. G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. END OF SECTION Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 9 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES «« UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Occupancy sensors. B. Daylighting controls. 2.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018. D. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts 2016. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 1472 - Solid -State Dimming Controls Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 2.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1 2.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component. 2. Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each photo sensor and associated system component. C. Field Quality Control Reports. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. 2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 2.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 2.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 2.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all occupancy sensors. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2 B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all daylighting controls. PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. 3.2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory -assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. 2. Sensor Technology: a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones. b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves. c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies. 3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. 4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval. 5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn -on and hold -on activation with settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies. 6. Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory masking material, adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection in selected areas. 7. Turn -Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes. 8. Sensitivity: Field adjustable. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3 9. Adaptive Technology: Field selectable; capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay according to conditions. 10. Integral Photocell: For field selectable and adjustable inhibition of automatic turn -on of load when ambient lighting is above the selected level. 11. Compatibility (Non -Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low -voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements. 12. Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load indicated on drawings. B. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide line voltage units with self-contained relay. c. Where indicated, provide two -circuit units for control of two separate lighting loads, with separate manual controls and separately programmable operation for each load. d. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off) or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off). e. Manual -Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic -on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed -off time interval. C. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated dimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Operation: Field selectable to operate either as occupancy sensor (automatic on/off) or as vacancy sensor (manual-on/automatic off). c. Manual -Off Override Control Capability: When used to turn off load while in automatic -on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed -off time interval. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 4 d. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full -range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed as complying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled. e. ---CHOOSE ONLY ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW --- f. Finish: Color to be selected<>. D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. c. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic on/off. d. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated. 2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1000 at a mounting height of 9 feet ( 2.7 m ), with a field of view of 360 degrees. E. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings. 3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. 4. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO SUBPARAGRAPHS BELOW -- 5. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on drawings. 3.3 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS A. System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible control modules and power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of load indicated according to available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors and manual override controls. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 4.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of lighting control devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches ( 80 mm) from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 6 D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 27 26. G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. I. Identify lighting control devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53. J. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Within the design intent, reasonably minor adjustments to locations may be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid conflicts or problems affecting coverage. 2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet (1.2 m) from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. K. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accurately measure the light level controlled at the designated task location, while minimizing the measured amount of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows or pendant luminaires. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measured amount of lighting from artificial sources. L. Lamp Burn -In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn -in. M. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location. N. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface with lighting control devices or associated power packs. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 7 O. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off power pack. 4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects. B. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. C. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices. 4.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect. C. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection. D. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture, and window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or as directed by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. Readjust controls calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window treatments that do not function properly as determined by Architect. 4.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 4.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 8 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of the installed lighting control devices. 4. Location: At project site. END OF SECTION Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 9 SECTION 26 21 00 - LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment. B. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements. END OF SECTION Low -Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 26 21 00 - 1 SECTION 26 23 00 - LOW -VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR «« UPDATE NOTES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW -VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR A. Provide switchgear assemblies consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Description: Dead -front standard (non -arc -resistant) type metal -enclosed drawout switchgear complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51; listed and labeled as complying with UL 1558; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. D. Service Conditions: 1. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation under the following service conditions without derating: a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet ( 2,000 m ). b. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F ( -30 degrees C) and 104 degrees F ( 40 degrees C ). 2. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location. E. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- F. Short -Time Current (30 -Cycle Withstand) Rating: Equivalent to specified short circuit current rating. G. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Provide top -mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation of incoming feed. H. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 1558 temperature rise requirements. 1. Main bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchgear. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchgear, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. Low -Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 1 4. Ground Bus Material: Copper. I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 1. Line Conductor Terminations: a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. 2. Load Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. b. Lug Type: J. Enclosures: 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. K. Future Provisions: 1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. L. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE THREE PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- M. Instrument Transformers: 1. Comply with IEEE C57.13. 2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices. 3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks. 4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means. 2.2 LOW -VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Quick -make, quick -break, trip -free low -voltage power circuit breakers with two- step stored energy closing mechanism; 100 percent rated; complying with IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.16, IEEE C37.17, and ANSI C37.50; listed and labeled as complying with UL 1066; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Interrupting Capacity: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated. Low -Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 2 C. Construction: Drawout. 1. Allows withdrawal of circuit breaker into test and disconnected positions, with racking position indication (connected, test, disconnected, withdrawn). 2. Provide safety interlock to prevent racking of circuit breaker while in the ON position. D. Trip Units: Solid state, microprocessor -based, true rms sensing. END OF SECTION Low -Voltage Switchgear 26 23 00 - 3 SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS «« UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low -voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and distribution applications. B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards. 2.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional constraints of the installation. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Service Entrance Switchboards: 1. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide switchboards with suitable provisions for electrical service and utility metering, where applicable. 2. Coordinate with Owner to arrange for Utility Company required access to equipment for installation and maintenance. 3. Obtain Utility Company approval of switchboard prior to fabrication. 4. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for switchboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchboards and final equipment settings. E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1. B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent factory -installed space heaters. C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 2.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Switchboards - Basis of Design: Eaton. B. Switchboards- Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; [ ]: www.eaton.com/#sle. 2. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle. C. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work, including any design fees. D. Source Limitations: Furnish switchboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 3.2 SWITCHBOARDS A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Description: Dead -front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. D. Service Entrance Switchboards: 1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. 2. For solidly -grounded wye systems, provide factory -installed main bonding jumper between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for testing purposes. 3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service. 4. Utility Metering Provisions: Provide separate barriered compartment complying with Utility Company requirements where indicated or where required by Utility Company. Include hinged sealable door and provisions for Utility Company current transformers (CTs), potential transformers (PTs), or potential taps as required. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 3 E. Service Conditions: 1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location. F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- 2. Provide switchboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 3. Listed series ratings are not acceptable. G. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Provide separate pull section and/or top -mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation of incoming feed. H. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements. 1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard (non -tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 4. Ground Bus Material: Copper. I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 1. Line Conductor Terminations: a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. 2. Load Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. b. Lug Type: 1) Provide mechanical lugs. J. Enclosures: 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: Switchboards 26 24 13 - 4 a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 2 (drip -proof). b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 3. Outdoor Enclosures: a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. b. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike. K. Future Provisions: 1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2. Equip distribution sections with full height vertical bussing to accommodate maximum utilization of space for devices. 3. Where designated spaces for future device provisions are not indicated, include provisions for minimum of 6 device(s) rated at 25 percent of rating of switchboard main or incoming feed. 4. Arrange and equip through bus and ground bus to accommodate future installation of additional switchboard sectionswhere indicated. L. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground -fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable. 2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion overcurrent protective devices with ground -fault shunt trips. a. Use zero sequence or residual ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide test panel and field -adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings. M. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE THREE PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- N. Instrument Transformers: 1. Comply with IEEE C57.13. 2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices. 3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 5 4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means. 3.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: a. Description: Quick -make, quick -break, over center toggle, trip -free, trip -indicating circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W -C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 1) Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. b. Minimum Interrupting Capacity: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. c. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. d. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator. 3.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test switchboards according to NEMA PB 2, including the following production (routine) tests on each switchboard assembly or component: 1. Dielectric tests. 2. Mechanical operation tests. 3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 6 4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests. 5. Ground -fault sensing equipment test. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the switchboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive switchboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including accommodations for any drawout devices. D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provide minimum clearance of 1/2 inch (10 mm) between switchboard and wall. E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. F. Install switchboards plumb and level. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. H. Install all field -installed devices, components, and accessories. I. Where accessories are not self -powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation. J. --CHOOSE ONLY ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW WHERE APPLICABLE -- K. Set field -adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settingsas directed. L. Set field -adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settingsas directed. M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards. Switchboards 26 24 13 - 7 4.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before energizing switchboard, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1. D. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than [ ] amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. E. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation -resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required. F. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required. G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation. H. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchboards or associated components. 4.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors. 4.5 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish. 4.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed switchboards from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Switchboards 26 24 13 - 8 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W -C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e (Amended 2017). B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards 2015. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards 2011. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less 2013. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems 2017. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 67 - Panelboards Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489 - Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 1 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush - mounted panelboards where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. D. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 2 D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. D. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.2 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet ( 2,000 m ). 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F ( -5 degrees C) and 104 degrees F (40 degrees C ). C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 3 E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface -Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush -Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. J. Load centers are not acceptable. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 4 C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 2. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt -on type. 2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakersfor circuit breaker frame sizes less than 225 amperes. 3. Provide electronic trip circuit breakersfor circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and above. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface -mounted or flush -mounted enclosuresas indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide door -in -door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick -make, quick -break, over center toggle, trip -free, trip -indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W -C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated. b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 5 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor -based, true rms sensing trip units. 6. Multi -Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 7. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 8. Provide multi -pole circuit breakers for multi -wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. F. Install panelboards plumb. G. Install flush -mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches ( 2000 mm) above the floor or working platform. I. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch ( 27 mm) trade size conduits out of each flush -mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. Panelboards 26 24 16 - 6 K. Install all field -installed branch devices, components, and accessories. L. Multi -Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70. M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than [ ] amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Panelboards 26 24 16 - 7 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES ««««< UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Wall plates. 2.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us 3.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet (1.8 m) of sinks. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. 3.3 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated. B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate. C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate. D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate. E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover. 3.4 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general -use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W -S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2 B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 3.5 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com/#sle. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self -grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W -C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5- 20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Automatically Controlled Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; controlled receptacle marking on device face per NFPA 70; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFCI Receptacles: 1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self -testing, with feed -through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. 2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5- 20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 3.6 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high -impact thermoplastic. D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion -resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra -duty type. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4 4.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches ( 1200 mm) above finished floor. b. Receptacles: 18 inches ( 450 mm) above finished floor or 6 inches ( 150 mm) above counter. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches ( 80 mm ) from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches ( 150 mm) long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push -in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw -actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed -through wiring to protect downstream devices. I. Where split -wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles. Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 5 J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. K. Install wall switches with OFF position down. L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. O. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 4.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 4.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 6 SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 2012. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 248-1 - Low -Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 248-12 - Low -Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time -current curves, and current limitation curves. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. Fuses 26 28 13 - 1 B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com. C. Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com. 2.2 APPLICATIONS A. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time -delay. 2.3 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION Fuses 26 28 13 - 2 SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING ««««< UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts and drivers. 2.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 1 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. 2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM -63 standard format upon request. 3. Ballasts: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations. 4. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output. C. Samples: 1. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request. D. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Lenses and Louvers: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type. 2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than two of each type. 3. Extra Ballasts: Two percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than one of each type. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions. Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 2 B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. 2.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 2.7 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. B. Provide five year pro -rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 3.2 SECTION 26 06 50.16 - LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE CAN BE USED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO A SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS. USE THE FIRST ARTICLE BELOW TO INDICATE WHERE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE CAN BE FOUND OR USE THE SECOND ARTICLE BELOW TO INCLUDE A LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE IN THIS SECTION. 3.3 3.4 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 3.5 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. Recessed Luminaires: Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 3 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC -rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. H. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM -79 and IES LM -80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. 3.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. E. Provide low -voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. 3.7 EXIT SIGNS 3.8 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements: 1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). 2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards. B. --CHOOSE ONE OF THE TWO PARAGRAPHS BELOW -- C. Dimmable LED Drivers: Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 4 1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker. 2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 4.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 (commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. F. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure surface -mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or framing members or to building structure. Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 5 4. Secure pendant -mounted luminaires to building structure. 5. Secure lay -in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 6. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. G. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. 2. Non -IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire -Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. 2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. 3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet nominal length, with no more than 4 feet (1.2 m) between supports. 4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface. I. Wall -Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Emergency Lighting Units: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. M. Exit Signs: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls. N. Install lamps in each luminaire. Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 6 4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. C. Test self -powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 4.5 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field -Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. 4.6 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 4.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 4.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Interior Lighting 26 51 00 - 7 SECTION 26 56 00 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING ««««< UPDATE NOTES PART 1 GENERAL 2.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires. 2.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. 2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. C. Samples: 1. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 1 2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation. 2.6 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 3.1 3.2 SECTION 26 06 50.16 - LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE CAN BE USED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO A SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS. USE THE FIRST ARTICLE BELOW TO INDICATE WHERE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE CAN BE FOUND OR USE THE SECOND ARTICLE BELOW TO INCLUDE A LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE IN THIS SECTION. 3.3 3.4 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 3.5 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 2 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM -79 and IES LM -80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM -80 test data. PART 3 EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 4.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501. D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Install lamps in each luminaire. 4.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each product for damage and defects. Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 3 B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. C. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 4.5 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. 4.6 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 4.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. 4.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Exterior Lighting 26 56 00 - 4 Appendix 2, Technical Cut Sheets TEMPLE CITY 9701 E Las Tunas Dr, Temple City, CA 91780 TECHNICAL CUT SHEETS FOR PRIMROSE PARK 5928 Primrose Avenue, Temple City, CA 91780 Prepared By: David Volz Design Landscape Architects Inc. 151 Kalmus Drive, Suite M-8 Costa Mesa, CA 92626 Phone: 714-641-1300 November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK TABLE OF CONTENTS LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 1 - FLATWORK 2 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY & BRICK 3 - SITE FURNITURE 4 - WATER FEATURE 5 - IRRIGATION 6 - WATER FEATURE 7 - GATE HARDWARE ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING 8 - LIGHT FIXTURES November 24, 2020 PROJECT NO.: XS -19-233 PRIMROSE PARK TOP SURFACE RETARDER FOR DECORATIVE CONCRETE FINISHES gcp applied technologies GRACE CONSTRUCTION & PACKAGING V DAYTON suer fort Gerrit -OS t Los Angeles California etc -11 •.. jig ANNIIITIO TOP -CAST® ADVANTAGES: • Top -Cast is a waterbased, top surface retarder which does not require covering with plastic for protection. It is available in 12 depths of etch, each one, color and number coded for safety and convenience. • Ideal for cast -in -place flatwork and the top surface of precast concrete panels. The wide selection of grades available provides a comprehensive range of effects, from a simulated light acid wash or sand blast finish up to full exposure of 11/4 in. (32 mm) aggregate. • Concrete mix design such as cement content, aggregate size and type will affect final appearance. Consult the online Top -Cast User Guide for additional information. • With 11 different degrees, or depth of surface paste retardation, a contractor, architect or owner can achieve a wide range of exposed looks, depending on their choice of aggregates, mix designs, integral color, finishing techniques, and level of Top -Cast. • Extremely environmentally friendly, Top -Cast is unmatched in reliability and control to obtain a uniform, high -quality finish. • Three-part Guide Specification available upon request, or visit our website. ® DAYTON® SUPERIOR The highly textured walkways are discernible even in lower light conditions. Using two different Top -Cast formulations allowed the contractor to achieve micro -etch and aggregate textures. Success Story The Perfect Finish for an Urban Oasis A multi -billion dollar urban oasis rising in the Phoenix area, CityNorth is a mixed -use residential, commercial and retail area bringing uniquely designed city living to its distinctive desert environment. While large in scale, the project's design details are thoughtfully woven together to create an appealing mix — from the top of the modem buildings right down to the hardscape walkways. Making the latter look good was one of the responsibilities of Hensel Phelps Construction, the General Contractor for the project. To create an attractive, textured finish, an acid wash was originally planned for the 128,000 square feet of hardscape sidewalks and courtyard areas. But when tested in small-scale mock-ups — even after three attempts — the acid wash wasn't doing the job. "We had a lot of blotchiness, spots and inconsistency while testing the acid finish," said Ted Alverez, project superintendent for Hensel Phelps. Alverez explained that with the tremendous scale of the project and the need for a consistent, high -qual- ity finish, Top -Cast 03 was selected for sidewalks. Top -Cast 250 was used in courtyard areas to create a coarse aggregate exposed finish. The results were a better looking finish and a tre- mendous labor savings. "What took three man-hours with acid wash was done in just about an hour with Top -Cast, and without the hassles or inconsistencies of the typical acid wash approach," said Alverez. "There's a lot less managing needed with Top -Cast. We don't have to worry about temperature and tight time tolerances like you do with the traditional acid wash process and approach. You put it down and it works. It's very forgiving." Lead finisher, Jesus Morales, agreed. "You walk away and come back, and it works just as expected. It's really easy and we're very comfortable working with Top -Cast," said Morales. "It gives us much better control and doesn't change the concrete's color like acid -wash can." 4 WWW.DAYTONSUPERIOR.COM SUPERIOR Building StrengthTM I ^ DAVTiON® 5 ° DAYTON® ® SUPERIOR Available in 12 different grades that create a range of finishes from micro -etch to fully -exposed aggregate. Grade selection based on size of aggregate to expose and strength of mix. All grades are formulated separately to create distinctly different products. Choose Your Finish NO. CODE ETCH AGGREGATE SIZE TO EXPOSURE PACKAGE COLOR 01 Light Acid Wash White 2 x 03 Acid Etch Finish Violet u Wu 05 Sandblast Finish Light Blue 15 Up to 1/4" (6.5 mm) Yellow W 25 1/8"-1/4" (3 mm -6.5 mm) Beige D N 50 1/8"— 3/8" (3 mm -9.5 mm) Canary Green 1 a 75 1/8"— 3/8" (3 mm -9.5 mm) Blue W 100 3/8"- 1/2" (9.5 mm -13 mm) Gray x W 1— 125 3/8"- 5/8" (9.5 mm -16 mm) Pink cc w N 0 150 3/8"— 5/8" (9.5 mm -16 mm) Green a ' 200 V8-1" (16 mm -25 mm) Salmon "' D ° .j`'1 , 250 1"-11/2" (25 mm -38 mm) Orange Values listed are for standard 6 -Sack Mix. In some conditions with certain mixes, it may be necessary to rinse the retarded matrix the same day Technical Data Sheet, the Top -Cast User Guide and the Safety Data Sheet for full instructions and safe practices prior to use. Pemberton Cafe, Georgia Aquarium Atlanta Georgia, Top -Cast Grade 250 WWW.DAYTONSUPERIOR.COM Refer to the Victoria Gardens Cultural Center Rancho Cucamonga, California, Top -Cast Grade 05 DAYTON SUPERIOR tl„;MCA BUILDING STRENGTH' applied technologies REV 8/18 Copyright © 2017 Dayton Superior Corporation, All Rights Reserved. Sky Blue Eggshell SURFACE AMERICA° STANDARD EPDM COLORS Terra Cotta Primary Red Gold Beige Yellow Bright Green k Mal Hunter Green Royal Blue Purple For r .y tiw c Brown Black Orange (indoor only) Light Gray Color(s) may vary slightly from samples shown. Teal Pearl Dark Gray 800-999-0555 SurfaceAmerica.com SURFACEAMERICA Recreational & Athletic Surfacing for Maximum Performance pstone, Inc. 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 Precast Solutions Since 1963 13238 S0. FIGUEROA ST. LOS ANGELES, CA 90061 1 www.stepstoneinc.com Product Name Truncated Dome Paver Manufacturer Stepstone, Inc. 17025 So. Main St. Gardena, CA 90248 MATERIAL PRODUCT DATA SHEET Phone 310-327-7474 Fax 310-217-1424 Toll free 800-572-9029 Product Description Stepstone, Inc. has produced high quality pre -cast concrete for over 40 years. Truncated Dome Pavers are precast, A.D.A. compliant, detectable warning surface pavers that are designed to be used in commercial as well as public works applications. Pavers have an aligned dome pattern. Composition & Materials Truncated Dome Pavers are hand -made, wet -cast from 5000 PSI hard rock concrete using Type I I I cement. Sizes Truncated Dome Pavers are available in the standard sizes 11 -7/8"x11 -7/8"x2", 11 -7/8"x11 -7/8"x4" and 23 -7/8"x23 -7/8"x2" and 23- 7/8"x35 -7/8"x2-1/2". Finishes Truncated Dome Pavers available finishes include: Domed stippled finish or light sandblast Colors Truncated Dome Pavers are available in 14 standard colors: Federal Yellow, Charcoal, Adobe, Agave, Almond, Brick Red, Cafe Brown, Caramel, French Gray, Granada White, Iceberg Green, Kona, Pebble and Porcelain; custom colors are available upon request. Technical Data APPLICABLE STANDARDS: American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM) ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 - Concrete Compressive Strength ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C642 - Water Absorption, Density, Voids in Hardened Concrete ASTM C666 - Rapid Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Concrete ASTM C979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete ASTM C1028 - Coefficient of Friction Physical/Chemical Properties Truncated Dome Paver weight is 22 LBS per square foot. Water absorption: Not more than 6.0 % average, not more than 7.0 % for any individual unit for standard colors. Unit length, width and height are not more than +/- 1/8" from standard dimensions. No unit will differ more than +/-1/8" from the approved samples. Test reports are available upon request. Concrete is non-combustible. Please contact Stepstone, Inc. for further information. September 2019 Inc. pstone, Precast Solutions Since 1963 Paver Series Detail 6 CA LAKI®DIVISION Nationwide Distribution TOP VIEW 35'e" • o 0 0 0 0 • 0 0 • 0 0 O 0 1w 3' .45" apart apart O 0 0 o 0 0 0 ©0 0 0 0 0 ©0 0 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0© 0 O 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 ® 0 o ©0 0 0 0000 x 0 0 0 0 .4" (61 mm) SIDE VIEW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 o 11!16' 46"radius 16" -A- PAVER SIZES 12" x 12" x 2" 12"x 12"x4" 24"x24"x 2" 24" x 36" x 2-1/2" NOTES: 1. PRECAST UNITS ARE INDIVIDUALLY HAND CAST. LENGTHS ARE APPROXIMATE. SOME VARIATIONS ARE EXPECTED. 2. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED MASONRY PRACTICES. 3. TRUNCATED DOME PAVERS ARE AVAILABLE IN TWELVE (12) STANDARD COLORS INCLUDING FEDERAL YELLOW. 4. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TOLERANCES. OALIGNED TRUNCATED DOME PAVER SCALE: N.T.S. Page 27 800.572.9029 stepstoneinc.com 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 13238 S0. FIGUEROA ST. LOS ANGELES, CA 90061 I www.stepstoneinc.com 09-20 V BLOCK CO., INC. Since 1946 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 8x8 Breeze Block Screen Wall Units - 4 -Inch Deep 4x8x8 Neptune Special Order Only. nunnnu Ft ❑n®Q❑rrnn Linn QED I ❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑E ❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑❑EE � EE EE I I � EEE EE I ❑®®®❑ ❑�- •_❑®❑L❑LJ❑®❑�� I CI ❑� ❑� ❑� E■� Features With a unique asymmetrical core and sloped face, Neptune brings a new look to breeze block. Rotate and stack to create your own pattern. Availability As indicated. May be limited in plant location or color availability. Standards Concrete masonry units manufactured by Angelus Block Co., Inc. meet ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. Sustainable Features • This product is included in Environmental Product Declaration for Angelus Block Concrete Masonry Units, a Type I I I EPD, and in one of six Health Product Declarations, as applicable for its weight classification. • Contributes to green rating systems calculations, including Regional Materials, EPDs, and Material Ingredient Reporting. • Angelus Block CMU help facilitate and support many more strategies and credits, including Optimize Energy Performance, Construction Waste Management, and several within Indoor Environmental Quality. Angelus Block CMU contain no VOCs. See Sustainable Design & Angelus Block Products for detailed information. A copy is available from your representative, or as a download at www.AngelusBlock.com. Contact your representative for more information. www.AngelusBlock.com info@AngelusBlock.com Corporate Office & Plant: 11374 Tuxford St. Sun Valley, CA 91352 (818) 767-8576 1705 N. Main St. Orange, CA 92865 (714) 637-8594 14515 Whittram Ave. Fontana, CA 92335 (909) 350-0244 252 E. Redondo Bch. BI. Gardena, CA 90248 (310) 323-8841 4575 E. Vineyard Ave. Oxnard, CA 93036 (805)485-1137 88-100 Fargo Canyon Rd. Indio, CA 92202 (760) 347-3245 WARNING: This product can expose you to Silica, crystalline (airborne particles of respirable size) which is know to the State of California to cause cancer. For more information, go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov. ©2020 Angelus Block Co., Inc. V BLOCK CO., INC. Since 1946 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 8x8x16 Precision CMU 8x8x8 Half 8x8x16 U -Lintel 8x8x16 Standard 8x8x16 Bond Beam 8x8x16 Open End Standard Availability Basic configurations are stocked in Natural Gray and a stock color. Some items may be limited in inventory. Units may be made in any of our integral color options on special order. Standards Concrete masonry units manufactured by Angelus Block Co., Inc. meet ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. Fire Rating Solid grouted walls 8 -in wide and greater are rated at 4 hours, per CBC Table 721.1(2). For partially grouted walls, depending on the specified weight classification, 8 -inch wide units are 1 hour to 2 hours, and 8x8x16 12 -inch wide units are 2 hours to 3 hours. Open End Bond Beam 8x8x16 Double Open End Bond Beam 8x8x8 U -Lintel 8x8x16 Solid Bottom U -Lintel 8x8x16 No Center Web Cells and web configurations as shown are representational only, and actual configurations may differ. Sustainable Features • This product is included in Environmental Product Declaration for Angelus Block Concrete Masonry Units, a Type II I EPD, and in one of six Health Product Declarations, as applicable for its weight classification. • Contributes to green rating systems calculations, including Regional Materials, EPDs, and Material Ingredient Reporting. • Angelus Block CMU help facilitate and support many more strategies and credits, including Optimize Energy Performance, Construction Waste Management, and several within Indoor Environmental Quality. Angelus Block CMU contain no VOCs. See Sustainable Design & Angelus Block Products for detailed information. A copy is available from your representative, or as a download at www.AngelusBlock.com. Contact your representative for more information. www.AngelusBlock.com info@AngelusBlock.com Corporate Office & Plant: 11374 Tuxford St. Sun Valley, CA 91352 (818)767-8576 1705 N. Main St. Orange, CA 92865 (714) 637-8594 14515 Whittram Ave. Fontana, CA 92335 (909) 350-0244 252 E. Redondo Bch. BI. Gardena, CA 90248 (310) 323-8841 4575 E. Vineyard Ave. Oxnard, CA 93036 (805)485-1137 88-100 Fargo Canyon Rd. Indio, CA 92202 (760) 347-3245 WARNING: This product can expose you to Silica, crystalline (airborne particles of respirable size) which is 1 know to the State of California to cause cancer. For more information, go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov. 02019 Angelus Block Co., Inc. Flat Fence Wall Caps V BLOCK CO., INC. Since 1946 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Precision 4x2x16 Flat Cap 6x2x16 Flat Cap 8x2x16 Flat Cap Availability Limited inventory depending on width and color. Units can be made in any of our integral color options. Standards Concrete masonry units manufactured by Angelus Block Co., Inc. meet ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. Sustainable Features • This product is included in Environmental Product Declaration for Angelus Block Concrete Masonry Units, a Type II I EPD, and in one of six Health Product Declarations, as applicable for its weight classification. • Contributes to green rating systems calculations, including Regional Materials, EPDs, and Material Ingredient Reporting. • Angelus Block CMU help facilitate and support many more strategies and credits, including Optimize Energy Performance, Construction Waste Management, and several within Indoor Environmental Quality. Angelus Block CMU contain no VOCs. See Sustainable Design & Angelus Block Products for detailed information. A copy is available from your representative, or as a download at www.AngelusBlock.com. Contact your representative for more information. www.AngelusBlock.com info@AngelusBlock.com Corporate Office & Plant: 11374 Tuxford St. Sun Valley, CA 91352 (818)767-8576 1705 N. Main St. Orange, CA 92865 (714) 637-8594 14515 Whittram Ave. Fontana, CA 92335 (909) 350-0244 252 E. Redondo Bch. BI. Gardena, CA 90248 (310) 323-8841 4575 E. Vineyard Ave. Oxnard, CA 93036 (805)485-1137 88-100 Fargo Canyon Rd. Indio, CA 92202 (760) 347-3245 WARNING: This product can expose you to Silica, crystalline (airborne particles of respirable size) which is 1 know to the State of California to cause cancer. For more information, go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov. ©2019 Angelus Block Co., Inc. V BLOCK CO., INC. Since 1946 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Vertical Score Precision Vertical Score Running Bond 6x8x16 Vertical Score 2 -Sides 8x8x16 Vertical Score 1 -Side Features A single vertical score mid -length, 3/8 -in wide and deep, simulates a raked joint. For typical cmu with an 8 -in by 16 -in face, the effect is a grid of 8x8 squares that can effectively add accent or interest to the elevation. Availability 6 -inch Vertical Score 2 -Sides and 8 -inch Vertical Score 1 -Side may have limited in -stock availability. Otherwise, units are special order, including scores on two sides. Stretcher units may be available in closed end, open end, and bond beam configurations. All units are available in any of our 10x8x16 integral color options on special order. Vertical Score 1 -Side Standards Concrete masonry units manufactured by Angelus Block Co., Inc. meet ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry 12x8x16 Units. Vertical Score 1 -Side 16x8x16 Ring Vertical Score 1 -Side 16x8x16 Double Open End Vertical Score 1 -Side Cells and web configurations as shown are representational only, and actual configurations may differ. Fire Rating Solid grouted walls 8 -in wide and greater are rated at 4 hours, per CBC Table 721.1(2). For partially grouted walls, depending on the specified weight classification, 8 -inch wide units are 1 hour to 2 hours, and 12 -inch wide units are 2 hours to 3 hours. Sustainable Features • This product is included in Environmental Product Declaration for Angelus Block Concrete Masonry Units, a Type II I EPD, and in one of six Health Product Declarations, as applicable for its weight classification. • Contributes to green rating systems calculations, including Regional Materials, EPDs, and Material Ingredient Reporting. • Angelus Block CMU help facilitate and support many more strategies and credits, including Optimize Energy Performance, Construction Waste Management, and several within Indoor Environmental Quality. Angelus Block CMU contain no VOCs. See Sustainable Design & Angelus Block Products for detailed information. A copy is available from your representative, or as a download at www.AngelusBlock.com. Contact your representative for more information. www.AngelusBlock.com info@AngelusBlock.com Corporate Office & Plant: 11374 Tuxford St. Sun Valley, CA 91352 (818)767-8576 1705 N. Main St. Orange, CA 92865 (714) 637-8594 14515 Whittram Ave. Fontana, CA 92335 (909) 350-0244 252 E. Redondo Bch. BI. Gardena, CA 90248 (310) 323-8841 4575 E. Vineyard Ave. Oxnard, CA 93036 (805)485-1137 88-100 Fargo Canyon Rd. Indio, CA 92202 (760) 347-3245 Q WARNING: This product can expose you to Silica, crystalline (airborne particles of respirable size) which is know to the State of California to cause cancer. For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov. ©2019 Angelus Block Co., Inc. Pacific 71 SELECT DESIRED COLOR: ❑ SUNSET RED ❑ RED FLASHED ❑ MFG USED ❑ MFG WHITE ONLY ❑ BROWN FLASHED ❑ BURGUNDY ❑ PUEBLO ❑ ROSE TAN ❑ 590 DARK ❑ 590 LIGHT PRODUCTS INC. ❑ ROYAL SALTILLO ❑ STERLING GREY ❑ LIGHT IRONSPOT ❑ MEDIUM IRONSPOT ❑ DARK IRONSPOT ❑ AZTEC ❑ SANDSTONE ❑ 190 ❑ WESTWOOD BUFF ❑ OTHER 11-1/2" PLAN VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW N PACIFIC CLAY 14741 LAKE STREET LAKE ELSINORE, CA 92530 PHONE: (951) 674-2131 FAX: (951) 674-6383 www.pacificclay.com ELEVATION VIEW BRICK UNIT NOMENCLATURE DIMENSIONS (W X H X L) SERIES TEXTURE COVERAGE WEIGHT STOCK AVAILABILITY 1112 (NORMAN) PAVER 3-1/2" X 2-3/16" X 11-1/2" ELITE WIRE CUT 3.0 UNITS PER SQ. FT (1/2" JOINT) 6.7 LBS SUNSET RED & RED FLASHED STOCKED ALL OTHER COLORS - SPECIAL ORDER NOTES: 1. PACIFIC CLAY'S COLORS ARE PRODUCED FROM NATURAL CLAYS - COLOR RANGES ARE INHERENT IN THE PRODUCT AND SHOULD BE SAMPLED ACCORDINGLY 2. INDIVIDUAL BRICKS MAY VARY IN DIMENSION AND WEIGHT WHILE MAINTAINING ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM SPECIFICATIONS. 3. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE CONSIDERED TRUE AND REFLECT MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING. 6. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISIT www.CADdetails.com/info REFERENCE NUMBER 3182-027. PAVERS 1112 (NORMAN) PAVER: RED FLASH 3182-027 REVISION DATE 10/18/2012 PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT ©2012 CADdetails.com LTD. www.CADdetails.com Most Dependable Fountains, Inc. OPERATIONS MANUAL MODELS: 10145 SM & 10145 SMSS Most Dependable Fountains, IncTM 5705 Commander Drive Arlington, TN 38002 901-867-0039 www.mostdependable.com MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. 5705 COMMANDER DR. P.O. BOX 587 ARLINGTON, TN 38002-0587 PHONE: (901) 867-0039 www.mostdependable.com .0. 18" ACCESS DOOR OPTIONAL 10" STAINLESS STEEL CARRIER 18" 4... FILTER 10" PIPE BY MDF WATER SUPPLY BY OTHERS FRONT VIEW NOTES: 1. OPTIONAL STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE CARRIER RECOMMENDED. 2. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 3. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING. 4. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION. 5. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE. 6. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISITwww.CADdetails.com/infoAND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 3354-17.8. MODEL 10145SM 10145SM SHOWN WITH OPTIONAL 10" SS SURFACE CARRIER 611 3354-17.8 REVISION DATE 12/05/2016 PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT © 2016 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 1- r1)F PEDESTAL BOTTLE FILLER SPECIFICATIONS WATER QUALITY (LEAD FREE) • STANDARD PEDESTAL OR • STAINLESS STEEL PEDESTAL RECEPTOR BOWL BOTTLE FILLER SPOUT BUBBLER HEAD PUSH BAR CONTROL VALVE WATER SUPPLY (LEAD FREE) DRAIN FINISH INSTALLATION WINTERIZATION WARRANTY SHIPPING WEIGHT Section 9, California Proposition 6 and the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act. One piece weld construction with MDF standard 3/16" wall thickness. One piece weld construction with MDF standard 304 schedule 10 stainless steel. 18 gauge electro-polished stainless steel bowl. Bowl overlaps pedestal, preventing buildup of residue in visual drinking area. Optional stainless steel Bowl Strainer recommended for areas with sand. Not applicable on Model 10125 SMSS. Sanitary recessed nozzle. Stainless steel anti -squirt head (weighing a pound and a half) mounted with a lock nut and washer to prevent tampering. Lock nut pin holds bubbler in locked position to prevent twisting or turning. The MDF bubbler head has a unique design that features a steady stream trajectory and a built in natural shield from contamination. 304 stainless steel with circumference exceeding 8.6': Mushroom style push bar overlaps and prevents sand and other objects from sticking push bar in the ON position. Stainless steel bubbler housing standard. Requires less than 5 Ibs to operate. Non -cartridge 0 -ring valve delivers steady stream of water through an adjustable valve. This valve design is to operate and function at 30 to 80 PSI. Ideal operating pressure is 60 PSI. Maintenance free reinforced nylobraid tubing - this tubing is not plastic. It is supplied with a 1/2"MIP threaded inlet with stainless steel strainer. Union fittings at every connection. Supply line stops above grade. Water Filter is standard on this model. 1 1/2" schedule 40 PVC pipe. Drain line stops above grade. Oven baked powder coat. Choice of colors are:❑green, ❑ blue, 0 black, 0 red, ❑ yellow, 0 orange, 0 brown and 0 white. Textured color choices: 0 emerald, ❑ sapphire, 0 pyrite, 0 text -black, 0 burgundy, 0 gold vein, 0 copper and ❑ sandstone. Stainless steel models are powder coated for added protection. The color 0 chrome is an available option for stainless steel models only. Surface Mount installation is designed to be anchored on top of a new or existing surface (concrete, etc.) For a new surface, a surface mount carrier is recommended. For an existing surface, anchor bolts are to be used through the attached mounting plate. Surface Mount Fountains come standard with an access door with vandal resistant stainless steel screws. Shut off water and drain down. Remove water filter. One year warranty, labor not included. Model 10125 SM 110 Ibs Model 10135 SM 150 Ibs Model 10145 SM 245 Ibs Model 10150 SM 245 Ibs Model 10155 SM 195 Ibs Model 10125 SMSS Model 10135 SMSS Model 10145 SMSS Model 10150 SMSS Model 10155 SMSS 100 Ibs Model 10890 SM 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Model 10890 SMSS... 140 Ibs 235 Ibs Model 10895 SM 200 Ibs 235 Ibs Model 10895 SMSS... 190 Ibs 185 Ibs MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC.' 5705 COMMANDER DR. • ARLINGTON, TN 38002-0587 www.mostdependable.com (901) 867-0039 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.' All SM (surface mount) products are designed to be installed on the surface of a new or existing concrete slab. Your contractor needs to provide a 1 1/2" PVC drain line (when applicable) and water line thru finish grade. Connections are made to our SM products thru our access door, as shown on detail drawings. The water tubing is provided with a 1/2" male iron pipe connection. This is an excellent location for a cutoff valve. Surface Mount units are anchored to the existing concrete by means of 1/2" concrete shields with bolts or we recommend 1/2" quick bolts. Note: We offer an optional template which is designed to be poured in the concrete slab. It comes with the necessary vandal resistant stainless steel bolts and washers needed to anchor. All DB (direct bury) products are designed to be installed to a depth of 14" below grade. MDF provides 1 1/2" PVC drain line inside the pedestal (when applicable) to point of connection by others. MDF also provides reinforced nylobraid flexible tubing with a 1/2" male iron pipe thread for connection to water supply by others. MDF recommends an optional valve box using a PVC conduit to the pedestal. By using this option you have complete control of your product. Individual detail drawings available Online or by request. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. For more information: Most Dependable Fountains, Inc." www.mostdependable.com Info@mostdependable.com 901-867-0039 LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY Most Dependable Fountains, ln<' Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM warrants that all of its products are guaranteed against defective material or poor workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM liability under this warranty shall be discharged by furnishing without charge any goods, or part thereof, which shall appear to the Company upon inspection to be of defective material or not of first class workmanship. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM will not be liable for the cost of repairs, alterations or replacements, or for any expense connected therewith made by the owner or his agents. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM will not be liable for any damages caused by defective materials or poor workmanship, except for replacements, as provided above. Buyer agrees that Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM has made no other warranties either expressed or implied in addition to those above stated. The products manufactured by Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM is warranted to function if installation and maintenance instructions provided are adhered to. The units also must be used for the purpose for which they were intended. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. PRODUCT: QS-ELEV2436W-Z22 WEIGHT: 227 Ibs (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: CONCRETE COLOR: O QUAIL HILL RED X FRENCH GREY O NATURAL 0 BUNGALOW O MISSION WHITE 0 ADOBE TAUPE O LATTE 0 CUSTOM COLOR O HARVEST CONCRETE TEXTURE: X SMOOTH 0 SANDSTONE SEALER: STANDARD SEALER GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: LID MATERIAL: " LITECRETE O ALUMINUM E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE 0 STEEL INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". AUXILIARY VIEW SECTION VIEW PLAN TYPE PRODUCT PROJECT NAME LID COLORS: O BLACK O GRAY O BROWN O BLUE Z22 LID W/ 21"L. SECURITY STEEL CABLE & TAMPER PROOF BOLT 29 GALLON PLASTIC LINER (QS-PL29) 2"DIA. DRAIN HOLE (CENTERED) STD. 2"DIA. DRAIN HOLE (CENTERED) PLAN VIEW EASED EDGE R1/2" ELEVATION VIEW Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. r 19 1/8"SQ. LID -Z22 (22"SQ.) 36" F- IAFzEDWA E 1 QTY TYPE (LID Z22) 22"O.D. FUNNEL LID SECURITY CABLE AND BOLT CONSTRUCTION PLAN (QS-PLP29) SQUARE PLASTIC LINER DATE FILE NO. SHEET 2/7/17 174QS_ELEV2436W222X SCALE DRAWN BY: 3/4" = 1' - OF PC. NO. QC ITEM NO. X PRODUCT: Q -GROOVE -72T WEIGHT: 514 Ibs.(TABLE) 232 Ibs. (BENCH) (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: MADE WITH EDURACAST, AN ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE c) QUAIL HILL RED Q NATURAL O MISSION WHITE Q LATTE O HARVEST CONCRETE COLOR: X FRENCH GREY c) BUNGALOW O ADOBE TAUPE Q CUSTOM COLOR CONCRETE TEXTURE: X SMOOTH O SANDSTONE X POLISH (TOP) SEALER: STANDARD SEALER 4200 1 1/2" GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". ANCHORING METHOD BY OTHERS 1 1/2" 1 3/4"-t 3/4"-1' 30" —12"--f 9"— • SECTION VIEW 1-1 1=2 I=:.WAF? E L1 �T QT - TYPE SIKAFLEX F.S. SIKAFLEX QCO www.qcp-corp.com PLAN TYPE PRODUCT PROJECT NAME CONSTRUCTION PLAN 1/2"W. x 1/4"DEEP GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY 3" M 72" Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. 24" 8" TYP. 3"1YP. 1/2°W. x 1/4"DEEP GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY 2 3/4" 1 1/2" PLAN VIEW 30" 17 /2" 56" ELEVATION VIEW 1 1/2"---I 11" 29" 18° 6Q -GROOVE -72T 1 TABLE 1 GROOVE 1111114/ DATE 3/5/19 SCALE 1/2" = 1' PC. NO. FILE NO. 392_Q_GROOVE_72T DRAWN BY: QC ITEM NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 MIGUEL\3Ds FOR WEBSITE\392 O_GROOVE_72T\392_ 0 GROOVE_72T.dwg, 3/5/2019 2:06:29 PM, Miguel PRODUCT: Q2-ORION-L WEIGHT: 415 Ibs. (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: MADE WITH EDURACAST, AN ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CONCRETE COLOR: Q QUAIL HILL RED X FRENCH GREY Q NATURAL 0 BUNGALOW Q MISSION WHITE 0 ADOBE TAUPE O LATTE 0 CUSTOM COLOR O HARVEST CONCRETE TEXTURE: X SMOOTH 0 SANDSTONE X POLISH TOP SEALER: STANDARD SEALER 4200 ISOMETRIC VIEW GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". 17 11/16" SIDE VIEW FOOTING BY OTHERS SECTION VIEW (2) 1/4"DIA. S.S. INSERTS (2) 1/4"DIA. x 3 1/2"L S.S. ANCHOR BOLT 1 1/2"DIA. x 4"DEEP GROUT POCKETS BY OTHERS QCO www.qcp-corp.com PLAN TYPE PRODUCT PROJECT NAME Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. 47 7/8" PLAN VIEW BOTTOM VIEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN ELEVATION VIEW 18" 17 /8" 17 1 /16" 14 5/16" 18 13/16" 1 13/16° 1 8 9/16° I- I A IR I=>WAFR E L1 ST QT- TYPE 2 1/4"DIA. x 3 1/2"L S.S. ANCHOR BOLT Q2-ORION-L 1 QLINE BENCH 1 ORIO 1111M DATE FILE NO. SHEET 3/13/19 394_Q2_ORION_L SCALE DRAWN BY 3/4" = 1' PC. NO. QC ITEM NO. OF QC0 (https://qcp- MATERIALS I tlieLRORS 1 FIN SHES REQUEST QUOTE (HTTPS //QCP-CORP.COM/REQUEST_A_QUOTEJ1 EARCH ii13€ 1,6E Email: sales@qcp-corp.com (railto:sales@qcp-c ata n( corp.coaijrp. PRECAST CONCRETE WILL NEVER LOOK THE SAME We don't just make your project stand the test of time. At QCP, we make it personal. With our industry -leading array of finishes, you can choose just the right distinctive, custom look for your precast concrete site furnishings or masonry products — from shimmering metallics and bold glazes to traditional stone -like textures. Continue reading to learn which finishes are available for our different products and get ready to see precast concrete in a brand new light. Complete boxes or individual samples are available for all options below. STANDARD AGORA CATALINAtttt rimedead BASE MATERIALS ISRcI Standard (SRC) Our Standard steel -reinforced concrete products are available in QCP's Craftsman's Etch and Strata finishes, both of which perfectly complement the durable, high -quality nature of SRC. Producing beautiful, saturated colors and a stone -like appearance, our SRC options add value to your design or investment. LC Lite Crete When a lighter -weight product is called for --such as planters, removable bollards, waste containers and architectural trim--Lite Crete provides functional flexibility without sacrificing strength and durability. Lite Crete is offered in eight tones in our versatile Sandstone finish, for a refined, consistent look. Plus 15% over Standard. UL EC] Ultralight When a lighter -weight product is called for --such as planters, removable bollards, waste containers and architectural trim--Lite Crete provides functional flexibility without sacrificing strength and durability. Lite Crete is offered in eight tones in our versatile Sandstone finish, for a refined, consistent look. Plus 15% over Standard. Eduracast Enduracast is QCP's all new ultra high performance mix. Enduracast allows QCP to design new products with a thinner profile to take precast concrete to new places. FINISHES AND COLORS Find- Material CRAFTSMAN'S ETCH SRC LC UL EC A natural finish with a subtle grit and minor pitting. Great for a variety of installations. 703- 3434) (/application/files/7715/1890/2141/craftsman- (/application/files/8915/2038/0137/craftsman- (/application/files/8615/2038/0120/craftsman- (/application/files/5515/1890/2108/craftsman- quail-hill-red.jpg) natural.jpg) mission-white.jpg) latte.jpg) Quail Hill Red Natural Mission White Latte (/application/files/6915/1890/2072/craftsma n - ha rvest.j pg) Harvest QC0 (https://gcp- corp.com/) (/application/files/1615/1890/2048/craftsman- french-gray.jpg) French Gray Finish STRATA Material SRC LC UL EC REQUESTA QUOTE (HTTPS//QCP-CORP.COM/REQUEST_A_QUOTE) p-corp.com (mailtoSales@qcp-c0e({jm) corp.coeijrp. 703- 3434) (/application/files/7515/1890/2033/craftsman- (/application/files/5415/1890/2018/craftsman- bungalow.jpg) adobe-taupe.jpg) Bungalow Adobe Taupe A heavy surface texture with a deep organic pitting. This finish is great for applications that lend to a more rustic look. (/application/files/2815/2114/5377/strata_quail_hil4 gplication/files/8915/2038/0187/strata- (/application/files/1515/2038/0203/strata- (/application/files/2215/1890/3290/strata- Quail Hill Red natural.jpg) mission-white.jpg) latte.jpg) Natural Mission White Latte ZURN® Model 975XL Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly Application Designed for installation on water lines to protect against both backsiphonage and backpressure of contaminated water into the potable water supply. Assembly shall provide protection where a potential health hazard exists. Standards Compliance • ASSE® Listed 1013 • IAPMO® Listed • UL® Classified (less shut-off valves or with OS&Y valves • C -UL® Classified • CSA® Certified B64.4 • AWWA compliant C511 • Approved by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern California • NYC MEA 425-89-M VOL 3 Materials Main valve body Access covers Fasteners Elastomers Polymers Springs Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Stainless Steel, 300 Series Silicone (FDA Approved) Buna Nitrile (FDA Approved) NoryITM, NSF Listed Stainless Steel, 300 series Features Sizes: 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" Maximum working water pressure Maximum working water temperature Hydrostatic test pressure End connections Threaded Relief Valve discharge port: 3/4" - 1" - 0.63 sq. in. 11/4"-2" - 1.19sq. in. 175 PSI 180°F 350 PSI ANSI B1.20.1 Dimensions & Weights (do not include pkg.) MODEL 975XL SIZE in. mm DIMENSIONS (approximate) A in. mm B in. mm C in. mm in. D mm E in. mm F in. mm G in. mm WITH VALVES lbs. BALL kg 3/4 20 12 305 7 3/4 197 2 1/8 54 3 76 3 1/2 89 5 127 16 1/8 410 12 5.5 1 25 13 330 7 3/4 197 2 1/8 54 3 76 3 1/2 89 5 127 17 3/8 441 14 6.4 1 1/4 32 17 432 10 15/16 278 2 3/4 70 3 1/2 89 5 127 6 3/4 171 22 9/16 573 28 12.7 1 1/2 40 17 3/8 441 10 15/16 278 2 3/4 70 3 1/2 89 5 127 6 3/4 171 24 1/16 611 28 12.7 2 50 18 1/2 470 10 15/16 278 2 3/4 70 3 1/2 89 5 127 6 3/4 171 26 1/2 673 34 15.4 Options (Suffixes can be combined) ❑ - with full port QT ball valves (standard) ❑ L - less ball valves, male pipe thread ❑ U - with union ball valves ❑ MS - with integral relief valve monitor switch ❑ s - with bronze "Y" type strainer ❑ BMS - with battery operated monitor switch ❑ FDC - with fire hydrant connection; 2" only ❑ FT - with integral male 45° flare SAE test fitting ❑ TCU - with test cocks up ❑ V - with union swivel elbows (3/4" & 1") ❑ SE - with street elbows (3/4" & 1") ❑ PF - with Z -Bite TM push fit connections" (1/2"-1" only) ❑ PR - with Z-PressTM press fit connections* *Fittings ship in box with valve and must be threaded into valve by hand on site. Accessories ❑ Air gap (Model AG) ❑ Repair kits ❑ Thermal expansion tank (Mdl. XT) ❑ Soft seated check valve (Model 40XL) ❑ Shock arrester (Model 1250XL) ❑ QT -SET Quick Test Fitting Set ❑ Ball valve handle locks Zurn Industries, LLC 1 Wilkins 1747 Commerce Way, Paso Robles, CA U.S.A. 93446 Ph. 855-663-9876, Fax 805-238-5766 In Canada 1 Zurn Industries Limited 7900 Goreway Drive, Unit 10, Brampton, Ontario L6T 5W6, 877-892-5216 www.zurn.com Rev. E Date: 12/19 Document No. BF-975XL Product No. Model 975XL Page 1 of 2 Flow Characteristics O Rated Flow (established by approval agencies) PRESSURE LOSS (PSIG) MODEL 975XL 3/4", 1", 1 1/4", 1 1/2" & 2" (STANDARD & METRIC) FLOW RATES (Vs) 1.26 2.52 3.8 5.0 3.2 6.3 9.5 12.6 15.8 Q 20 20 1 1/2" 137 •- (40m rn 15 � 15 z" (5omm) 103 0 3/4" (20mm) 1 (25mm) 1 1/4" (32mm) I� 10 10 5 0 20 40 60 80 5 0 FLOW RATES (GPM) Typical Installation Local codes shall govern installation requirements. To be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code. Unless otherwise specified, the assembly shall be mounted at a mini- mum of 12" (305mm) and a maximum of 30" (762mm) above adequate drains with sufficient side clearance for testing and maintenance. The installation shall be made so that no part of the unit can be submerged. FLOOR FLOOR DRAIN DIRECTION OF FLOW INDOOR INSTALLATION (Shown w/optional BMS) 50 100 150 200 w 69 W 35 a 250 Capacity thru Schedule 40 Pipe Pipe size 5 ft/sec 7.5 ft/sec 10 ft/sec 15 ft/sec 1/8" 1 1 2 3 1/4" 2 2 3 5 3/8" 3 4 6 9 1/2" 5 7 9 14 3/4" 8 12 17 25 1" 13 20 27 40 1 1/4" 23 35 47 70 1 1/2" 32 48 63 95 2" 52 78 105 167 OPTIONAL WATER METER PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INLET SHUT-OFF DRAIN DIRECTION OF FLOW OUTDOOR INSTALLATION Specifications The Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer shall be shall be ASSE® Listed 1013, rated to 180°F, and supplied with full port ball valves. The main body and access covers shall be bronze (ASTM B 584), the seat ring and all internal polymers shall be NSF® Listed NorylTM and the seat disc elastomers shall be silicone. The first and second checks shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the relief valve or the entire device from the line. If installed indoors, the installation shall be supplied with an air gap adapter and integral monitor switch. The Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer shall be a ZURN WILKINS Model 975XL. Zurn Industries, LLC 1 Wilkins 1747 Commerce Way, Paso Robles, CA U.S.A. 93446 Ph. 855-663-9876, Fax 805-238-5766 In Canada 1 Zurn Industries Limited 7900 Goreway Drive, Unit 10, Brampton, Ontario L6T 5W6, 877-892-5216 www.zurn.com Page 2 of 2 VALVE BOX PRODUCT LIST RECTANGLE VALVE BOXES MODEL DESCRIPTION VB-STD VB-STD-H VB-STD-P VB-STD-B VB-STD-L VB-STD-PL VB-STD-BKL VB-STD-6EXT-B VB-STD-6EXT VB-JMB VB-JMB-H VB-JMB-P VB-JMB-B VB-JMB-L VB-JMB-PL VB-JMB-BKL VB-JMB-6EXT-B VB-JMB-6EXT VB-SPR-H VB-SPR-L VB-SPR-PL VB-MAX-H VB-MAX-L VB-MAX-PL Standard - Black Body with Green Lid Standard - Black Body with Green Lid + Lock Standard - Black Body with Purple Lid Standard - Black Body Only Standard - Lid Only - Green Standard - Lid Only - Purple Standard - Lid Only - Black Standard 6" Extension - Black Body Only Standard 6" Extension - Black Body with Green Lid Jumbo - Black Body with Green Lid Jumbo - Black Body with Green Lid + Lock Jumbo - Black Body with Purple Lid Jumbo- Black Body Only Jumbo- Lid Only- Green Jumbo- Lid Only- Purple Jumbo - Lid Only - Black Jumbo 6" Extension - Black Body Only Jumbo 6" Extension - Black Body with Green Lid SuperJumbo - Black Body with Green Lid + 2 Locks SuperJumbo - Lid Only- Green SuperJumbo - Lid Only- Purple Maxi Jumbo - Black Body with Green Lid + 2 Locks Maxi Jumbo- Lid Only -Green Maxi Jumbo- Lid Only- Purple ROUND VALVE BOXES MODEL DESCRIPTION VB-1ORND VB-1ORND-H VB-1ORND-B VB-1ORND-L VB-1ORND-PL VB-1ORND-BKL VB-7RND VB-7RND-P VB-7RND-BK VB-6RND 10" Round - Black Body with Green Lid 10" Round - Black Body with Green Lid + Lock 10" Round - Black Body Only 10" Round - Lid Only- Green 10" Round - Lid Only- Purple 10" Round - Lid Only- Black 7" Round - Black Body with Green Lid 7" Round - Black Body with Purple Lid 7" Round - Black Body with Black Lid 6" Round - Green Body with Green Lid LOCKING BOLTS FOR VALVE BOXES MODEL DESCRIPTION VB-LOCK-H VB-LOCK-P Locking - Hex Bolt, Washer and Clip Locking - Penta Bolt, Washer and Clip R41N*BIRD® Rain Bird Corporation 6991 East Southpoint Road Tucson, AZ 85706 Phone: (520) 741-6100 Fax: (520) 741-6522 Technical Service and Support (800) RAINBIRD (U.S. and Canada only) Registered Trademark of Rain Bird Corporation © 2011 Rain Bird Corporation 4/11 Rain Bird Corporation 970 West Sierra Madre Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 812-3400 Fax: (626) 812-3411 Specification Hotline (800) 458-3005 (U.S. and Canada only) Rain Bird International, Inc. P.O. Box 37 Glendora, CA 91741 Phone: (626) 963-9311 Fax: (626) 852-7343 www.rainbird.com RAIN*BIRD® VB Series Valve Boxes Professional grade. Excellent value. D39534C Knock -outs are easily removed. Reattach the knock -outs to keep out backfill dirt. Designed For the Irrigation Professional Rain Bird has built a better valve box. Strength and Stability • Multiple sizes and shapes are designed with corrugated sides and wide flange bases for maximum durability, compression strength and stability. Smart Lid Design • Designed with no holes to keep out pests, beveled edges to minimize damage potential from turf equipment, and for easy hand and shovel access. Flexible Installations • Interlocking stacking capabilities, extension models and pipe hole knockouts support deeper and flexible installations. Environmentally Friendly • Earth -friendly, LEED-compliant material made of 100% recycled materials (black boxes and black lids only). Rain Bird® Valve Box Patented Features Interlock two valve boxes for deeper installations. Anatomy of a Better Box MULTIPLE SIZES AND SHAPES make it easy to choose the right boxes for the job. SHOVEL ACCESS SLOT for easy removal of lid. BOLT HOLE KNOCK -OUT keeps critters out when bolt is not used. PATENTED INTERLOCKING FEATURE locks two boxes together when fitted bottom -to -bottom for deep installations. LEED-COMPLIANT 100% recycled material in black bodies and black lids. CORRUGATED SIDES for greater strength before AND after knock -outs are removed. PIPE HOLE KNOCK -OUTS built into the sides. PATENTED KNOCK -OUT RETAINERS hold removed knock -outs in place and keep out backfill dirt. BEVELED LID EDGES prevent damage from lawn equipment. DIMENSIONS AND ACCOMMODATIONS VBVALVEBOXES EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS ACCOMMODATIONS T=Top B=Bottom VALVE BOX EXTENSIONS EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 6" ROUND SERIES 7" ROUND SERIES (VB-6RND) (VB-7RND) 5.7" T x 9.0" H x 7.5"B (14.6cm x22.9 cm x 19.0 cm) Two pre -molded side openings accommodate upto a 2.0" (5.0 cm) diameter pipe. 10. STANDARDS" (VB-STD-6EXT) 20.0" Lx 14.75" W x 6.75" H (50.8 cm x 37.5cm x 17.1 cm) 6.6" T x 9.0" H x 8.5" B (16.8cm x22.9 cm x 21.5 cm) Four equally spaced knock -outs accommodate upto a 2.0" (5.0 cm) diameter pipe. JUMBO6" (VB-JMB-6EXT) oil STANDARD 10" ROUND SERIES RECTANGULAR SERIES JUMBO RECTANGULAR (VB-10RND) (VB-STD) SERIES (VB-JMB) 8.9"Tx10.0"Hx11.9"B (25.1 cm x 25.4 cm x 30.2 cm) Four equally spaced knock -outs accommodate up to a 2.0" (5.0 cm) diameter pipe. Optional lock option. 24.4" Lx 17.9" W x 6.75" H (62.0 cm x45.5 cm x 17.1 cm) VALVE BOX LIDS Green and Black Purple- Non -potable Water T:14.5" Lx 9.4" W x 12.1"H 8:18.7"Lx14.1"W (T:36.8 cm x 23.9 cm x 30.7 cm) (B: 47.6 cm x35.9 cm) Two large center knock -outs accommodate uptoa 3.5" (8.9cm) diameter pipe and eleven other knock -outs accommodateupto2.0" (5.0 cm) diameter pipe. Optional lock option. T:18.7" L x 12.2" W x 12.1" H B: 24.0" L x 17.5" W (T: 47.4cm x30.9 cm x30.7 cm) (B: 61.1 cm x 44.3 cm) Two large center knock -outs accommodate uptoa 3.5" (8.9 cm) diameter pipe. Optional lock option. SUPERJUMBO RECTANGULAR SERIES (VB-SPR) T: 22.5" L x 13.0" W x 15.0"H 8:28.8"Lx19.5"W (T: 57.1 cm x33.0 cm x38.1 cm) (B: 73.1 cm x 49.6 cm) Thirteen knock -outs accommodate uptoa 3.5" (8.9 cm) diameter pipe. Includes two stainless steel boltsand clipsto securely fasten thelidtothebody. INTERLOCKING BOTTOMS 1 NON -POTABLE LIDS Patentedfeaturefor deep installations. All Provide easy identification of boxesexcept6" Round matesecurelytogether. non -potable water supplies. MAXI JUMBO RECTANGULAR SERIES (VB-MAX) T:29.4" L x 16.4" W x 18.0"H 8:35.1"Lx21.9"W (T: 74.7 cm x41.7 cm 45.7 cm) (B: 89.1 cm x 55.4 cm) Eighteen knock -outs accommodate uptoa 3.5" (8.9 cm) diameter pipe. I ncludes two stainless steel bolts and clipsto securely fasten the lid to the body. VALVE BOX LOCK Secure lids with hex or penta bolt locks TECHLINE® CV Maximum Uniformity in Subsurface and On -Surface Including Slopes 17mm DRIP NE APPLICATIONS • Subsurface or on -surface installations • Turf, shrubs, trees and flowers • Sports turf, tennis courts, golf courses • Slopes • Longer lateral runs • Curved, angular or narrow planting areas • High traffic/high liability areas • Areas subject to vandalism • High wind areas • At -grade windows • Green walls, green roofs • Raised planters SPECIFICATIONS • Broadest choice of emitter flow rates: 0.26, 0.4, 0.6 and 0.9 GPH • Emitter spacings: 12",18" and 24" (24" spacing available for 0.6 and 0.9 GPH only) • Pressure compensation range: 14.5 to 58 psi • Bending radius: 7" • Maximum recommended system pressure: 58 psi • Minimum pressure required: 14.5 psi • Tubing diameter: 0.66" OD; 0.56" ID; 0.050" wall • Coil lengths: 100', 250', 500',1,000' • Recommended minimum filtration: 120 mesh • Diaphragm made of silicon • ISO 9261 Standard Compliance FEATURES & BENEFITS 2 psi CHECK VALVE IN EACH EMITTER All emitters turn on and off at the same time, maximizing balance of application. Holds back up to 4.6' of water (elevation change). No low emitter drainage, great on slopes. Delivers more precise watering. UNIQUE PATENTED EMITTER DESIGN WITH PHYSICAL ROOT BARRIER Offset flow path, extra large bath area and raised outlet prevent root intrusion without chemical reliance. PRESSURE COMPENSATING Precise and equal amounts of water are delivered over a broad pressure range. CONTINUOUS SELF -FLUSHING EMITTER DESIGN Flushes debris as it is detected, throughout operation, not just at the beginning or end of a cycle, ensuring uninterrupted emitter operation. EMITTER WITH ANTI -SIPHON FEATURE Prevents ingestion of debris into tubing caused by vacuum. SELF-CONTAINED, ONE-PIECE DRIPLINE CONSTRUCTION Assures reliable, easy installation. FLEXIBLE UV RESISTANT TUBING Adapts to any planting area shape - tubing curves at a 7" radius. For on -surface installations withstands heat and direct sun. MAKES INSTALLATION QUICKER Does not require air/vacuum relief vent or automatic flush valve for on -surface or subsurface installations. Use manual flush valves at exhaust headers. TECHLINE LASER TECHLINE CV ETCHING t MADE WITH FOR EASY POST CONSUMER IDENTIFICATION RECYCLED MATERIAL QUALIFIES FOR USE ON LEED PROJECTS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR DRIPLINES Netafim warrants any polyethylene tubing and driplines (Techline® HCVXR, HCVXR-RW and RWP, CV, DL, RW, RWP and EZ) sold to be free from original defects in materials and workmanship for a period of seven (7) years and ten (10) years for environmental stress cracking - from the date of original delivery. GENERAL GUIDELINES TURF SHRUB & GROUNDCOVER CLAY SOIL LOAM SOIL SANDY SOIL COARSE SOIL CLAY SOIL LOAM SOIL SANDY SOIL COARSE SOIL EMITTER FLOW 0.26 GPH 0.4 GPH 0.6 GPH 0.9 GPH 0.26 GPH 0.4 GPH 0.6 GPH 0.9 GPH EMITTER SPACING 18" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 12" 12" 20" LATERAL(ROW)SPACING 18" 20" 22" 12" 14" 18" 12" 14" 18" 12" 14" 16" 18" 21" 24" 18" 21" 24" 16" 18" 20" 16" 18" BURIAL DEPTH Bury evenlythroughoutthe zone from 4"to 6" On -surface or bury evenly throughout the zone to a maximum of 6" APPLICATION RATE (INCHES/HOUR) 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.64 0.55 0.43 0.98 0.84 0.65 1.48 1.27 1.11 0.19 0.16 0.14 030 0.26 0.23 0.73 0.65 0.59 1.11 0.99 0.89 TIME TO APPLY IA" OF WATER (MINUTES) 80 89 97 23 27 35 15 18 23 10 12 13 80 93 106 50 58 66 20 23 26 13 15 17 Following these maximum spacing guidelines, emitter flow selection can be increased if desired by the designer. 0.9 GPH flow rate available for areas requiring higher infiltration rates, such as coarse sandy soils. Note: 0.4, 0.6 and 0.9 GPH are nominal flow rates. Actual flow rates used in the calculations are 0.42, 0.61 and 0.92 GPH. SPECIFYING MODEL NUMBER Reference for Ordering Information Chart I Techline CV =TLCV Dripline 0 EMITTER FLOW RATE 0.26 GPH =26 0.4 G P H = 4 0.6 GPH = 6 0.9 GPH = 9 SAMPLE MODEL NUMBER ()EMITTER SPACING 12" = 12 18" = 18 24" = 24 COIL LENGTH 100' = 01 250' = 025 500' = 05 1,000' = 10 BLANK TUBING MODEL NUMBERS: 100' = TLCV001 250' = TLCV0025 500' = TLCV005 1,000' = TLCV010 FLOW RATE VS. PRESSURE 1.0 FLOW RATE (GPH) 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 PH "-0.6 GPH G PH 0:26-GFH 10 20 30 40 50 58 PRESSURE (psi) Techline CV emitters open at 14.5 psi and close at 2 psi. FLOW PER 100 FEET EMITTER SPACING 0.26 EMITTER 0.4 EMITTER 0.6 EMITTER 0.9 EMITTER GPH GPM GPH GPM GPH GPM GPH GPM 12" 26.4 0.44 42.3 0.71 60.8 1.01 92.5 1.54 18" 17.6 0.29 28.2 0.47 40.5 0.68 61.6 1.03 24" - - - - 30.4 0.51 46.2 0.77 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF A SINGLE LATERAL (FEET) EMITTER SPACING 12" 18" 24" EMITTER FLOW (GPH) 0.26 0.4 0.6 0.9 0.26 0.4 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.9 INLET PRESSURE 20 psi 331 242 190 144 468 344 270 204 342 260 25 psi 413 302 238 180 584 429 338 257 430 326 35 psi 518 380 299 227 737 540 426 323 542 412 45 psi 594 436 343 260 845 620 489 371 622 472 55 psi 655 480 378 287 932 684 539 410 686 522 60 psi 681 500 393 298 969 713 561 426 716 544 ORDERING INFORMATION FLOW RATE EMITTER SPACING COIL LENGTH MODEL NUMBER 100' TLCV26-1201 12" 250' TLCV26-12025 0.26 GPH 1,000' TLCV26-1210 100' TLCV26-1801 18" 250' TLCV26-18025 1,000' TLCV26-1810 100' TLCV4-1201 12" 250' TLCV4-12025 0.4 GPH 1,000' TLCV4-1210 100' TLCV4-1801 18" 250' TLCV4-18025 1,000' TLCV4-1810 100' TLCV6-1201 250' TLCV6-12025 12" 500' TLCV6-1205 1,000' TLCV6-1210 100' TLCV6-1801 0.6 GPH 250' TLCV6-18025 18„ 500' TLCV6-1805 1,000' TLCV6-1810 100' TLCV6-2401 24" 250' TLCV6-24025 1,000' TLCV6-2410 100' TLCV9-1201 250' TLCV9-12025 12" 500' TLCV9-1205 1,000' TLCV9-1210 100' TLCV9-1801 0.9 GPH 250' TLCV9-18025 18" 500' TLCV9-1805 1,000' TLCV9-1810 100' TLCV9-2401 24" 250' TLCV9-24025 1,000' TLCV9-2410 100' TLCV001 BLANK TUBING 250' TLCV0025 500' TLCV005 1,000' TLCV010 NETAFIM NETAFIM USA CS 888 638 2346 Vwwv.netafimusa.com TLCV 1/18 a D C&Ma M ® ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER CAISENSE WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SPECIFICATION 4 4 4 ♦ t 4 ‚makinWater work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION aD CCLIZZ�CCC�C CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION HOW TO SPECIFY CONTROLLER: Step 1 Controller Model Number, Number of stations desired. The first section of the part number identification process is deciding the model of Calsense irrigation controller that you want to order. The ET2000e portion is listed first, then the amount of stations that you require. Controller Model Number Number of Stations -8 stations -12 stations -16 stations ET2000e -24 stations -32 stations -40 stations -48 stations PART NUMBER EXAMPLE: ET2000e-48 Step 2 Communications. The second step of the part number process is to identify the communications options that you want to utilize on the controller. Currently Calsense offers two (2) Communications options per Irrigation controller. The Choices are as follows: (-R) Phone Modem: This may be a site with a single irrigation controller, or a project where each irrigation controller will have its own phone line. The customer requests a RJ-11 phone jack from the telephone company at the location of each irrigation controller. The irrigation controller is plugged directly into the phone jack. Each Irrigation controller used with its own phone line is specified as a Model —R. (-M) Multi -Controller Communications System: This is a location with several irrigation controllers sharing a single phone line, or another type of communication. A phone line with an RJ-11 phone jack supplied by the telephone company, or a particular communications device is installed at the most feasible controller location. All groups of these controllers must have one controller with the Communications option. The other controllers in the group will all be designated as —M controllers. This option includes the —M interface and cables. All irrigation controllers are hardwired to the communications controller using Paige P -7171-D communications cable in conduit. Restrictions: • There can only be up to 31 irrigation controllers on one multi -controller communications system. • The maximum total length of all cable on one multi -controller communication system is 5,000 feet. • Communication cable is to be direct pull, installed in conduit. Splices are not recommended. • If a project has more than 32 irrigation controllers or a cable length of more than 5,000 foot. A second multi -controller communications chain must be set-up. This must include a second communications controller, and communications cable to communicate with the second group of irrigation controllers. (-LR) Local Radio: The Calsense Local Radio system is designed for wireless communications in local areas. A central `HUB' located at the project site will communicate with controllers in a local area. The system consists of a telephone modem at the central computer, one or more LR-HUB's, and —LR controllers. Several HUB's can be combined in a central system. The communication type can be mixed with other communication type controllers, hard wired controller, and phone controllers in the same central system. The Calsense Local Radio system also offers the flexibility of multiple irrigation controllers making water work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION sharing one Radio Modem. An advantage of using the Local Radio system is there are no monthly fees. Equipment Needed: Central: The central computer uses a telephone modem for the Base Station to communicate to the LR-HUB's. Local Radio communications will work only with Command Center for Windows software. LR-HUB: The LR-HUB is mounted in a standard irrigation controller cabinet. The HUB panel is the same size as a standard controller panel. The HUB contains a radio and a telephone modem. The central computer communicates to the HUB through the telephone modem. The HUB communicates to the —LR controllers by Local Radio. The LR-HUB requires an antenna, an LR-STICK (stick antenna) or LR-YAGI (Yagi antenna). Optionally the LR-HUB may be directly connected to the central computer through standard serial cable, or may also be mounted in a Calsense SSE enclosure. -LR: The —LR is a controller with a local Radio installed. It is mounted in a standard irrigation controller cabinet. It can also be mounted in the Calsense SSE -R enclosure. The controller requires an antenna, either the LR-DOME dome type antenna, or the LR-YAGI Yagi type antenna. The SSE -R enclosure comes with the LR-DOME antenna installed when specified for use with Local Radio. Note: It is also possible to chain —M controllers to the —LR controller via Paige cable (see —M communications for definition). This combination would be referred to as a —MLR. (-SR) Spread Spectrum Radio: The Spread Spectrum Radio option is used when a hardwire link between controllers is not possible. The Spread Spectrum Radio can be thought of as replacing the hardwire link with radios. The Spread Spectrum radio operates in a non -licensed radio frequency band. This radio utilizes a frequency hopping technology to eliminate interference. The —SR option would be primarily used on a site where the FLOWSENSE® option is used. The —SR option may be combined with hardwire link on a site to create a flexible and cost efficient communication network. Equipment Needed: Multiple controllers (Radio Link only): The project site consisting of multiple irrigation controllers. Each of the irrigation controllers is specified as a —SR communications option. Each controller requires an antenna, the standard type of antenna used on an enclosure is the dome antenna and is specified as an SR -DOME. The irrigation controllers will be setup to communicate between themselves with the Spread Spectrum radio using unique communication addresses. Multiple controllers (with Hardwire link): The project site will consist of multiple irrigation controllers. One of the controllers will be specified as the master radio with the designation —MSR communications option. The controller with the — MSR option requires an antenna, the standard type of antenna used on an enclosure is the dome antenna and is specified as a SR -DOME. The other irrigation controllers will be specified with the —M communications option. These will be linked to the master radio controller using Paige P -7171-D communications cable in conduit. You may have several controllers on a site communicating with the radio link only along with several other controllers on the same site with a hardwire link. This allows the designer to mix and match the two communications options to provide the most flexible communications network possible. Restrictions: • A Radio survey must be conducted by Calsense. There is no -charge for this service. • The Radio requires a clear line of site for communications. (-EN) Ethernet communications: The Calsense Ethernet communications option provides reliable data communication links utilizing the customers existing Ethernet network. The option is designed to connect the Calsense ET2000e controller with serial interface to an existing Ethernet. The Ethernet option is typically used where a user has easy access to an existing Ethernet network. Typical projects include a school campus, business campus or a city with buildings that are linked with an Ethernet network. making Water work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION aD CCLIZZ�CCC�C The Computer, when connected to a network and operating the Calsense Command Center software, will access any controller that is connected to the Ethernet network. The Calsense controller is specified with a —EN option when one controller is sharing one Ethernet connection. The Ethernet communication option is compatible with the Calsense ET2000e controller. The Calsense Ethernet option is integrated into the controller and does not require a separate power source. This arrangement provides for a small highly dependable package. The user must supply an Ethernet (RJ45) connection at the controller location with the network set to have access to this connection. The Ethernet network must also be set to assign a static IP address to the ET2000e controller. (-GR) GPRS Modem: The GPRS radio delivers reliable, long distance data communication links through the advantage of wireless technology. The Calsense GPRS radio is integrated into the controller and does not require a separate power source. Compact in size, the GPRS fits into the standard Calsense wall mountable enclosure. The GPRS system utilizes Internet Protocol (IP) addressing, assigning a permanent IP address to each modem when activated. Built-in encryption maintains the security of the data transmitted. The system is always "on" and never requires dial up or delays in connecting. A central computer operating the Calsense Command Center software requires a GPRS host radio for access to the GPRS network. The user is required to enter into an agreement with a third -party network service provider. The associated monthly fees paid to this provider are the responsibility of the user. These fees are estimated to be about $35.00 per month per field controller. A radio survey is required before final acceptance of GPRS radio as the communication method. Please consult with your service provider for proper coverage. The GPRS option requires the end user to sign a service contract with a third -party network provider. (-FOM) Fiber Optic Modem: The Calsense Fiber Optic Modem communications option provides High -reliability traffic signalization networking. This option is designed to connect the Calsense ET2000e controller with a Fiber Optic Modem to a Fiber Optic Network. Typical Projects include Freeway or highway systems that are linked via Fiber Optic Network. The Computer, when connected to a network and operating the Calsense Command Center software, will access any controller that is connected to the Fiber Optic network. The Calsense controller is specified as a -FOM option when one controller is shearing one Fiber Optic connection. The Fiber Optic communications option is compatible with the Calsense ET2000e controller. The Calsense Fiber Optic option is integrated into the controller and does not require a separate power source. This arrangement provides for a small highly dependable package. COMMUNICATIONS OPTION CHART COMM1 COMM2 DEFINITION -R Phone Line capability, one phone line — one controller -M -M Ability to chain controllers together with cable and share the first communications option -LR -LR Local Radio, one Local Radio — one controller -SR -SR Spread Spectrum radio, one Spread Spectrum Radio — one controller -EN -EN Ethernet device, one Ethernet device — one controller -GR -GR GPRS modem, one GPRS modem — one controller -FOM -FOM Fiber Optic Modem, self healing, single mode. making water work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION Note: Certain communications option combinations are non -practical these include: -EN-EN -FOM-FOM -G R -FO M -GR-EN PART NUMBER EXAMPLE: ET2000e-48-M-SR Note: The following communications types require an antenna, (-GR), (-LR), (-SR). Note: If no communication option is desired just leave the part number the way it is and move on to step three. Step 3 Options. The Calsense irrigation controller allows you to select a number of options that you can include in the overall design they are as follows: (-F) Multiple Flow Meter Interface: All Models of the Calsense controller can receive up to three separate flow meter inputs on projects consisting of more than one water source for irrigating landscape. The controller will sum up the readings of all flow sensors connected. The irrigation controller is specified as a (-F) controller. The first flow meter is wired to the irrigation controller using the standard Calsense red and black flow meter wires. The second and third flow meters are wired to the irrigation controller using an additional wire harness supplied when a (-F) option is specified. (-G) ET Gage interface: All Models of the Calsense controller can receive the ET Gage interface option. This allows the controller to collect Evapotransperation data via an ET gage. The controller keeps a table of the last 28 days of ET. When it comes time to irrigate a station, the controller adds up the ET numbers since the last irrigation. If it has been 3 days since it irrigated, it will total the first three numbers in the table. If these numbers are .20", .15", and .10", the total would be .45". The controller will multiply this number by the station %of or ET factor to calculate how much water to apply (% of ET factor is used to adjust for irrigation efficiency and crop type). If the % of ET factor is 60%, the controller would multiply .6 times .45" to get .30". Using the precipitation rate stored in the controller, the run time is calculated. If the precipitation rate is 2.00" per hour, the run time will be 15 minutes (1/4 hr. The user can program the cycle and soak feature to divide up the 15 minutes into individual run times. If the cycle time is set to 5 minutes, there will be one start time and two repeats. If there is no signal from the ET Gage, historical data is used as a back-up. (-RB) Rain Bucket interface: The Calsense Irrigation controllers can keep a record of accumulated rainfall when using the Calsense Model RB-1 Rain Bucket. The irrigation controller is specified as a —RB controller. The rain bucket consists of a tipping mechanism which measures every 0.01 inches of rainfall, and is used in conjunction with the daily ET mode of the irrigation controller. The Calsense controller receives this information and takes into account the actual amount and rate of rainfall when calculating station run times. The measured water drains out of the bottom of the housing. Therefore the bucket requires no additional service of any kind. It is completely automatic. One rain bucket can be shared by multiple controllers, or Rain Bucket data can be shared by multiple controllers through the Calsense Command Center software. (-WG) Wind Gage interface: The Calsense Irrigation controllers can monitor wind speed using the Calsense Model WG-1 Wind Gage. The irrigation controller is specified as a —WG controller. The wind gage sends pulses to the Calsense irrigation controller, which in turn automatically stops irrigation once the wind speed increases above a user set limit. As wind dies down, the Calsense irrigation controller will resume irrigation where it left off. The wind gage cannot share with other controllers through the Calsense Command Center Central System (unless the -FL option is in use with all other controllers in the same chain). making Water work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION aD CCLIZZ�CCC�C (-FL) FLOWSENSE® interface: The Calsense FLOWSENSE® option is available on the ET2000 and ET2000e Irrigation controllers. This option is used when one or more controllers are sharing one or more Master Valves, Flow Meters, or Pumps. The Calsense FLOWSENSE® option is designed to allow the user to setup and operate this feature directly in the field with the Calsense controller. There is no requirement for a central computer to operate this feature. The FLOWSENSE® option makes use of innovative technology to cooperatively communicate between controllers and manage the proper operation of irrigation valves. The FLOWSENSE® option allows management of the following irrigation system components: • Eliminates relays when sharing pumps or Master Valves with several controllers. • Manages the number of valves operating based on irrigation system flow capacities. • Eliminates scheduling conflicts with multiple controllers. • Provides water management capabilities with or without a flow meter. • Allows Wind / ET to be shared to other controllers. • All of these features are done in the field without a central. The cooperative nature of FLOWSENSE® allows the sharing of flow readings, Master Valve and pump information between controllers. The sharing of information is done through a mutual two-way communication hardware link between controllers. The hardware link is made up of hardware, radio or a combination of both. FLOWSENSE® Water Management: The Calsense FLOWSENSE® option allows the user to control the number of valves turned ON based on flow capacities. By doing this the water window is minimized and the system flow rate is never exceeded. Pumps operate at their capacities and the entire irrigation system is operated at maximum efficiency. The user is able to select the system maximum flow rate with or without pumps. In addition, the user can control the number of valves coming ON for areas of the mainline based on mainline capacities. The final result is an irrigation system operating at maximum efficiency, all controlled in the field through the irrigation controllers. The FLOWSENSE® technology will also allow the user to turn pumps ON and OFF by program. Manual operation through the manual key on the controller or through the optional Radio Remote is combined with the FLOWSENSE® technology so that even during programmed irrigation these functions will not overflow the system causing a reduction in performance. Flow Monitoring: The FLOWSENSE® option is able to pinpoint valves with high flows due to broken pipes or low flows. The controllers will identify which valve is causing the problem, shut this valve down and alert the user for quick and easy repair. The controllers will also identify problem valves based on electrical problems such as shorted solenoids or broken wires. When a faulty valve is detected and shut off, the controller will find another valve to turn on, always working to shorten the water window and maximize pumping efficiencies, while at the same time not exceeding the irrigation system capacity. Communications Options The FLOWSENSE® option will be able to communicate between the controllers with a hardwire link or an unlicensed low wattage radio link, or even a combination of both, on the same project. The FLOWSENSE® option is also available in a single controller if the user needs to irrigate based on system watering capacities. Multiple Controllers: The FLOWSENSE® option is especially powerful when operated on a project using several controllers. It is necessary for each controller to be specified with the —FL option for proper communication between controllers. In addition to the features previously mentioned, the controllers make full use of the FLOWSENSE® technology by sharing flow, Master Valve and pump information making water work since 1986 o�I L.iZg M® ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION between themselves. The irrigation system is water managed in the field through user-friendly menus. Hard Link: The FLOWSENSE® option when specified as a —FL option and with the appropriate hardwire link (-M) will allow the user to link several controllers with the standard 4 conductor communications cable. The — FL option, when combined with a hardwire chain link, is used when more than one controller is sharing more than one point of connection with more than one controller. This option allows several controllers to share the irrigation programs and flow information between themselves for: • Monitoring of system flows. • Avoiding scheduling conflicts between multiple controllers. • Minimizing water window by maximizing number of valves on without exceeding system flow capacity. • Turning OFF valves with excessive flow rates due to broken lateral lines. • Tracking water usage and comparing to a water budget. • Elimination of relays when sharing pumps and Master Valves. Radio Link: The FLOWSENSE® option, when specified as a —FL option and a —SR communications option, allows the user to link several controllers with unlicensed frequency hopping radios. This radio link can be viewed as simply replacing the hardwire described in the hardwire link section and is available only with the Calsense controller. A Radio survey conducted by Calsense is required prior to installation to confirm proper radio coverage for efficient system communication. The radios operate in an unlicensed frequency band and deal with interference by hopping through multiple frequencies. This hopping technique is preprogrammed into the controllers and assures the user the system is communicating efficiently. If after several retries the system cannot communicate, the controllers revert to stand-alone operation continuing to operate as stand-alone controllers without the FLOWSENSE® option. When FLOWSENSE® communication is re-established, the controllers automatically start maximizing the irrigation with the FLOWSENSE® option. Note: The (—FL) option is in addition to and independent from any central communication option. The —FL option may be combined with any other Calsense controller option and is available only with the model ET2000 and ET2000e. (-RRe) Radio Remote interface: The optional Calsense Integrated Radio Remote (- RRe) option receiver allows the user to turn on and off valves without requiring the user to go to the controller first. Range of coverage (line of sight) has been factory tested at over 4.5 miles. The receiver is integrated onto the Calsense controller board. During operation the controller display will indicate remote operation. The integrated Radio Remote receiver will operate all irrigation station outputs on the Calsense controller. The user activates the current controller by issuing a "Wake -Up" command from the transceiver. Only the controller receiving the "Wake up" command will respond to the station on/off commands, guaranteeing the correct irrigation station coming on. Multiple transceivers may be used on large sites without interfering with each other by utilizing unique controller addressing. The receiver unit controls up to 48 irrigation station outputs and a Master Valve output that is on any time one or more outputs are activated. The controller stations may be turned on or off in any order. The Calsense controller makes use of "Rapid Commands". This provides quick and easy station up or down commands for rapid changing of stations. The user is able to select the controller to operate by scrolling through a text list of sites and controllers downloaded, through an IR-link at the PC, to the RRe-TRAN, making operation flexible and easy. The transceiver includes a battery charger, IR- Interface, and 6 inch whip antenna. The transceiver case is a rugged high impact ABS plastic. Batteries are easily replaced. All components comply with FCC rules and regulations. The user is responsible for any licensing requirements if necessary. making Water work since 1986 ET2000e IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SPECIFICATION (-L) Lights interface: The Model ET2000e Irrigation controller provides an optional program that can be used to control various devices such as lights, gates, or water features. The additional light circuits are added at the time of ordering the controller by specifying the (—L) Lights option. This option includes the hardware and software for four additional isolated light circuits. These are in addition to the outputs for stations. The lights program operates independently from the irrigation programs. The output is 24 VAC, and is used to operate a relay. The program has a 14 day schedule, with two start and stop times in each 24 hour period. OPTIONS CHART OPTION DEFINITION -F Interface to read two (2) additional flow sensors. -G Interface to read an ETG (ET Gage) -RB Interface to read a RB-1 (Rain Bucket) -WG Interface to read a WG-1 (Wind Gage) -FL FLOWSENSE® software only, requires a communications option when more than one controller is using this option. -RRe (-RRe) Calsense integrated Radio Remote board for ET2000e -L (-L) Calsense hardware and software for four (4) additional light circuits PART NUMBER EXAMPLE: ET2000e-48-M-SR-F-G-RB-WG-FL-L-RRe Note: You can add up to seven (7) options on any one controller, the only restriction is that more than one of a like item is not permitted. Step 4 Enclosure. The Calsense controller can be housed in a number of different enclosures. They are as follows. (PD -1) Powder coated enclosure. The Calsense Powder coated enclosure is a weather resistant, pre -driller unit, ready for any Calsense controller and optional Transient Protection Board (TP-1). The pedestal is mounted to a concrete base using hardware supplied with the pedestal. (SSE, SSE -R) Stainless -steel enclosure (-R denotes antenna). The Calsense heavy-duty enclosure is a completely assembled unit, ready for any Calsense controller. The controller panel is mounted at a 25 degree angle for easy access and viewing. The enclosure is constructed of weather and vandal resistant stainless -steel. The unit comes complete with TP-1 and TP-110 transient and lightning protection, factory labeled terminals, GFI outlet and keyed switch. It is also available with a pre -mounted radio antenna for use with the Calsense Local Radio controllers. It features a security -tight locking mechanism, louvered vents with splash guards and bee/wasp screens, and comes with a 5 year warranty for the enclosure and the Calsense installed equipment within. The Calsense enclosure is fully UL approved. PART NUMBER EXAMPLE: ET2000e-48-M-SR-F-G-RB-WG-FL-L-RRe-SSE-R Note: Only the SSE and SSE -R enclosures are added to the end of the controller part number. The PD -1 enclosure is ordered separately. 1 ♦ 6 taiiiiwater work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS 4 4 ♦ 4 4 4 4 Am aking water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FLOW METER OPERATION The Calsense Flow Meter consists of an impeller and a sensing device, which measures the flow in gallons per minute (GPM). The irrigation controller learns an average GPM value for each station. If a broken head or riser causes the flow to exceed the learned flow rate by a selected percent, the irrigation controller shuts off that station automatically and advances to the next station. When irrigation has finished, the controller marks that one station with a HIGHFLOW alert on the display. During the next irrigation, that station will again come on and a measurement will be taken, if the flow still exceeds the learned average flow for that station, the controller instantly turns it off and again displays a HIGHFLOW alert. Calsense Irrigation Controllers monitor the flow meter continuously and will close a master valve if at any time the flow exceeds the user selected Mainline break number. A Flashing MAINLINE BREAK alert on the irrigation controller will alert the user to the problem. A normally closed or normally open master valve can be used. No irrigation will occur until the MAINLINE BREAK alert is cleared by the user. If a valve does not open, or has a measured flow rate below the flow meter minimum, the irrigation controller will flash a NO FLOW alert on the display. If the backflow preventer or water meter has been turned off, every station on the controller will have a NO FLOW alert. RESTRICTIONS Certain hydraulic restrictions should be considered when designing an irrigation system with the Calsense Flow Meter. Since the irrigation controller independently learns station flow rates, the flow meter must be installed in a pipe through which only the water regulated by the irrigation controller flows. Therefore there must be isolated supply lines for each controller. If a loop system exists or if several irrigation controllers are fed off of one main line, the —FL option should be recommended. AVAILABLE FLOW METER SIZES AND MODEL NUMBERS Calsense Flow Meter sizes and model numbers: SIZE MODEL NUMBER 1" brass Tee FM -1 B 1-1/4" Brass Tee FM -1.25B 1-1/2" Brass Tee FM- 1.5B 1-1/2" Sch 80 PVC Tee FM- 1.5 2" Sch 80 PVC Tee FM -2 2" Brass Tee FM -2B 3" Sch 80 PVC Tee FM -3 4" thru 18" FMBX (Saddle Mounted) SIZE DETERMINATION FACTORS The correct flow meter size to use is NOT determined by the size of the irrigation mainline, but based on station flow rates. Selection of flow meter size depends on three factors. • Maximum GPM flow rate for system. • Minimum GPM flow rate for the system. • Permissible pressure loss through the flow meter. The maximum GPM is the full scale reading of a flow meter, this must not be exceeded by the flow rate of any station on an irrigation system. The minimum GPM is the lowest flow rate at which a flow meter will read water flow. If the flow rate of a station does not exceed this minimum, a NO FLOW alert will be generated whenever irrigation occurs. To determine the correct flow meter size when designing an irrigation system, first determine the station with the highest flow rate on the system, next determine the station with the lowest flow rate on the system, then make sure that both flow rates are within the operating range of the selected flow meter size in the chart. making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS SIZING TECHNICAL Parameters: Accuracy: Linearity: Repeatability: Flow Max Parameters: Accuracy: Linearity: Repeatability: Flow Max CHART: Model Min Flow (.5 fps) Recommended Range Min Flow Max Flow (1 fps) (15 fps) Max Flow (15 fps) PSI Loss @ gpm FM -1 B 2 gpm 3 gpm 50 gpm 50 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 36 gpm FM -1.25B 3 gpm 5 gpm 81 gpm 81 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 69 gpm FM -1.5B 4 gpm 7 gpm 105 gpm 106 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 96 gpm Model Min Flow (.5 fps) Recommended Range Min Flow Max Flow (1 fps) (15 fps) Max Flow (30 fps) PSI Loss @ gpm FM -1.5 4 gpm 7 gpm 105 gpm 212 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 96 gpm FM -2 6 gpm 11 gpm 166 gpm 333 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 165 gpm FM -2B 6 gpm 11 gpm 166 gpm 333 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 165 gpm FM -3 12 gpm 24 gpm 363 gpm 727 gpm 0.5 PSI @ 390 gpm Model Min Flow (.5 fps) Recommended Range Min Flow Max Flow (1 fps) (15 fps) Max Flow (30 fps) PSI Loss @ gpm FMBX .5 fps 1 fps 15 fps 30 fps N/A (Flows based on CL 200 SDR 21 PVC pipe) SPECIFICATIONS: FM -1B, FM -1.25B, FM -1.5B Body Construction: +/- 1% of full scale FM -B series: all bronze +/- 0.7% FM series: Schedule 80 PVC +/- 0.7% Range: 0.5 to 15 feet/second Parameters: FM -1.5, FM -2, FM -3 Pressure: 400 PSI @ 150F (65.5 C) FM -2B Accuracy: +/- 1% of full scale Linearity: +/- 0.5% +/ 1% of full scale Repeatability: +/- 0.5% Flow Range: 1 to 30 feet/second +/- 1% Max Pressure: 100 PSI @ 68F (20 C) +/- 1% Range: 1 to 30 feet/second Pressure: 200 PSI @ 150F (65.5 C) Insert Construction: Impeller: Glass reinforced nylon Bearing: Ultrahigh molecular Weight polyethylene Shaft: Tungsten Carbide Housing: Glass reinforced Polyphenylene sulfide O -rings: Ethylene propylene making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS PERMISSIBLE PRESSURE LOSS The permissible pressure loss is important because there is pressure loss through the flow meter, through the pipe upstream of the flow meter and downstream of the flow meter. This pipe must be the same diameter as the flow meter to keep turbulence to a minimum. The length required upstream of the flow meter is ten times the flow meter size. The length required downstream of the flow meter is five times the flow meter size. The table below provides pressure losses for several flow meters with appropriate pipe extensions. Pressure Loss in Pounds Per Square Inch at Various Flow Rates 10 GPM 20 GPM 30 GPM 40 GPM 50 GPM 60 GPM 70 GPM 80 GPM FM -1B .046 .166 .351 .597 .902 ---- ---- ---- FM-1.25B .014 .050 .106 .181 .274 .283 .510 .653 (Based on CL200 SDR21 PVC Pipe) 40 GPM 60 GPM 100 GPM 160 GPM 220 GPM 280 GPM 340 GPM 400 GPM FM -1.5B .097 .206 .530 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- FM-2B .036 .076 .196 .468 ---- ---- ---- ---- FM-1.5 .097 .206 .530 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- FM-2 .036 .076 .196 .468 ---- ---- ---- ---- FM-3 .007 .016 .040 .096 .0173 .270 .387 .522 MINIMUM FLOW METER RATES The minimum GPM is important because this determines the minimum rate at which the flow meter impeller turns. If the impeller turns too slowly the flow meter reading will not be accurate. (Based on CL200 SDR21 PVC Pipe) MINIMUM FLOW RATES FOR CALSENSE FLOW METERS FLOW METER PART NUMBER MINIMUM FLOW RATE (1 fps) FM -1B 3 GPM FM -1.25B 5 GPM FM -1.5 7 GPM FM -1.5B 7 GPM FM2 11 GPM FM -2B 11 GPM FM -3 24 GPM (Based on CL200 SDR21 PVC Pipe) making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS MAXIMUM FLOW METER RATES The maximum GPM is important because the flow meter full scale reading exceeding the maximum flow rate will lead to premature flow meter failure due to excessive wear. MAXIMUM FLOW METER PRESSURE It is important not to exceed the maximum recommended pressure rating of a flow meter. The flow meter body may be damaged and warranty is voided. If necessary a pressure regulator should be placed in the irrigation mainline, upstream of the flow meter. The following table provides the maximum recommended pressure rating for each size flow meter. MAXIMUM FLOW RATES FOR CALSENSE FLOW METERS FLOW METER PART NUMBER MAXIMUM FLOW RATE (15 fps) FM -1B 50 GPM FM -1.25B 81 GPM FM -1.5 105 GPM FM -1.5B 105 GPM FM2 166 GPM FM -2B 166 GPM FM -3 363 GPM (Based on CL200 SDR21 PVC Pipe) MAXIMUM FLOW METER PRESSURE RATINGS FLOW METER PART NUMBER MAXIMUM PRESSURE FM -1B 400 PSI FM -1.25B 400 PSI FM -1.5B 400 PSI FM2B 200 PSI FM -1.5 100 PSI FM -2 100 PSI (Based on CL200 SDR21 PVC Pipe) PHYSICAL SPECIFICATION The flow meter is installed after the water meter or backflow device. The Master Valve can be installed on either side of the flow meter. The mainline pipe is usually sized down during the installation to accommodate the fitting of the flow meter. Note the intended direction of the flow as indicated by an arrow on the top of the flow meter. There must be free, unrestricted pipe of the same diameter as the flow meter, with a length of 10 times the flow meter size upstream, and 5 times the flow meter size downstream of the flow meter tee. This should apply to distance from any valve, fitting, meter, or backflow device. • The flow meter shall be easily accessible, housed in a rectangular valve box, and marked 'FM'. • There should be 6" to 8" of pea gravel beneath the flow meter in the valve box. . The length of #14 AWG wire connecting the flow meter to the irrigation controller shall not exceed 2,000 feet. See Figure 1 44mir ate work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Wires from the flow meter to the irrigation controller should consist of one (1) black and one (1) red standard #14 AWG irrigation wire. The flow meter has two wire leads, a black and a red. At the controller, the black wire in the black wire harness is connected to the black flow meter wire, and the red wire in the black wire harness is connected to the red flow meter wire. The Calsense Flow Meter operates at 9 volts DC. The flow meter wires should be separated from other controller wires when pulled up at the irrigation controller site. If 24 VAC is used to test field wires when determining proper sequencing, and is applied to the flow meter wires, the sensing unit in the flow meter could be damaged. M.'wW Vrrt It is very important that all electrical connections are tight and dry. Any water leaking into a connection will cause flow meter problems. Additionally, there should never be any buried splices between the flow meter and the irrigation controller. Use only Calsense recommended electrical connectors. Recommended Electrical Connectors: • Spears DS -100 Connectors with Spears DS - 300 sealant. • 3M Scotchlok No. 3570 connector sealing pack. FLOW METER INSTALLATION ca.o"Olr. ai 610 oN. We. a4w44. Vi W.e WM= Fmk! Lom,m Wawgad Ehrctry Gdmrcie+a &WA w.. ►i.ra..a Pmt Fi Weil YWi. die.* aa« tr.rr Wk. v fl '*Vik)SLal LpsIram GUL+tiw uo.w,rnrt+h 4.arxyr i0x Floe. Mew Saw 6■Fkiwill 140, iaptaan a awl( b See Figure 2 Ratimrrgrr Yalta Bolo CS.10.1.a Raw IMP. Haled FM Fr'yh Grad• ie d' al Ida prow.' nvala hosIA FIGURE 1 MINIMUM UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM DISTANCE FOR VARIOUS FLOW METER SIZES Flow Meter Size 1.00" Minimum Upstream Pipe Length 10.00" Minimum Downstream Pipe Length 5.00" Pipe Diameter 1.00" 1.25" 12.50" 6.25" 1.25" 1.50" 15.00" 7.50" 1.50" 2.00" 20.00" 10.00" 2.00" 3.00" 30.00" 15.00" 3.00" making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS MULTIPLE FLOW METER INTERFACE (-F). All models of Calsense controllers can receive up to three separate flow meter inputs on projects consisting of more than one water source for irrigating landscape when equipped with the optional (-F) interface. The controller will sum up the readings of all flow sensors connected. The irrigation controller is specified as a (-F) controller. The first flow meter is wired to the irrigation controller using the standard Calsense red and black flow meter wires. The second and third flow meters are wired to the irrigation controller using an additional wire harness supplied when a (-F) option is specified. See Figure 2 CALSENSE (-F) OPTION WIRING DIAGRAM -F opLon w,rNITIM r1irocred to Flaw Meters #2 and Calsense Controller all Mo igls Black wire hamess connected to Flow M€Rer #1 {s!andard on all Cafsc,rsr: coirlrollris} 1 �1 Flow Meter #t RED BLACK Ma,nr,ne Water - Meter I--1 FI,w Meter #2 Water Meter Mainline Mainline Flow Mgler #3 FIGURE 2 BLACK. O1 AN('+E BLACK daditater work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FMBX CALIBRATION The FMBX insertion sensor uses unique K and Offset numbers for calibration. These numbers are derived from calibration runs using NIST traceable instruments. Using both a K and an Offset number provides higher accuracy than using a K ( Pulse/ Gal) factor alone. K and Offset numbers for each tee configuration are listed in the following tables. The table on the following pages provide calibration and operation data for most scheduled pipe sizes from 3" through 18" . FMBX DESCRIPTION OF CHART SECTION INFORMATION SECTION 1: Nominal Pipe Size. SECTION 2: Pipe Outside Diameter defined by ASA B36.10 and other standards. SECTION 3: Pipe Inside Diameter defined by ASA B36.10 and other standards. SECTION 4 AND 5: The K value and Offset that should be used in our frequency equation: SECTION 6: Example: GPM Freq = - - Offset K This equation describes the frequency of the output signal of all Calsense flow sensors. By substituting the appropriate K and Offset values from the table, the sensor's output frequency can be calculated for each pipe size. This information is required when using the FMBX insertion sensor. This section indicates the suggested flow range of sensors in each pipe size. Calsense sensors will operate both above and below the indicated flow rates. However, good design practice dictates the use of this range for best performance. Sensors should be sized for flow rather than pipe size. To prevent disturbances to the flow profile always connect the sensor tee to pipe nipple measuring at least 10 pipe diameters in length on the upstream (supply) side and at least 5 pipe diameters in length on the downstream (delivery) side before making the transition in pipe size. making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FMBX FLOW METER CALIBRATION TABLE FOR PIPE SIZES 3" THROUGH 36" Section 1 Section2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Suggested Pipe Outside Pipe Inside Operating Pipe Size Diameter Diameter K value Offset Range (GPM) 3" Sch 10S 3.500" 3.260" 5.009 .090 12-400 Std. Wt., Sch 40 3.5" 3.068" 4.362 .063 12-400 Extra Strong, Sch 80 3.5" 2.900" 3.858 .043 12-400 PVC Class 125 3.5" 3.284" 5.094 .093 12-400 PVC Class 160 3.5" 3.230" 4.902 .085 12-400 PVC Class 200 3.5" 3.166" 4.682 .076 12-400 4" Sch 10S 4.5" 4.260" 9.597 .241 20-600 Std. Wt.,Sch 40 4.5" 4.026" 8.34 .229 20-600 Extra Strong, Sch 80 4.5" 3.826" 7.354 .188 20-600 PVC Class 125 4.5" 4.224" 9.396 .240 20-600 PVC Class 160 4.5" 4.154" 9.013 .240 20-600 PVC Class 200 4.5" 4.072" 8.578 .239 20-600 5" Sch 10S 5.563" 5.295" 16.305 .250 30-900 Std. Wt., Sch 40 5.50" 5.047" 14.674 .248 30-900 Extra Strong, Sch 80 5.50" 4.813" 13.165 .246 30-900 6" Sch 10S 6.625" 6.357" 24.089 .260 50-1,500 Std. Wt., Sch 40 6.5" 6.065" 21.574 .257 50-1,500 Extra Strong, Sch 80 6.5" 5.761" 19.457 .254 50-1,500 PVC Class 125 6.625" 6.217" 22.853 .258 50-1,500 PVC Class 160 6.625" 6.115" 21.968 .257 50-1,500 PVC Class 200 6.625" 5.993" 21.068 .256 50-1,500 8" Sch 10S 8.625" 8.329" 43.914 0.286 80-2,500 Sch 20 8.625" 8.125" 41.653 0.283 80-2,500 Sch 30 8.625" 8.071" 41.063 0.283 80-2,500 Std. Wt., Sch 40 8.625" 7.981" 40.086 0.281 80-2,500 Sch 60 8.625" 7.813" 38.288 0.279 80-2,500 Extra Strong, Sch 80 8.625" 7.625" 36.315 0.276 80-2,500 PVC Class 125 8.625" 8.095" 41.324 0.283 80-2,500 PVC Class 160 8.625" 7.961" 39.869 0.281 80-2,500 PVC Class 200 8.625" 7.805" 38.203 0.279 80-2,500 10" Sch 10S 10.75" 10.420" 70.195 0.321 125-4,000 Sch 20 10.75" 10.250" 67.668 0.318 125-4,000 Sch 30 10.75" 10.136" 66.069 0.316 125,4000 Std. Wt., Sch 40 10.75" 10.020" 64.532 0.314 125-4,000 Sch 60 10.75" 9.750" 61.016 0.309 125-4,000 Extra Strong, Sch 80 10.75" 9.564" 58.644 0.306 125-4,000 PVC Class 125 10.75" 10.088" 65.431 0.315 125-4,000 PVC Class 160 10.75" 9.924" 63.272 0.312 125,4000 PVC Class 200 10.75" 9.728" 60.733 0.309 125,4000 Continued on next page making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FMBX FLOW METER CALIBRATION TABLE FOR PIPE SIZES 3" THROOUGH 36" Section 1 Section2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Suggested Pipe Outside Pipe Inside Operating Pi • e Size Diameter Diameter K value Offset Ranee (GPM) 12" Sch 10S 12.75" 12.390" 104.636 0.367 175-5,000 Sch 20 12.75" 12.250" 102.553 0.364 175-5,000 Sch 30 12.75" 12.090" 99.347 0.36 175-5,000 Std. Wt.,Sch 40S 12.75" 12.000" 97.576 0.358 175-5,000 Sch 40 12.75" 11.938" 96.369 0.356 175-5,000 Sch 60 12.75" 11.625" 90.441 0.348 175-5,000 Extra Strong 12.75" 11.750" 92.775 0.351 175-5,000 Sch 80 12.75" 11.376" 85.922 0.342 175-5,000 PVC Class 125 12.75" 11.966" 96.912 0.357 175-5,000 PVC Class 160 12.75" 11.770" 93.152 0.352 175-5,000 PVC Class 200 12.75" 11.538" 88.842 0.346 175-5,000 14" Sch 10S 14.00" 13.500" 122.307 0.391 200-6,000 Sch 20 14.00" 13.375" 120.216 0.388 200-6,000 Std. Wt., Sch 30 14.00" 13.250" 118.151 0.385 200-6,000 Sch 40 14.00" 13.124" 116.096 0.382 200-6,000 Sch 60 14.00" 12.814" 111.148 0.376 200-6,000 Extra Strong 14.00" 13.00" 114.098 0.33 200-6,000 Sch 80 14.00" 12.50" 106.299 0.369 200-6,000 16" Sch 10S 16.00" 15.500" 159.243 0.44 300-9,000 Sch 20 16.00" 15.375" 156.742 0.436 300-9,000 Std. Wt., Sch 30 16.00" 15.250" 154.267 0.433 300-9,000 Sch 60 16.00" 14.688" 143.456 0.419 300-9,000 Extra Strong, Sch 40 16.00" 15.000" 149.394 0.427 300-9,000 Sch 80 16.00" 14.314" 136.548 0.41 300-9,000 18" Sch 10S 18.00" 17.500" 202.739 0.498 350-10,000 Sch 20 18.00" 17.375" 199.828 0.494 350-10,000 Sch 30 18.00" 17.124" 194.061 0.486 350-10,000 Std. Wt. 18.00" 17.250" 196.943 0.49 350-10,000 Sch 40 18.00" 16.876" 188.464 0.479 350-10,000 Sch 60 18.00" 16.500" 180.171 0.469 350-10,000 Extra Strong 18.00" 17.000" 191.25 0.482 350-10,000 Sch 80 18.00" 16.126" 172.152 0.457 350-10,000 20" Std. Wt.,Sch 20 20.00" 19.25" 246.179 0.555 400-12,000 Sch 40 20.00" 18.812" 234.836 0.540 400-12,000 Extra Strong, Sch 30 20.00" 19.000" 239.666 0.547 400-12,000 Sch 80 20.00" 17.938" 213.14 0.511 400-12,000 22" Std. Wt.,Sch 20 22.00" 21.25" 301.975 0.621 500-15,000 Extra Strong, Sch 30 22:00" 21.00" 294.642 0.616 500-15,000 Sch 80 22.00" 19.75" 259.513 0.573 500-15,000 Continued on next page making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS FMBX FLOW METER CALIBRATION TABLE FOR PIPE SIZES 3" THROOUGH 36" Section 1 Section2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Suggested Pipe Outside Pipe Inside Operating Pi a Size Diameter Diameter K value Offset Ran a (GPM) 24" Std. Wt.,Sch 20 24.00" 23.25" 364.331 0.666 600-18,000 Extra Strong 24.00" 23.00" 356.178 0.660 600-18,000 Sch 40 24.00" 22.624" 344.109 0.652 600-18,000 Sch 80 24.00" 21.562" 311.271 0.628 600-18,000 26" Sch 10 26.00" 25.376" 437.809 0.719 700-21,000 Std. Wt. 26.00" 25.25" 433.247 0.716 700-21,000 Sch 20, Extra Strong 26.00" 25.00" 424.274 0.709 700-21,000 28" Sch 10 28.00" 27.376" 513.698 0.774 900-23,000 Std. Wt. 28.00" 27.25" 508.723 0.770 900-23,000 Sch 20,Extra Strong 28.00" 27.00" 498.930 0.763 900-23,000 30" Sch 10 30.00" 29.376" 596.147 0.833 1,000-30,000 Std. Wt. 30.00" 29.25" 590.759 0.829 1,000-30,000 Sch 20, Extra Strong 30.00" 29.00" 580.146 0.822 1,000-30,000 32" Sch 10 32.00" 31.376" 685.156 0.897 1,200-35,000 Std. Wt. 32.00" 31.25" 679.355 0.893 1,200-35,000 Sch 20, Extra Strong 32.00" 31.00" 667.922 0.885 1,200-35,000 Sch 40 32.00" 30.624" 650.919 0.873 1,200-35,000 34" Sch 10 34.00" 33.312" 777.566 0.964 1,300-40,000 Std. Wt. 34.00" 33.25" 774.511 0.962 1,300-40,000 Sch 20, Extra Strong 34.00" 33.00" 762.258 0.953 1,300-40,000 Sch 40 34.00" 32.624" 744.022 0.940 1,300-40,000 36" Sch 10 36.00" 35.376" 882.855 1.040 1,500-45,000 Std. Wt. 36.00" 35.25" 876.227 1.035 1,500-45,000 Sch 20, Extra Strong 36.00" 35.00" 863.154 1.025 1,500-45,000 Sch 40 36.00" 34.50" 837.315 1.007 1,500-45,000 making water work since 1986 FLOW METER SPECIFICATIONS a i ,A.,1..... Ox 2075 Corte del Nogal, Suite P, Carlsbad CA 92011 1-(800)-572-8608 FAX: 1-(760)-438-2619 www.calsense.com Stock Number: PG1-FM-B Rev. 03/06 making water work since 1986 Solvent Weld Schedule Series PRESSURE -RATED PVC PIPE ASTM D1785, ASTM D2665, ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454 Uniform Plumbing Code, ANSI/NSF 61/14 MARKETS DESCRIPTION JMMagIe" DELIVERING GOOD WATER TO YOU BENEFITS �v- Irrigation O Reclaim Plumbing Drainage Available Pipe Sizes (IPS) 3A_J, 1_, 1'/a , 1'/z , 2L, 2'/zo, 3E, 4o, 5o, 6o, 8i, 10H, 12,, 14 , 161 Nominal Laying Length: 10/20 feet (Laying length tolerances are in accordance with ASTM standards) Color: Schedule 40: n White Schedule 80: Purple Beige (Marked for Reclaim only)* (For SolarBlok only)* Dark Grey ASTM D1785 Schedule 40 Schedule 80 INSTALLATION, soke•olJilifilde...21 :028311. .• AA. ire A ice !;• "es • • . FEATURES 8.118,4,40 llF,\:I�L V4e414LV "C.AUTIOt1 AECYCIE.D "RECLAIMED WATER DO NOT DRINK'' 01101410 759825705631 2, Lightweight, great for manual installation. Field -cut with a power saw or handsaw; bevel without complicated machinery. Does not need lining, wrapping, coating, or cathodic protection to prevent galvanic corrosion. Unaffected by corrosive elements: sewer gas, sulfuric acid, alkaline, or acidic soils. Consistency in carrying capacity (flow coefficient, C=150), for savings in pumping and material costs. SolarBlok Option: Formulated PVC to increase resistance to ultraviolet rays. *Supply may vary based on plant location. Please call regarding availability. Solvent Weld PRESSURE -RATED PVC PIPE Schedule Series JM e Nmid SUBMITTAL AND DATA SHEET DELIVERING GOOD WATER TO YOU Schedule 40 PIPE SIZE (IN) 1/2 3/4 1 2 21/2 5 10 AVERAGE O.D. (IN) Schedule 80 PIPE SIZE (IN) 1/2 3/4 1 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 6 8 10* 12* 0.840 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.500 5.563 6.625 8.625 10.750 12.750 14.000 16.000 NOM. I.D. (IN) AVERAGE O.D. (IN) 0.840 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.500 6.625 8.625 10.750 12.750 0.609 0.810 1.033 1.363 1.593 2.049 2.445 3.042 3.998 5.016 6.031 7.942 9.976 11.889 13.073 14.940 MIN. T. (IN) NOM. I.D. (IN) 0.528 0.724 0.936 1.255 1.476 1.913 2.290 2.864 3.786 5.709 7.565 9.493 11.294 0.109 0.113 0.133 0.140 0.145 0.154 0.203 0.216 0.237 0.258 0.280 0.322 0.365 0.406 0.437 0.500 PRESSURE RATING (PSI) MIN. T. (IN) 0.147 0.154 0.179 0.191 0.200 0.218 0.276 0.300 0.337 0.432 0.500 0.593 0.687 600 480 450 370 330 280 300 260 220 190 180 160 140 130 130 130 APPROX. WGT (LBS/FT) PRESSURE RATING (PSI) 850 690 630 520 470 400 420 370 320 280 250 230 230 0.164 0.218 0.324 0.439 0.525 0.705 1.118 1.463 2.083 2.822 3.663 5.512 7.815 10.333 12.220 15.980 PIPE STIFFNESS (PSI) APPROX. WGT (LBS/FT) I.D.f '1, 0.210 0.285 0.419 0.579 0.701 0.969 1.479 1.979 2.892 5.516 8.336 12.375 17.027 5,928 3,136 2,547 1,397 1,008 596 784 509 307 205 154 104 78 64 60 60 PIPE STIFFNES (PSI) 17,066 9,078 6,995 3,930 2,911 1,846 2,141 1,473 949 607 417 356 330 T: (Wall Thickness) O.D.: (Outside Diameter) I.D.: (Inside Diameter) Product Standard: ASTM D1785, ASTM D2665 Pipe Compound: ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454 Certification: ANSI/NSF 61, ANSI/NSF 14* Uniform Plumbing Code* Pipe End Finish: Bell End*, Plain End Nominal Laying Length: 10/20 feet (Laying length tolerances are in accordance with ASTM standards) Installation: JM Eagle° Solvent Weld Installation Guide Water pressure rating measured at 23°C (73°F) Manning Coefficient (n) = 0.009 Hazen -Williams Coefficient (c) = 150 SolarBlok Option Available Size: 1/2"- 4" Product Standard: ASTM D1785 Certification: ANSI/NSF 61 Pipe End Finish: Bell End *Supply may vary based on plant location. Please call regarding availability. Product Standard: ASTM D1785 Pipe Compound: ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454 Certification: ANSI/NSF 61, ANSI/NSF 14* Uniform Plumbing Code* Pipe End Finish: Bell End*, Plain End Nominal Laying Length: 20 feet (Laying length tolerances are in accordance with ASTM standards) Installation: JM Eagle° Solvent Weld Installation Guide Water pressure rating measured at 23°C (73°F) Manning Coefficient (n) = 0.009 Hazen -Williams Coefficient (c) = 150 *Supply may vary based on plant location. Please call regarding availability. •ull ILJ This information may have been updated. Please visit www.jmeagle.com for all updated information and warranty details. CUSTOMER SERVICE:1.800.621.4404 THIS PRODUCT IS MADE IN AMERICA PRINTED JUNE 2018 REV12 HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURES CSairto Jc Bo TOP ENTRY - STAINLESS STEEL THE ULTIMATE TOP ENTRY ENCLOSURE WEATHER RESISTANT —VANDAL RESISTANT • 100% stainless steel construction assures long-term, rustproof durability and additional strength • Three point locking mechanism, flush mounted access handle and heavy duty continuous hinge ensures maximum security • Removable, predrilled backboard and trays provide for easy installation of controllers • Chameleon effect of the natural brushed stainless steel finish provides an unobtrusive quality • 38" height with flip top access provides ease of viewing and programming • Filtered side louvers at bottom and top allow passive cross flow ventilation • Mounting template, stainless steel anchors and instructions • Ten year limited warranty • NEMA TYPE 3R rated UL Listed • All stainless steel enclosures may be powder coated in many colors at an additional charge SB-16SS 16" Wide Enclosure • 16" Wide, 38" High, 15.5" Deep • NEMA TYPE 3R Weatherproof • Three point locking door • Padlock security provisions • Mounting template and J bolt anchors • Standard tray and backboards included SPECIFICATION ON PAGE 42 SB-22SS 24" Wide Enclosure • 24" Wide, 38" High, 17" Deep • NEMA TYPE 3R Weatherproof • Three point locking door • Padlock security provisions • Mounting template and J bolt anchors • Standard tray and backboards included 9.50 38"CLOSED SPECIFICATION ON PAGE 42 22.50" 10 StrongBox ■ 2320 Meyers Ave. ■ Escondido, CA 92029 RAINBIRD® Tech Spec 1800TM Series Spray Heads Industry's Leading Spray Heads Trusted for over 30 years, 1800 Series Spray Heads have provided unmatched durability, reliability, and performance. Superior components and features make the 1800 Series Spray Head the spray head of choice for a wide variety of applications. Features Co -molded, pressure -activated, multi -func- tional wiper seal assures positive seal without excess"flow-by"which enables more heads to be installed on the same valve. • Designed for use with all Rain Bird plastic spray head nozzles — Rotary Nozzles, U -Series, MPR, VAN and XPCN Series. • Precision controlled flush at pop -down clears debris from unit, assuring positive stem retraction in all soil types. • Strong stainless steel spring provides reliable stem retraction. • Ratchet mechanism on all models allows easy nozzle pattern alignment without tools. • Pre -installed 1800 Pop -Top' flush plug blocks debris from entering after flushing. Allows for easy nozzle installation. • Constructed of time -proven UV -resistant plastic and corrosion resistant stainless steel parts, assuring long product life. • All sprinkler components are removable from the top without special tools, providing for quick and easy flushing and maintenance of the sprinkler. • Side inlets featured on 1806, 1806PRS, 1812, and 1812PRS models only. • Five-year trade warranty. Operating Range • Spacing: 2.5 to 24 feet (0.8 to 7.3 m) • Pressure: 15 to 70 psi (1.0 to 4.8 bar) Specifications • Flow -by: 0 at 8 psi (0.6 bar) or greater; 0.1 gpm (0.02 m3/h; 0.006 I/s) otherwise Dimensions/Models • 1/2"(15/21) NPT female threaded inlet • Models and height: 1802:4"(10 cm) body height; 2" pop-up height (5 cm) 1803:4/3" (12 cm) body height; 3" pop-up height (7.6 cm) 1804:6" (15 cm) body height; 4" pop-up height (10 cm) 1806:9 3/8" (24 cm) body height; 6" pop-up height (15 cm) 1812:16" (40 cm) body height; 12" pop-up height (30 cm) Exposed surface diameter: 2Y"(5.7 cm) How To Specify 1804 - SAM - PRS - P45 Optional Feature SAM: Seal-A-Matic" check valve Optional Feature PRS: 30psi (2.1 bar) in -stem pressure regulation P45: 45psi (3.1 bar) in -stem pressure regulation Model 1804:4" (10.2 cm) pop-up height Note: SAM feature included with P45 models How To Specify 1804 - SAM -P45 - R13 -18Q Nozzle Rotary Nozzle Radius Range Optional 13-18' (4.0 — 5.5,m) Feature 17-24' (5.2 — 7.3m) SAM: Seal-A-Matic- check valve P45: 45psi (3.1 bar) in -stem pressure regulation Pattern F: Full (360°) TQ:Three Quarter (270°) TT: Two Third (240°) H: Half (180°) T:Third (120°) Q: Quarter (90°) Model 1804:4"(10.2 cm) pop-up height Note: Specify sprinkler bodies and nozzles separately. PRS SAM-PRS SAM-PRS-P45 1800T"' Series Spray Heads Tech Spec 1800° SAM Series Ideal for use in areas with changing eleva- tions, the 1800 SAM Series offers all 1800 Series features plus: • Built-in Seal-A-Matic- (SAM) check valve. Eliminates the need for under -the -head check valves. No parts to be installed at the site. • Stronger retract spring to accommodate elevation changes up to 14' (4.2 m). One of the strongest springs in the industry. • Prevents drainage from spray heads at lower elevations. Stops water waste. Ends landscape damage due to flooding and/ or erosion. • Helps retain water in lateral pipes which reduces wear on system components by minimizing water hammer during start-up. • Designed for use with all Rain Bird plastic spray head nozzles. • "SAM"stamped on cap for easy identification and maintenance. • Five-year trade warranty. Operating Range • Spacing: 2.5 to 24 feet (0.8 to 7.3 m) • Pressure: 25 to 70 psi (1.7 to 4.8 bar) Specifications • SAM capability: holds up to 14 feet (4.2 m) of head; 6 psi (0.3 bar) • Flow -by: 0 at 8 psi (0.6 bar) or greater; 0.1 gpm (0.02 m3/h; 0.006 I/s) otherwise • Installation: bottom inlet only Dimensions h" (15/21) NPT female threaded inlets • Body height: 1804 SAM - 6"(15 cm), 1806 SAM - 9%" (24 cm), 1812 SAM- 16" (40 cm) • Exposed surface diameter: 2Y"(5.7 cm) Models • 1804 SAM: 4" pop-up height (10 cm) • 1806 SAM: 6" pop-up height (15 cm) • 1812 SAM: 12" pop-up height (30 cm) 1800 PRS Series Designed for areas with high and/or widely fluctuating water pressures, the 1800 PRS Series has all 1800 Series features plus: • PATENTED PRS pressure regulator built into the stem. No parts to be installed at the site. Saves time and money. • Maintains constant outlet pressure at 30psi (2.1 bar). Spray nozzles perform best at 30psi. Ensures maximum nozzle performance, even with varying inlet pressures. Maintains constant pressure regardless of nozzles used. Restricts water loss by up to 70% if nozzle is removed or damaged. Saves water and money. Reduces possibility of accidents and property damage. Recommended for vandal -prone areas. • Ensures consistent performance throughout zone if nozzle is removed or damaged. Keeps plant life covered by other spray heads properly irrigated. • Ends misting and fogging caused by high pressure. Stops water waste. Ensures necessary watering occurs in high pressure or wind conditions. • Designed for use with all Rain Bird plastic spray head nozzles. • "PRS"stamped on cap for easy identification and maintenance. • Five-year trade warranty. Operating Range • Spacing: 2.5 to 24 feet (0.8 to 7.3 m) • Pressure: 15 to 70 psi (1 to 5 bar) Specifications • Regulates nozzle pressure to an average 30 psi (2.1 bar) with inlet pressures of up to 70 psi (4.8 bar) • Flow -by: 0 at 8 psi (0.6 bar) or greater; 0.1 gpm (0.02 m3/h; 0.0061/s) otherwise • Installation: side or bottom inlet • Side inlet installation not recommended in freezing climates Dimensions • Y"(15/21) NPTfemalethreaded inlets • Body height: 1804 PRS - 6" (15 cm), 1806 PRS - 9%" (24 cm), 1812PRS-16"(40cm) • Exposed surface diameter: 2%4"(5.7 cm) Models • 1804 PRS: 4" pop-up height (10 cm) • 1806 PRS: 6" pop-up height (15 cm) • 1812 PRS: 12" pop-up height (30 cm) 1800 SAM-PRS Series Meets the needs of all spray areas, regardless of changing elevation or water pressures. Incorporates all 1800 Series SAM and PRS features."SAM-PRS"stamped on the cap for easy identification and maintenance. Operating Range • Spacing: 2.5 to 24 feet (0.8 to 7.3 m) • Pressure: 25 to 70 psi (1.7 to 4.8 bar) Specifications • SAM capability: holds up to 14 feet (4.2 m) of head; 6 psi (0.3 bar) • Flow -by: 0 at 8 psi (0.6 bar) or greater; 0.1 gpm (0.02 m3/h; 0.006 I/s) otherwise • Installation: bottom inlet only • Regulates nozzle pressure to an average 30 psi (2.1 bar) with inlet pressures of up to 70 psi (4.8 bar) Dimensions • le (15/21) NPTfemalethreaded inlets • Body height: 1804 SAM-PRS - 6" (15 cm), 1806 SAM-PRS - 9%" cm), 1812 SAM-PRS - 16" (40 cm) • Exposed diameter: 2%"(5.7 cm) Models • 1804 SAM-PRS: 4" pop-up height (10 cm) • 1806 SAM-PRS: 6" pop-up height (15 cm) • 1812 SAM-PRS: 12" pop-up height (30 cm) www.rainbird.com Tech Spec 1800'"' Series Spray Heads 1800 SAM -P45 Series Meets the needs of spray body applications using Rotary Nozzles regardless of changing elevation or water pressures. Incorporates 1800 Series SAM feature and regulates oper- ating pressure at 45psi (3.1 bar). • Designed to maximize application efficiency when using Rotary Nozzles. • Maintains constant outlet pressure at 45psi (3.1 bar) at varying inlet pressures. Maintains constant pressure regardless of nozzle used. • "SAM-PRS-45"stamped on cap for easy identification and maintenance. • Five-year trade warranty. Operating Range • Spacing: 13 to 24 feet (4.0 to 7.3 m) • Pressure: 25 to 70 psi (1.7 to 4.8 bar) Specifications • Regulates nozzle pressure to an average 45 psi (3.1 bar) with inlet pressures of up to 70 psi (4.8 bar) • SAM capability: holds up to 14 feet (4.2 m) of head; 6 psi (0.3 bar) • Flow -by: 0 at 8 psi (0.6 bar) or greater; 0.1 gpm (0.02 m3/h; 0.0061/s) otherwise • Installation: bottom inlet only Dimensions • ' "(15/21) NPTfemalethreaded inlets • Body height: 1804 SAM -P45 - 6" (15 cm), 1806 SAM -P45 - 9W (24 cm), 1812 SAM -P45 - 16"(40 cm) • Exposed diameter: 2%"(5.7 cm) Models • 1804 SAM -P45: 4" pop-up height (10 cm) • 1806 SAM -P45: 6" pop-up height (15 cm) • 1812 SAM -P45: 12" pop-up height (30 cm) 1806 with Swing Joint on Bottom Inlet 1812 with Swing Pipe on Side Inlet Rain Bird® co -molded, pressure -activated wiper seal - Strong stainless steel retract spring — Side inlet on 1806, 1806PRS, 1812, and 1812PRS models only Patented PRS in -stem pressure regulator option t—� - - Ratchet (for easy nozzle pattern alignment) SAM (S I A M ea at in -stem check valve option www.rainbird.com RA/114B/RD Specifications 1802, 1803, 1804, 1806 and 1812 Pop-up Full or Part Circle Spray Sprinkler The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle and screen shall be constructed of heavy-duty, ultra -violet resistant plastic. It shall have a heavy-duty stain- less steel retract spring for positive pop -down and a ratcheting system for easy alignment of the pattern.The sprinkler shall have a soft elas- tomer pressure -activated co -molded wiper seal for cleaning debris from the pop-up stem as it retracts into the case to prevent the sprinkler from sticking up to minimize "flow -by" The sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate (MPR) plastic or brass nozzle with an adjust- ing screw capable of regulating the radius and flow.The sprinkler shall be capable of housing protective, non -clogging filter screens or pres- sure compensating screens (PCS) under the nozzle.The screen shall be used in conjunction with the adjusting screw for regulating. The 6" (15 cm) and 12" (30 cm) models shall have both a side and a bottom 12"(15/21) (FNPT) inlet for ease of installation. The sprinkler shall have a Pop -Top" Flush Plug pre-installed.The plug shall prevent debris from clogging the sprinkler during installation and allow for the system to be flushed before noz- zling.The plug shall be bright orange in color and constructed of polypropylene material. 1804 SAM, 1806 SAM and 1812 SAM Full or Part Circle Seal-A-Matic- Pop-up Spray Sprinkler Optional Feature Specifications: When so indicated on the design, the 4', 6" or 12" high pop-up spray sprinklers shall also include a Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve to prevent low -head drainage of up to 14 feet of head.This feature shall require the use of the bottom inlet only.These units shall be identifi- able from the top with "SAM" marking on the cap.The sealing device shall be an integral part of the pop-up stem, removable through the top of the sprinkler, and shall seal against the bot- tom case inlet. It shall create no more than 1 psi pressure drop at the maximum rated flow. 1804 PRS, 1806 PRS and 1812 PRS Full or Part Circle Pressure Regulating Pop-up Spray Sprinkler Optional Feature Specifications: When so indicated on the design, the 4", 6" or 12" high pop-up spray sprinkler shall also include a pressure regulating (PRS) device to prevent high pressure fogging to the nozzle stream.This regulating device shall be an integral part of the pop-up stem, removable through the top of the case. These units shall be identifiable from the top with "PRS" markings on the cap. The device shall regulate the nozzle pressure to 30 psi for inlet pressures from 35 to 70 psi. Below 35 psi the pressure loss shall not exceed 6 psi. 1804 SAM-PRS, 1806 SAM-PRS and 1812 SAM-PRS Full or Part Circle Seal-A- Matic Pressure Regulating Pop-up Spray Sprinkler Optional Feature Specifications: When so indicated on the design, the 4', 6" or 12" high pop-up spray sprinkler shall also include a Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve and a pressure regulating (PRS) device.These units shall be identifiable from the top with "SAM- PRS" markings on the cap. The check valve shall prevent low -head drain- age of up to 14 feet of head.The pressure regulating device shall prevent high pressure fogging of the nozzle stream by regulating the nozzle pressure to 30 psi for inlet pressures from 35 to 70 psi. Below 35 psi the pressure loss shall not exceed 6 psi.These models shall utilize the bottom inlet only. 1804 SAM -P45, 1806 SAM -P45, and 1812 SAM -P45 Full or Part Circle Seal-A-Matic Pressure Regulating Pop-up Spray Sprinkler Optional Feature Specifications: When so indicated on the design, the 4", 6", or 12" high pop-up spray sprinkler shall also include a Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve and a 45 psi pressure regulating (P45) device. These units shall be identifiable from the top with "SAM-PRS-45" markings on the cap. The check valve shall prevent low -head drain- age of up to 14 feet of head.The pressure regulating device shall prevent high pressure misting and undesirable performance of the nozzle stream by regulating the nozzle pressure to 45 psi for inlet pressures from 50 to 70 psi. Below 50 psi the pressure loss shall not exceed 6 psi. These models shall utilize the bottom inlet only. The sprinkler shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Corporation, Azusa, California. Rain Bird Corporation 6991 E. Southpoint Road Tucson, AZ 85756 Phone: (520) 741-6100 Fax: (520) 741-6522 Rain Bird Technical Services (800) RAINBIRD (1-800-724-6247) (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird Corporation 970 West Sierra Madre Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 812-3400 Fax: (626) 812-3411 Specification Hotline 800-458-3005 (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird International, Inc. 1000 West Sierra Madre Ave. Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 963-9311 Fax: (626) 852-7343 The Intelligent Use of Water" www.rainbird.com ® Registered Trademark of Rain Bird Corporation © 2009 Rain Bird Corporation 10/09 D39025K RAINBIRD® Tech Spec PEB and PESB Series Valves Designed to Outperform. Engineered to Outlast. Pressure surges? Effluent water? Clogging debris? No problem. PEB and PESB Series valves offer long life and efficient, trouble - free performance -even under harsh condi- tions. Constructed of heavy-duty, glass -filled nylon, these valves resist clogging. And the PESB model features a patented scrubber to actively fight dirt, debris and particles. Features • Body constructed of durable glass - filled nylon for long life and heavy-duty performance at 200 psi (13.80 bar) pressure • Stainless steel studs molded into the body. Bonnet can be attached and removed more easily without damaging threads • One-piece solenoid design with captured plunger and spring for easy servicing. Prevents loss of parts during field service • External bleed protects the solenoid ports from debris when system is flushed • Internal bleed operates the valve without allowing water into the valve box; allows pressure regulator to be adjusted without turning on the valve at the controller first • Low flow operating capability (0.25 gpm; 0.06 m3/h; 1.2 I/m) for a wide range of applications. For flows below 5 gpm (1.14 m3ih; 19.2 I/m) or any Xerigation® application, install Rain BirdYfilter upstream • Slow closing to prevent water hammer and subsequent system damage • PESB only: Scrubber scrapes its stainless steel screen clean to break down grit and plant material. Prevents debris build-up and clogging Options (order separately) • Accommodates optional, field installed PRS-D pressure regulating module to ensure optimum sprinkler performance • Optional purple flow control handles for non -potable water applications - PEB-NP-HAN1(1") - PEB-NP-HAN2 (11/2" and 2") Accepts latching solenoid for use with Rain Bird battery -operated controllers up to 150 psi (10.35 bar) Operating Range • Pressure: 20 to 200 psi (1.38 to 13.80 bar) • Flow: 0.25 to 200 gpm (0.06 to 45.40 m3/h; 1.2 to 7571/m) • Flow with PRS-D: 5 to 200 gpm • (1.14 to 45.40 m3'h; 19.2 to 757 I/m) • Temperature: up to 150° F (66° C) Electrical Specifications • Power: 24 VAC 50/60 Hz (cycles/sec) solenoid • Inrush current: 0.41 A (9.84 VA) at 60 Hz • Holding current: 0.14A (3.43VA) at 60Hz • Coil resistance: 30-39 Ohms • Compatible with ESP-LXD decoders PEB and PESB Series Valve Pressure Loss (psi) Flow GPM 0.25 0.5 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 100-PEB 1" 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.7 1.8 2.9 5.6 10.0 15.6 150-PEB 200-PEB 2" 3.9 3.6 3.5 3.6 5.4 9.6 14.6 21.2 4.8 4.5 5.2 8.2 11.8 15.5 19.5 PEB and PESB Series Valve Pressure Loss (bar) Flow Flow 100-PEB 150-PEB 200-PEB m3/h I/m 2.5 cm 3.8 cm 5.1 cm 0.06 0.3 0.6 1.2 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 1 5 10 20 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 757 0.06 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.32 0.68 0.26 0.24 - 0.26 0.33 0.33 0.32 0.42 0.32 0.57 0.34 0.74 0.41 0.92 0.51 1.14 0.64 1.38 0.77 0.90 1.04 1.18 1.34 Notes 1) Loss values are with flow control fully open. 2) PRS-D module recommended for all flow ranges. Recommendations 1) Rain Bird recommends flow rates in the supply line not to exceed 7.5 ft./sec. (2.29 m/s) in order to reduce the effects of water hammer. 2) For flows below5 gpm (1.74 mM; 19.21 I/m), Rain Bird recommends use of upstream filtration to prevent debris from collecting below the diaphragm. 3) For flows below 10 gpm (2.27 mill; 37.8 I/m) Rain Bird recommends the flow control stem be turned down two full turns from the fully open position. PESB Cutaway Dimensions Size Height Length Width 100 6Y" (16.5 cm) 4" (10.2 cm) 4" (10.2 cm) 150 8"(20.3 cm) 6"(15.2 cm) 6"(15.2 cm) 200 8" (20.3 cm) 6" (15.2 cm) 6" (15.2 cm) Note: The PRS-D option adds 2"(5.1 cm) to valve height. Models • 100PEB and 100PESB • 150PEB and 150PESB • 200PEB and 200PESB 1" 1'/2" 2" BSP threads available, specify when ordering. (26/34) (40/49) (50/60) How To Specify 100 - PEB - PRS-D r r- Size Model Optional Feature 100: 1" (26/34) PEB PRS-Dial: pressure 150:11' (40/49) PESB: scrubber regulating module 200:2" (50/60) model (must be ordered separately) Note: Valve and PRS-Dial module must be ordered sepa- rately. For non-U.S. applications, it is necessary to specify NPT or BSP thread type. RAINBIRD® Specifications The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz (cycles/sec) solenoid actuated globe pattern design.The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi (13.80 bar).The valve shall have the following characteristics (circle one): Flow rate: gpm m3/h I/m Pressure Toss not to exceed: psi bar The valve body shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass -filled UV -resistant nylon and have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (internal and external bleed) to manually open and close the valve without electrically energizing the solenoid.The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve box. The valve shall house a fully -encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The solenoid shall have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy servicing and a leverage handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz solenoid shall open with 19.6 VAC minimum at 200 psi (13.80 bar). At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed 0.41 amps. Average holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shut-off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 psi (13.80 bar), and less than 30 seconds at 20 psi (1.38 bar). The PESB valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use in dirty water applications. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. Optional Feature Specification PRS-D Pressure Regulating Module: 100PEB-PRS-D 150PEB-PRS-D 200PEB-PRS-D 100PESB-PRS-D 150PESB-PRS-D 200PESB-PRS-D When so indicated on the design, the 1 ,1'h" and 2" electric remote control plastic valves shall have a pressure regulating module (PRS-D) capable of regulating outlet pressure between 15 and 100 psi (±3 psi) (1.04 and 6.90 bar (±0.21 bar)). The PRS-D module shall have an adjusting knob for setting pressure and Schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure. The pressure shall be adjustable from the PRS-D when the valve is internally manually bled or electrically activated. Non -Potable Flow Control Handle * PEB-NP-HAN1 - Fits 1" PEB-NP-HAN2 - Fits 1%"and 2" When so indicated on the design, the valve shall have a purple flow control handle to indicate to the user that non -potable water is being used.There shall be no difference between the black and purple handles except for the color. *Rain Bird offers the PESB-R reclaimed water valve and conversion kits for reclaimed water application. Please see Tech Spec D373388, the Rain Bird catalog, or visit www.rainbird.com for more information. Plastic Electric Remote Control PEB or PESB Valve (with PRS-D) Rain Bird Corporation 6991 E. Southpoint Road Tucson, AZ 85756 Phone: (520) 741-6100 Fax: (520) 741-6522 Rain Bird Technical Services (800) RAINBIRD (1-800-724-6247) (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird Corporation 970 West Sierra Madre Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 812-3400 Fax: (626) 812-3411 Specification Hotline 800-458-3005 (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird International, Inc. 1000 West Sierra Madre Ave. Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 963-9311 Fax: (626) 852-7343 The Intelligent Use of Water" www.rainbird.com ® Registered Trademark of Rain Bird Corporation © 2016 Rain Bird Corporation 4/16 D38950PEO RAINBIRD® Tech Spec Quick -Coupling Valves Convenient water access in potable and non -potable systems Features • Industrial -strength brass quick -coupling valves for convenient water access in potable and non -potable systems. • Rugged, red brass construction for long life and reliable performance. • Reliable leak proof operation with strong corrosion -resistant stainless steel spring. Optional locking cover on models 33-DLRC, 44-LRC, 5-LRC, 33-DNP, • 44 -NP, and 5 -NP (use * 2049 key to unlock). Metal cover on model 7 only • One-piece body design (models 3 -RC, 5 -RC and 7) • Two-piece body design for easy servicing (models 33-DLRC, 33-DRC, 44-LRC, 44 -RC, 33-DNP, 44 -NP, and 44 -NP ACME) • Thermoplastic rubber cover for durability • 33-DNP, 44 -NP, 44 -NP ACME, and 5 -NP covers marked with "Do Not Drink!" warnings in English and Spanish Three-year trade warranty Specifications • Pressure: 5 to 125 psi (0.35 to 8.63 bar) • Flow: 10 to 125 gpm (2.27 to 28.38 m3/h; 37.8 to 473 I/m) • 33-DNP, 44 -NP and 5 -NP flow: 10 to 70 gpm (2.27 to 15.89 m3/h; 37.8 to 265 I/m) Models 3 -RC: 3r4" (20/27) Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body • 33-DRC: 3r4" (20/ 27) Double Track Key Lug, Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 33-DLRC: 3r4"(20/27) Double Track Key Lug, Locking Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 44 -RC: 1"(26/34) Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 44-LRC: 1"(26/34) Locking Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 5 -RC: 1" (26/34) Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body • 5-LRC: 1 " (26/34) Locking Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body • 7: 112"(40/49) Metal Cover, 1 -Piece Body • 5-RC-BSP: 1" (26/34) Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body, BSP threaded Quick Coupling Valves 33-DNP, 44 -NP, 44 -NP ACME 7 • 5-LRC-BSP: 1" (26/34) Locking Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body, BSP threaded • 33-DNP: 3/4"(20/27) Non -potable, Purple Locking Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 44 -NP: 1"(26/34) Non -potable, Purple Locking Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body • 44 -NP ACME: 1"(26/34) Non -potable, Purple Locking Rubber Cover, 2 -Piece Body, ACME thread • 5 -NP: 1"(26/34) Non -potable, Purple Locking Rubber Cover, 1 -Piece Body Note: For non -US applications, it is necessary to specify NPT or BSP thread type Dimensions (height) • 3 -RC: 41/4" (10.8 cm) • 33-DRC: 43/8" (11.1 cm) • 33-DLRC: 45/8" (11.7 cm) • 44 -RC: 6" (15.2 cm) • 44-LRC: 6" (15.2 cm) • 5 -RC: 5'h"(14.0 cm) Quick -Coupling Valve Cutaway to - 3 -RC, 5 -RC, 33-DRC, 33-DLRC, 5-LRC 44 -RC, 44-LRC • 5-LRC: 5'k" (14.0 cm) • 7: 53/4" (14.6 cm) • 33-DNP: 43/8" (11.1 cm) • 44 -NP: 6" (15.2 cm) • 44 -NP ACME: 6" (15.2 cm) • 5 -NP: 511"(14.0 cm) How To Specify 33 - DLRC Model Cover 33 RC 44 DRC 5 DLRC 7 LRC DNP NP Thread Blank: NPT BSP: 5 -RC, 5-IRC only ACME: 44 -NP only Note: This specifies a 33-DLRC valve: 3/4"(20/27) quick coupling type; optional locking cover. RAINBIRD® Specifications 33-DNP, 44 -NP, 44 -NP ACME - Two Piece Quick Coupling Valve (Non -Potable) The quick coupling valve shall be a two piece type capable of having a discharge rate of units with a pressure loss not to exceed units. The valve shall be constructed of red brass and shall have a purple, thermoplastic, lock- ing rubber cover with molded -in warnings of "DO NOT DRINK" in English and Spanish, for use on systems using non -potable water. The valve shall be opened and closed by a brass key of the same manufacturer having a "(MNPT) and "(FNPT) outlet.The valve throat shall have a key -way with detent positions for regulating water flow. QUICK COUPLING VALVES - 3 -RC, 5 -RC, 5-LRC, 7 - One Piece Quick Coupling Valve The quick coupling valve shall be a one-piece type capable of having a discharge rate of units with a pressure loss not to exceed units. The valve body shall be constructed of red brass.The cover shall be a durable, protective self -closing rubber cover. When so specified, the cover shall be a locking rubber cover (LRC). The valve shall be opened and closed by a brass key of the same manufacturer having a " (MNPT) and " (FNPT) outlet. The valve throat shall have a key -way with detent positions for regulating water flow. * Cover Key - Model 2049 • Locks and unlocks the optional locking cover (LRC) on quick coupling valves. • Operates the valve marker compression lock. 33-DRC, 33-DLRC, 44 -RC, 44-LRC- Two Piece Quick Coupling Valve The quick coupling valve shall be a two piece type capable of having a discharge rate of _units with a pressure loss not to exceed units. The valve body shall be constructed of red brass.The cover shall be a durable, protective self -closing rubber cover. When so specified, the cover shall be a locking rubber cover (LRC). The valve shall be opened and closed by a brass key of the same manufacturer having a "(MNPT) and " (FNPT) outlet.The valve throat shall have a key -way with detent positions for regulating water flow. Quick Coupling Valve Keys TOP PIPE THREADS VALVE KEY MALE FEMALE 3 -RC 33DK 3/a" 19 mm 'h° 13 mm 33-DRC 33DK 3/a" 19 mm 'h" 13 mm 33 -NP 33DK 3/4" 19 mm /" 13 mm 44 -NP 44K 1" 25 mm 3/4" 19 mm 44 -NP ACME 44KA 1" 25 mm 3/41 19 mm 44 -RC 44K 1" 25 mm 3/4'I 19 mm 5 -RC 55K1 1" 25 mm - - 5 -NP 55K1 1" 25 mm - 7 7K 1' " 38 mm 0 FINISH GRADE/TOP OF MULCH 0 QUICK -COUPLING VALVE: RAIN BIRD MODEL 3RC OVALVE BOX WITH COVER: RAIN BIRDVB-6RND 0 PVC SCH 80 NIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED) 0 3 -INCH MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3/4 -INCH WASHED GRAVEL 0 BRICK (10F2) OPVC 5CH 40 STREET ELL 8 PVC SCH 40 TEE OR ELL 9 PVC MAINLINE PIPE 10 PVC 5CH40 ELL 2", 2"REDWOOD STAKE WITH STAINLESS S EQUIVALENT OR EQUIVALENT SUPPORT SYSTEM NOTE FURNISH FITTINGS AND PIPING NOMINALLY SIZED IDENTICAL TO NOMINAL QUICK COUPLING VALVE INLET SIZE. Quick -Coupling Valves Pressure Loss (psi) Flow 3 -RC 33-DRC 33-DLRC 33-DNP 44 -RC 5 -RC 7 44-LRC 5-LRC 44 -NP 5 -NP 44 -NP ACME 9Pm ;/4 3/41 1" 1" 1111 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 125 1.8 4.7 7.2 2 4.3 7.6 2.2 4.4 11.5 4.1 7.3 11 15.7 21.5 1.7 2.5 3.6 4.9 8.4 14 Quick -Coupling Valves Pressure Loss (bar) METRIC Flow 3 -RC 33-DRC 44 -RC 5 -RC 7 33-DLRC 44-LRC 5-LRC 33-DNP 44 -NP 5 -NP 44 -NP ACME m3M I/m 1.9 cm 1.9 cm 2.5 cm 2.5 cm 3.8 cm 2.3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 22 28 38 0.12 67 0.41 83 0.57 100 - 117 - 133 - 150 - 167 - 200 - 233 - 267 - 367 - 473 - 0.12 0.42 0.62 0.23 0.40 0.62 0.83 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.61 0.85 1.15 1.50 0.13 0.18 0.25 0.54 0.97 *Loss values are with flow control fully open. 1) Rain Bird recommends flow rates in the supply line not to exceed 7.5 ft/sec (2,3 m/s) in order to reduce the effects of water hammer. 2) For flows below 5 gpm (1 m3/h; 32I/s) Rain Bird recommends use of upstream filtration to prevent debris from collecting below the diaphragm. 3) For flows below 10 gpm (2 m3/h; 63I/s) Rain Bird recommends that the flow control stem be turned down two full turns from the fully open position. PRS-8 module is recommended for use only at flow rates in areas below solid line. Rain Bird Corporation 6991 E. South point Road Tucson, AZ 85756 Phone: (520) 741-6100 Fax: (520) 741-6522 Rain Bird Technical Services (800) RAINBIRD (1-800-724-6247) (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird Corporation 970 West Sierra Madre Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 812-3400 Fax: (626) 812-3411 Specification Hotline 800-458-3005 (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird International, Inc. 1000 West Sierra Madre Ave. Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 963-9311 Fax: (626) 852-7343 The Intelligent Use of Water" www.rainbird.com ® Registered Trademark of Rain Bird Corporation © 2017 Rain Bird Corporation 9/17 D38950QE0 RAINBInD® Tech Spec Root Watering System Primary Application The Rain Bird® Root Watering System (RWS) enables vital water, air, and nutrients to bypass compacted soil and directly reach tree and shrub root systems. It's factory assembled irrigation hardware and patented basket weave canister allow ground installation to a depth of 36" (91,4 cm) for the RWS, 18"(45,7 cm) for the RWS-Mini, and 10"(25,4 cm) for the RWS-Supplemental. This system is intended for use with water dispensing devices, such as a bubbler head or an emitter. This system can be customized by the end user to meet their specific required irrigation needs or can be purchased with pre -installed bubbler and check valve options. Features and Benefits Investment Protection • Deep and broad roots yield transplantation survivability, stability in high winds, fast and healthy growth Watering Efficiency • Subsurface irrigation minimizes run-off and evaporation Landscape Aesthetics • Installs at grade and helps minimize damage to hardscapes Models RWS (Root Watering System) RWS - Root Watering System Basic, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, ready for customer provided irrigation hardware RWS-B-1401 - Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler, 4"(10,2 cm) grate, versatile swing assembly with 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-B-1402 - Root Watering System with 0.50 GPM (1,9 I/m) bubbler, 4" (10 cm) grate, 12"(30,5 cm) versatile swing assembly with 12"(15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-B-C-1401 - Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, versatile swing assembly with 12"(15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-B-C-1402 - Root Watering System with 0.50 GPM (1,9 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, versatile swing assembly with 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-B-C-1404 - Root Watering System with 1.00 GPM (3,8 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, versatile swing assembly with 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-B-X-1401 - Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, 18" (45,7 cm) open swing assembly with 12"(15/21) M NPT inlet RWS-MINI (Mini Root Watering System) RWS-M - Mini Root Watering System Basic with 4" (10,2 cm) grate, ready for customer provided irrigation hardware RWS-M-B-1401 - Mini Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler, 4"(10,2 cm) grate, 12"(15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS-M-B-1402 - Mini Root Watering System with 0.50 GPM (1,9 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS-M-B-C-1401 - Mini Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS-M-B-C-1402 - Mini Root Watering System with 0.50 GPM (1,9 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 4" (10,2 cm) grate, 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS/RWS-MINI ACCESSORIES RWS-SOCK - Root Watering System Sock (6 per bag) RWS-GRATE-P-RootWateringSystem4" (10 cm) Purple Grate RWS-Supplemental RWS-S-B-1401 - Supplemental Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler, 2" (5,1 cm) snap -on cap and base, 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS-S-B-C-1401 - Supplemental Root Watering System with 0.25 GPM (0,95 I/m) bubbler & check valve, 2" (5,1 cm) snap -on cap and base, 12" (15/21) M NPT inlet spiral barb elbow RWS-S-B-C-PCT5 - Supplemental Root Watering System with 5 GPH (18,93 I/h) bubbler RWS Supplemental RWS-Mini How To Specify RWS-X-X-X-XXXX Model RWS 36" (91,4cm) Bubbler Model: 1401 1402 1404 PCT5 Optional: C: Check Valve Bubbler: B: Bubbler Pre -installed Other Size: M: Mini (18"- 45,7cm) S: Supplemental (10"- 25,4cm) GRATE -P: Purple Grate RWS-Sock: Sock RA/114B/RD Specifications The RWS is the smart watering product line designed to maximize tree and shrub transplanting survivability. It consists of a perforated polyethylene cylinder in three different lengths - 36" (91,4 cm) for large trees, 18" (45,7 cm) for small trees, and 10" (25,4 cm) for shrubs and row plantings - and two different widths - 4" (10.2 cm) for trees and 2" (5,1 cm) for shrubs and row plantings.The rigid mesh material helps support the horizontal movement of water and air into the root zone and adjacent soil. The cylinder supports pea gravel fill to provide better top -to -bottom water dispersion and firmness against root compression. The RWS is designed with an integrated bubbler and optional check valve. The water being emitted from the bubbler helps train roots away from surfaces and hardscapes, minimize surface erosion and reduce waste due to run-off. The factory -assembled RWS comes pre - configured with swing assemblies and/or spiral barbed fittings in order to promote irrigation design flexibility, accommodate all tree and shrub sizes, and help save installation time by being ready to install out of the box.The assemblies and fittings enable the RWS to be directly connected to PVC or polyethylene lateral lines. The RWS Usage Guide • Use 2-3 RWS units for large trees • Use 1-2 RWS-MINI units for small trees • Use 1-2 RWS-Supplemental units for shrubs bubblers on the 18" (45,7cm) and 36" (91,4cm) RWS models can be replaced with Rain Bird's 6 -outlet drip manifold (EMT-6XERI) allowing use of the RWS as a drip distribution hub. RWS includes two ports allowing distribution of XQ 1/4"drip tubing to surrounding RWS units or other drip irrigation emitters. Rain Bird's Drip System Operation Indicator (OPERIND) can be optionally used to indicate active RWS irrigation. The RWS, including the RWS-M and RWS-S models, protect the investment property owners make in trees and shrubs. It helps trees and shrubs establish deeper and broader roots for better stability against high winds and quicker, healthier growth. The subsurface irrigation design improves watering efficiency by minimizing the total volume of water used to irrigate trees and shrubs and minimize water lost due to evaporation and run-off.The RWS improves the aesthetics of the landscape by installing at finish -grade level and minimizing root damage to hardscapes. The RWS supports an extra -wide molded collar to provide convenient access to the bubbler and drip line fastener. It supports a locking grate cover to help deter vandalism. It offers a purple, reclaimed water grate cover option. The RWS offers also a sock option in order to prevent small particles from penetrating the RWS cylinder.The RWS is designed with a RWS RWS-MINI peripheral watering feature which allows water to flow along the perforated cylinder resulting in the wetting of soil along the vertical distance of the cylinder. RWS units should be installed on their own watering zone in order to improve irrigation efficiency and management. ;;Integrated swing assembly connects to lateral lines • Position units evenly spaced, adjacent to the root zone and within the canopy of the tree • Consider filling canisters with pea gravel to fill to provide better top -to -bottom water dispersion and firmness against root compression • Optional soil sock should be used to prevent particle intrusion into cyliner • Optional purple grate cover should be used for non -potable water sources • For long-term deep and broad roots, consider installing two RWS perimeters on seperate zones — running the inner zone for the first couple of years and the outer zone in subsequent years �- -- - : �• r RWS-Supplemental Rain Bird Corporation 6991 E. Southpoint Road Tucson, AZ 85756 Phone: (520) 741-6100 Fax: (520) 741-6522 Rain Bird Technical Services (800) RAINBIRD (1-800-724-6247) (U.S. and Canada) Registered Trademark of Rain Bird Corporation © 2016 Rain Bird Corporation 05/16 Rain Bird Corporation 970 West Sierra Madre Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 812-3400 Fax: (626) 812-3411 Specification Hotline 800-458-3005 (U.S. and Canada) Rain Bird International, Inc. 1000 West Sierra Madre Ave. Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: (626) 963-9311 Fax: (626) 852-7343 The Intelligent Use of Water'"' www.rainbird.com D39500F PRODUCT: QS-ELEV2436W-Z22 WEIGHT: 227 Ibs (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: CONCRETE COLOR: O QUAIL HILL RED X FRENCH GREY O NATURAL 0 BUNGALOW O MISSION WHITE 0 ADOBE TAUPE O LATTE 0 CUSTOM COLOR O HARVEST CONCRETE TEXTURE: X SMOOTH 0 SANDSTONE SEALER: STANDARD SEALER GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: LID MATERIAL: " LITECRETE O ALUMINUM E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE 0 STEEL INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". AUXILIARY VIEW SECTION VIEW PLAN TYPE PRODUCT PROJECT NAME LID COLORS: O BLACK O GRAY O BROWN O BLUE Z22 LID W/ 21"L. SECURITY STEEL CABLE & TAMPER PROOF BOLT 29 GALLON PLASTIC LINER (QS-PL29) 2"DIA. DRAIN HOLE (CENTERED) STD. 2"DIA. DRAIN HOLE (CENTERED) PLAN VIEW EASED EDGE R1/2" ELEVATION VIEW Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. r 19 1/8"SQ. LID -Z22 (22"SQ.) 36" F- IAFzEDWA E 1 QTY TYPE (LID Z22) 22"O.D. FUNNEL LID SECURITY CABLE AND BOLT CONSTRUCTION PLAN (QS-PLP29) SQUARE PLASTIC LINER DATE FILE NO. SHEET 2/7/17 174QS_ELEV2436W222X SCALE DRAWN BY: 3/4" = 1' - OF PC. NO. QC ITEM NO. X PRODUCT: Q -GROOVE -72T WEIGHT: 514 Ibs.(TABLE) 232 Ibs. (BENCH) (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: MADE WITH EDURACAST, AN ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CONCRETE COLOR: O QUAIL HILL RED 0 FRENCH GREY O NATURAL 0 BUNGALOW O MISSION WHITE O ADOBE TAUPE O LATTE 0 CUSTOM COLOR O HARVEST CONCRETE TEXTURE: O SMOOTH O SANDSTONE O POLISH (TOP) SEALER: STANDARD SEALER 4200 1 1/2" GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". ANCHORING METHOD BY OTHERS 1 1/2" 1 3/4"-t 3/4"-1' 30" —12"---9"— • SECTION VIEW 1-1 1=2 1=:. 1=2 E LI �T SIKAFLEX F.S. SIKAFLEX QCO www.qcp-corp.com PLAN TYPE PRODUCT PROJECT NAME CONSTRUCTION PLAN 1/2"W. x 1/4"DEEP GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY 3" M 72" Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. 24" 8" TYP. 3"IYP. 1/2"W. x 1/4"DEEP GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY GROOVES ON THIS SIDE ONLY 2 3/4" 1 1/2" PLAN VIEW 30" 17 /2" 56" ELEVATION VIEW 1 1/2"--I 11" 29" 18° 6Q -GROOVE -72T 1 TABLE 1 GROOVE 11111141 DATE 3/5/19 SCALE 1/2" = 1' PC. NO. FILE NO. 392_Q_GROOVE_72T DRAWN BY: QC ITEM NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 MIGUEL\3Ds FOR WEBSITE\392 O_GROOVE_72T\392_ 0 GROOVE_72T.dwg, 3/5/2019 2:06:29 PM, Miguel PRODUCT: Q2-ORION-L WEIGHT: 415 Ibs. (CUSTOMER TO OFFLOAD IF OVER 6000 Lbs.) QUANTITY: MADE WITH EDURACAST, AN ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CONCRETE COLOR: o QUAIL HILL RED 0 FRENCH GREY O NATURAL 0 BUNGALOW O MISSION WHITE 0 ADOBE TAUPE O LATTE 0 CUSTOM COLOR O HARVEST CONCRETE TEXTURE: O SMOOTH O SANDSTONE O POLISH SEALER: STANDARD SEALER 4200 ISOMETRIC VIEW FOOTING BY OTHERS GENERAL PRODUCT NOTES: E = EXPOSED FINISHED SURFACE INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY OTHERS. ALL EDGES TO BE EASED. MANUFACTURING TOLERANCE ±1/4". 17 11/16" SIDE VIEW SECTION VIEW Authorized Signature Date By signing above or stamping this drawing "approved" or "no exception taken" authorization is give to QCP to produce this drawing as shown within a 114° tolerance. 47 7/8" • 17 /8" 17 1 /16" PLAN VIEW ELEVATION VIEW 18" 14 5/16" 18 13/16" 1 13/16° (2) 1/4"DIA. S.S. 1 INSERTS . . . T (2) 1/4"DIA. x 3 1/2"L S.S. ANCHOR BOLT 1 1/2"DIA. x 4"DEEP GROUT POCKETS BY OTHERS QCO PLAN TYPE PRODUCT 8 9/16° CONSTRUCTION PLAN BOTTOM VIEW I- I A IR I=>WAFR E L1 ST QT- TYPE 2 1/4"DIA. x 3 1/2"L S.S. ANCHOR BOLT -ill=IIIC ON-L 1 QLINE BENCH 1 ORIO DATE FILE N0. SHEET 3/13/19 394_Q2_ORION_L SCALE DRAWN BY 3/4" = 1' OF www.qcp-corp.com PROJECT NAME PC. NO. QC ITEM NO. QC0 (https://qcp- MATERIALS I tlieLRORS 1 FIN SHES REQUEST QUOTE (HTTPS //QCP-CORP.COM/REQUEST_A_QUOTEJ1 EARCH ii13€ 1,6E Email: sales@qcp-corp.com (railto:sales@qcp-c ata n( corp.coaijrp. PRECAST CONCRETE WILL NEVER LOOK THE SAME We don't just make your project stand the test of time. At QCP, we make it personal. With our industry -leading array of finishes, you can choose just the right distinctive, custom look for your precast concrete site furnishings or masonry products — from shimmering metallics and bold glazes to traditional stone -like textures. Continue reading to learn which finishes are available for our different products and get ready to see precast concrete in a brand new light. Complete boxes or individual samples are available for all options below. STANDARD AGORA CATALINAtttt rimedead BASE MATERIALS ISRcI Standard (SRC) Our Standard steel -reinforced concrete products are available in QCP's Craftsman's Etch and Strata finishes, both of which perfectly complement the durable, high -quality nature of SRC. Producing beautiful, saturated colors and a stone -like appearance, our SRC options add value to your design or investment. LC Lite Crete When a lighter -weight product is called for --such as planters, removable bollards, waste containers and architectural trim--Lite Crete provides functional flexibility without sacrificing strength and durability. Lite Crete is offered in eight tones in our versatile Sandstone finish, for a refined, consistent look. Plus 15% over Standard. UL EC] Ultralight When a lighter -weight product is called for --such as planters, removable bollards, waste containers and architectural trim--Lite Crete provides functional flexibility without sacrificing strength and durability. Lite Crete is offered in eight tones in our versatile Sandstone finish, for a refined, consistent look. Plus 15% over Standard. Eduracast Enduracast is QCP's all new ultra high performance mix. Enduracast allows QCP to design new products with a thinner profile to take precast concrete to new places. FINISHES AND COLORS Find- Material CRAFTSMAN'S ETCH SRC LC UL EC A natural finish with a subtle grit and minor pitting. Great for a variety of installations. 703- 3434) QCp (https://gcp- corp.com/) REQUESTA QUOTE (HTTPS//QCP-CORP.COM/REQUEST_A_QUOTE) (/application/files/7715/1890/2141/craftsman- (/application/files/8915/2038/0137/craftsman- (/application/files/8615/2038/0120/craftsman- (/application/files/5515/1890/2108/craftsman- quail-hill-red.jpg) natural.jpg) mission-white.jpg) latte.jpg) Quail Hill Red Natural Mission White Latte p-corp.com (mailtEoales@qcp-c06(fjm) corp.coaM1jrp. 703- 3434) (/application/files/6915/1890/2072/craftsman- (/application/files/1615/1890/2048/craftsman- (/application/files/7515/1890/2033/craftsman- (/application/files/5415/1890/2018/craftsman- ha rvest.j pg) french-gray.j pg) bu nga low.j pg) adobe-ta a pe.j pg) Harvest French Gray Bungalow Adobe Taupe Finish STRATA Material SRC LC UL EC A heavy surface texture with a deep organic pitting. This finish is great for applications that lend to a more rustic look. (/application/files/2815/2114/5377/strata_quail_hilU gplication/files/8915/2038/0187/strata- (/application/flies/1515/2038/0203/strata- (/application/files/2215/1890/3290/strata- Quail Hill Red natural.jpg) mission-white.jpg) latte.jpg) Natural Mission White Latte Most Dependable Fountains, Inc. OPERATIONS MANUAL MODELS: 10145 SM & 10145 SMSS Most Dependable Fountains, IncTM 5705 Commander Drive Arlington, TN 38002 901-867-0039 www.mostdependable.com MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. 5705 COMMANDER DR. P.O. BOX 587 ARLINGTON, TN 38002-0587 PHONE: (901) 867-0039 www.mostdependable.com .0. 18" ACCESS DOOR OPTIONAL 10" STAINLESS STEEL CARRIER 18" 4... FILTER 10" PIPE BY MDF WATER SUPPLY BY OTHERS FRONT VIEW NOTES: 1. OPTIONAL STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE CARRIER RECOMMENDED. 2. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 3. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING. 4. THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR USE BY ARCHITECTS, ENGINEERS, CONTRACTORS, CONSULTANTS AND DESIGN PROFESSIONALS FOR PLANNING PURPOSES ONLY. THIS DRAWING MAY NOT BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION. 5. ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WAS CURRENT AT THE TIME OF DEVELOPMENT BUT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE PRODUCT MANUFACTURER TO BE CONSIDERED ACCURATE. 6. CONTRACTOR'S NOTE: FOR PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION VISITwww.CADdetails.com/infoAND ENTER REFERENCE NUMBER 3354-17.8. MODEL 10145SM 10145SM SHOWN WITH OPTIONAL 10" SS SURFACE CARRIER 611 3354-17.8 REVISION DATE 12/05/2016 PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT © 2016 CADDETAILS.COM LTD. CADdetails.com 1- r1)F PEDESTAL BOTTLE FILLER SPECIFICATIONS WATER QUALITY (LEAD FREE) • STANDARD PEDESTAL OR • STAINLESS STEEL PEDESTAL RECEPTOR BOWL BOTTLE FILLER SPOUT BUBBLER HEAD PUSH BAR CONTROL VALVE WATER SUPPLY (LEAD FREE) DRAIN FINISH INSTALLATION WINTERIZATION WARRANTY SHIPPING WEIGHT Section 9, California Proposition 6 and the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act. One piece weld construction with MDF standard 3/16" wall thickness. One piece weld construction with MDF standard 304 schedule 10 stainless steel. 18 gauge electro-polished stainless steel bowl. Bowl overlaps pedestal, preventing buildup of residue in visual drinking area. Optional stainless steel Bowl Strainer recommended for areas with sand. Not applicable on Model 10125 SMSS. Sanitary recessed nozzle. Stainless steel anti -squirt head (weighing a pound and a half) mounted with a lock nut and washer to prevent tampering. Lock nut pin holds bubbler in locked position to prevent twisting or turning. The MDF bubbler head has a unique design that features a steady stream trajectory and a built in natural shield from contamination. 304 stainless steel with circumference exceeding 8.6': Mushroom style push bar overlaps and prevents sand and other objects from sticking push bar in the ON position. Stainless steel bubbler housing standard. Requires less than 5 Ibs to operate. Non -cartridge 0 -ring valve delivers steady stream of water through an adjustable valve. This valve design is to operate and function at 30 to 80 PSI. Ideal operating pressure is 60 PSI. Maintenance free reinforced nylobraid tubing - this tubing is not plastic. It is supplied with a 1/2"MIP threaded inlet with stainless steel strainer. Union fittings at every connection. Supply line stops above grade. Water Filter is standard on this model. 1 1/2" schedule 40 PVC pipe. Drain line stops above grade. Oven baked powder coat. Choice of colors are:❑green, ❑ blue, 0 black, 0 red, ❑ yellow, 0 orange, 0 brown and 0 white. Textured color choices: 0 emerald, ❑ sapphire, 0 pyrite, 0 text -black, 0 burgundy, 0 gold vein, 0 copper and ❑ sandstone. Stainless steel models are powder coated for added protection. The color 0 chrome is an available option for stainless steel models only. Surface Mount installation is designed to be anchored on top of a new or existing surface (concrete, etc.) For a new surface, a surface mount carrier is recommended. For an existing surface, anchor bolts are to be used through the attached mounting plate. Surface Mount Fountains come standard with an access door with vandal resistant stainless steel screws. Shut off water and drain down. Remove water filter. One year warranty, labor not included. Model 10125 SM 110 Ibs Model 10135 SM 150 Ibs Model 10145 SM 245 Ibs Model 10150 SM 245 Ibs Model 10155 SM 195 Ibs Model 10125 SMSS Model 10135 SMSS Model 10145 SMSS Model 10150 SMSS Model 10155 SMSS 100 Ibs Model 10890 SM 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Model 10890 SMSS... 140 Ibs 235 Ibs Model 10895 SM 200 Ibs 235 Ibs Model 10895 SMSS... 190 Ibs 185 Ibs MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC.' 5705 COMMANDER DR. • ARLINGTON, TN 38002-0587 www.mostdependable.com (901) 867-0039 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.' All SM (surface mount) products are designed to be installed on the surface of a new or existing concrete slab. Your contractor needs to provide a 1 1/2" PVC drain line (when applicable) and water line thru finish grade. Connections are made to our SM products thru our access door, as shown on detail drawings. The water tubing is provided with a 1/2" male iron pipe connection. This is an excellent location for a cutoff valve. Surface Mount units are anchored to the existing concrete by means of 1/2" concrete shields with bolts or we recommend 1/2" quick bolts. Note: We offer an optional template which is designed to be poured in the concrete slab. It comes with the necessary vandal resistant stainless steel bolts and washers needed to anchor. All DB (direct bury) products are designed to be installed to a depth of 14" below grade. MDF provides 1 1/2" PVC drain line inside the pedestal (when applicable) to point of connection by others. MDF also provides reinforced nylobraid flexible tubing with a 1/2" male iron pipe thread for connection to water supply by others. MDF recommends an optional valve box using a PVC conduit to the pedestal. By using this option you have complete control of your product. Individual detail drawings available Online or by request. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. For more information: Most Dependable Fountains, Inc." www.mostdependable.com Info@mostdependable.com 901-867-0039 LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY Most Dependable Fountains, ln<' Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM warrants that all of its products are guaranteed against defective material or poor workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM liability under this warranty shall be discharged by furnishing without charge any goods, or part thereof, which shall appear to the Company upon inspection to be of defective material or not of first class workmanship. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM will not be liable for the cost of repairs, alterations or replacements, or for any expense connected therewith made by the owner or his agents. Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM will not be liable for any damages caused by defective materials or poor workmanship, except for replacements, as provided above. Buyer agrees that Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM has made no other warranties either expressed or implied in addition to those above stated. The products manufactured by Most Dependable Fountains, Inc.TM is warranted to function if installation and maintenance instructions provided are adhered to. The units also must be used for the purpose for which they were intended. MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. C23257 PRIMROSE PARK SCHEMATIC 201001 JB8-1-100 PC -8882-D FWS-100 TOP OF SLAB 120V,1 0,60HZ 12FLA (PUMP ONLY) ELECTRICAL FEED NOTE: IF ADDING MORE CIRCUITS, FLA TO CHANGE 1 "C(3W,TYPE MTW) CPL-TCLC 3 WIRE POWER CORD (TYP 3) FLOWER TOP 2" VALVE & 3"x2" REDUCER FITTING SUB -BP -075 R-51 TOP OF SLAB 2" CHECK VALVE CITY WATER SUPPLY BACKFLOW PREVENTION AND PRESSURE REDUCTION 50 PSI MAX. BY INSTALLER TO BASIN TO BASIN (BYPASS) (FILTERED) II 2" VALVE 0 INSIDE BASIN OUTSIDE BASIN WTC-920 1'-9" 1'-5" EROSION FEEDER 2' .1 r ir'A- r\ L_, _ � I ' ; _' = 1 \ i I = _• .....FIG Di=- I L �— \i I = IG 1 •--- i NOTE: PIPE BY INSTALLER ••• • MG: fountain people WTC-920 CHLORINE - BROMINE TREATMENT ASSEMBLY LOCKABLE LID TAMPER —RESISTANT FASTENER AND TOOL PROVIDED r FINISHED SURFACE GRAVEL PVC ISOLATION VALVE 1-1/2" CONNECTION (TYP 2) DRFT DESIGN CHLORINE —BROMINE TREATMENT ASSEMBLY DETAIL A 1 • WTC-920 co N.T.S. r 00-00-00 FOUNTAIN PEOPLE — PO BOX 807 — SAN MARCOS, TX 78667 — 512-392-1155 SUB —BP SERIES SUBMERSIBLE BRONZE PUMP DESCRIPTION INFORMATION: SUB -BP Series Submersible Bronze Pump is suitable for high flow, low pressure handling capability. Pump provides a high flow rate per watt for energy -efficient continuous operation, and is safe for fish and plants. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION: SUB -BP Series Submersible Bronze Pump, all bronze and stainless steel construction, 1/3 to 1 HP units available in both 115V and 230V single phase. Details 1.75 (45) HOSE CONNECTION, DISCHARGE, 90 DEG. ROTATION L2.56_ 2.56y (65) (65) 7.75 (197) 4.25 (108) l000Vf III 6 °°° °°°o o . c°o°o°o°°°o 0000°o°u°cc 0000 0000 NAM 0%4'4:BBo°oMI% cfrallIPAIS%%411, 000°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°�o o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o°o�i 3 800000°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0°0000000°00000°0°06 3 000000000000000000000000000000 12.00 (305) 8.0 6 6.38 (205; (162) 15.75 (400) 2.50 (64r- 1.00 (25) PROFILE VIEW TOTAL METERS HEAD FEET 20- 60 18— 1HP 16- 50 3/4HP `` 14— 12— 40 1/2HP 10— 30 _ 1/3HP 8- 6 20 4- 10 2— V87781 U.S. GALLONS PER MINUTE 20 40 60 80 100 LITERS I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 PER SECOND TECHNICAL NOTES: 1. These pumps are UL listed for pumping water. DO NOT USE TO PUMP FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS 2. Special suction chamber keeps motor 3 submerged at all times for cool operations. 3. Modifications may affect "UL" listings. 4. Installations such as decorative fountains or water features provided for visual enjoyment must be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and/or the authority having jurisdiction. This pump is not intended for use in swimming pools, recreational water parks, or installation in which human contact with pumped media is a common occurrence. ELEVATION VIEW ENGINEERING DATA Model # Hp V �Ph e Hz RPM (Nom) Full Load Amps SUB -BP -033 1/3 115/1 60 3450 8 SUB -BP -050 1/2 115/1 60 3450 9.5 SUB -BP -075 3/4 115/1 60 3450 12 SUB -BP -100 1 230/1 60 3450 7 • • ;d1. Ii; fountain people Fountain People, Inc. 4600 Hwy 123 San Marcos, TX 78666 USA T: (512) 392-1155 F: (512) 392-1154 www.fountainpeople.com 'FWS-SERIES WATERSTOP FITTING DESCRIPTION INFORMATION: FWS-Series Waterstop Fitting provides a flush mount, "pour -in -place" embedded fitting, that allows a direct connection between in -pool components with piping or conduit. Fitting may be floor or wall mounted. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION: FWS-Series Waterstop Fitting; consists of a coupling with an integral waterstop plate, bonding lug and female threaded connections. Construction is cast bronze, copper and brass with a natural finish. NON -CORROSIVE PIPE FITTING, (TO KEEP CONCRETE DEBRIS FROM INTERFERING WITH THREADS), BY INSTALLER Details BONDING SCREW FNPT CONNECTIONS, TOP & BOTTOM INTEGRAL WATERSTOP PLAN VIEW - FWS-150 (AS SHOWN) - BONDING SCREW M FRONT VIEW TECHNICAL NOTES: FINISHED FOUNTAIN FLOOR N INTEGRAL WATERSTOP PVC OR NON -CORROSIVE PIPING & FITTINGS, BY INSTALLER ELEVATION VIEW ENGINEERING DATA MODEL# FNPT Measurements FWS-050 1/2" 3-1/2" 1-3/4" FWS-075 3/4" 3-1/2" 1-3/4" FWS-100 1" 5" 1-3/4" FWS-125 1-1/4" 5" 3" FWS-150 1-1/2" 5" 3" FWS-200 2" 5', 3" FWS-300 3" 7" 5-1/4" FWS-400 4" 7" 5-1/4" 1) WATERSTOP FITTING INTENDED FOR FORMED CONCRETE OR GUNITE/SHOTCRETE APPLICATIONS. THIS PRODUCT IS NOT INTENDED FOR POND/POOL LINER APPLICATIONS. 2) WATERSTOP MUST BE BONDED UTILIZING A #8 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE. BONDING SCREW THICKENED SLAB Fountain People, Inc. 4600 Hwy 123 San Marcos, TX 78666 USA T: (512) 392-1155 fountain people- F: (512) 392-1154 www.fountainpeople.com J J88 -Series Underwater Junction Box DESCRIPTION INFORMATION: JB8-Series Underwater Junction Box is an universal junction box for either conduit mount or niche mount applications (up to 8 fixtures). The box is tapped for the maximum number of allowable fixtures and includes the appropriate style/quantity cord seals and plugs depending on the number of connections requested. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION: JB8-Series Underwater Junction Box; UL Listed underwater junction box consisting of bronze constructed housing and lid, stainless steel fasteners, neoprene gasket, integral ground bar and external "direct burial" rated bonding lug; includes (1) 1" (F)NPT bottom connection and (8) 3/4" (F)NPT side connections. Junction box may be conduit mounted or flush mounted. Universal brass cord seal provides method for either flush mount or freestanding fixture/conduit connections (3/4" or 1/2" NPT connection). The box has a minimum internal volume of 72.0 cubic inches. NOTES: - CONDUIT MOUNT VERSION REQUIRES EMBED FITTING Details 1/2 " (F)NPT CONNECTION OR 3/4 " (M)NPT CONNECTION AS NEEDED 1/2" OPTIONAL CONDUIT CONNECTION CONDUIT FROM CONTROL PANEL, BY INSTALLER FLUSH MOUNT ELEVATION VIEW ENGINEERING DATA 3/4" OPTIONAL CONDUIT CONNECTION CORD SEAL INCLUDED, QTY. SUPPLIED BASED ON MODEL NO. # BONDING LUG INLETS WILL HAVE PLUGS IF NOT USED BRASS NIPPLE, BY INSTALLER, LENGTH AS NEEDED CORD SEALS & PLUGS, INCLUDED (SEE NOTE #2) I +; J A a BONDING LUG A a SEE NOTE #1 BELOW BONDING LUG 7/\ CONDUIT FROM CONTROL PANEL, BY INSTALLER CONDUIT MOUNT ELEVATION VIEW CATALOG # DIM 'A' DIM 'B' DIM 'C' 1B8-1-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" JB8-2-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" JB8-3-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" JB8-4-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" JB8-6-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" JB8-8-100 4" 6.75" 6.75" NOTES: 1) WATERSTOP FITTING REQUIRED FOR CONCRETE POUR WHEN USING JUNCTION BOX FOR CONDUIT APPLICATION. 1" F.N.P.T STANDARD. SEE CATALOG ITEM FWS-100. 2) CORD SEALS INCLUDED ARE DESIGNED FOUNTAIN PEOPLE FX/FXPRO SERIES LIGHTS. ANY OTHER FIXTURE STYLE MAY REQUIRE DIFFERENT CORD SEAL. 3) REQUIRES #8882-D POTTING COMPOUND PER NEC STANDARDS. fountain people- oo� — Fountain People, Inc. 4600 Hwy 123 San Marcos, TX 78666 USA T: (512) 392-1155 F: (512) 392-1154 www.fountainpeople.com 'PC -8882 POTTING COMPOUND DESCRIPTION INFORMATION: PC -8882 Potting Compound is made for encapsulating wire connections within electrical junction boxes. Potting compound adheres well and pulls away cleanly for fast splice re-entry. Prevents moisture in junction boxes. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION: Potting Compound; Two-part, non -urethane, re -enterable encapsulant compound. Meets NEC article 680 as an approved potting compound. Details PC -8882 POTTING COMPOUND ENGINEERING DATA POTTING COMPOUND OZ. IN3 PC -8882-C 2 -PT 12.3 22 PC -8882-D 2 -PT 21.3 30 fountain people - Fountain People, Inc. 4600 Hwy 123 San Marcos, TX 78666 USA T: (512) 392-1155 F: (512) 392-1154 www.fountainpeople.com WATER LEVEL (9") 2 3/4" ;Obi: fountain people 1/2" N.P.T. ADAPTER BY INSTALLER NOTE: PIPE AND CONNECTIONS BY INSTALLER R-51 4" MECHANICAL FLOAT VALVE DESIGN FITTING DETAIL 0, low R-51 m 1=2 00-00-00 FOUNTAIN PEOPLE - PO BOX 807 - SAN MARCOS TX 78667 - 512-392-1155 Pool & Sna Electronic Control Centers ca a oes O a Ratings Operating Voltage 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Switch Type 3-SPST Resistive 17 A, 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Tungsten 5 A, 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Motor 80 LRA @ 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 17 FLA @ 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Auxiliary Switch 2 A, 24 VAC Enclosure Dimensions HxWxD 16.875" x 10.875" x 4.75" (428.6 mm x 276.2 mm x 120.7 mm) Knockout Dimensions Bottom Left Back Right (1) 1 '/s" diameter hole, (6)'/z" - 3/a", (3) 3/4" - 1" (2) A" - 3/a" (1) 3/4" - 1" (1)1%"x23/4" Warranty 1 -year 60 A Pool/Spa Control System with Type 3R Load Center PE20000 Series This system can be used as a load center only, or add mechanisms or wiring devices for complete control systems. Applications • Filter Pumps • Cleaner Pumps • Booster Pumps • Lighting Features • Four breaker spaces • 3-SPST mechanism (P1353ME) controls single- and two -speed filter pumps, cleaner/booster pumps and pool/spa landscape lighting • Load center dead front has two knockouts for switches or GFCIs • P1353ME and MultiWave® controllers sold separately • Wiring devices may be installed in these load centers with the use of Standoffs, sold separately • Also compatible with T100 Series Model # Description PE20000 Load Center Only PE25300F Load Center with Mechanism (P1353ME) and Freeze Probe (178PA28A) PE25300 Load Center with Mechanism (P1353ME) Accessories/Replacement Freeze Probe 178PA28A Spacer -Standoff, 3" long - 2 pack 21T166A Spacer -Standoff, 3" long - 4 pack 21T156A Rixson® is a registered trademark of Yale Security Inc., an ASSA ABLOY Group company. Copyright© 1999, 2015, Yale Security Inc., an ASSA ABLOY Group company. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without the express written permission of Yale Security Inc. is prohibited. ASSA ABLOY, the global leader in door opening solutions 1 1 Dia. 1-15/32 9/32 1/4 Jamb 2-5/8 R. Max 1-1/4 Dia H340 HEAVY DUTY TOP PIVOT (With 11/16" Pin Shown Engaged) Torrington Roller Bearing JH-1110 $ 1-7/16 7/8 a Ann 15/32 21/32 1/4-20 x 5/8" FHMS or #14 x 1-1/2" FHWS (1 Place) 6-118 Floor Plate Closer 23/4 1 118 • See l Note 7 11-7/8 1-3/4 1-1/2 Thrust Spindle Bearing Shoulder Collar 2-1/4 t 1' Cement Case 11-5/16 1 4-1/16 15/32 Floor Plate 6-3/4 1 JAMB PORTION 12-24 x 5/8" FHMS or #12 x 1-1/4" FHWS (2 Places) 9/32 9/32 13/16 t 1-5/16 1-5/8 9/32 1/4-20 x 5/8" FHMS or #14x 1-1/2" FHWS D�6 (3 Places) PORTION r- 5/8 7-9/32 Door Mortised 2-5/16" Deep for Arm Cement Case 5-7/8 WITH FLOOR PLATE Set Cement Case 1/8" Below Surface of Finished Floor t— 3/16 1/4-20 SHCS x 1" (4 Places) .1/41 1-1/2 1/4 1-3/4 Drill & C'Sink for 5/16-18 x 2-1/4" FHMS or#18x3" FHWS (5 Places) Door Mortised Deep for Arm 1/4 Threshold 1/2 Threshold ARM NON -HANDED "A 2-3/16 A 1-15/16 1/4 WITH THRESHOLD Set Cement Case Flush with Finished Floor 3/16 Threshold Notes: 1. Do not scale drawing. 2. Suitable reinforcing by others. 3. Rixson design threshold available on request. 4. This template for 2" thick door or larger. 5. For 1-3/4" doors see template CH2O110. 6. For wood doors pre -drill arm and top pivot holes to prevent splitting. 7. Door must have removable heel to allow tightening of arm (by others). Access panel must go from top of arm to bottom of door. 8. All dimensions given in inches. H28 Floor Closer Single Acting, Center Hung For Minimum 2" Thick Door RIXSON" ASSA ABLOY www.rixson.com TEMPLATE NUMBER DATE CH20200 08-15 Closer Adjustment PAGE 4 RIXSON FIREMARK FRANKLIN PARK ILLINOIS e PO ° Wes; �G Spy This Set Screw Is On Selector Hold -open Types Only Closing speeds can be adjusted to suit local conditions and requirements. Label on closer face designates the purpose of each adjustment screw. Adjustments are for speed control. A. The Delay Action valve allows adjustment from full open to 65° closed position. (Optional) B. The Closing Speed valve allows adjustment from full open to 15° on units without the Delay Action feature. C. The Closing Speed valve allows adjustment from 65° to 15° closed position on closers with Delay Action feature. D. Latch valve allows adjustment from 15° to closed position. E. Important: Backcheck adjustment must be adjusted to vary resistance from light to firm at 60° of door open. Closer Type RH mPGKChc OFF HO ON PN FUL( � Do not use Backcheck as deadstop. This is an intensity valve not speed control. This closer is one of three types as follows: 1. Non hold -open factory set. No hold -open adjustments. 2. Automatic hold -open factory set. No hold -open adjustment. 3. Selective (on -off) hold -open label will indicate position of on -off selector screw. When turned "on", closer has automatic hold - open: turned "off", hold -open will not function. Turn full 180°. Spring Power Adjustments This closer can be adjusted for increased or decreased spring power. These adjustments if required should be done by an authorized repair agency. Repairs, parts replacement or internal adjustments must be done by a Rixson authorized repair agency. Consult www.rixson.com for an authorized repair agency in your area. ASSA ABLOY is the global leader in door opening solutions, dedicated to satisfying end -user needs for security, safety and convenience. Rixson® is a registered trademark of Yale Security Inc., an ASSA ABLOY Group company. Copyright© 2006, 2009, Yale Security Inc., an ASSA ABLOY Group company. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without the express written permission of Yale Security Inc. is prohibited. Rixson Specialty Door Controls www.rixson.com RIXSONI`% ASSA ABLOY 866-474-9766 Technical Department RIXSON ASSA ABLOY Template 1/8 1-1/2 Installation Instructions IS2800587 (07-09) H28 x 587 Arm Floor Closer Center Hung Single Acting - Handed H340 Top Pivot - Non Handed A\ /.\ I of �•r ' b 4 �'+ 4 mot' 4- 4 Spindle Shoulder Collar 1 -1 E2-1/4� OUTSIDE 11/16 5/16 7 INSIDE See Note 6 r 4-1/16 Support Adjuster 11 5/16 See Note 5 2- /4 — 3/8 1-9/16 Notes: Dia. 1. Do not scale drawing. 2. Suitable reinforcing by others. 3. Rixson design threshold available on request. 4. For wood doors predrill arm and top pivot holes to prevent splitting. 5. Door must have removable panel (by others) for access to arm screws. Removable panel must be on inside of door. 6. Drill and tap for #8-32 machine screw, centered (screw by others). 7. All dimensions given in inches. Conversion from inches to metric: inch x 25.4. Rixson Specialty Door Controls www.rixson.com 5/16-18 FHSC (4 Places) 'L3/8 9 Cement Case 3/8 f 3/8 ARM NON -HANDED Drill and C"sink for 5/16-18x2-1/4" FHMS or #18x3" FHWS (7 Places) 1-1/2 Spindle Shoulder Collar Finished See Note 7 Floor 1/4-20NC FHMS x 5/8" or #14 FHWS x 1-1/2 WITH THRESHOLD Set Cement Case Flush with Finished Floor 15/32 —.-1 Max. Door Clearance Floor Plate 1" 1/2 Thresh 5/8" 1/4 Thresh 7/8" Floor Plate 12-24NC FHMS x 5/8" or #12 FHWS x 1-1/4" 6-3/4 7-9/32 5 7/8 WITH FLOOR PLATE Set Cement Case 1/8" Below Surface of Finished Floor Door Mortised r 2-5/16" Deep for Arm 3/16 Door Mortised "A" Deep for Arm 1/4 Threshold 1/2 Threshold 2-3/16 1-15/16 866-474-9766 Technical Department PAGE 2 PAGE 3 How To Determine Hand of Door Face a door swinging open away from you. If it opens to the right, it is right hand. If it opens to the left, it is left hand. Installation Instructions 1. Locating Closer Door Jamb Top Pivot Jamb Portion Top Pivot Door Portion IMPORTANT: Use plumb line to make sure that center line of top pivot pin lines up with center line of closer spindle. Centerline of Door and Spindle 1 Spindle Position 2 3/4" From Face of Jamb to c of Spindle 2. Install Cement Case in Floor LEVEL IN BOTH DIRECTIONS A. Measure 2-3/4" out from door jamb on centerline of door. This is the location of the spindle center. A. For floor plate application: Cement case is set 1/8" (3.2mm) below floor level. B. For threshold application: Cement case is set flush with floor. C. Set cement case in floor and block in position. D. Case should be parallel with center line of door. E. CEMENT CASE SHOULD BE LEVEL. Place levels per Illustration. F. Grout in cement case with closer. Cement should not get between closer and case. 3. Install Pivot and Closer Arm DOOR Arm End Block Spindle Collar -- Thrust Bearing - 4. Hang Door 4® —Arm Spindle Spacer, if supplied Washer Spindle Closer in Floor Top Pivot Pin Pin Retracting Screw Centerline of Door A. Install top pivot in door per template. B. Install top pivot in jamb per template. C. Centerline of pivot pin should line up with centerline of spindle. Use plumb line to assure accuracy. D. Mortise door for arm. E. Install arm in bottom of door. CAUTION: Closer is shipped with valve screws down. DO NOT FORCE VALVES DOWN. A. Retract top pivot pin by turning retracting pin screw counterclockwise. (see illustration) B. Turn spindle to 30° open position. (see illustration) C. Slide door on spindle. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLOSE DOOR. Attach arm cap but do not tighten. D. Line up two portions of top pivot and turn pin retracting screw clockwise. E. Tighten arm end block screws. F. Open door to 60° or more and open screw valve by turning screw counterclockwise. Door will then close. Rixson Specialty Door Controls www.rixson.com 866-474-9766 Technical Department Rixson Specialty Door Controls www.rixson.com 866-474-9766 Technical Department We reserve the right to revise the design or components of any product without notice. 571 • 572 • 573 • 574 Vandal Resistant Linear Fixture LED CATALOG 8 TYPE PROJECT/LOCATION APPROVED BY SPECIFICATIONS • DRIVER — Universal volt (120-277v) electronic driver with standard 0-10V low voltage dimming. • FINISH — All metal parts are 5 stage pre-treated and finished in white polyester powder coat. • HOUSING — Heavy gauge extruded aluminum with cast aluminum end caps. Includes knockouts for surface conduit and tandem mounting. • LENS —.130" thick U.V. stabilized "Satinized" Polycarbonate Lens (SPL) is Standard with no LED Striations. Optional Clear Prismatic Polycarbonate Lens (CPR) is available. • LENS FASTENERS — Recessed Allen set screws to secure lens in place (2) each side (4) total. • REFLECTOR — Formed aluminum with multiple bends for maximum rigidity and unitized with all electrical components. • COMPLIANCE — Built to comply with U.S. and Canadian Safety Standards. Complies with Buy American Act. Suitable For Wet Location Covered Ceiling. Series ORDERING GUIDE: SERIES 571 = 571 Series 1 Ft° 572 = 572 Series 2 Ft 573 = 573 Series 3 Ft 574 = 574 Series 4 Ft Mounting MOUNTING BLANK= Ceiling Surface Mount (Standard) PEND = Pendant Mount WM = Wall Mount (See PSH option for Wet Location) MOUNTING OPTIONS PSH = Protective Shield for Wall Mount — Required for Outdoor Wet Location TDM = Tandem Mount (574 Only) LENS SPL = Satinized Polycarbonate Lens (Standard) CPR = Clear Prismatic Polycarbonate Lens .156 = .156" UV Stabilized Satinized Polycarbonate Lens LED WATTAGE Note: Refer to Below Chart for Size / Wattage Compatibility LED(xx) = LED (xx = Wattage, ex: LED40) TS = Non -Shunted Tombstone Sockets — For Style -B T8 Lamps (By Others) COLOR TEMPERATURE 3K = ±3000K range LED 35K = ±3500K range LED 4K = ±4000K range LED 5K = ±5000K range LED 65K = ±6500K range LED COLOR RENDERING INDEX (CRI) 80CRI = 80 Color Rendering Index (STANDARD) 90CRI = 90 Color Rendering Index VOLTAGE 347 = 347 Volts UNV = Universal Volt (120-277v) Electronic Driver 2UNV = Two Universal Volt (120-277v) Electronic Drivers© Lens LED Wattage CCT Bluetooth" FINISH ex = Black BZ = Bronze WH = White +NAT = Conformal Coating - Light Engine Only +AM = Anti -Microbial Finish CC = Custom Color (Visit www.ralcolor.com) — Provide RALR or Make -to -Match Color Chip PENDING Voltage Finish CONTROL OPTIONS Note: See Accessory Options for Required Remote Controller 9328 = Photocell Button (120/277V)© OCC = Occupancy Sensing Motion Sensor Integral© — Microwave / Single Feed / 120/277V Only — Standby Dim Level Presets: ON/OFF (0%/100%) BLD = Bi-Level Dimming Motion Sensor Integral© — Microwave / Single Feed / 120/277V Only — Standby Dim Level Presets: 10% / 20% / 30% (Standard) / 50% BLDA = Bi-Level Dimming Motion Sensor Integral© — Ambient Light Sensing Feature — Microwave / Single Feed / 120/277V Only — Standby Dim Level Presets: 10% / 20% / 30% (Standard) / 50% — Bi-Level Control Initiated at Ambient Light Level Preset BLS = Bi-Level Switching - Using 2 Drivers (2UNV)© DIMMING OPTIONS Note: 0-10V 100%-30% is Standard D7A = 0-10VDC LED Dimming Driver (100-10%) D7B = 0-10VDC LED Dimming Driver (100-1°k) MISC OPTIONS FUS = Single Fusing DFUS = Double Fusing SG = 10KA Surge Protection (ANSI spec C62.41.2) TP = Tamperproof Screws "'a•�= ARRA =YSA= Compliant Options BACK BOX OPTIONS BB1 = 12" X 2" Back Box BB2 = 25" X 2" Back Box BB3 = 36" X 2" Back Box BB4 = 49" X 2" Back Box EMERGENCY / BATTERY OPTIONS ©O©© No onsite Emergency Power (AC or DC) is provided GTD1 = Generator Transfer Device (Signify)© GTD2 = Generator Transfer Device (LGTD)© — Shunt Relay w/Fire Alarm Override Input Meets California Energy Commission Title 20: (CEC-400-2014-009-CMF) Efficiency Standards EL8W = Integral LED 8 Watt© EL16W = Integral LED 16 Watt© EL2OW = Integral LED 20 Watt© REL8W = Remote LED 8 Watt REL16W = Remote LED 16 Watt REL2OW = Remote LED 20 Watt Cold Weather Emergency Batteries: Operating Temp: -20°C thru 50°C NON-CEC Compliant EL1OW-CW = Integral LED 10 Watt (Cold Weather)© REL10W-CW = Remote LED 10 Watt (Cold Weather) ACCESSORY OPTIONS (order as a separate line) 9002 = Tamperproof Screwdriver REMT = Remote Controller for Sensor Options O Consult Factory with requests regarding wattages not shown. O Backbox (BB) Required. CO 571 Series requires Remote Emergency Battery (REL). O Max mounting height is 18' (18 feet). O Max WHIP length of REL is 8 feet. O Final selection of the Battery Pack under discretion of Factory SIZE / LED WATTAGE 0 Fixture 571 572 573 574 Dimensions - W x H x D 13"x9"x4" 25'/:"x9"x4" 37"x9"x4" 49"x9"x4" Light Emitting Diode LED 20w / 30w 20w / 30w / 40w 20w / 40w / 50w / 60w 20w / 40w / 50w / 60w / 80w / 100w ECLIPSE" LIGHTING 9245 W. Ivanhoe St. I Schiller Park, IL 60176 P: 847-260-0333 1 F:847-260-0344 I E: quoteseeclipselightinginc.com I W: eclipselightinginc.com ® 2020 Eclipse Lighting Inc. Eclipse Lighting pg.1 Rev. 5/28/2020 We reserve the right to revise the design or components of any product without notice. 571 • 572 • 573 •574 Vandal Resistant Linear Fixture LED CATALOG # TYPE PROJECT/LOCATION APPROVED BY OPTIONS I Instructions for Joining Units for Tandem Option SEALING WASHER AS REQUIRED LOCKNUT EACH SIDE CONDUIT STUB CONNECTOR Shown with Protective Shield (PSH) 43-7/8" Distance (On Center) 12" Stem 574 Shown with PEND Option Clear Prismatic Polycarbonate Lens (CPR) Shown with Back Box (BB) DIMENSIONS 572 SERIES 3/8 "Dia. 7/8 " Dia. Knockout --(5) /-Hole-(6) 25" 3 1 3/8 " Dia. Hole -(6) 573 SERIES 7/8 " Dia. Knockout --(5) r —f+J 36" r 3/8" Dia. Hole --(6) X7/8" Dia. Knockout -(5) 574 SERIES / 23-7/8" —11" r/ 23-7/8" —1 I 21-3/4" 49" 21-3/4" Test: 103842377CHI-002 1 Catalogue #: 574-SPL-LED100-5K-EBU-WH 1 Test Date: 2/21/2019 Lamp Output Lumen Efficacy Input Voltage Input Current Input Wattage Power Factor Delta UV (Duv) Color Temp CRI 12,791 Lumens 130.5 LPW 120.OV 818.6mA 98.02W 0.998 0.0006 5238K 83.8 3,800 3,167 2,533 1,900 1267 633 CDi0 633 1267 1,900' 2,533 3,167 3,800' ■ -0°H • - 90° H Polar Candela Distribution 188° 178° 160° 150° 148° s - 3 2 1 130° 18° 204 38° 40° • - 22.5° H -45°H ■ -67.5°H 120° 110° 100° 90° 80° 70° 60° 50° I I ■ 20Fc 2.5Fc ■0.2k ■ IDFc ■IFc ■O.IFc ■ 5 lc ■0.5 Fc Ili,ten, in iglu gt mgi igt height (loft) ECLIPSE" LIGHTING 9245 W. Ivanhoe St. I Schiller Park, IL 60176 P: 847-260-0333 1 F:847-260-0344 I E: quotes@eclipselightinginc.com I W: eclipselightinginc.com 0 2020 Eclipse Lighting Inc. Eclipse Lighting pg.2 Rev. 5/28/2020 PROJECT INFORMATION MILLENIUM AURACYLTM SCONCE MLAS826 SERIES PRODUCT FEATURES: » Surface wall mount — 8"Wx26"H » Marine grade aluminum housing with die-cast end caps » Peace of Mind Guarantee® » UL certified IP64 per IEC 60598 lJ Job Name Fixture Type Catalog Number Approved by SPECIFICATIONS HOUSING: Marine grade extruded aluminum. Marine grade die-cast aluminum end caps. TGIC polyester powder coat — 5 -stage pre-treatment; Salt spray test: 1,000 hours. REFLECTOR: Die -formed marine grade aluminum. Full reflector/wire cover — 92% reflectivity. OUTER LENS: Thermoformed, UV -stabilized impact resistant polycarbonate, and frost or clear acrylic. See Ordering Information for options. Nominal thickness .125". INNER LENS: UV -stabilized, high impact resistant, extruded 100% DR acrylic frost lens. Nominal thickness .100". Lens secured in place by lens frame. HARDWARE: Four stainless steel Torx® with center pin fasteners. Internal brackets and fasteners are non -corrosive. Surface Conduit Adapter (SCA) accessory — aluminum trim frame assembly with integral 1 -box; finished to match lens frame. Water -tight conduit fittings supplied by others. ELECTRICAL: LED: Available 3500K, 4000K and 5000K color temperatures, 82 CRI. 120-277VAC, 50/60Hz electrical input with serviceable high power factor electronic, constant -current driver k20% THD, >0.95 PF). Standard 0-10V dimming with 1-100% range, maximum driver source of 200 pA. LF: 120-277V or 347V high power factor electronic fluorescent ballast (<10-25% THD). PHOTOMETRICS: Photometry tested to the IESNA LM -79-08 standard by an ILAC/IS017025 accredited laboratory. For photometric information, go to www.kenall.com. WARRANTY: Limited five (5) year LED warranty. LISTINGS: UL and CUL listed for Wet Location — vertical wall mount only. UL certified IP64 per IEC 60598. ADA Compliant (SCA Option is non-ADA). PEACE CIF MIND Guarantee® LED C 11 US °�k�°s ORDERING INFORMATION (Ex: MLAS826-PAN-PP-CS-1-17-DV-FS) Model Frame Type Outer Lens MLAS826 FRAME TYPE L Pane L Pillar Finish Frame Type Outer Lens PAN Pane ASt Frosted Acrylic PLR Pillar CAPt Clear Acrylic w/Inner Perforation CPL Capital painted to match housing SLT Slot PP Pearlescent Polycarbonate PRA Prairie RNK Rank tn/a with Peace of Mind Guarantee® LAT Lattice SQR Squares BRK Bricks ORB Orbs L Slot Capital Prairie Rank Finish MB MW WS CS BR DB LG FG CC Matte Black Matte White Warm Satin Painted Anodized Cool Satin Painted Anodized Bronze Dark Bronze Light Gray Forest Green Custom Color (Consult factory) Lamp Quantity 1 One Lamp Lattice Squares Bricks Lamp Qty 1 Orbs Lamp & Ballast/Driver Options Lamp & Ballast/Driver Type (Quantity, Ballast, Voltage, Starting Temperature) 25L35K-DCC-DV 25 Watt 3500K LED 25L40K-DCC-DV 25 Watt 4000K LED 25L50K-DCC-DV 25 Watt 5000K LED 14-120 F14T5 (1,PS,120V, 0°F) 14-277 F14T5 (1,PS,277V, 0°F) 17 -DV F17T8 (1,15,120-277V, 0°F) 17-347 F17T8 (1,PRS,347V, 0°F) 24 -DV F24T5H0 (1,PRS,120-277V, 0°F) Options 9500 D-0552 FS SCA Torx® Screwdriver Torx® Driver Bit Polycarbonate Single Fuse & Holder Surface Conduit Adapter (non-ADA compliant) OUTER LENS OPTIONS PP Pearlescent Polycarbonate AS t Frosted Acrylic CAP t Clear Acrylic w/ Inner Perforation www.kenall.com I P: 800-4-Kenall I F: 262-891-9701 110200 55th Street Kenosha, Wisconsin 53144, USA A brand of legrand° This product complies with the Buy American Act: manufactured in the United States with more than 50% of the component cost of US origin. It may be covered by patents found at www.kenall.com/patents.Content of specification sheets is subject to change; please consult www.kenall.com for current product details. ®2019 Kenall Mfg.Co. MLAS826-100918 For additional photometry, go to www.kenall.com MILLENIUM AURACYLTM SCONCE MLAS826 SERIES —Technical Data PERFORMANCE Initial Delivered Lumens Lamp Type @ 25°C (Im) Efficacy (Im/W) Input Power (W) Drive Current (mA) Estd. L7o LED Life (Hrs) 25L35K 1369 47 29 94 80,000 25L40K 1460 50 29 94 80,000 25L50K 1518 52 29 94 80,000 Displayed information above is for PP Lens type only. Info subject to change. Visit www.kenall.com for IES files and additional information. Model: MLAS826-PAN-PP-MW-25L40K-DV 236 Maximum Candela = 236 Located At Horizontal Angle = 0, Vertical Angle =90 — 1 -Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (0-180) (Through Max. Cd.) — 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (90) (Through Max. Cd.) DIMENSIONAL DATA CROSS SECTION SURFACE CONDUIT ADAPTER (SCA) 2.14" "—> ,I, 1.50" 5.46" INSTALLATION DETAILS (SCA) (4) .312" Dia. Mtg. Holes .875" Dia. Hole 1.50" Dia. Knockout 2404" for over box (4) .25" mounting Dia. Mtg. Holes (4) .312" Dia. Mtg. Holes www.kenall.com 1 P: 800-4-Kenall 1 F: 262-891-9701 1 10200 55th Street Kenosha, Wisconsin 53144, USA A brand of leytand° This product complies with the Buy American Act: manufactured in the United States with more than 50% of the component cost of US origin. It may be covered by patents found at www.kenall.com/patents.Content of specification sheets is subject to change; please consult www.kenall.com for current product details. 02019 Kenall Mfg.Co. MLAS826-100918 SCONCE DECORATIVE FRAME STYLES Pane Rank Pillar Capital Lattice Squares MILLENIUM AURACYL SCONCE FINISH OPTIONS 1 Slot Bricks Prairie Orbs MB Matte Black MW Matte White WS Warm Satin CS Cool Satin BR Bronze Please consult Kenall for custom color availability DB Dark Bronze LG Light Gray www.kenall.com 1 P: 800-4-Kenall 1 F: 262-891-9701 1 10200 55th Street Kenosha, Wisconsin 53144, USA This product complies with the Buy American Act and may be covered by patents found at www.kenall.com/patents. Content of specification sheets is subject to change; please consult www.kenall.com for current product details. A brand of a legrand' 02019 Kenall Mfg.Co. Catalog Number: Date: Project: OVERVIEW The nLight Relay Panel family delivers cost-effective 0-10V dimming and switching for your building design needs. The panel communicates with an nLight network and supports up to 128 digital devices per nLight control zone. Offering a full range of panel sizes, the nLight Relay Panel is ideal for spaces that require full circuit control, with the optional flexibility of configuring single pole relays into a two or three -pole relays in the field. Also included on each panel is a programmable input that can be connected to a photocell, for example, and a separate dry contact "alarm" input that overrides all relays until the contact is released. nLIGHT OPERATION The nLight Relay Panel is nLight-enabled, meaning it has the ability to communicate over an nLight network. When daisy -chain wired with other nLight-enabled sensors, power packs, or WallPodsTM using CAT -5e cabling, an nLight control zone is created. Connecting the panel to an nLight network backbone and nLight® ECLYPSETM system controller enables time -based control, remote programming and monitoring from SensorViewTM software, and BMS integration capabilities. The digital time clock (DTC) option allows for on -screen configuration and control of connected devices, while introducing scheduling to standalone panel. When connected to nLight backbone and nLight ECLYPSE system controllers the panels relinquish all time clock functionality. FEATURES • Communicates with an nLight network • Up to 128 digital devices per nLight control zone - each nLight Relay Panel utilizes 9 device addresses per 8 relays/dimming outputs: • 1 address per relay/dimming output • 1 address for the programmable input • All relays include local manual override lever • All relays are individually programmable • One 0-10V dimming output per relay • Create and control up to 32 schedules — Normal & Holiday (DTC version) • Programmable "dry contact/pull high" input (with provided 24VDC source) • Input is programmable to preset/profile scene, photosensorsignal, wallpod toggle (maintain or momentary) • Contact input for "alarm" override (requires maintain contact signal) • All relays communicate with switch/occupancy/photocell channel 1 out of the box (programmable through SensorView) • FCR type relays capable of being field configured to 2 and 3 -pole relay configurations with included hardware: • 4/8 Relay Panel: 2x2 -Pole and 1x3 -Pole Hardware Included • 12/16 Relay Panel: 4x2 -Pole and 2x3 -Pole Hardware Included • 24/32/48 Relay Panel: 6x2 -Pole and 3x3 -Pole Hardware Included • Supplies auxiliary 24VDC power and nLight network bus power (40mA per RJ45 port) • Removable back plate for ease of installation • UL 924 panel listing for Switching Emergency Circuits • Optional field installed voltage barrier(s) for normal/emergency use, or mixed voltage use • Remotely Configurable/Upgradeable Warranty Five-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: www.acu itybrands.com/support/customer-support/terms-and-conditions Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end -user environment and application. Specifications subject to change without notice. CHT Relay Panel 1 cL us LISTED Acuity Brands 1 One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800.535.2465 www.acuitycontrols.com 0 2016-2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 05/15/20 ARP 1 of 5 ORDERING INFORMATION Example: ARP INTENC08 NLT 8FCR MVOLT SC SM Panel Size Relay Quantity ARP INTENC08 NLT ARP INTENC16 NLT ARP INTENC32 NLT ARP INTENC48 NLT 8 -Relay Enclosure 16 -Relay Enclosure 32 -Relay Enclosure 48 -Relay Enclosure 4SPR1 8SPR1 12SPR2 16SPR2 245PR3 4 -Single Pole Relays 8 -Single Pole Relays 12 -Single Pole Relays 16 -Single Pole Relays 24 -Single Pole Relays 32SPR3 48SPR4 4FCR1 8FCR1 12FCR2 32 -Single Pole Relays 48 -Single Pole Relays 4 -Field Configurable Relays 8 -Field Configurable Relays 12 -Fie d Configurable Relays 16FCR2 24FCR3 32FCR3 48FCR4 16 -Field Configurable Relays 24 -Field Configurable Relays 32 -Field Configurable Relays 48 -Field Configurable Relays Operating Voltage Voltage Barrier M Door Type Mounting Clock Option MVOLT 120-277VAC CNDV5 120-277, 347VAC [blank] No barriers 1VB 1 Voltage Barrier 2VB 2 Voltage Barriers 3VB6 3 Voltage Barriers 4VB6 4 Voltage Barriers SC Screw Cover HLK7 Hinge Locking SM' Surface Mount FM Flush Mount [blank] No Clock DTC Digital Time Clock NOTE: If desired, panel enclosure and interior components can be ordered separately (typically for panel enclosure rough -in prior to final wiring and system programming). Contact your Acuity representative for ordering tree information. 1. Only available in 8 -Relay Enclosure. 2. Only available in 16 -Relay Enclosure. 3. Only available in 32 -Relay Enclosure. 4. Only available in 48 -Relay Enclosure. 5. Only available with xFCR Relay Option. 6. Only available in 32 or 48 -Relay Enclosure Options. 7. 32/48 Enclosures only available in hinge locking surface mount. Photosensor Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. Series Description ARPA PC Simple switching (at _1-3fc)with mechanically adjustable slide LSAAPS OL Analog sensor(0-100FC) with switching/dimming thresholds remotely adjustable (via SensorView) PCELL 3WI ZT Analog sensor (0-100FC)with switching/dimming thresholds remotely adjustable (via SensorView) Recommended Application Outdoor dusk to dawn, On/Off only Outdoor dusk to dawn lighting, On/Off or On/Off/Dimming (where necessary) Indoor On/Off or On/Off/Dimming Applications NOTE: For additional photosensor information, see spec sheet: LSA Spec Sheet, PCELL Spec Sheet. Additional Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. Series ARP FCR CONFIG HARDWARE BAG ARP BARRIER REPLACEMENT KIT ARP32-48 VOLTAGE BARRIER Description Extra set of hardware to create 2 and 3 -pole relays in the field (2x 2 -pole relays, 1x 3 -pole relay) Additional voltage barrier for 4/8/12/16 relay panels Additional voltage barrier for 24/32/48 relay panels Acuity Brands 1 One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800.535.2465 www.acuitycontrols.com 0 2016-2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 05/15/20 ARP 2 of 5 WIRING - SINGLE -POLE CAT5 cable to digital LOW/HIGH nPODht devices do LOW VOLTAGE : HIGH VOLTAGE VOLTAGEBARRIER SeODM)- 4or A NCM SIDE SIDE BARRIER Sensors)-4UmA of bus power available per port. nLight INTERFACE CARD WJ Ba J SENSOR INPUT 77 77 1,3 77 rid) 77 GED GDE G� Gen G� WJ [0J DEJ OVERRIDE INPUT STATUS ❑O =UT TEST HOT NEUT GND Zo RELAY DRIVER CARD � J P7J rig LINE LOAD TO LOADS thr 5- LOAD W rig LINE LOAD 5- W LINE LOAD 5- W Gs LINE LOAD 5- LI LOAD W LINE LOAD LI LOAD LINE IN TO LOAD LINE IN TO LOAD 8 -RELAY PANEL ENCLOSURE SHOWN 16 -Relay Enclosure 8 -Relay Enclosure Dead -Front removed Shown with optional Circuit Separation Barrier 32 -Relay Enclosure D v ..a aJ : yO HI !I I ©I G.* pad IluII `r —J a G ~ JAL C■9 1 9 -© ■ ■© B9 in © Irw © IIYII r . J: r.T rr BREAKER PANEL OPTIONAL ADD -IN BARRIERS FOR SEPARATION OF CIRCUITS WHEN REQUIRED WHEN MORE THAN ONE OPTIONAL BARRIER IS USED, FIELD -PERFORMED PUNCHOUTS CAN BE ADDED TO THE ENCLOSURE TO ACCESS COMPARTMENT MIDWAY WITHIN THE RELAY STACK. SEE HIGH VOLTAGE AREA PUNCH -OUT DIAGRAM FOR NOTES ON PUNCH OUT POSITIONING 48 -Relay Enclosure a J a GLI ©Ie ®� 0 o■a¢ Go ®Ia. ® ® of ®So ® ■ -v ea Dn. t VIII •a 1■0 g- 1© y. a 1 5f e,e:, • -_ 1© 7 O © © 0 I B © 11 : • r • r.-li r-,4 r,: _4 . r, r.. r- rY. M2 CM 0 OC Acuity Brands 1 One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800.535.2465 www.acuitycontrols.com 0 2016-2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 05/15/20 ARP 3 of 5 HOT NEUT TO BREAKER PANEL 0-10VDC OUTPUT TERMINAL BLOCKS #1 - 8 ONE JUMPER BINDS THE TWO ADJOINING RELAYS AS A TWO POLE UNIT ARP NLT 8FCR w/ 2 -POLE SCENARIO HOT r{T� HOT nUGHT INTERFACE CARD nIn DRIVER CA PS50 POWER SUPPLY m m u JLNE LOAD u LINE 0 LOAD g 0 LINE 0 LOAD J w 0 J LINE LOAD >- w 0 LINE 0 LOAD 0 LINE 0 LOAD } W W J a 0-10VDC OUTPUT TERMINAL BLOCKS #1 - 8 TWO ADJACENT JUMPERS BIND THE THREE ADJOINING RELAYS AS A THREE POLE UNIT 8 RELAY ENCLOSURE SHOWN a 1 1 LABEL CLIP LINE 1LOAD J LINE 1 LOAD ARP NLT 8FCR w/ 3 -POLE SCENARIO TO BREAKER PANEL LOAD (a) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LOAD (b) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LOAD (c) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LOAD (d) PARKING LOT (see plans for qty) BRIDGING CLIP REQUIRED TO INTERLOCK SWITCH TOGGLE MECHANISM HOT NEUT nLIGHT INTERFACE CARD RELAY DRIVER CARD in in is PS50 POWER SUPPLY B m ELL- ELF- 0 ce 1LNE LOAD0 0 ce 0 Ce >- w 0 LINE I LOAD LINE 1 LOAD LINE LOAD 11 a 1') LINE LOAD LINE LOAD 8 RELAY ENCLOSURE SHOWN U 11 LINE — LOAD _ LINE 1 LOAD TO BREAKER PANEL TO BREAKER PANEL LOAD (a) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LOAD (b) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LOAD (c) FIXTURE TYPE Al (see plans for qty) LABEL CLIP LOAD (d) PARKING LOT (see plans for qty) BRIDGING CLIP REQUIRED TO INTERLOCK SWITCH TOGGLE MECHANISM Acuity Brands 1 One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800.535.2465 www.acuitycontrols.com 0 2016-2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 05/15/20 ARP 4 of 5 SPECIFICATIONS ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS Note: Enclosure is NEMA 1 rated 8 -Relay Enclosure • BACKBOX ONLY: 14.25"H x 14.25"W x 4.00"D • SURFACE MOUNT SCREW COVER (standard offering): 14.41"H x 14.41"W x 4.05"D • FLUSH MOUNT SCREW COVER: 15.65"H x 15.65"W x 4.05"D (IN -WALL DEPTH: 4.0") 16 Relay Enclosure • BACKBOX ONLY: 22.25"H x 14.25"W x 4.00"D • SURFACE MOUNT SCREW COVER (standard offering): 22.45"H x 14.45"W x 4.06"D • FLUSH MOUNT SCREW COVER: 23.65"H x 15.65"W x 4.06"D (IN -WALL DEPTH: 4.0") 32 Relay Enclosure • BACKBOX ONLY: 32.10"H x 20.13"W x 6.00"D • SURFACE MOUNT HINGED DOOR w/ KEYLOCK: 32.10"H x 20.13"W x 6.68"D 48 Relay Enclosure • BACKBOX ONLY: 40.10"H x 20.13"W x 6.00"D • SURFACE MOUNT HINGED DOOR wl KEYLOCK: 40.10"H x 20.13"W x 6.68"D Patent • 10,129,950 • 9,691,578 • 9,368,306 RELAYS "FCR" Type Relays - Field Configurable for 2 -Pole and 3 -Pole Relays • Magnetic/Standard Ballast: • 40A @ 120-347VAC (Single -pole) • 40A @ 480VAC (Multi -pole) • Electronic Ballast: • 16A @ 120-347VAC • Tungsten: • 20A @ 120-277VAC • Horsepower Ratings: • 2HP @ 120VAC • 3HP @ 240-277VAC • DC: • 20A @ 48VDC • SCCR: • 65kA@ 277/480VAC with: Screw Cover (SC) option for 8 & 16 relay enclosure Hinge Locking (HLK) option for 32 & 48 relay enclosure • 14kA@ 277/480VAC with: Hinge Locking (HLK) option for 8 & 16 relay enclosure "SPR" Type Relays • Magnetic/Standard Ballast: • 20A @ 120-277VAC • Electronic Ballast: • 16A @ 120-277VAC • Tungsten: • 5000W @ 250VAC • Horsepower Ratings: • 2HP @ 120VAC • DC: • 20A @ 48VDC • SCCR: • 5kA@277VAC NLIGHTADDRESSES PER PANEL • (9)ARP04/08 • (8) Relays/Dimming Outputs • (1) Programmable Input • (18)ARP12/16 • (16) Relays/Dimming Outputs • (2) Programmable Inputs • (36)ARP24/32 • (32) Relays/Dimming Outputs • (4) Programmable Inputs • (54)ARP48 • (48) Relays/Dimming Outputs • (6) Programmable Inputs INPUTS (1 PER 8 RELAYS) • (1) Programmable Input for contact closure or photosensor signal (see photosensor accessories above) • (1) Override input (requires maintained signal) • 24VDC/200mA auxiliary power available (per 8 relays) • Connectors accept 16 to 24 AWG wire OUTPUTS • 0-10V Capable of Class 1 or Class 2 Wiring • 100mASink Per Dimming Output • Note: • Low trim default 1V, adjustable down to 0.7V • High trim default 10V, 10V max • Off mode: < 0.7V • Connectors accept 16 to 24 AWG wire POWER SUPPLY INPUTS • 120-277VAC • 347VAC Option • 50/60 Hz • Max 0.5 Amps for 8/16 relay enclosure • Max 1.0 Amp for 32/48 relay enclosure PROGRAMMING • Via SensorView Software ENVIRONMENT • Ambient, 8 & 16 relay enclosure: 32-122F (0-50C) • Ambient, 32 & 48 relay enclosure: 32-113F (0-45C) • Relative Humidity: 90% non -condensing STANDARDS • ULandcUL9161isted • UL 924 listed (for emergency circuit use) • UL 2043 (Plenum) Rated for Surface Mount Screw cover "SC SM" option (8 & 16 relay enclosure only) BUS CONNECTOR • (2) RJ45 connectors • 40mA Bus Power per RJ45 (80mAtotal) Acuity Brands 1 One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800.535.2465 www.acuitycontrols.com 0 2016-2020 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 05/15/20 ARP 5 of 5 4 3 2 1 POLE SPECIFICATIONS D C B REMOVABLE CAP DRILLED PER FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS: D1- DRILLED FOR 1 FIXTURE D2- DRILLED FOR 2 FIXTURES AT 90° OR 180° D3- DRILLED FOR 3 FIXTURES AT 90° OR 120° D4- DRILLED FOR 4 FIXTURES POLE SHAFT DRILLED MOUNT OPTIONS V POLE SHAFT-' �TENON MOUNT OPTIONS: T2- 02.38 OD X 4.00 LG T2.5- 02.88 OD X 4.00 LG T3- 03.00 OD X 5.00 LG T4- 04.00 OD X 6.00 LG .25 THK TENON MOUNT TENON MOUNT OPTIONS POLE HEIGHT 0.75 X 20.00 ANCHOR BOLT 2.00 X 4.00 HAND HOLE W/ COVER POLE DETAIL 14.00 REMOVABLE ABS BASE COVER NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. COMPONENT POLE SHAFT BASE PLATE ASTM DESIGNATION A-500 GR. B MIN. YIELD (P.S.I) 46,000 36,000 55,000 A36 ANCHOR BOLTS F1554 GR. 55 GALVANIZED HARDWARE A153 FINISH SPECIFICATIONS POLES SHALL HAVE A POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH IN A STANDARD COLOR. POLE DIMENSIONS BOTTOM DIA. (IN.) POLE HGT (FT.) 14' TOP DIA. (IN.) 4.00 4.00 GAGE 11 GAGE MTG. HGT. (FT.) 14' BASE PLATE DIMENSIONS BOLT CIRCLE (IN.) BASE PLATE DIM. (IN.) BOLT HOLE (IN.) PLATE THK. (IN.) 8.00-9.00 8.00 SQ ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS ANCHOR BOLT DIA. (IN.) 1.00 .75 .75 ANCHOR BOLT LENGTH (IN.) 20.00 WIND* ALLOWABLE WIND LOADING (SQ. FT.) INDICATED EPA 80 MPH 90 MPH 100 MPH 120 MPH EPA 11.7 8.9 7.1 4.0 *WITH 1.3 GUST FACTOR 2.00 X 4.00 HAND HOLE COVER 8.00 X 8.00 X .75 THK. BASE PLATE DRAWN: M. HARVALA 6/8/2015 SOME GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS HAVE SPECIAL WIND CONDITIONS THAT CAN CREATE WIND INDUCED VIBRATIONS CAUSING A FATIGUE PROBLEM. NO METHOD HAS YET BEEN FOUND FOR PREDICTING A CHECKED DESTRUCRVE LIGHTING POLE VIBRATION. THESE CONDITIONS ARE UNIQUE AND CANNOT BE GUARANTEED A D 23171 Groesbeck Hwy. AGAINST, AND ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF A LOCAL SITE ENGINEER. TITLE: D C B 270° 180° 0° HAND HOLE 90° REVISION: DATE: APPROVED: QUOTE: S.O.x r„, IG STA T \D Warren, MI 48089 P: (586) 774-5650 1 F: (586) 774-5706 A D S www.unitedlightingstandards.com CATALOG: DWG NO: RSP-14-4-1 1 SIZE: C SHEET 1 OF 1 REF: 4 SCALE: NONE 3 2 1 1 Catalog Number Mounting Shaft Height Size UNITED LIGHTI\G STANDARDS A DWM COMPANY www.unitedlightingstandards.com POLE ORDERING GUIDE ORDER NUMBER TEMPLATE Example Order Number Fixture Product Number Design RPSQ 20 -I 4 Wall Thickness - 11 Build Your Order Number Brand Fixture Product Number Design Catalog Number Mounting Shaft Height Size Wall Thickness Mounting Type AB = Anchor Base EMB = Embedded (Direct Burial) Fixture Mounting Arrangement D1 D2@90 D2@180 D3@90 D3@120* D4 T2 T2.5 T3 T4 *Round poles only Refer to the Mounting Orientation Guide on the next page of this file. Finish Mounting Type AB Fixture Mounting Arrangement T2 Mounting Type llll Fixture Mounting Arrangement WH = White TWH = Textured White DB = Dark Bronze TMB = Textured Medium Bronze HB = Harvest Bronze NB = New Bronze SL = Silver MGY = Medium Gray GR = Gray TGR = Textured Gray GM = Graphite Metallic DP = Dark Platinum MA = Matte Aluminum PSP = Platinum Silver BK = Black TBK = Textured Black MG = Moss Green Contact us for custom colors. Finish DB Finish Design WB-15 Design Options Orientation @90 Options Orientation Height From Base 10' Height From Base Option CMB = Camera Mounting Bracket CMP = Camera Mounting Plate WB-15 = Welded Bracket WC = Welded Coupling (denote size) WN = Welded Nipple (denote size) CSBC = Custom Steel Base Cover VD = Vibration Dampener IUC = In Use Cover GFCI = Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter DR = Duplex Receptacle UL = UL Listed** Design Accessories Orientation FH @180 Height From Base 9' Design Accessories Orientation Height From Base Note: N/A =Not Applicable Accessories TB = Transformer Base* ABS-BC = ABS Base Cover* LW = Lowering Winch LW -ELECTRIC = Electric Lowering Winch BA = Banner Arm FH = Flag Holder PTTA = Pole Top Tenon Adapter* *See our online product catalog for complete catalog numbers of these options and accessories. ** UL Listed labeling is available for catalog steel and aluminum poles —both Commercial cf= Industrial and Roadway. UL Listed labeling is not available for brackets. UL Listing must be specified at the time of order. 4 3 2 1 POLE SPECIFICATIONS D C B REMOVABLE CAP DRILLED PER FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS: D1- DRILLED FOR 1 FIXTURE D2- DRILLED FOR 2 FIXTURES AT 90° OR 180° D3- DRILLED FOR 3 FIXTURES AT 90° OR 120° D4- DRILLED FOR 4 FIXTURES POLE SHAFT DRILLED MOUNT OPTIONS V POLE SHAFT-' �TENON MOUNT OPTIONS: T2- 02.38 OD X 4.00 LG T2.5- 02.88 OD X 4.00 LG T3- 03.00 OD X 5.00 LG T4- 04.00 OD X 6.00 LG .25 THK TENON MOUNT TENON MOUNT OPTIONS POLE HEIGHT 0.75 X 20.00 ANCHOR BOLT 2.00 X 4.00 HAND HOLE W/ COVER POLE DETAIL 14.00 REMOVABLE ABS BASE COVER NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. COMPONENT POLE SHAFT BASE PLATE ASTM DESIGNATION A-500 GR. B MIN. YIELD (P.S.I) 46,000 36,000 55,000 A36 ANCHOR BOLTS F1554 GR. 55 GALVANIZED HARDWARE A153 FINISH SPECIFICATIONS POLES SHALL HAVE A POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH IN A STANDARD COLOR. POLE DIMENSIONS BOTTOM DIA. (IN.) POLE HGT (FT.) 20' TOP DIA. (IN.) 4.00 4.00 GAGE 11 GAGE MTG. HGT. (FT.) 20' BASE PLATE DIMENSIONS BOLT CIRCLE (IN.) BASE PLATE DIM. (IN.) BOLT HOLE (IN.) PLATE THK. (IN.) 8.00-9.00 8.00 SQ ANCHOR BOLT DIMENSIONS ANCHOR BOLT DIA. (IN.) 1.00 .75 .75 ANCHOR BOLT LENGTH (IN.) 20.00 WIND* ALLOWABLE WIND LOADING (SQ. FT.) INDICATED EPA 80 MPH 90 MPH 100 MPH 120 MPH EPA 5.6 4.1 3.1 1.7 *WITH 1.3 GUST FACTOR 2.00 X 4.00 HAND HOLE COVER 8.00 X 8.00 X .75 THK. BASE PLATE DRAWN: M. HARVALA 6/8/2015 SOME GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS HAVE SPECIAL WIND CONDITIONS THAT CAN CREATE WIND INDUCED VIBRATIONS CAUSING A FATIGUE PROBLEM. NO METHOD HAS YET BEEN FOUND FOR PREDICTING A CHECKED DESTRUCRVE LIGHTING POLE VIBRATION. THESE CONDITIONS ARE UNIQUE AND CANNOT BE GUARANTEED A D 23171 Groesbeck Hwy. AGAINST, AND ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF A LOCAL SITE ENGINEER. TITLE: D C B 270° 180° 0° HAND HOLE 90° REVISION: DATE: APPROVED: QUOTE: s.O.x r„, IG STA T \D Warren, MI 48089 P: (586) 774-5650 1 F: (586) 774-5706 A D S www.unitedlightingstandards.com CATALOG: DWG NO: RSP-20-4-1 1 SIZE: C SHEET 1 OF 1 REF: 4 SCALE: NONE 3 2 1 1 Catalog Number Mounting Shaft Height Size UNITED LIGHTI\G STANDARDS A DWM COMPANY www.unitedlightingstandards.com POLE ORDERING GUIDE ORDER NUMBER TEMPLATE Example Order Number Fixture Product Number Design RPSQ 20 -I 4 Wall Thickness - 11 Build Your Order Number Brand Fixture Product Number Design Catalog Number Mounting Shaft Height Size Wall Thickness Mounting Type AB = Anchor Base EMB = Embedded (Direct Burial) Fixture Mounting Arrangement D1 D2@90 D2@180 D3@90 D3@120* D4 T2 T2.5 T3 T4 *Round poles only Refer to the Mounting Orientation Guide on the next page of this file. Finish Mounting Type AB Fixture Mounting Arrangement T2 Mounting Type llll Fixture Mounting Arrangement WH = White TWH = Textured White DB = Dark Bronze TMB = Textured Medium Bronze HB = Harvest Bronze NB = New Bronze SL = Silver MGY = Medium Gray GR = Gray TGR = Textured Gray GM = Graphite Metallic DP = Dark Platinum MA = Matte Aluminum PSP = Platinum Silver BK = Black TBK = Textured Black MG = Moss Green Contact us for custom colors. Finish DB Finish Design WB-15 Design Options Orientation @90 Options Orientation Height From Base 10' Height From Base Option CMB = Camera Mounting Bracket CMP = Camera Mounting Plate WB-15 = Welded Bracket WC = Welded Coupling (denote size) WN = Welded Nipple (denote size) CSBC = Custom Steel Base Cover VD = Vibration Dampener IUC = In Use Cover GFCI = Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter DR = Duplex Receptacle UL = UL Listed** Design Accessories Orientation FH @180 Height From Base 9' Design Accessories Orientation Height From Base Note: N/A =Not Applicable Accessories TB = Transformer Base* ABS-BC = ABS Base Cover* LW = Lowering Winch LW -ELECTRIC = Electric Lowering Winch BA = Banner Arm FH = Flag Holder PTTA = Pole Top Tenon Adapter* *See our online product catalog for complete catalog numbers of these options and accessories. ** UL Listed labeling is available for catalog steel and aluminum poles —both Commercial cf= Industrial and Roadway. UL Listed labeling is not available for brackets. UL Listing must be specified at the time of order. (Solera 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Date Quote # Project Name Type SCSD - Pole mount Description: SCSD is constructed of aluminum. Door assembly is hinged to fixture housing for easy access and maintenace. Name Engine Lumens CCT Electrical Mounting Lens Pattern Options Finish Name Light Engine Source Lumens(LED)(5000K) Color Temp ectrical SCSD 288W LED (Max) Contact for custom 31436 Contact for custom 3000K 3500K 4000K 5000K Contact for custom UNV 120-277V HLV 347-480V TT Tri-Tap(HID) MT Multi-Tap(HID) Mounting en a ern Op ions Finishes ER3 Arm for round or CPL Clear polycarbonate TY5 Type V (Std) square pole lens (Std) SPD Spider arm slip CG Clear glass lens TY4 Type IV fitter TY3 Type I II PR Prismatic lens (K12) • Lumens are based on max wattage & 5000K CCT • IES files available upon request • Std - Standard Offering TYII Type II SD Step dimming MS Motion sensor TCO Trespass cut off EM Emergency battery PC Button photocell PCR Photocell receptacle SF Single fuse DF Double fuse Standard BL Black WH White SG Silver Grey BZ Bronze Custom CC Custom Color See website for custom colors. Contact factory for physical samples. Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 1 (Soles 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Dimensions & Mounting: Please note that drawings are not to scale. ER3 - arm for round or square pole • 22" • Side view 18" • ER3 Pole mount arm 2" 4" 2" —0-3/4" I1„ 3/8„ Top view Listing: Complies to CSA and UL standards. Polar Graph: TY5 180° 40° 120° 100° 80° 60° 0" 20° 40° TY4 TY3 TY2 Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 2 V (Solera 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Date Quote # Project Name Type SCSD - Pole mount Description: SCSD is constructed of aluminum. Door assembly is hinged to fixture housing for easy access and maintenace. Name Engine Lumens CCT Electrical Mounting Lens Pattern Options Finish Name Light Engine Source Lumens(LED)(5000K) Color Temp ectrical SCSD 288W LED (Max) Contact for custom 31436 Contact for custom 3000K 3500K 4000K 5000K Contact for custom UNV 120-277V HLV 347-480V TT Tri-Tap(HID) MT Multi-Tap(HID) Mounting en a ern Op ions Finishes ER3 Arm for round or CPL Clear polycarbonate TY5 Type V (Std) square pole lens (Std) SPD Spider arm slip CG Clear glass lens TY4 Type IV fitter TY3 Type I II PR Prismatic lens (K12) • Lumens are based on max wattage & 5000K CCT • IES files available upon request • Std - Standard Offering TYII Type II SD Step dimming MS Motion sensor TCO Trespass cut off EM Emergency battery PC Button photocell PCR Photocell receptacle SF Single fuse DF Double fuse Standard BL Black WH White SG Silver Grey BZ Bronze Custom CC Custom Color See website for custom colors. Contact factory for physical samples. Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 1 (Soles 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Dimensions & Mounting: Please note that drawings are not to scale. ER3 - arm for round or square pole • 22" • Side view 18" • ER3 Pole mount arm 2" 4" 2" —0-3/4" I1„ 3/8„ Top view Listing: Complies to CSA and UL standards. Polar Graph: TY5 180° 40° 120° 100° 80° 60° 0" 20° 40° TY4 TY3 TY2 Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 2 V (Solera 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Date Quote # Project Name Type SCSD - Pole mount Description: SCSD is constructed of aluminum. Door assembly is hinged to fixture housing for easy access and maintenace. Name Engine Lumens CCT Electrical Mounting Lens Pattern Options Finish Name Light Engine Source Lumens(LED)(5000K) Color Temp ectrical SCSD 288W LED (Max) Contact for custom 31436 Contact for custom 3000K 3500K 4000K 5000K Contact for custom UNV 120-277V HLV 347-480V TT Tri-Tap(HID) MT Multi-Tap(HID) Mounting en a ern Op ions Finishes ER3 Arm for round or CPL Clear polycarbonate TY5 Type V (Std) square pole lens (Std) SPD Spider arm slip CG Clear glass lens TY4 Type IV fitter TY3 Type I II PR Prismatic lens (K12) • Lumens are based on max wattage & 5000K CCT • IES files available upon request • Std - Standard Offering TYII Type II SD Step dimming MS Motion sensor TCO Trespass cut off EM Emergency battery PC Button photocell PCR Photocell receptacle SF Single fuse DF Double fuse Standard BL Black WH White SG Silver Grey BZ Bronze Custom CC Custom Color See website for custom colors. Contact factory for physical samples. Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 1 (Soles 1610 Sismet Road, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 1 R4, Canada Toll Free: 1.877.765.3722 Fax: 905.457.1115 www.soleracorp.com Dimensions & Mounting: Please note that drawings are not to scale. ER3 - arm for round or square pole • 22" • Side view 18" • ER3 Pole mount arm 2" 4" 2" —0-3/4" I1„ 3/8„ Top view Listing: Complies to CSA and UL standards. Polar Graph: TY5 180° 40° 120° 100° 80° 60° 0" 20° 40° TY4 TY3 TY2 Since product development is an on -going process, Solera reserves the right to change the information on this spec sheet. Date Modified: 09-20-2019 2 V UKI-60741 KIOS 3 Ingrade Flush Frame LirMAN LIGHTING USA 12w LED 1036 Lumens IP67 • Suitable For Wet Locations IK10 • Impact Resistant (Vandal Resistant) Weight 9.4 Ibs Conduit Water drain pipe H 8.5" 8.5" 12.0" Adjustable LED Module LED Module TILT10 Deg ROTATE (2) Construction Frame Options Extended Frame: Slightly raised & protruding over the edge of the recessing box, used to cover irregular finish around the recessing box e.g cut tiles. Flush Frame: Installed flush with the floor surface, typically used with poured concrete or precision cut tiles. Aluminum Less than 0.1 % copper content - Marine Grade 6060 extruded & LM6 Aluminum High Pressure die casting provides excellent mechanical strength , clean detailed product lines and excellent heat dissipation. Pre paint 8 step degrease and phosphate process that includes deoxidizing and etching as well as a zinc and nickel phosphate process before product painting. Memory Retentive -Silicon Gasket Provided with special injection molded "fit for purpose" long life high temperature memory retentive silicon gaskets. Maintains the gaskets exact profile and seal over years of use and compression. Thermal management LM6 Aluminum is used for its excellent mechanical strength and thermal dissipation properties in low and high ambient tempera- tures. The superior thermal heat sink design by Ligman used in conjunction with the driver, controls thermals below critical temperature range to ensure maximum luminous flux output, as well as providing long LED service life and ensuring less than 10% lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours. Surge Suppression Standard 10kv surge suppressor provided with all fixtures. BUG Rating B4 - U4 - G5 Finishing All Ligman products go through an extensive finishing process that includes fettling to improve paint adherence. Paint UV Stabilized 4.9MiI thick powder coat paint and baked at 200 Deg C. This process ensures that Ligman products can withstand harsh environments. Rated for use in natatoriums. Hardware Provided Hardware is Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Anti Seize Screw Holes Tapped holes are infused with a special anti seize compound designed to prevent seizure of threaded connections, due to electrolysis from heat, corrosive atmospheres and moisture. Crystal Clear Low Iron Glass Lens Provided with tempered, impact resistant crystal clear low iron glass ensuring no green glass tinge. Optics & LED Precise optic design provides exceptional light control and precise distribution of light. LED CRI > 80 Lumen - Maintenance Life L80 /B10 at 50,000 hours (This means that at least 90% of the LED still achieve 80% of their original flux) Professional technical inground lighting solutions. Sophisticated and expansive; single, twin -lamp, white and RGBW DMX, with 7 beam types. A top range of small shallow inground uplights with a round or square profile available with an extended or flush mounted frame. The fixture is manufactured with a marine grade 316 stainless steel front ring and is designed for use in shopping and pedestrian areas for illuminating building facades, columns, squares, parks, gardens, sculptures, flag poles and trees. The adjustable high powered LED's in conjunction with high efficiency optics provides focused beam distributions to suit most design applications. The tapered high density polyethylene inground recessing box is provided with securing lugs on each side to allow the installer to properly secure the box in place thereby stopping it from moving during the concrete pour procedure. These securing lugs can also be used to secure the base to wood support beams and working in conjunction with the tapered recessing box will prevent the fixture from lifting when installed in dirt. The housing also has two shoulders to prevent fixture rotation when used in drive over applications. The Kios is available with a non -slip ADA glass. This glass is infused with a specialized non -slip finish across the entire surface of the lens making this non -slip option the best in the industry. To ensure efficient drainage, gravel must be used to a depth of 17" and a width of 12" beneath the housing, and should also be placed around the luminaire. An animated video can be viewed on the Ligman website to show proper Kios installation procedure to assist contractors and ensure a problem -free installation. Power is provided to the integral control gear through a specially developed anti -wicking PG13.5 watertight cable gland and 2ft of outdoor submersible #18/3 SOOW 600V power cable. Clear or frosted tempered 0.6" thick glass. 2.5 ton maximum load is transferred by the housing to the foundation. Vehicles with pneumatic tires can drive over the luminaire but the speed must not exceed 30mph. The distance between the floodlight and the illuminated surface should be at least 1.6'. The Kios inground is available in 2700, 3000, 3500 and 4000 Kelvin, and is also available with colored dichroic filters, concentric ring louvre and honeycomb louvre. This luminaire range is also available with specialized optics that provide Type II, III and IV distributions for floodlighting walls and monuments, see Kios 9, 10, 11 & 12. The high power LED option is available in RGBW for the Kios 5, 6, 7 & 8. Additional Options (Consult Factory For Pricing) A61212 Anti Slip Lens LSL Linear Spread Lens CRL Concentric Ring Louvre AGL Anti Glare Louvre A61921 Honeycomb Louvre Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. UKI-60741 KIOS 3 Ingrade Flush Frame LirMAN LIGHTING USA •ROJ ECT hp.UANTITY TYPE NOTE DATE 1 ORDERING EXAMPLE 11 UKI-60741-12w - N - W30- 120/277v UKI-60741 LAMP 12w LED 1036 Lumens N - Narrow 18° M - Medium 28° W - Wide - 38° LED COLOR W27 - 2700K W30 - 3000K W35 - 3500K W40 - 4000K ] VOLTAGE 120/277v Other - Specify ADDITIONAL OPTIONS F - Frosted Lens DIM - 0-10v Dimming NAT - Natatorium Rated TORO - Torque Screwdriver A61212 - Anti Slip Lens CRL - Concentric Ring Louvre AGL - Anti Glare Louvre A61921 - Honeycomb Louvre LSL - Linear Spread Lens COLOR DICHROIC FILTERS RD - Red Lens BL - Blue Lens AM - Amber Lens GR - Green Lens NOTE: A proper torque screwdriver set at 30 inch pounds must be used to tighten all screws securing the housing to the recessing box, as well as fastening the body and frame. Please specify TORO in the additional options section to order a proper torque screwdriver for installation. Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. caus Intertek 6PR NEW CONSTRUCTION AND REMODEL FEATURES Trim Dck° LED 6" Shallow Plenum Downlight — Round • Innovative TrimLock reflector retention system ensures trim remains flush with ceiling plane • Beam angles ranging from 25° narrow to 85° wide for tailored performance • Die cast trim with flush lens provides glare -free illumination for a soft ceiling appearance • Industry -leading efficacies as high as 106 Im/W - ENERGY STAR® certified • Fully room -side accessible SPECIFICATIONS • HOUSING - Spun housing with forged aluminum heat sink. Galvanized steel splice compartment with driver mounting plate/enclosure. Mounting clips allow for ceiling thickness from 1/2"- 1-1/4" (consult factory for additional ceiling thicknesses). • TRIMLOCK - Innovative TrimLock reflector retention system ensures the trim remains flush with the ceiling plane. • LENSED TRIM - Die-cast aluminum frame with micro -prismatic, tempered glass lens. • ELECTRICAL - High-performance Class 2 C.O.B. LED array. Modular quick -connect plug for easy field -connection of LED light assembly to driver. Reported L70>55,000 hours. Reported L90>55,000 hours. Estimated L70 = 200,000 hours. • MOUNTING - Recessed. 20 ga. galvanized steel mounting pan for new construction or IC -rated enclosure. Remodel kit option includes receiver bracket hardware. Minimum 24" O.C. marked spacing required for L50 - L70 lumen packages. LISTINGS - • cCSAus conforms to UL STD 1598; Certified to CAN/CSA STD C22.2 No. 250.0 for damp locations. LED light assembly conforms to UL 2108 for remote installation. Suitable for wet location under covered ceiling when specified with WET/CC option. • ENERGY STAR® certified in select configurations, see www.energystar.gov • IC -rated for direct contact with insulation when specified with I Mounting Type. • City of Chicago Environmental Air approved when specified with CP option. • Complies with ASTM-E283 when specified with ATH option. • RoHS compliant. WARRANTY - 5 -year limited warranty, see hew.com/warranty. R / \ L10 - L40: 4-1/2" L50 - L70: 5-1/4" I I=_ k1 k -05-5/8"—.I t1/2" min 1-1/4" max 161/2 CATALOG #: TYPE: PROJECT: f Williams ORDERING EXAMPLE: 6PR - TL - L20/835 -OPTIONS- DIM - UNV - LW - OF - WH - TRIM OPTIONS - N - F1 HOUSING TRIM `MOUNT. HOUSING SERIES LUMENS 111 6PR -TL L10 1,0001m 131 TrimLock 115 1,5001m L20 2,000Im L30 3,000Im L40 4,0001m L50 5,000Im L60 6,0001m L70 7,000Im TRIM 1111 CRI CCT OPTIONS 8 80 9 90[0.] 27 2700K 30 3000K 35 3500K 40 4000K 50 5000K EM/7W 7 -watt emergency battery 151 EM/10W 10 -watt emergency battery [6] EM/10W/RTS 10 -watt emergency battery with regressed test switch [7] ATH Airtight construction CP Chicago plenum (CCEA)1a F Fuse kit SDT Stepdown transformer 191 CONTROL121 DIM Dimming driver, 0-10V DIM11% Dimming driver, 0-10V VOLTAGE UNV 120-277V 347 347V 1751 TRIM TYPE L Flush lens A Angled lens 1131 S Non-conductive flush lens for shower applications 1741 MOUNTING DISTRIBUTION [121 W 85° Wide M 35° Medium 1151 N 25° Narrow [16] FLANGE TYPE REFLECTOR FINISH TRIM OPTIONS OF 1/2" standard CS Clear semi - flange specular SF 1/4" mud -in powder coat flange 117] WH White texture powder coat BL Black texture powder coat IP IP65 rated trim AD Diffuse acrylic lens 1181 PD Diffuse 1/8" polycarbonate lens 119] WET/CC Wet location, covered ceiling listed AM Anti -microbial 1201 MOUNTING TYPE 1211 N Open pan for new construction 1 IC -rated enclosure for new construction 1231 R Remodel kit1241 MOUNTING HARDWARE 1221 F1 Integral 2 -position fixed pan bracket, universal bar hanger included 1251 BA1 Adjustable butterfly pan bracket, bar hanger not included 1261 CA1 Adjustable caterpillar pan bracket, universal bar hanger included 1271 NOTES 1 Lumen output based on L trim type, W distribution and WH finish, 3500K/8OCRI. Actual lumens may vary +/-5%. See page 2 for FIXTURE PERFORMANCE DATA. 2 See page 3 for ADDITIONAL CONTROL OPTIONS. • Not available with EM/10W emergency batteries. 0. Extended lead times may apply. Consult factory for availability. 5 N and R Mounting Types only. 6 N and R Mounting Types only. • Not available with WET/CC, ATH or IP options. N and R Mounting Types only. See page 4 for EM/10W/RTS DETAILS. 8 I Mounting Type required. 9 May be required for 347V, see product builder at hew.com/product-builder. 10 Not available with EM batteries or DMX controls. 11 Trim ships separately. 72 Beam angle based on WH reflector finish and L Trim Type. 73 Wide distribution only. Diffuse acrylic lens standard. 14 W Distribution, OF Flange Type, and WH Reflector Finish only. Standard with AD diffuse acrylic lens. IP and WET/CC options standard. 15 Not available with lumen stops L50 - L70. 16 Not available with lumen stops L50 - L70. 17 For use with mud -in plaster construction only, supplied with mud flange installation kit. See page 3 for FLANGE TYPE DETAILS. Not available with ATH or IP options. 18 L Trim Type only. W distribution only. 18 W distribution only. 20 WH and BL Reflector Finishes only. Not available with S Trim Type. 21 Mounting hardware required (N and I only), ordered separately, see MOUNTING HARDWARE ordering info. See page 4 for MOUNTING TYPE DETAILS. 22 Additional mounting hardware options available. See page 5 for MOUNTING HARDWARE DETAILS. 23 L30 lumen package max. 24 Also used in new construction sheetrock ceilings. 25 N and I Mounting Types only. I Mounting requires external brackets. 28 N Mounting Type only. 27 N Mounting Type only. H.E. Williams, Inc. • Carthage, Missouri • www.hew.com • 417-358-4065 • Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HEW.70701.LA REV.07/01/20 Downlights Page 1of5 0° 20° 6PR LED 6" Shallow Plenum Downlight - Round FIXTURE PERFORMANCE DATA DISTRIBUTION DELIVERED LUMENS WATTAGE EFFICACY (ImIW) o W 1111 10.7 103.6 M 1127 10.7 1051 N 1137 10.7 106.1 r, W 1696 16.6 101.9 M 1720 16.6 103.3 N 1736 16.6 104.3 N W 2208 22.7 97.3 M 2239 22.7 98.8 N 2260 22.7 99.7 M W 3293 33.2 991 M 3309 33.2 99.6 N 3224 33.2 97.1 v W 4394 44.1 99.6 M 4415 44.1 100.1 N 4302 44.1 97.6 o W 5503 54.7 100.7 M N - - - o 0 W 6010 68.2 88.2 M - - - N - - - o W 7023 78.2 89.8 M - - - N - - - PHOTOMETRY MULTIPLIER TABLES U CO COLOR TEMPERATURE CCT CONVERSION FACTOR 2700K 3000K 3500K 4000K 5000K 0.92 0.98 1.00 1.01 1.02 2700K 0.76 - 3000K 0.79 o0 3500K 0.82 °' 4000K 0.84 5000K 0.88 TRIM CATALOG CONVERSION NUMBER FACTOR S 0.85 AD 0.85 PD 0.85 • Photometrics tested in accordance with IESNA LM -79. Results shown are based on 25°C ambient temperature. • Wattage shown is based on 120V input. • Results based on L trim type, W distribution and WH finish, 3500K, 80 CRI, actual lumens may vary +/-5% • Use multiplier tables to calculate additional options. 6PR-TL-L201835-DIM-UNV-LW-OF-WH Report #:12326812.29; 06/08/18 I Total Luminaire Output: 2208 lumens; 22.7 Watts I Efficacy: 97.3 Im/W 181.8 CRI; 3647K CCT 0° 20° 90 80° 60° 40° __0- CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION VERTICAL ANGLE HORIZONTAL ANGLE ZONAL LUMENS 0 0 1169 5 1148 81 15 1075 174 25 989 243 35 859 267 45 556 183 55 223 86 65 111 47 75 51 21 85 12 3 90 1 LUMEN SUMMARY ZONE LUMENS % FIXTURE 0 - 40 1399 64 0-60 2029 92 0-90 2208 100 0-180 2208 100 6PR-TL-L20/835-DIM-UNV-LM-OF-WH Report #:12326812.31; 06/08/18 I Total Luminaire Output: 2239 lumens; 22.7 Watts I Efficacy: 98.8Im/W 181.7 CRI; 3644K CCT 90 1►1��-� 80° 60° 40° CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION VERTICAL ANGLE HORIZONTAL ANGLE ZONAL LUMENS 0 5151 5 4950 333 15 3241 421 25 1025 188 35 304 80 45 134 46 55 70 27 65 36 15 75 17 7 85 3 1 90 0 LUMEN SUMMARY ZONE LUMENS % FIXTURE 0 - 40 2013 90 0 - 60 2182 97 0-90 2239 100 0-180 2239 100 H.E. Williams, Inc. • Carthage, Missouri • www.hew.com • 417-358-4065 • Designed and Manufactured in the USA Downlights Information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HEW.70701.LA REV.07/01/20 Page 2 of 5 0° 20° 6PR LED 6" Shallow Plenum Downlight — Round 6PR-TL-L20/835-DIM-UNV-LN-OF-WH Report #:12326812.32; 06/08/18 I Total Luminaire Output: 2260 lumens; 22.7 Watts I Efficacy: 99.7 lm/W 181.6 CRI; 3629K CCT 90° 80° 60° 40° CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION VERTICAL ANGLE HORIZONOTALANGLE ZONAL LUMENS 0 8348 5 7547 466 15 3235 381 25 771 137 35 212 57 45 107 38 55 66 27 65 37 16 75 16 7 85 3 1 90 0 ADDITIONAL CONTROL OPTIONS LUMEN SUMMARY ZONE LUMENS % FIXTURE 0 - 40 2060 91 0 - 60 2203 98 0-90 2260 100 0-180 2260 100 Lumen restrictions apply: L30 max for DMX driver, L30 max for Lutron drivers, L50 max for DIM LINE driver. 347V may require stepdown transformer, see product builder at hew.com/product-builder. CATALOG NUMBER DESCRIPTION DIM Dimming driver prewired for 0-10V low voltage applications DIM1 1% dimming driver prewired for 0-10V low voltage applications DIM LINE Line voltage dimming driver (TRIAC and ELV compatible at 120V only) DMX 0.1% dimming driver for DMX controls LTE LINE Lutron Hi-lume 1% 2 -wire dimming driver forward phase line voltage controls (120V only) LDE1 Lutron Hi-lume 1% EcoSystem dimming LED driver LDE5 Lutron 5 -Series 5% EcoSystem dimming LED driver VRF/DSR Lutron Vive integral fixture control, RF only (DFCSJ-OEM-RF) and sensor -ready driver VRF/DBI/LDE1 Lutron Vive integral fixture control, RF only (DFCSJ-OEM-RF), Lutron Hi-lume 1% EcoSystem dimming LED driver, and digital link interface VRF/DBI/LDE5 Lutron Vive integral fixture control, RF only (DFCSJ-OEM-RF), Lutron 5 -Series 5% EcoSystem dimming LED driver, and digital link interface FCJS/DIM Lutron Vive PowPak wireless fixture control with dimming driver FCJS/DIM1 Lutron Vive PowPak wireless fixture control with 1% dimming driver ELDO SOLOB EIdoLED Solodrive, 0.1% dimming driver for 0-10V controls ELDO SOLOB DALI EldoLED Solodrive, 0.1% dimming driver for DALI controls ELDO ECO1 EIdoLED Ecodrive, 1% dimming driver for 0-10V controls ELDO ECO1 DALI EldoLED Ecodrive, 1% dimming driver for DALI controls TRIMLOCK DETAILS TWIST TRIM TYPE DETAILS PULL RELEASE UMW FLUSH SHOWER J=L ILA L 05 -5/8" —*I 18" k -05-5/8"-4I 1/8" FLANGE TYPE DETAILS ANGLED T 1/8" 1/2" STANDARD 1/4" MUD -IN MUD FLANGE MOUNTING KIT (SLIM FLANGE TYPE) I J� IJ � y. mo— o7"—> I�— ao6-1/2"—).]I 1/8" ' T,1/2 06-9/16" —,I Ceiling Cutout: 06-1/2" Ceiling cutout: 06-3/4" REFLECTOR FINISH DETAILS CS WH BL Clear semi-specular White Black H.E. Williams, Inc. • Carthage, Missouri • www.hew.com • 417-358-4065 • Designed and Manufactured in the USA Downlights Information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HEW.70701.LA REV.07/01/20 Page 3 of 5 6PR LED 6" Shallow Plenum Downlight — Round MOUNTING TYPE DETAILS NEW CONSTRUCTION i 13- /2" i 06-1/2" n 0 0 \r61/4" 0 / 16 1/2" —* EM/10W/RTS DETAILS IC -RATED 00 00 14 D LENGTH B LUMENS L10 - L20 A C D 15-1/16" 15-3/16" 16" 16" 4-1/2" 6-3/8" 12-1/8" 12-1/8" L30 REMODEL Cross Section -4 05 5/8"—>1 Receiver Bracket 2-3/4" i L10 - L40: 4-1/2" L50: 5-1/4" <— 6 5/8"—* Driver and Junction Box -4— 5-1/4" 4-1/8" IA-- 6 15/16" --0I n � — \Ceiling cutout 1-1/8" min space Shown Installed RTS trim nut RTS trim washer RTS TRIM CUTOUT (Outside pan boundary) RTS trim Test button from EM Driver Downlight cutout H.E. Williams, Inc. • Carthage, Missouri • www.hew.com • 417-358-4065 • Designed and Manufactured in the USA Downlights Information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HEW.70701.LA REV.07/01/20 Page 4 of 5 6PR LED 6" Shallow Plenum Downlight — Round MOUNTING HARDWARE DETAILS F1 Integral 2 -position fixed pan bracket, universal bar hanger included BA1 Adjustable butterfly pan bracket, bar hanger CA1 Adjustable caterpillar pan bracket, universal not included (N Mounting Type only) bar hanger included (N Mounting Type only) F1 with 1 Mounting Type Mounts to t -bar or nailer bar 14" minimum 24" maximum 14" minimum 24" maximum Mounts to t -bar or nailer bar BA2 Adjustable butterfly pan bracket, heavy-duty universal bar hanger included (N Mounting Type only) 12" minimum 24" maximum Mounts to t -bar or nailer bar 14" minimum 24" maximum Mounts to t -bar or nailer bar CA2 Adjustable caterpillar pan bracket, t -bar hanger included (N Mounting Type only) 11" minimum 26" maximum Mounts to t -bar H.E. Williams, Inc. • Carthage, Missouri • www.hew.com • 417-358-4065 • Designed and Manufactured in the USA Downlights Information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HEW.70701.LA REV.07/01/20 Page 5 of 5 UTA-31882 Tango 31 Cylindrical Up/Downlight mirre OS TECHNOLOGY LieMA /1/ LIGHTING USA 2x39w LED 2x2582 Lumens IP65 • Suitable For Wet Locations IKO8 • Impact Resistant (Vandal Resistant) Weight 14.1 Ibs X4.7' 0.3" 7.5" 11.3" Mounting Detail • mirrc TECHNOLOGY O S Ligman's micro Variable Optical System provides the ability to interchange, mix & rotate optics to provide specific light distributions for optimized spacing and uniformity. Type II f Type IV — 1�J Type III Type V The variable optic system allows for the designer to create hybrid distributions for precise lighting requirements. HYBRID TYPE I & TYPE IV Construction Aluminum Less than 0.1 % copper content - Marine Grade 6060 extruded & LM6 Aluminum High Pressure die casting provides excellent mechanical strength , clean detailed product lines and excellent heat dissipation. Pre paint 8 step degrease and phosphate process that includes deoxidizing and etching as well as a zinc and nickel phosphate process before product painting. Memory Retentive -Silicon Gasket Provided with special injection molded "fit for purpose" long life high temperature memory retentive silicon gaskets. Maintains the gaskets exact profile and seal over years of use and compression. Thermal management LM6 Aluminum is used for its excellent mechanical strength and thermal dissipation properties in low and high ambient temperatures. The superior thermal heat sink design by Ligman used in conjunction with the driver, controls thermals below critical temperature range to ensure maximum luminous flux output, as well as providing long LED service life and ensuring less than 10% lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours. Surge Suppression Standard 10kv surge suppressor provided with all fixtures. BUG Rating B1 - U5 - G1 Finishing All Ligman products go through an extensive finishing process that includes fettling to improve paint adherence. Paint UV Stabilized 4.9MiI thick powder coat paint and baked at 200 Deg C. This process ensures that Ligman products can withstand harsh environments. Rated for use in natatoriums. Hardware Provided Hardware is Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Anti Seize Screw Holes Tapped holes are infused with a special anti seize compound designed to prevent seizure of threaded connections, due to electrolysis from heat, corrosive atmospheres and moisture. Crystal Clear Low Iron Glass Lens Provided with tempered, impact resistant crystal clear low iron glass ensuring no green glass tinge. Optics & LED Precise optic design provides exceptional light control and precise distribution of light. LED CRI > 80 Lumen - Maintenance Life L80 /B10 at 50,000 hours (This means that at least 90% of the LED still achieve 80% of their original flux) Circular or square form technical up & down - light wall range. Completely tailorable wall -mounted direct/indirect optical lighting solutions for perfect task or architectural lighting. Wall luminaires with a selection of light distribu- tions and LED wattages with downward light distributions. The Tango is unique as it is available with Type II,III & IV light distribution options that facilitates wider spacing and even light distribution between the light fixtures. Spacings of up to 40' on center, and a 14' mounting height with a 2 fc average can be achieved using the type II optic. This provides higher energy saving and reduced installation costs. The Tango 31 cylindrical or Tango 32 square up -down versions can be manufactured using different type beam distributions for the up and down optics. Integral electronic control gear. Mounting plate for 3" and 4"junction box is provided with the fixture. Matching surface mount conduit boxes are available as an option. Custom round pole adapt- ers can be manufactured to suit specific pole diameters for column mounting applications. Please contact the factory for more information. Additional Options (Consult Factory For Pricing) SCE Surface Conduit Decorative Trim RPA Round Pole Adapter /!IIp AGL Anti Glare Louvre Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. UTA-31882 Tango 31 Cylindrical Up/Downlight micros TECHNOLOGY LieMA /1/ LIGHTING USA bROJ ECT QUANTITY TYPE NOTE DATE ORDERING EXAMPLE 11 UTA - 31882 - 2x39w - T2 - W30 - 02 - 120/277v - Options UTA-31882 LAMP 2x39w LED 2x2582 Lumens BEAM - UP BEAM - DOWN N - Narrow Beam 12° M - Medium Beam 26° W - Wide Beam 40° NAT - Natatorium Rated SCE - Surface Conduit Decorative Trim DIM - 0-10v Dimming F - Frosted Lens AGL - Anti Glare Louvre T1 - Type 1 Distribution T2 - Type II Distribution T3 - Type III Distribution T4 - Type IV Distribution EMG - Emergency Battery Pack RPA - Round Pole Adapter HGT - Custom Height AMB - Turtle Friendly Amber LED i FINISH COLOR LED COLOR W27 - 2700K W30 - 3000K W35 - 3500K W40 - 4000K CITY OF FLAGSTAFF & TURTLE FRIENDLY COMPLIANT 10096 80m 3 AMB Spectral Diagram Sys J 380 430 180 530 580 630 Wavel ngth(nm) 680 730 780 Narrow -Spectrum Amber LEDs Peak wavelength between 585 & 595 nanometers and a full width of 50% power no greater than 15 nanometers. 01 - BLACK RAL 9011 02 - DARK GREY RAL 7043 03 - WHITE RAL 9003 04 - METALLIC SILVER RAL 9006 05 - MATTE SILVER RAL 9006 06 - LIGMAN BRONZE 07 - CUSTOM RAL •1S r 'r rT VOLTAGE _ 120/277v ■■ Other - Specify UTA-31871 UTA-80551 UTA-80561 UTA-20011 UTA-20031 UTA-20731 Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. UTA-20732 caus Intertek UKWH-30001 KWH 1 Surface Mount mirrr OS TECHNOLOGY Li' MAN LIGHTING USA 20w LED 2591 Lumens IP65 • Suitable For Wet Locations IKO7 • Impact Resistant Weight 8.7 Ibs 4.3" 15.7" 1.8" 0.21" 4" T 3.7" Mounting Detail Available with Integral Emergency Backup mirrr OS TECHNOLOGY Ligman's micro Variable Optical System provides the ability to interchange, mix & rotate optics to provide specific light distributions for optimized spacing and uniformity. Type 1 Type 11 Type IV Type 111 Type V The variable optic system allows for the designer to create hybrid distrubtions for precise lighting requirements. Construction Aluminum Less than 0.1 % copper content - Marine Grade 6060 extruded & LM6 Aluminum High Pressure die casting provides excellent mechanical strength , clean detailed product lines and excellent heat dissipation. Pre paint 8 step degrease and phosphate process that includes deoxidizing and etching as well as a zinc and nickel phosphate process before product painting. Memory Retentive -Silicon Gasket Provided with special injection molded "fit for purpose" long life high temperature memory retentive silicon gaskets. Maintains the gaskets exact profile and seal over years of use and compression. Thermal management LM6 Aluminum is used for its excellent mechanical strength and thermal dissipation properties in low and high ambient temperatures. The superior thermal heat sink design by Ligman used in conjunction with the driver, controls thermals below critical temperature range to ensure maximum luminous flux output, as well as providing long LED service life and ensuring less than 10% lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours. Surge Suppression Standard 10kv surge suppressor provided with all fixtures. BUG Rating BO - UO - GO Finishing All Ligman products go through an extensive finishing process that includes fettling to improve paint adherence. Paint UV Stabilized 4.9MiI thick powder coat paint and baked at 200 Deg C. This process ensures that Ligman products can withstand harsh environments. Rated for use in natatoriums. Hardware Provided Hardware is Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Anti Seize Screw Holes Tapped holes are infused with a special anti seize compound designed to prevent seizure of threaded connections, due to electrolysis from heat, corrosive atmospheres and moisture. Crystal Clear Low Iron Glass Lens Provided with tempered, impact resistant crystal clear low iron glass ensuring no green glass tinge. Optics & LED Precise optic design provides exceptional light control and precise distribution of light. LED CRI > 80 Lumen - Maintenance Life L80 /B10 at 50,000 hours (This means that at least 90% of the LED still achieve 80% of their original flux) Clean, slim, surface wall fixtures with class leading performance. The KWH luminaire provides a small profile luminaire with clean crisp lines and lateral expandability, maintaining a minimalistic uniform visual sideways appearance while offering a variety of lumen packages. These luminaires have rotatable and inter- changeable microVOS optics and are also available with integral emergency battery backup solutions. Powerful, flexible and cost-effective family with vast array of technical optic choices. A range of small profile, linear surface wall or ground mounted luminaires with options of upward or downward light distributions. Ideally suited to illuminate the wall and surfaces in front of wall and for light accents on vertical surfaces using high efficiency LED's. The KWH is suitable for indoor and outdoor applications and provides a clean, visually appealing solution for a small, unobtrusive surface mounted luminaire. This luminaire is available in 3 different sizes utilizing microVos technology, meaning the ability to do Type I,II,III,IV & V distributions as well as hybrid distributions to suit the designer's require- ments. Using the microVos optics allows for very wide spacing to mounting height ratios, while still providing perfect uniformity and code compliant light levels. HYBRID TYPE I & TYPE IV Ligman Lighting USA reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements In LED technology data and components may change without notice. UKWH-30001 KWH 1 Surface Mount micro os TECHNOLOGY Li MAid LIGHTING USA NOTE DATE ORDERING EXAMPLE II UKWH - 30001 - 20w - T2 - W30 - 02 - 120/277v - Options UKWH-30001 LAMP 20w LED 2591 Lumens BEAM T1 - Type 1 Distribution T2 - Type II Distribution T3 - Type III Distribution T4 - Type IV Distribution M - Medium 31° W - Wide 55° EW - Extra Wide 107° ME - Type ME Distribution SCL - Type SCL Distribution T1 IESNA Type 1 (medium) T3 IESNA Type III (medium) SCL Type II/111 (long), ideal for pedestrian paths and residential roads W27 - 2700K W30 - 3000K W35 - 3500K W40 - 4000K T2 IESNA Type II (medium) T4 IESNA Type IV ME Excellent longitudinal luminance uniformity fulfilling EN13201 M - class requirements EMOTIONAL OPTIONS DIM - 0-10v Dimming NAT - Natatorium Rated F - Frosted Lens EMG - Emergency Battery Backup INV - Integral Inverter for Emergency Lighting IHSS- Internal House Side Shield Elinf• H COLOR 01 - BLACK RAL 9011 02 - DARK GREY RAL 7043 03 - WHITE RAL 9003 04 - METALLIC SILVER RAL 9006 05 - MATTE SILVER RAL 9006 06 - LIGMAN BRONZE 07 - CUSTOM RAL VOLTAGE _ 120/277v L. A Other - Specify Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. KWH Product Family b KWH 1 • UKWH-30001-19w-25911m b KWH 2 • UKWH-30001-20w-25911m r r KWH 5 • UKWH-20011-38w-51821m KWH 6 • UKWH-20021-60w-72001m setik KWH 3 • UKWH-30021-60w-7200Im r KWH 4 • UKWH-20001-20w-25911m UALD-30091 Aldo 2 Surface Floodlight LirMAN LIGHTING USA if 24w LED 2127 Lumens IP65 • Suitable For Wet Locations IKO8 • Impact Resistant (Vandal Resistant) Weight 3.5 Ibs 39.3" 11 .21" 0 0 .62" 0-0 t .37" Mounting Detail Construction Aluminum Less than 0.1% copper content - Marine Grade 6060 extruded & LM6 Aluminum High Pressure die casting provides excellent mechanical strength , clean detailed product lines and excellent heat dissipation. Pre paint 8 step degrease and phosphate process that includes deoxidizing and etching as well as a zinc and nickel phosphate process before product painting. Memory Retentive -Silicon Gasket Provided with special injection molded "fit for purpose" long life high temperature memory retentive silicon gaskets. Maintains the gaskets exact profile and seal over years of use and compression. Thermal management LM6 Aluminum is used for its excellent mechanical strength and thermal dissipation properties in low and high ambient temperatures. The superior thermal heat sink design by Ligman used in conjunction with the driver, controls thermals below critical temperature range to ensure maximum luminous flux output, as well as providing long LED service life and ensuring less than 10% lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours. Surge Suppression Standard, in series wired 10kv surge suppressor provided with all fixtures. Finishing All Ligman products go through an extensive finishing process that includes fettling to improve paint adherence. Paint UV Stabilized 4.9Mil thick powder coat paint and baked at 200 Deg C. This process ensures that Ligman products can withstand harsh environments. Rated for use in natatoriums. Hardware Provided Hardware is Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Anti Seize Screw Holes Tapped holes are infused with a special anti seize compound designed to prevent seizure of threaded connections, due to electrolysis from heat, corrosive atmospheres and moisture. Crystal Clear Low Iron Glass Lens Provided with tempered, impact resistant crystal clear low iron glass ensuring no green glass tinge. Optics & LED Precise optic design provides exceptional light control and precise distribution of light. LED CRI > 80 Lumen - Maintenance Life L80 /B10 at 50,000 hours (This means that at least 90% of the LED still achieve 80% of their original flux) Elegant, slim, low -profile high output LED linear luminaire for wall wash and LED video display application. Aldo wall wash or wall grazing floodlight family is designed as a perfect solution for color changing applications, as well as static color for architectural structures, wall grazing, column lighting and linear floodlighting. This high performance luminaire, with superior optic design is suitable for many applications including commercial, historic or modern architectural interiors and exteriors. Two different lengths, 39.3" and 19.6" allow the luminaire installation to be tailored exactly to the architectural structure. Luminaires can be installed end to end, without any gaps or shadows in the lighting design. A remote mounted driver is provided. Aldo is available in 2700K, 3000K, 3500K and 4000K, as well as RGBW color changing. Additional Options (Consult Factory For Pricing) ADJ3 - 3" Extended Arm ADJ12 - 12" Extended Arm ADJ6 - 6" Extended Arm .0. 18.04" �--% 0 ADJ18 - 18" Extended Arm Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. UALD-30091 Aldo 2 Surface Floodlight LirMAN LIGHTING USA bROJIMII � QUANTITIII TYPE NOTE DATE 1 ORDERING EXAMPLE 11 UALD - 30091 - 24w LED - M - W30 - 02 - 120/277v UALD-30091 DIM - 0-10v Dimming PHSD - Phase Dimming NAT - Natatorium Rated 6w - 19.6" UALD-30001 12w - 19.6" UALD-30081 48w - 39.3' UALD-30171 12w - 393- LAMP 24w LED 2127 Lumens BEAM N - Narrow 12° M - Medium 30° W - Wide 45° E - Elliptical 15°x 50° ADJ3 - 3" Extended Arm ADJ6 - 6" Extended Arm ADJ12 - 12" Extended Arm ADJ18 - 18" Extended Arm UALD-30011 12w -19.6" UALD-30101 18w -19.6" UALD-30181 6w - 19.6' LED COLOR W27 - 2700K W30 - 3000K W35 - 3500K W40 - 4000K UALD-30021 12w - 39.3" UALD-30031 24w-39.3" 18w-19.6' UALD-30111 UALD-30121 36w-39.3" 36w-19.6' UALD-30191 UALD-30201 FINISH COLOR 01 - BLACK RAL 9011 02 - DARK GREY RAL 7043 03 - WHITE RAL 9003 04 - METALLIC SILVER RAL 9006 05 - MATTE SILVER RAL 9006 06 - LIGMAN BRONZE 07 - CUSTOM RAL 18w - 39.3' 9w-19.6" UALD-30041 36w - 39.3' UALD-30131 72w - 39.3" UALD-30211 UALD-30051 18w - 19.6" UALD-30141 36w-19.6" UALD-30221 VOLTAGE _ 120/277v Wail Other - Specify 9w - 19.6" UALD-30061 36w - 39.3" UALD-30151 72w - 39.3" UALD-30231 18‘m - 39.3' UALD-30071 24w-19.6" UALD-30161 Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. Lighting the Vertical Outdoor linear, remote driver Solid State (LED) 1 Style S151 Optical Assembly 1:2 Scale T 1-13/16" [46mm] 1 17/16"� [37mm] Pendant Stem with Round Canopy 1:8 Scale I_4-3/16" [106mm],.I 6" min to 60" max Vertical 1 Wall Mounted Cantilever Mounting arms & hubs ordered separately K _24" (610mm) maximum,) Horizontal 11/16" — [17mm] 1-1/4" [32mm] LENGTH (center -to -center) See Chart —I 0 0 Remote Driver(s) See remote LED driver document MA-xxxx for dimensions, wiring, mounting instructions c A LENGTH CENTER -CENTER 2FT 25" (635mm) 3FT 36-3/4" (933mm) 4FT 48-1/4"" (1226mm) 5FT 60-1/4" (1530mm) 6FT 72-1/4" (1835mm) Specifications A Extruded aluminum heat sink housing B Extruded semi - diffuse lens C Die-cast aluminum end plate D Linear LED PCB with mid - power LEDs E Clear silicone encapsulant F Round j -box cover 4-3/16" diameter G Slip ring with set screw H Rigid stem 11/16" O.D. J Aluminum mounting hub 1.25" K Wall Mounting Plate 6"H x 4.5"W M Optional cross baffle N Extruded aluminum intermediate cover Optic Assembly: Extruded aluminum heat sink/optic housing. Exterior heat sink anodized for maximum emissivity. Precision extruded polymer refractive lens with optimal dispersion. Finish: Bright anodized extruded aluminum heat sink/housing with painted finish, white or black. Formed aluminum canopy, end hubs and stems painted white or black. Painted surfaces - 6 stage pretreatment and electrostatically applied thermoset polyester powder coating for a durable abrasion, fade and corrosion resistant finish. All hardware - stainless steel or nickel plated brass. Mounting: Required pendant or cantilever hangers -- ordered and priced separately. Surface Cantilever/pendant supplied with recessed outlet box (suitable backing structure required). Adjustable interface plate (concealed under canopy) allows for leveling of arms. Fixture weight: 1.0 lb/ft (1.5 kg/m). 9/20 PRELIMINARY Electrical: Luminaire furnished with 10 foot (3048mm) of low voltage cable for connection to remote driver. Electronic HPF thermally protected Class II driver mounted in weather-proof enclosure or optional indoor dry enclosure. For complete driver specifications, see website, reference document MA -1303. Standard: CSA certified for wet locations Dual rated IP66 and IP67 5 year warranty Maximum ambient temperature 45°C (113°F). Features • Inconspicuous low profile - lights entire surface evenly from one edge • Small elegant yet strong hub hangers • Adjustable and lockable aiming • Built-in visor provides shielding of glare Performance Precisely extruded acrylic lens produces an asymmetric distribution ideal for illuminating vertical surfaces evenly from top to bottom. For LM79 and photometric reports, visit thel ig hti ngq uotient.com L90(10k) > 60,000 hrs 25°C per TM -21 eliiptipar° Style S151 To form a Catalog Number Project: 1 1511 1 1 1 1-J- 1 I -J- I -J- 1 1 1-__L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ▪ Source S = Solid state (LED) ▪ Style 151 = XtraSmall Outdoor Linear Adjustable 3 Length / Light Output / Power ORDER CODE LENGTH LUMENS INPUT WATTS NUMBER OFLEDS DRIVE CURRENT RO2G 2FT 799 7 72 175mA RO2L 2FT 1567 13 72 350mA RO2M 2FT 3037 27 72 700mA RO3G 3FT 1199 10 108 175mA RO3L 3FT 2350 20 108 350mA RO3M 3FT 4555 40 108 700mA RO4G 4FT 1598 13 144 175mA RO4L 4FT 3133 27 144 350mA RO4M 4FT 6073 53 144 700mA RO5G 5FT 1998 17 180 175mA RO5L 5FT 3916 33 180 1 350mA RO5M 5FT 7592 67 180 700mA RO6G 6FT 2398 20 216 175mA RO6L 6FT 4700 40 216 350mA RO6M 6FT 9110 80 216 700mA Based on 3500K/80+ CRI. Click here for scaled performance table. 4 Mounting H = For use with required mounting hubs only or mounting hubs with surface or pendant/cantilever hangers — ordered and priced separately, see hubs/hangers at right. 5 Finish 02 = 06 = 07 = 08 = 17 = 18 = Semigloss white Dark bronze Silver Semigloss black Champagne Copper 99 = Custom RAL or computer matched color to be specified, consult sales representative. ▪ Voltage M = 120-277V Universal voltage input K = 347V input 9/20 PRELIMINARY elliptipar® 7 Option 00 = No options OB = Cross baffle, provides shielding OD = Indoor/dry location remote driver BD= Cross baffle and indoor/dry location remote driver 8 Destination Requirement 0 = UL listed or CSA certified for U.S. J = UL listed or CSA certified for Canada Color Temperature /CRI 830 = 3000K, 80+ CRI 835 = 3500K, 80+ CRI 840 = 4000K, 80+ CRI Additional CCT and CRI options are available; consult factory. 10 Dimming** 00 = Non -dimming TD = ERP Tri-Dim forward phase, reverse phase (120V) or 0-10V dimming (120-277V), 100-10% power on forward/ reverse phase, 100%-1% on 0-10V, compatible controls by others ZX = 0-10V analog dimming 120-277V input, dimming range 100%-5%, 0-10V controls by others EL = eldoLED SOLOdrive 120-277V input, dimming range 100%-0.1%, 0-10V controls by others. ED = eldoLED SOLOdrive 120-277V input, dimming range 100%-0.1%, DALI controls by others. **Dimming range refers to % power input, % light output will vary. Refer to Driver Information document MA -1303 Example S151-RO6M-H-02-M-0D-0-835-ZX S151 XtraSmall outdoor linear adjustable asymmetric with remote driver. Extruded aluminum heat sink/housing, nominal 6ft (1830mm) long, 700mA, semi -gloss white finish, 120-277V electronic dimming driver with indoor/dry location enclosure, dims to 1%, 0-10V dimming controls by others, CSA certified for wet location, 3500K, 80+CRI. elliptipar from The Lighting Quotient 114 Boston Post Road, West Haven, Connecticut 06516, USA Voice 203.931.4455 • Fax 203.931.4464 • thelightingquotient.com Type: Required Mounting Hangers � HGA or HGC (hubs with hangers) are required — ordered and priced separately. Order two hangers and one HGE end of row kit (pair of end caps) for each individually mounted luminaire or each row. For a continuous row, order one hanger for each additional luminaire in the row. Example: three rows of four housings requires 3 end cap kits and (15) HGA or HGC hangers. Note: Recessed outlet box by others or splice box style hanger required at each mounted location for electrical connections. HOL Hub/stem assembly for use with 3/8" NPT rigid conduit by others HGA Surface hanger with round mounting/splice box options HGC Cantilever hanger with rectangular mounting splice box options - 24" maximum length (horizontal) HGF Pendant hanger with round mounting/splice box options - 60" maximum length (vertical) ME End of row kit (two end caps) The external shapes of the housings are trademarks of Sylvan R. Shemitz Designs, LLC dba The Lighting Quotient, makers of elliptipar, tambient and fraqtir. Certain products illustrated may be covered by applicable patents and patents pending. These specifications supersede all prior publications and are subject to change without notice. Copyright © 2020 Sylvan R. Shemitz Designs, LLC, all rights reserved. UBOH-60013 Bornholm 2 Underwater Luminaire (Constant Voltage) LirMAN LIGHTING USA llw LED - 1068 Lumens IP68. Suitable For Wet Locations IK07 • Impact Resistant (Vandal Resistant) Weight 2 Ibs 6" 4 6" 5" Mounting Detail 4"--I 6" Construction Luminaire Housing & Bracket Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Memory Retentive -Silicon Gasket Provided with special injection molded "fit for purpose" long life high temperature memory retentive silicon gaskets. Maintains the gaskets exact profile and seal over years of use and compression. Thermal management LM6 Aluminum is used for its excellent mechanical strength and thermal dissipation properties in low and high ambient tempera- tures. The superior thermal heat sink design by Ligman used in conjunction with the driver, controls thermals below critical temperature range to ensure maximum luminous flux output, as well as providing long LED service life and ensuring less than 10% lumen depreciation at 50,000 hours. Surge Suppression Standard 10kv surge suppressor provided with all fixtures. Hardware Provided Hardware is Marine grade 316 Stainless steel. Crystal Clear Low Iron Glass Lens Provided with tempered, impact resistant crystal clear low iron glass ensuring no green glass tinge. Optics & LED Precise optic design provides exceptional light control and precise distribution of light. LED CRI > 80 Lumen - Maintenance Life L80 /B10 at 50,000 hours (This means that at least 90% of the LED still achieve 80% of their original flux) Sophisticated recessed underwater family, available in four sizes with a wide range of lumen outputs and RGBW versions to suit any project brief. A high powered compact recessed LED underwater projector for lighting small ponds, waterfalls and water jets. The floodlight must be submerged when operating. Stainless steel grade 316 body, stainless steel screws. Cable entry PG.11 cable gland supplied with 7ft of outdoor submersible #18/3 SOOW 600v power cable. Durable high temperature memory retentive silicon gasket and clear tempered vandal resistant glass. Remote 24v constant voltage driver required to be installed by others. Driver output voltage to be determined depending on quantity of luminaires connected in parallel. Color temperature 2700K, 3000K, 3500K and 4000K, LED CRI >80 and life time 50,000 Hours. A variety of beam spreads are available to suit the application requirements. Maximum depth 5'. suitable for recessed mount. Recessing box in PVC is included. Remote driver is included and required to be installed by others. Remote IP gear box by contractor. This luminaire is constant voltage and needs connecting in parallel. Additional Options (Consult Factory For Pricing) A80191 3" x 10" Remote Enclosure Box aM A80291 4" x 10" Remote Enclosure Box 11111011 41. Dichroic Color Filters A52321 Honeycomb Louvre Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. UBOH-60013 Bornholm 2 Underwater Luminaire (Constant Voltage) LirMAN LIGHTING USA •ROJ ECT hp.UANTITY TYPE NOTE DATE ORDERING EXAMPLE 11 UBOH-60013- llw - W - W30 - 120/277v UBOH-60013 LAM P llw LED 1068 Lumens BEAM N - Narrow 10° M - Medium 19° W - Wide 33° VW - Very Wide 71° E - Elliptical 41° x 14° LED COLOR W27 - 2700K W30 - 3000K W35 - 3500K W40 - 4000K VOLTAGE 120/277v Other - Specify ADDITIONAL OPTION A80191 - 3"x10" Remote Driver Enclosure Box A80291 - 4"x10" Remote Driver Enclosure Box A52321 - Honeycomb Louvre DICHROIC COLOR FILTERS A51816 - Red Color Filter A51817 - Blue Color Filter A51818 - Amber Color Filter A51819 - Green Color Filter Ligman Lighting USA reserves the rightto change specifications without prior notice, please contact factory for latest Information. Due to the continual Improvements in LED technology data and components may change without notice. caus Intertek Appendix 3, Geotechnical Report l ip 15-FIRA.TA.--FECHgl NC. MEOCCINSULTAMTS 310. 968. 2999 stratatech(yahoo.com September 18, 2019 W.O. 288319 DMS Consultants, Inc. 12377 Lewis Street #101 Garden Grove, CA 92840 Subject: Geotechnical Engineering Investigation, Proposed Park Improvements, Primrose Park, Southwest Quadrant of woodruff Avenue and Primrose Avenue, Temple City, California Gentlemen: Pursuant to your request, a geotechnical investigation has been performed at the subject site. The purposes of the investigation were to determine the general engineering characteristics of the soils on and underlying the site and to provide recommendations for the design of foundations and underground improvements. PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT It is our understanding that the urban redevelopment will result in a new park including storm water retention features. PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES The scope of the study was to obtain subsurface information within the project site area and to provide recommendations pertaining to the proposed development and included the following: 1. A cursory reconnaissance of the site and surrounding areas. 2. Excavation of three exploratory boring to determine the subsurface soil and groundwater conditions. 3. Collection of representative bulk and/or undisturbed soil samples for laboratory analysis. 1920 Pacific Avenue, Unit 16060, Long Beach, CA 90806 DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 2 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 4. Laboratory analyses of soil samples including determination of in -situ and maximum density, in -situ and optimum moisture content, shear strength and consolidation characteristics, expansion potential, sulfate content, and liquefaction analysis. 5. Preparation of this report presenting results of our investigation and recommendations with discussion of Liquefaction for the proposed development. SITE CONDITIONS The subject site is the location of a future community park at Primrose Avenue, South of Woodruff and north of Las Tunas, Temple City. Site topography is essentially level. The site is located on the attached Site Vicinity Map, Plate land Aerial, and Plate 1.1. FIELD INVESTIGATION The field investigation was performed between September 26, 2019, consisting of the drilling of three auger borings also used for infiltration testing at the locations shown on the attached Boring Location Map , Plate 2. As drilling progressed, personnel from this office visually classified the soils encountered, and secured representative samples for laboratory testing. Description of the soils encountered is presented on the attached Boring Log, Plates 3-B1,B2 &B3. The data presented on this log is a simplification of actual subsurface conditions encountered and applies only at the specific boring location and the date excavated. It is not warranted to be representative of subsurface conditions at other locations and times. EARTH MATERIALS Earth materials encountered within the exploratory test borings were visually logged by a representative from STRATA -TECH, Inc. The materials were classified as artificial fill and native soils. Native soils consisted of clean to silty, fine grained sand, sandy silt, and silty, to the maximum depth explored. Groundwater was not encountered in the shallow borings to 15 feet below ground surface(bgs). The historical high groundwater for this location is 12' bgs. Earth materials are further described on the attached boring logs. DMS Consultants, Inc. 3 W. O. 288319 Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation October18, 2019 SEISMICITY Southern California is located in an active seismic region. Moderate to strong earthquakes can occur on numerous faults. The United States Geological Survey, California Division of Mines and Geology, private consultants, and universities have been studying earthquakes in Southern California for several decades. Early studies were directed toward earthquake prediction estimation of the effects of strong ground shaking. Studies indicate that earthquake prediction is not practical and not sufficiently accurate to benefit the general public. Governmental agencies are shifting their focus to earthquake resistant structures as opposed to prediction. The purpose of the code seismic design parameters is to prevent collapse during strong ground shaking. Cosmetic damage should be expected. Within the past 30 years, Southern California and vicinity have experienced an increase in seismic activity beginning with the San Fernando earthquake in 1971. In 1987, a moderate earthquake struck the Whittier area and was located on a previously unknown fault. Ground shaking from this event caused substantial damage to the City of Whittier, and surrounding cities. The January 17, 1994, Northridge earthquake was initiated along a previously unrecognized fault below the San Fernando Valley. The energy released by the earthquake propagated to the southeast, northwest, and northeast in the form of shear and compression waves, which caused the strong ground shaking in portions of the San Fernando Valley, Santa Monica Mountains, Simi Valley, City of Santa Clarita, and City of Santa Monica. Southern California faults are classified as: active, potentially active, or inactive. Faults from past geologic periods of mountain building, but do not display any evidence of recent offset, are considered "inactive" or "potentially active". Faults that have historically produced earthquakes or show evidence of movement within the past 11,000 years are known as "active faults". There are no known active faults within the subject property. The nearest known active fault is the Newport -Inglewood located to the southwest. The principal seismic hazard to the subject property and proposed project is strong ground shaking from earthquakes produced by local faults. It is likely that the subject property will be shaken by future earthquakes produced in Southern California. Secondary effects such as surface rupture, lurching, lateral spread or flooding are not considered probable. Liquefaction and seismically induced settlement are discussed in the following sections of this report. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Development of the site as proposed is considered feasible from a soils engineering standpoint, provided that the recommendations stated herein are incorporated in the design and are implemented in the field. Recommendations are subject to change based on review of final foundation and grading plans. DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 4 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 As stated on Page 35 of "Recommended Procedures for Implementation of DMG Special Publication 117, Guideline for Analyzing and Mitigating Liquefaction in California": The choice of mitigation methods will depend on the extent of liquefaction and the related consequences. Also, the cost of mitigation must be considered in light of an acceptable level of risk. Youd (1998) has suggested that structural mitigation for liquefaction hazards may be acceptable where small lateral displacements (say less than 1 foot or 0.3 meter) and vertical settlement (say less than 4 inches or 10 centimeters) are predicted. Youd cites evidence that houses and small buildings with reinforced perimeter footings and connected grade beams have performed well in Japan, and similar performance should be expected in the United States. The level to which the liquefaction potential is mitigated is a function of assumed risk. The following options are presented: Option 1- High Risk Structure is not designed to accommodate any differential settlements and may suffer significant structural shifts during liquefaction. Option 2 — Moderate Risk Structure is designed to accommodate limited differential settlements and may suffer some cracking with limited liquefaction. Option 3 — Low Risk Structure is designed to withstand complete loss of ground support from major earthquake, along with possible large-scale ground subsidence and lateral spreading. To provide moderate risk from potential seismic settlement effects due to a catastrophic earthquake, the structure may be placed on compacted soil to reduce the effects of differential settlement. The foundation shall be continuous or tied together with grade beams. The foundation shall be reinforced with a minimum of four No. 4 bars, two top and two bottom, concrete slabs shall be a minimum of 4 -inch actual thickness with No. 3 bars 18 inches on center each way, and shall be tied into foundations. These are minimum geotechnical recommendations. Additionally, the structural engineer shall utilize the newest seismic building codes in design. Since surface soils will be disturbed due to removal of the existing structures, it is recommended that the proposed building/s be entirely supported by compacted fill. A minimum of 2 foot compacted fill blanket below the bottom of footings is recommended. DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 5 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 For minor structures like property line walls or retaining walls less than 4 feet high, competent native soils or compacted fill may be used. PROPOSED GRADING Grading plans were not available at the time our work was performed. It is assumed that proposed grades will not differ significantly from existing grades. The following recommendations are subject to change based on review of final grading plans. GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS Removal and recompaction of existing fill and loose native soils will be required to provide adequate support for foundations and slabs on grade. Earthwork for foundation support shall include the entire building pad and shall extend a minimum of five feet outside exterior footing lines. Removals shall extend downward into competent earth materials or to at least two feet below proposed footing bottoms, whichever is deeper. Average removal depth is estimated at 4 feet. The exposed excavation bottom shall be observed and approved by STRATA -TECH, Inc. prior to processing. Dependent on field observations, removals may be adjusted up or down. Subsequent to approval of the excavation bottom, the area shall be scarified six inches, moisture conditioned as needed, and compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction. Fill soils shall be placed in six to eight inch loose lifts, moisture conditioned as needed, and compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction. This process shall be utilized to finish grade. Grading for hardscape areas shall consist of removal and recompaction of soft surficial soils. Removal depths are estimated at one to two feet. Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with previously specified methods. Grading and/or foundation plans shall be reviewed by the soil engineer. All recommendations are subject to modification upon review of such plans. FOUNDATIONS ON COMPACTED FILL Single story buildings may be supported by continuous spread placed a minimum depth of 18 inches below lowest adjacent grade utilizing an allowable bearing value of 2,000 pounds per square foot. This value is for dead plus live load and may be increased 1/3 for total including seismic and wind loads where allowed by code. DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 6 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 Type Minimum Depth (inches) Minimum Width (inches) Bearing Value (psf) Increase Maximum (psf) Width Depth (psf/ft) (psf/ft) Continuous 18 12 2000 180 440 3500 Interior 18 18 2000 180 440 3500 It is recommended that all footings be reinforced with a minimum of two no. 4 bars (2 top and 2 bottom). The structural engineer's reinforcing requirements should be followed if more stringent. Footing excavations shall be observed by a representative of STRATA -TECH, Inc. prior to placement of steel or concrete to verify competent soil conditions. If unacceptable soil conditions are exposed mitigation will be recommended. FOUNDATIONS ON COMPETENT NATIVE SOILS — for Minor Structures Minor structures may be supported by continuous spread footings placed a minimum depth of 18 inches below lowest adjacent grade and 12 -inches into competent natural soil utilizing an allowable bearing value of 1,500 pounds per square foot. This value is for dead plus live load and may be increased 1/3 for total including seismic and wind loads where allowed by code. Footing excavations shall be observed by a representative of STRATA -TECH, Inc. prior to placement of steel or concrete to verify competent soil conditions. If unacceptable soil conditions are exposed, mitigation will be recommended. LATERAL DESIGN Lateral restraint at the base of footings and on slabs may be assumed to be the product of the dead load and a coefficient of friction of .35. Passive pressure on the face of footings may also be used to resist lateral forces. A passive pressure of zero (0) at the surface of finished grade, increasing at the rate of 350 pounds per square foot of depth to a maximum value of 3500 pounds per square foot, may be used for compacted fill or native soils at this site. If passive pressure and friction are combined for evaluating the lateral resistance, the value of the passive pressure should be limited to 2/3 of the values given above. EXPANSIVE SOILS Results of expansion tests indicate that the near surface soils have a low to very low expansion potential. C.B.C. SEISMIC DESIGN VALUES DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 7 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 • Site Coordinates 34.1089858N, -118.06284270000003 W • Site Soil Classification Site Class D — "Stiff Soil" • Risk Category VIVIII Basic Parameters Name Value Description Ss 1.989 MCER ground motion (period=0.2s) S1 0.704 MCER ground motion (period=1.0s) Sms 2.386 Site -modified spectral acceleration value SM1 1.197 Site -modified spectral acceleration value Name Value Description SDS SDI PGA 1.591 Numeric seismic design value at 0.2s SA 0.798 Numeric seismic design value at 1.0s SA 0.863 peak ground acceleration SETTLEMENT The maximum total post -construction settlement is anticipated to be on the order of 1/2 inch. Differential settlements are expected to be less than 1/2 inch, measured between adjacent structural elements. FLOOR SLABS The surface soils are non -plastic. If a slab on grade is utilized, the slab shall be supported on engineered fill compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction and underlain by a minimum of 4inches clean sand with SE>30. Slabs should be reinforced with at least No. 3 bars 18 inches on center both ways. The soil should be kept moist prior to casting the slab. However, if the soils at grade become disturbed during construction, they should be brought to approximately optimum moisture content and rolled to a firm, unyielding condition prior to placing concrete. In areas where a moisture sensitive floor covering will be used, a vapor barrier consisting of a plastic film (6 ml polyvinyl chloride or equivalent) should be used. The vapor barrier should be properly lapped and sealed. Since the vapor barrier will prevent moisture from draining from fresh DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 8 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 concrete, a better concrete finish can usually be obtained if at least two inches of sand is spread over the vapor barrier prior to placement of concrete. PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS Asphalt Pavements will be constructed to create light traffic parking. The near surface soil consists of a fine grain cohesionless silty -sand. This soil can be used as a moderate Subgrade if the upper layer is removed and recompacted. We have performed calculations for various asphalt pavements sections assuming different traffic loading conditions. The sub -grade was assigned an R -Value of 45. AREA ASPHALT PAVEMENT SECTION T. I. GE AC AB SUBGRADE Auto Parking 4.0 .73 4.0 - ** 12" Driveway 5.0 .94 4.5 - ** 12" * Compacted to 90% relative compaction. ** Compacted to 95% relative compaction. UTILITY LINE BACKFILLS All utility line backfills, both interior and exterior, shall be compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction and shall require testing at a maximum of two foot vertical intervals. HARDSCAPE AND SLABS Hardscape and slab subgrade areas shall exhibit a minimum of 90% relative compaction to a depth of at least one foot. Deeper removal and recompaction may be required if unacceptable conditions are encountered. These areas require testing just prior to placing concrete. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS A representative, onsite soil sample has been analyzed for soluble sulfates, soluble chloride, minimum resistivity and PH. Type II concrete may be utilized for the foundation system. Concrete design and placement shall be in accordance with appropriate codes. The soils are considered corrosive to metal pipes. All metal pipes must be wrapped. The Chemical Series Results are presented in Appendix A of this report. DMS Consultants, Inc. Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation 9 W. O. 288319 October18, 2019 DRAINAGE Positive drainage should be planned for the site. Minimum drainage should be two percent for landscape areas and one percent for hardscape. Drainage should be directed away from structures via non -erodible conduits to suitable disposal areas. The structure should utilize roof gutters and down spouts tied directly to yard drainage. Unlined flower beds, planters, and lawns should not be constructed against the perimeter of the structure. If such landscaping (against the perimeter of a structure) is planned, it should be properly drained and lined or provided with an underground moisture barrier. Irrigation should be kept to a minimum. ENGINEERING CONSULTATION, TESTING & OBSERVATION We will be pleased to provide additional input with respect to foundation design once methods of construction and/or nature of imported soil has been determined. Grading and foundation plans should be reviewed by this office prior to commencement of grading so that appropriate recommendations, if needed, can be made. Areas to receive fill should be inspected when unsuitable materials have been removed and prior to placement of fill, and fill should be observed and tested for compaction as it is placed. AGENCY REVIEW All soil, geologic and structural aspects of the proposed development are subject to the review and approval of the governing agency (s). It should be recognized that the governing agency (s) can dictate the manner in which the project proceeds. They could approve or deny any aspect of the proposed improvements and/or could dictate which foundation and grading options are acceptable. Supplemental geotechnical consulting in response to agency requests for additional information could be required and will be charged on a time and materials basis. LIMITATIONS This report presents recommendations pertaining to the subject site based on the assumption that the subsurface conditions do not deviate appreciably from those disclosed by our exploratory excavations. Our recommendations are based on the technical information, our understanding of the proposed construction, and our experience in the geotechnical field. We do not guarantee the performance of the project, only that our engineering work and judgments meet the standard of care of our profession at this time. In view of the general conditions in the area, the possibility of different local soil conditions may exist. Any deviation or unexpected condition observed during construction should be brought to the DMS Consultants, Inc. 10 W. O. 288319 Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation October18, 2019 attention of the Geotechnical Engineer. In this way, any supplemental recommendations can be made with a minimum of delay necessary to the project. If the proposed construction will differ from our present understanding of the project, the existing information and possibly new factors may have to be evaluated. Any design changes and the finished plans should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Consultant. Of particular importance would be extending development to new areas, changes in structural loading conditions, postponed development for more than a year, or changes in ownership. This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the owner, or of his representative, to ensure that the information and recommendations contained herein are called to the attention of the Architects and Engineers for the project and incorporated into the plans and that the necessary steps are taken to see that the contractors and subcontractors carry out such recommendations in the field. This report is subject to review by the controlling authorities for this project. We appreciate this opportunity to be of service to you. Respectfully submitted: STRATA -TECH, INC. Roland Acuiia, CEG President Larry Finley RCF 46606 Enclosure(s) Plate No. 1 — Plate No. 2 — Plates No. 3 Plate No. 4 — Vicinity Map, Site Plan — Boring Logs Shear Test VICINITY AERIAL MAP Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation PRIMROSE PARK Temple City, California Work Order 288318 Plate No. 1 STRATA - TECH, INC. Orr EMS•.IMIX 1162. Y1KMtLL _c5rIst mote 04, '',CmY AC Nlsa01n1�` ibr/1J tocalg.A, e ._ ... 1a : —la 6151 aSWIALL PRMRUSE AYE ENST 51115.9.56E Lora -Id SCALE: ` u o � J3 orlAi `Ent1 PABANCorl BENCH IAARK it 14. 105159 FLEV. 11105 1200)) ace 02 Inca sc 9., ) 2 Fl E\M &R n Y CORRF0 Immne AVE Me usrvli as OA. N]'KU 1 SS LOI Iu. SURVEYOR RE amok,. Ktd' 05,1]/IL ID IS TOPOGRAPHY SURVEY G4NSVLTAIYTS. Ya: PRIMROSE PARK TEMPLE CITY, CA SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-1 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E co cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description x x x x x x Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots — — 5 — _ 10- 15 — Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp End of boring at 5 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-2 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E 03 cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots 5 — 10- Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp Olive -gray , silt -sandy, trace of cay - — 15 — End of boring at 11 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-3 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E cu cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description x Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots _ 5 — — — 10- 15 — Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp End of boring at 5 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. DMS Consultants, Inc. 11 W. O. 288319 Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation October18, 2019 APPENDIX A This appendix contains a description of the field investigation, laboratory testing procedures and results, site plan, and exploratory logs. LABORATORY TESTING Field samples were examined in the laboratory and a testing program was then established to develop data for preliminary evaluation of geotechnical conditions. Sample Retrieval - Undisturbed samples of earth materials were obtained at frequent intervals by driving a thin - walled steel sampler with a sampling hammer. The material was retained in brass rings of 2.41 inches inside diameter and 1.00 inch height. The central portion of the sample was in close - fitting, watertight containers for transportation to the laboratory. Descriptions of the soils encountered are presented on the attached boring Logs. The data presented on these logs is a simplification of actual subsurface conditions encountered and applies only at the specific boring location and the date excavated. It is not warranted to be representative of subsurface conditions at other locations and times. Laboratory Testing Field samples were examined in the laboratory and a testing program was then established to develop data for preliminary evaluation of geotechnical conditions. Moisture Density Field moisture content and dry density were determined for each of the undisturbed soil samples. The dry density was determined in pounds per cubic foot. The moisture content was determined as a percentage of the dry soil weight. The results of the tests are shown in the test results section of this appendix. Compaction Character Compaction tests were performed on bulk sample of the existing soil in accordance with ASTM D1557. The results of the tests are shown in the test results section of this appendix. Shear Strength The ultimate shear strength of the fill soil, remolded to 90 -percent of the laboratory standard was determined by performing a direct shear test. The test was performed in a strain -controlled machine manufactured by GeoMatic. The rate of deformation was 0.005 inches per minute. Samples were sheared under varying confining pressure, as shown on the "Shear Test Diagrams". The samples DMS Consultants, Inc. 12 W. O. 288319 Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation October18, 2019 indicated as saturated were artificially saturated in the laboratory and were shear under submerged conditions. The results of tests are based on 80 percent peak strength or ultimate strength, whichever is lower, and are attached. TEST RESULTS Maximum Density/Optimum Moisture (ASTM:D-1557) Boring Depth in Feet Maximum Density (pcf) Optimum Moisture (%) 2 2 - 4 118.0 9.5 Direct Shear Boring Depth in Feet Cohesion (psf) Angle of Internal Friction (degrees) 1 3 70 30 Expansion Index (U.B.C. Standard 18-2) Boring Depth in Feet Expansion Index Expansion Potential 1 3 — 4 12 Very Low 2 1 — 2 20 Low Chemical Analysis Boring Depth (feet) Soluble Sulfate Soluble Chlorides Minimum Resistivity PH 1 3 167 160 1390 7.4 S T R A T A - T E C H, I N C. GEOCONSULTANTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADING SITE CLEARING All existing vegetation shall be stripped and hauled from the site. PREPARATION After the foundation for the fill has been cleared, plowed or scarified, it shall be disced or bladed until it is uniform and free from large clods, brought to a proper moisture content and compacted to not less than 90 percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM:D-1557 (5 layers - 25 blows per layer; 10 lb. hammer dropped 18"; 4" diameter mold). MATERIALS On -site materials may be used for fill, or fill materials shall consist of materials approved by the Soils Engineer and may be obtained from the excavation of banks, borrow pits or any other approved source. The materials used should be free of vegetable matter and other deleterious substances and shall not contain rocks or lumps greater than 8 inches in maximum dimension. PLACING, SPREADING, AND COMPACTING FILL MATERIALS Where natural slopes exceed five horizontal to one vertical, the exposed bedrock shall be benched prior to placing fill. The selected fill material shall be placed in layers which, when compacted, shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. Each layer shall be spread evenly and shall be thoroughly mixed during the spreading to ensure uniformity of material and moisture of each layer. Where moisture of the fill material is below the limits specified by the Soils Engineer, water shall be added until the moisture content is as required to ensure thorough bonding and thorough compaction. Where moisture content of the fill material is above the limits specified by the Soils Engineer, the fill materials shall be aerated by blading or other satisfactory methods until the moisture content is as specified. After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly compacted to not less than 90 percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM:D-1557 (5 layers -25 blows per layer; 101bs. hammer dropped 18 inches; 4" diameter mold) or other density tests which will attain equivalent results. STRATA - T E C H, I N C. GEOCONSULTANTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADING PAGE 2 Compaction shall be by sheepsfoot roller, multi -wheel pneumatic tire roller or other types of acceptable rollers. Rollers shall be of such design that they will be able to compact the fill to the specified density. Rolling shall be accomplished while the fill material is at the specified moisture content. Rolling of each layer shall be continuous over the entire area and the roller shall make sufficient trips to ensure that the desired density has been obtained. The final surface of the lot areas to receive slabs on grade should be rolled to a dense, smooth surface. The outside of all fill slopes shall be compacted by means of sheepsfoot rollers or other suitable equipment. Compaction operations shall be continued until the outer 9 inches of the slope is at least 90 percent compacted. Compacting of the slopes may be progressively in increments of 3 feet to 5 feet of fill height as the fill is brought to grade, or after the fill is brought to its total height. Field density tests shall be made by the Soils Engineer of the compaction of each layer of fill. Density tests shall be made at intervals not to exceed 2 feet of fill height provided all layers are tested. Where the sheepsfoot rollers are used, the soil may be disturbed to a depth of several inches and density readings shall be taken in the compacted material below the disturbed surface. When these readings indicate that the density of any layer of fill or portion there is below the required 90 percent density, the particular layer or portion shall be reworked until the required density has been obtained. The grading specifications should be a part of the project specifications. The Soil Engineer shall review the grading plans prior to grading. INSPECTION The Soil Engineer shall provide continuous supervision of the site clearing and grading operation so that he can verify the grading was done in accordance with the accepted plans and specifications. SEASONAL LIMITATIONS No fill material shall be placed, spread or rolled during unfavorable weather conditions. When work is interrupted by heavy rains, fill operations shall not be resumed until the field tests by the Soils Engineer indicate the moisture content and density of the fill are as previously specified. EXPANSIVE SOIL CONDITIONS Whenever expansive soil conditions are encountered, the moisture content of the fill or recompacted soil shall be as recommended in the expansive soil recommendations included herewith. Appendix 4, Storm Water Percolation Report A STRAT -TEC H , I N C. DEDCDNBULTAMT 310. 968. 2999 stratatech@yahoo.com October 21, 2019 W.O. 288319 DMS Consultants, Inc. 12377 Lewis Street #101 Garden Grove, CA 92840 Subject: Percolation Infiltration testing, Storm Water Management, Primrose Park, Southwest Quadrant of woodruff Avenue and Primrose Avenue, Temple City, California Ref: STRATA -TECH, INC.; "Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation, Primrose Park, Southwest Quadrant of woodruff Avenue and Primrose Avenue, Temple City, California", October 18, 2019 Gentlemen: In accordance with your authorization and terms of our contract STRATA -TECH, Inc. is pleased to submit the results of our storm water infiltration testing. Falling head percolation testing was performed in two Pits at the locations shown on the attached grading plan. The soils encountered consist of Olive -Tan, silty, fn sand, Sand, fn to 4 -feet. Logs of the Pits are attached. The percolation pit bottoms are substantially separated from seasonal groundwater. Ground water was encountered in adjacent borings that were dry to 1lfeet. Historical groundwater is 12bgs. Testing was performed in 4 -foot dry wells consisting of 4 -inch slotted well screen with .020" openings in an 8" diameter hand borings having the annular space packed with #3 Monterey filter sand to prevent caving. Hand borings were prepared 9/26/19 Testing was performed 9/26/19. The cased pits were filled with water for pre soak same day and the percolation test conducted immediately following the pre soak which confirmed sand condition criteria as outlined in OC_TGD_5-19-11AppendixVII. . STRATA-TECH,INC. GEOCONSULTANTS DMS consultants, Inc Preliminary Storm Water Percolation Testing Primrose Park, Temple City, California 2 October 21, 2019 The testing consisted of filling each 4 -foot pit with water to within 2 -feet of the surface and allowing it to seep for 10 min intervals and repeatedly filling the test pit and measuring the stabilized rate at the end of 6th cycle. The drop between successive measurements was recorded for each pit and is the basis for the calculated infiltration rate. The lowest calculated infiltration rate of 6.2 inch/Hr. may be used by the design civil engineer for the infiltration system design for the subject site. When a conservative factor of safety, FS = 2 is applied the infiltration rate of 3.1 in/Hr results. At the completion of testing the well screens were pulled and remaining holes filled with bentonite chips and covered with sod. The work performed was carried out in accordance with acceptable geotechnical principles common to the local area in which we practice. We make no other warranties, either expressed or implied. Respectfully submitted: STRATA -TECH, INC. Roland Acufia, PG President Enclosures: Appendix; A Plate 1 — Pit/Perc Location Map Plate 2 — Test Pit Logs Plate 3 — Test Results Larry Finley RCE 46606 STRATA-TEC H, I N C. U E O C O H E U L T A N T 5 APENDIX A Plot Plan, Boring Logs and Test Results Orr EMS•.IMIX 1162. Y1KMtLL _c5rIst mote 04, '',CmY AC Nlsa01n1�` ibr/1J tocalg.A, e ._ ... 1a : —la 6151 aSWIALL PRMRUSE AYE ENST 51115.9.56E Lora -Id SCALE: ` u o � J3 orlAi `Ent1 PABANCorl BENCH IAARK it 14. 105159 FLEV. 11105 1200)) ace 02 Inca sc 9., ) 2 Fl E\M &R n Y CORRF0 Immne AVE Me usrvli as OA. N]'KU 1 SS LOI Iu. SURVEYOR RE amok,. Ktd' 05,1]/IL ID IS TOPOGRAPHY SURVEY G4NSVLTAIYTS. Ya: PRIMROSE PARK TEMPLE CITY, CA SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-1 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E co cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description x x x x x x Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots — — 5 — _ 10- 15 — Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp End of boring at 5 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-2 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E 03 cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots 5 — 10- Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp Olive -gray , silt -sandy, trace of cay - — 15 — End of boring at 11 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. SUMMARY OF BORING NO. B-3 Date: 9/26/2019 Dry Density (Pcf) Moisture (% Dry Wt.) a) E cu cn U B Depth (Ft.) Description x Mulch, Lt-Brn Silt -sand and roots _ 5 — — — 10- 15 — Lt -olive -gray, Sand fn-med silty, damp Lt -gray, Sand, fn, clean, damp End of boring at 5 feet No water No caving Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation Primrose Park Temple City, California Work Order 288319 Plate No. STRATA - TECH, INC. Percolation Test Data Sheet Pro.ect: Ri lti,rea$2 Afek project No: Cot 2(.5e? 17. Date: G'Zc!-/7 Test Hobe No: 77,00 Tested By: /Z 4 Depth of Test Hole, I' ,: 1j5" USCS Soil Classification: S'/41 Test Hole Dimensions (inches; Length Width Diameter (if round)= j g it I Sides (if rectangular)= Sandy Soil Criteria Test' Trial No. Start Time Stop Time Time interval, (min.) Initial Depth to Water(in.) Final Depth to Water(in.) Change in Water Level (in.) Greater than or Equal to 6''? (y/n) 1 1 z:/ g 1Z: 3o (S— ig 33, s 157 Y 2 12:.31 lZ LR l eic7I /0 33.E _rte:'- Y 'if two consecutive measurements show that six inches of water seeps away in less than 25 minutes, the test shall be run for an additional hour with measurements taken every 10 minutes. Otherwise, pre-soak (fill) overnight. Obtain at least twelve measurements per hole over at leas: sx hours (approximately 30 minute intervals) with a precision of at least 0.25'. Trial No. StartTirne Stop Time t Time Interval (min.) D;; Initial Depth to Water(in.) Dt Final Depth to Water(in.) AP Change in Water Level (in.) Percolation Rate (min./in,) 1 /z: 5.0 l : o0 /0 270 '34'1.2 4 1 1. Z. o ,7-n 2 L e+ o f ! e /! ! 0 Z . 3510 ILI.0 O, i 3 ! : ! Z /. ; Z7 , ZZ 3 s"s 0 13.0 £2 4 1: 2 3 1 ' 3 ,/b,, - fry 21 25 / 3%5- .7.4. 0. y 5 /:3S i , 41i /0 2( 341.1 X1I5- l3,1 12,c d,7.6, & o 6 i:'j 1, 1 5-6, !b 1'J 7 _ ,. 8 9 r 10 . 11 12 13 14 15 COMMENTS: I — MCC oV) 1 Z- 640) - . 2 -7,5, 4 CV i- Z /Avg Percolation Test Data Sheet Project: 1,5'/ilia. iJN 4„ Pro;ect No: /44o jaz, I ?' Date; &"21/-14" Test I -tole No; He — L. Tes'ed By: f it Deot- of Test Hole, D. 4/13 1, USCS Soil Classification: %St Hole Dimersior:s (inches) lenbt" Width Diameter (if round)- I 8', . I sides (if ratlang,.lar}- Sandy Soil Criteria Test* Trial No. Start Time Sto Time `rime in`.erval, Imin.) Initial Depth to Water (in.) Final Depth to Wa:er(in.) Change in water ,.evel iin.) Greater tha- :v- Equal to 6'? iyJn) 1 i, r 5,2D /5— IS 33►1" ii; b--12/1,2/ �� 6I'3. /V' // /8 33,5-. /S +1f two consecutive minutes, tha Otherwise, six ho.rs (approximately -measurements show that .1k inches of water 'F ' away i' less test shall tie run 4or€tn acdmonal hour with meal-Jrerrants to<en ovary pre-soak (ft 1i overnight. Obtain at least twelve measurernerts per hole over 30 minute intervals) with a precision of at least 0.25'. Han 25 10 minutes. at least Trial No. StartTime Stop Time M Time Interval Imin.) D. ini•tal Depth to Water{in.) pt Final Depth to Watertin.) dD Change in water veilrn.) Percolation Rate (mtn.fin.) 1 9; /.9 9ri.ez. /0 2i Sy /Ai, Z. c :7o 2 `i�2.2. `1;32- /0 2/ -3S70 3 5, o /tlio /3. 0 d,7-/ , D,, ‘ 3 7; 3 ' ; 4'3 /Q z, 2— 4 47;gie/ ?; 'f /D ZZ- 35(5 /3, 0. ? -4- 5 9; SG /t';o( /0 z r -3v, / ,_0.--7y / ./ /O /6: l?. ID / ? 31,C /2,5- 0,94) 7 9 10 11 A - 12 33 14 15 CORM CNT5; e _ /.�/I (G o r) /z, L-. 90,d ^ 6. , 2. 4t c 4 z H;) /�'�'�� Plate: 4 Appendix 5, Hydrology Report DD HYDROLOGY VIP FLOW CALCULATIONS REPORT For: PRIMRSSE PARK City Project ID: XS -19-233 Prepared For: City of Temple City 9701 Las Tunas Drive Temple City, CA 91780 326.285.2171 Prepared By: DIM Consultants, inc. 12371 Lewis Street, Suite 203 Garden Grove, CA 92840 714.740.8840 PREPARED UN R THE SUPERVISION OF: Su end r M. Dewan, P.E. Date R.C.E 34559 EXP 9/31/21 October 21, 2020 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 2 2. HYDROLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS 3 2.1 Location 3 2.2 Existing Drainage Facilities 3 2.3 Proposed Drainage Facilities 3 2.4 Rainfall 3 2.5 Soil Properties 3 2.6 Land Use 3 2.7 Time of Concentration (Tc) 3 2.8 SUSMP 4 3. METHODOLOGY - HYDROLOGY 4 3.1 Proposed Condition 4 4. WATER QUALITY CALCULATIONS 4 5. REFERENCES 5 APPENDIX 1: HYDROLOGY CALCULATIONS 6 • EXISTING AND PROPOSED CONDITIONS APPENDIX 2: CATCH BASIN SIZING CALCULATIONS 9 APPENDIX 3: HYDROLOGY MAPS AND SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION 11 • EXISTING AND PROPOSED CONDITION HYDROLOGY MAPS • EL MONTE 50 -YEAR 24 -HOUR ISOHYET MAP • RUNOFF COEFFICIENT CURVE SOIL TYPE NO. 006 • STORM WATER QUALITY DESIGN CALCULATIONS • PROPORTION IMPERVIOUS DATA HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 1 1. INTRODUCTION Primrose Park includes improvements to an existing 1.01 acre park located in the City of Temple City, County of Los Angeles. The park is located on the southeast side of the intersection of Woodruff Avenue and Primrose Avenue approximately 130 feet south of intersection. VICINITY MAP NOT TO SCALE The purpose of this drainage concept report includes the following: 1. Establish hydrologic criteria and methodology to be used for this project and meet the City of Temple City requirements in accordance with the Los Angeles County Department of Public Works requirements. 2. Determine peak discharges and drainage patterns for pre and post -project conditions. 3. Determine peak discharges to determine proposed drainage improvements. 4. Determine runoff rate and volume of runoff to comply with MS4 permit requirements. HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 2 2. HYDROLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS 2.1 Location The project location is located in the City of Temple City, California. The project location is shown on the overall hydrology maps in Appendix 3. 2.2 Existing Drainage Facilities The project area currently is a parking lot and open space and outlets easterly to an alley. 2.3 Proposed Drainage Facilities The onsite drainage improvements will consist of inlets that will convey the flow and direct via proposed drainage pipes into a StormTech unit, overflow from the StormTech unit will outlet via a 12" diameter drain inlet located in the alley. This drain inlet is located on an existing storm drain which flows southerly. 2.4 Rainfall Based on rainfall isohyetal maps prepared by Los Angeles County Department of Public Works in Appendix B of the Hydrology Manual, the project area lies in the 6.9 -inch 50 - year 24 -hour isohyet. This rainfall depth was multiplied by the rainfall frequency factor of 0.878 to determine the 25 -year 24 -hour rainfall depth. The 25 -year 24 -hour rainfall depth is 6.058 -inches. The El Monte USGS quad panel 1-H1.20 is included in Appendix 3. 2.5 Soil Properties Soil types for Los Angeles County are found on the hydrological maps in Appendix B of the Hydrology Manual. The watershed for the project area consists of soil type 006. The El Monte USGS quad panel 1-H1.20 is included in Appendix 3. 2.6 Land Use The project area mainly consists of a park. 2.7 Time of Concentration (Tc) The Hydrocalc program developed by the Los Angeles County Department of Public Works was used to calculate Tc's and the peak flows of subareas for both existing and proposed conditions. Output from the Hydrocalc program are included in Appendix 3. HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 3 Using the LA County 85th percentile precipitation isohyet map, water quality design storm for the project was determined to be approx. 0.95 inch (85th percentile, 24 -hr rain event). Since it is greater than 0.75 inch, 24 -hr rain event, 0.95 inch, 24 -hr rain event is required to be treated. 2.8 SUSMP As required, the first 3/ -inches of rainfall are required to be treated. Installation of catch basin filters at all inlets will be installed to prevent pollutants from entering the storm water discharge system. 3. METHODOLOGY - HYDROLOGY This report is based on the methodology described in the Los Angeles County Department of Public Works Hydrology Manual. The drainage analyzed for this project is as follows: 3.1 Proposed Condition The project area is a proposed park. The proposed drainage is shown on the hydrology map for proposed conditions found in Appendix 2. Several area drains and onsite StormTech unit are proposed for the project. The runoff from the site will be directed through grading of the site and through storm drain pipes to a StormTech unit located at southeast corner of the project. Overflow from the StormTech unit will outlet via a 12" diameter drain inlet located in the alley. This drain inlet is located on an existing storm drain which flows southerly. 4. WATER QUALITY CALCULATIONS The project is defined as a designated project, since its size is greater than 1 acre and will be adding more than 10,000 square feet of impervious area. An infiltration study conducted by Strata -Tech, Inc. indicates that the soil has a design infiltration rate of 3.10 inches/hour. A StormTech unit manufactured by StromTech, Inc. has been used. This unit has been sized to carry the design flow. The calculations in the Appendix give the design flow rate and volume along with the storm water quality design flow rate and volume (SWQDv). The table below summarizes the design flow rate, volume and storm water quality design flow rate and design volume (SWQDv). HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 4 Table 1 - 25 Year Flow Rates Proposed Flow Rates SubArea Area Length Max Elev Min Elev Slope Flow Rate Burned Peak Flow Rate (acres) (ft) (ft) (ft) (cfs) (cfs) A 0.47 220 411.00 406.20 0.0218 1.5224 1.5224 B1 0.26 180 412.60 409.50 0.0172 0.8422 0.8422 B2 0.28 180 411.60 408.48 0.0172 0.9070 0.9070 Existing Flow Rates SubArea Area Length Max Elev Min Elev Slope Flow Rate Burned Peak Flow Rate (acres) (ft) (ft) (ft) (cfs) (cfs) A (Project Site) 1.01 300 413.75 409.00 0.0158 3.2716 3.2716 Table 2 - Stormwater Quality Design Flow Rates & Volume SubArea Area Length Max Min Slope Flow Design Volume Elev Elev Rate (acres) (ft) (ft) (ft) (cfs) (cu -ft) A (Project Site) 0.47 220 411.00 406.20 0.0218 0.1215 1189.48 B1 (Project Site) 0.26 180 412.60 409.50 0.0172 0.0802 729.16 B2 (Project Site) 0.28 180 411.60 408.48 0.0172 0.0863 785.25 Areas A, B1 and B2 drain via inlets and PVC drains to StormTech unit manufactured by StormTech, Inc. The table above gives the storm water quality design value of 2703.89 cu. ft. and flow rate of 0.288 cfs for the unit. 5. REFERENCES 1. Los Angeles County Department of Public Works, 2006 Hydrology Manual. 2. Hydrocalc Program, LA County. HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 5 APPENDIX 1 HYDROLOGY CALCULATIONS Existing Conditions Proposed Conditions HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 6 EXISTING CONDITIONS HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 7 Peak Flow Hydrologic Analysis File location: Z:/1 DMS/DavidVoltz/Primrose Park/PrimrosePark - AEx(25yr).pdf Version: HydroCalc 0.3.1 Input Parameters Project Name PrimrosePark Subarea ID A Area (ac) 1.01 Flow Path Length (ft) 300.0 Flow Path Slope (vft/hft) 0.0158 50-yr Rainfall Depth (in) 6.9 Percent Impervious 0.9 Soil Type 6 Design Storm Frequency 25-yr Fire Factor 0 LID False Output Results Modeled (25-yr) Rainfall Depth (in) Peak Intensity (in/hr) Undeveloped Runoff Coefficient (Cu) Developed Runoff Coefficient (Cd) Time of Concentration (min) Clear Peak Flow Rate (cfs) Burned Peak Flow Rate (cfs) 24 -Hr Clear Runoff Volume (ac -ft) 24 -Hr Clear Runoff Volume (cu -ft) 6.0582 3.6145 0.8618 0.8962 5.0 3.2716 3.2716 0.4206 18322.4441 U O 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 Hydrograph (PrimrosePark: A) 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 Time (minutes) 1400 1600 PROPOSED CONDITIONS HYDROLOGY REPORT Page 8 Peak Flow Hydrologic Analysis File location: Z:/1 DMS/DavidVoltz/Primrose Park/PrimrosePark - APr(25yr).pdf Version: HydroCalc 0.3.1 Input Parameters Project Name PrimrosePark Subarea ID A Area (ac) 0.47 Flow Path Length (ft) 220.0 Flow Path Slope (vft/hft) 0.0218 50-yr Rainfall Depth (in) 6.9 Percent Impervious 0.9 Soil Type 6 Design Storm Frequency 25-yr Fire Factor 0 LID False Output Results Modeled (25-yr) Rainfall Depth (in) Peak Intensity (in/hr) Undeveloped Runoff Coefficient (Cu) Developed Runoff Coefficient (Cd) Time of Concentration (min) Clear Peak Flow Rate (cfs) Burned Peak Flow Rate (cfs) 24 -Hr Clear Runoff Volume (ac -ft) 24 -Hr Clear Runoff Volume (cu -ft) 6.0582 3.6145 0.8618 0.8962 5.0 1.5224 1.5224 0.1957 8526.2859 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0 30 8 0 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.0 Hydrograph (PrimrosePark: A) 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 Time (minutes) 1 1400 1600 PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK HYDROLOGY PLAN EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK HYDROLOGY PLAN PROPOSED CONDITIONS Appendix 6, SUSMP Report PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK SUSMP PLAN GENERAL GRADING NOTES PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 1 PLAN CHECK 1 NC SD 11/06/20 1 00067 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS1 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00065 1 00066 00064 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS1 00063 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS1 1 1 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00061 00062 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00059 1 00080 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS1 PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK GRADING PLAN APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 11/06/20SDNCPLAN CHECK 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00073 1 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00071 00072 00071 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS 1 00070 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS 1 00070 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING PLAN APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 11/06/20SDNCPLAN CHECK 11 1 1 1 1 1 00074 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS 1 SUMP DEPTH TBD BY SITE DESIGN ENGINEER (24" MIN RECOMMENDED) MC-3500 ISOLATOR ROW DETAIL 18" MIN WIDTH CONCRETE SLAB 8" MIN THICKNESS MC-3500 6" INSPECTION PORT DETAIL 20 BEAVER ROAD, SUITE 104 WETHERSFIELD, CT 06109 PHONE: 888-892-2694 FAX: 866-328-8401 WWW.STORMTECH.COM PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING DETAILS 11/06/20SDNCPLAN CHECK 11 1 1 1 1 PLAN CHECK COMMENTS ADDRESSED: 00080 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING DETAILS 11/06/20SDNCPLAN CHECK 11 1 1 00075 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK HYDROLOGY PLAN EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK HYDROLOGY PLAN PROPOSED CONDITIONS Appendix 7, Bond Act Sign Appendix 8, Project Plans BOUNDARY / TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY PLOT PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK DEMOLITION PLAN PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 1. NO EQUIPMENT IS TO BE OPERATED OR PARKED UNDER A TREE, NOR ARE ANY MATERIALS TO BE STORED WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OF A TREE. 2. NO SURFACE IRRIGATION SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN THE DRIPLINE OF A TREE. 4. NO CHEMICAL HERBICIDES ARE TO BE USED WITHIN 100 FT. OF TREE'S DRIPLINE. 5. DO NOT NAIL GRADE STAKES OR ANYTHING ELSE TO TREES. 6. AVOID ANY PONDING BY DRAINING LOW POINTS 7. PRIOR TO GRADING, INSTALL FENCES AND BARRICADES AROUND TREE. 8. FERTILIZE WATER TO MINIMIZE SHOCK AS DIRECTED BY QUALIFIED ARBORIST. 9. PROVIDE ADEQUATE RETAINING WALL AS NEEDED, NO CLOSER THAN DRIP LINE. LARGE AMOUNTS OF FILL WILL INHIBIT DELICATE BALANCE BETWEEN ROOTS AND SOIL. TYPICAL WORK PROCEDURES 1. ALL WORK WITHIN THE TREES ROOT ZONE SHALL BE OBSERVED BY THE ARBORIST AS NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. PRUNING MAY BE NECESSARY TO FACILITATE REMOVAL OF DEAD WOOD, CONFLICT WITH NEW STRUCTURE, OR REDUCE STRESS AND SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED ARBORIST. BORING OF UTILITY LINES IS LESS DAMAGING TO TREES THAN TRENCHING. WHEN EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING ADJACENT DRIPLINES, APPROVAL OF CITY ARBORIST IS REQUIRED. 1.CUT AS FEW ROOTS AS POSSIBLE AND CUT THEM CLEAN. 2.PAINT CUT ROOTS WITH APPROVED DRESSING. 3.BACKFILL AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO AVOID ROOTS FROM DRYING.DRIP LINEDRIP LINEFENCE TYP. FENCE THE PERIMETER OF DRIP LINE WITH 6' HIGH CHAIN LINK FENCE OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2. THE EXTENT OF ALL WORK AFFECTING EXISTING TREES TO SHALL BE STAKED BY FIELD SURVEY AND REVIEWED WITH THE REMAIN SHALL BE STAKED BY FIELD SURVEY AND REVIEWED WITH THE ARBORIST. 3. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COSTS TO PROVIDE PROFESSIONAL TREE PRUNING SERVICES FOR FOURTEEN (14) TREES THAT ARE IDENTIFIED ON THESE PLANS. THE TREES SHALL BE PRUNED IN A MANNER THAT MAINTAINS AND/OR ENHANCES THE TREE'S NATURAL FORM. THE TREE PRUNING SERVICES SHALL BE OVERSEEN AND DIRECTED BY A CALIFORNIA CERTIFIED ARBORIST. 4. HAND DIG VERTICAL TRENCH AT THE FINAL CUT LINE TO FINAL GRADE AND CLEANLY CUT ANY ROOTS ENCOUNTERED AND SEAL WITH APPROVED TREE SEAL. (THIS PROCEDURE WILL PROTECT THE ROOT SYSTEM FROM UNNECESSARY DAMAGE BY EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT.) 5. A SIX (6) FOOT HIGH CHAIN LINK FENCE OR APPROVED ALTERNATE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO PROTECT THE TREES FROM DAMAGE AND REMAIN IN PLACE UNTIL COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION. 6. THE AREA WITHIN THE FENCE SHALL NOT BE USED FOR MATERIAL STORAGE, EQUIPMENT STORAGE, OR PARKING DURING CONSTRUCTION. 7. DURING CONSTRUCTION, TREES SHALL BE CLOSELY MONITORED TO MITIGATE SHOCK SYMPTOMS IF THEY OCCUR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY DEEP WATER TO IRRIGATE AND WASH THE DUST FROM FOLIAGE IF NEEDED. 8. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROTECT THE IDENTIFIED TREES AND TO PROVIDE THE NECESSARY TREE CARE & MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING WATERING, DURING CONSTRUCTION. ROOT PRUNING WILL NOT BE PERMITTED UNLESS APPROVED BY THE CITY AND THE ACTION IS TAKEN ONLY WHEN THE CITY REPRESENTATIVE IS PRESENT. APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 DEMOLITION PLAN PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE (TO BE DECIDED IN CONSULTATION WITH THE CITY) * (SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET) CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS SEE DETAILS ON SHEET EC.2 EROSION CONTROL PLAN PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 NOT A CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE NOT A CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE ENTRANCE NOT A CONSTRUCTIONNOT A CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCEGRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ SILT FENCE GRAVEL BAG/ GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS GRAVEL BAGS EROSION CONTROL PLAN PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 GENERAL GRADING NOTES PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 PRIMROSE PARK GRADING PLAN APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 00071 ADDRESSED: PLAN CHECK COMMENTS 1 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING PLAN APN (ASSESSOR'S PARCEL NUMBER) : POR. 8587-014-901, 8587-014-904 & 8587-014-905 SUMP DEPTH TBD BY SITE DESIGN ENGINEER (24" MIN RECOMMENDED) MC-3500 ISOLATOR ROW DETAIL 18" MIN WIDTH CONCRETE SLAB 8" MIN THICKNESS MC-3500 6" INSPECTION PORT DETAIL 20 BEAVER ROAD, SUITE 104 WETHERSFIELD, CT 06109 PHONE: 888-892-2694 FAX: 866-328-8401 WWW.STORMTECH.COM PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING DETAILS PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 GRADING DETAILS 9 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A1.0 ALL GENDER ALL GENDER PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A2.0 DOOR SCHEDULE LEGENDNOTESRESTROOM ADA SIGNS HARDWARE GROUPS FLOOR SURFACESWALL SURFACESCEILING SURFACES BASE MATERIAL PAINTING NOTES PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A3.0 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A3.1 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A4.0 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A5.0 36"11-1/4" 9-1/4" 39-3/8" RUBEROID / GAFGLAS WALL FLASHING PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A6.0 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 67A6.1 . 811 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 DWV Plan - Roof Plan - Water Supply Plan - Water Supply Riser - DWV Riser - Water Hammer Arrestor Detail Single Lavatory Piping Detail Exterior Cleanout to Grade Detail - - 811 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 POWER LEGEND AND SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION +96" OR 7'-6" AFF MOUNTING HEIGHT FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO BOTTOM LINE OF OUTLET OR EQUIPMENT. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES, IT IS TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE. MAIN SWITCHBOARD, POWER OR LIGHT, FLOOR STANDING ENCLOSURE, (SEE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND LOAD SUMMARY) BRANCH PANELBOARD, WALL MOUNTED, SEE PLANS AND SCHEDULE. (RECESSED MOUNTED) BRANCH PANELBOARD, WALL MOUNTED, SEE PLANS AND SCHEDULE. (SURFACE MOUNTED) DISCONNECT SWITCH H.P. RATED 600 VOLTS RATED. "F" INDICATES FUSE TYPE. FUSES PER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS SHOP DRAWINGS. OR EQUIPMENT ID. No. SHEET No. DETAIL No. EQUIPMENT REFERENCE DETAIL REFERENCE ABOVE CEILING, CONCEALED, JUNCTION BOX, WITH COVER, PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) TABLE 314.16(A)/(B), 4" SQUARE DEEP, WITH PLASTER RING. RECESSED WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX, WITH COVER, PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) TABLE 314.16(A)/(B), 4" SQUARE DEEP, WITH PLASTER RING. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS, GFCI TYPE) WITH MOUNTING HEIGHT HORIZONTALLY ABOVE COUNTER TOP PER ARCHITECTURAL PLANS OR APPROVAL. DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS, GFCI TYPE) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N. WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER GROUNDING CONNECTION AT SWITCHGEAR/DISTRIBUTION BOARD WITH NEUTRAL BONDING. UTILITY COMPANY PULL SECTION LUGS G N GROUNDING CONNECTION TO MAIN BUILDING GROUND SYSTEM U.O.N. EXISTING (DASH INDICATES) ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TELEPHONE BACKBOARD 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 2 #12 & 1 #12 GND WIRES UON 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 3 #12 & 1 #12 GND WIRES UON 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 4 #12 & 1 #12 GND WIRES UON 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 5 #12 & 1 #12 GND WIRES UON 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 2 #10 & 1 #10 GND WIRES (#10 INDICATING WIRE SIZE) 3/4" CONDUIT WITH 3 #10 & 1 #10 GND WIRES (#10 INDICATING WIRE SIZE) CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING #10 #10 A-1,3 IN-LINE UTILITY COMPANY METER UTILITY METER WITH CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS (CT'S) METER WP GROUND WELL 200-B CONDUIT WIRING DESCRIPTION PER FEEDER SCHEDULE ON OTHER PLAN CONCRETE ELECTRICAL PULL BOX WITH LID APPROPRIATE FOR INSTALLATION LOCATION. LID SHALL BE LABELED "ELECTRICAL" OR "COMM" ACCORDING TO USE. SWITCH, SINGLE POLE 20A. MOUNTED 48" A.F.F. TO TOP OF DEVICE. SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE THE FOLLOWING: M - MOTOR RATED K - KEY OPERATED 3 - THREE WAY D - DIMMER SWITCH 4 - FOUR WAY T - TIMED SWITCH a, b, c, ETC. - DESIGNATES SWITCH-LEGS CONTROLLED AND QUANTITY OF SWITCHES AT EACH LOCATION. ROUND DUAL-HEAD POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH ELECTRONIC DRIVER. ROUND SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH ELECTRONIC DRIVER. FN INDICATES LUMINAIRE TYPE - REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, TYPICAL. SUBSCRIPT 2AB REFERS TO CIRCUIT AND LIGHTING ZONE AB DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSOR, SURFACE WALL MOUNTED 180° U.O.N. LEVITON MODEL #OSSMT-GD (FOR SINGLE POLE SWITCHING) & LEVITON MODEL #OSSMD-GD FOR (DUAL SWITCHING) LIGHTING LEGEND AND SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FN AB ABBREVIATIONS A AMPERE AF AMPERE FRAME RATING (CIRCUIT BREAKER) AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AFU AMPERE FUSE RATING (FUSE) AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AS AMPERE SWITCH RATING (FUSE) AT AMPERE TRIP RATING (CIRCUIT BREAKER) AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE BKBD BACKBOARD BLDG BUILDING BKR BREAKER C CONDUIT CB CIRCUIT BREAKER CKT CIRCUIT CFSD COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPER CO CONDUIT ONLY CONC CONCRETE CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER CU COPPER CL CENTERLINE DISC DISCONNECT DSBN DISTRIBUTION SECTION DN DOWN DWG DRAWING EA EACH EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EM EMERGENCY EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EXIST, (E)EXISTING EXO EXTERNAL OPERABLE DISCONNECT F FUSE FA FIRE ALARM FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FF FINISHED FLOOR FG FINISHED GRADE FLA FULL LOAD CURRENT FLUOR FLUORESCENT GEN GENERATOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GFP GROUND FAULT PROTECTION GND GROUND HOA HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC HP HORSE POWER HV HIGH VOLTAGE IDF INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION FRAME IG ISOLATED/INSULATED GROUND INCAND INCANDESCENT ISC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AVAILABLE IN RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES J-BOX JUNCTION BOX KCMIL THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS KW KILOWATT KV KILO VOLT KVA KILO VOLT-AMPERE LDC LOCAL DISTRIBUTION CABINET LDF LOCAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME LCL LONG CONTINUOUS LOAD LTG LIGHTING LV LOW VOLTAGE MFR MANUFACTURER MAX MAXIMUM MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MIN MINIMUM MH MANHOLE / METAL HALIDE M/M METER AND MAIN SECTION MULTI MULTI-METER SECTION MV MEDIUM VOLTAGE NC NORMALLY CLOSED NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION NEW (N)NEW, TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR NF NON-FUSED NIC NOT IN CONTRACT N/L NIGHT LIGHT NO NUMBER, NORMALLY OPEN NTS NOT TO SCALE OC ON CENTER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER P POLE PB PULL BOX PF POWER FACTOR PNL PANEL POC POINT OF CONNECTION PP POWER POLE PWR POWER PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE QUAD QUADRUPLEX QTY QUANTITY REQD REQUIRED REQMT REQUIREMENT RGS RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL RMC RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT RM ROOM RNC RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT SHT SHEET SN SOLID NEUTRAL SPEC SPECIFICATIONS SPDT SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW SPST SINGLE POLE, SINGLE THROW SW SWITCH SWBD SWITCHBOARD TC TIME CLOCK TEL TELEPHONE TERM TERMINAL TP TEMPORARY POLE TYP TYPICAL UGPS UNDERGROUND PULL SECTION UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED V VOLT, VOLTAGE VA VOLT-AMPERE VFC VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE W WATT WH WATT-HOUR WP WEATHERPROOF WT WEATHERTIGHT WW WIREWAY XP EXPLOSION PROOF Z IMPEDANCE 4W FOUR-WIRE 3W THREE-WIRE 5S JUNCTION BOX (4 11/16" SQUARED X2 1/8" DEEP) Ø DIAMETER, PHASE #NUMBER °C DEGREE CELSIUS (E)EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN (R)REMOVE EXISTING DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND WIRE (RL)REMOVE EXISTING DEVICE AND RELOCATE AS SHOWN ON PLAN (NL)NEW LOCATION OF RELOCATED DEVICE APPLICABLE CODES 1.ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR), NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE EDITION AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS. 2.ALL PANELS, SWITCHES, ETC. SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT GUTTER SPACE AND LUGS IN COMPLIANCE TO UL REQUIREMENTS TO ACCOMMODATE CONDUCTORS SHOWN. 3.WHERE WIRE SIZES ARE INDICATED ON PLANS, FOR INDIVIDUAL CIRCUITS, THE WIRE SIZE INDICATED SHALL APPLY TO THE COMPLETE CIRCUIT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4.CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF PLUMBING AND OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRIOR TO ANY WORK. 5.CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND WIRING FROM ALL JUNCTION BOXES, SWITCHES, ETC. AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION AS REQUIRED TO ALL BUILDING EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. 6.LOCATION OF LOCAL WALL SWITCHES ARE SUBJECT TO MODIFICATIONS. AT OR NEAR DOORS, INSTALL SWITCHES ON SIDE OPPOSITE TO DOOR HINGE. VERIFY FINAL HINGE LOCATION IN FIELD PRIOR TO ANY WORK. 7.DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF SYSTEMS AND WORK INCLUDED. FOLLOW DRAWINGS IN LAYING OUT WORK AND CHECK DRAWINGS OR OTHER TRADES RELATING TO WORK TO VERIFY SPACE IN WHICH WORK WILL BE INSTALLED. MAINTAIN HEADROOM AND MINIMUM CODE REQUIRED WORKING CLEARANCES AT ALL TIMES. 8.CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF ALL WALL OUTLET BOXES FOR SWITCHES, BELL/STROBES, FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS. RECEPTACLES ETC. WITH CABINETS, FURNITURE, EQUIPMENT ETC., TO AVOID CONFLICT. 9.FURNISH APPROVED EXPANSION FITTINGS WHERE RACEWAY CROSSES BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS. 10.FURNISH PULL STRING IN EACH RACEWAY RUN OVER 10' IN LENGTH, IN WHICH PERMANENT WIRING IS NOT INSTALLED. 11.NOT MORE THAN THREE LIGHTING OR CONVENIENCE OUTLET CIRCUITS ARE PERMITTED IN ONE CONDUIT, PROVIDE SEPARATE CONDUIT FOR EACH HOMERUN INDICATED ON THE DRAWING, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. 12.PROVIDE PULL BOXES WHEREVER NECESSARY TO FACILITATE PULLING OF CONDUCTORS. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF BOXES WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICT. PULL BOXES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. THE SIZE OF PULL BOX SHALL COMPLY WITH N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS. 13.OUTLET BOXES FOR FIXTURES RECESSED IN HUNG CEILING SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE THROUGH OPENING CREATED BY REMOVAL OF FIXTURES. 14.SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS TO CONTROL PANELS, CONTROL TRANSFORMERS, POWER FOR CONTROL SYSTEM EP AND PE SWITCHES, TIME CLOCKS, VALVES, STATS, RELAYS, DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATIONS, ETC. INDICATED ON CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY FINAL CONTROL WIRING REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO ANY WORK AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY DEVICES AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED. 15.ALL EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT INCLUDING THOSE THAT ARE EXPOSED TO OUTSIDE ENVIRONMENT (UP TO 16') SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF TYPE, NEMA 3R. 16.NO CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE ALLOWED IN CONCRETE SLABS. ALL CONDUITS WILL BE PLACED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACES UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE UNDERGROUND. 17.LIGHTING, POWER, TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS SHALL NOT BE PLACED BACK-TO-BACK. 18.ALL ELECTRICAL POWER LIGHTING, TELEPHONE OR SIGNAL WIRING IN FIRE RATED WALL IS TO BE INSTALLED IN A METALLIC CONDUIT SYSTEM. 19.ALL ELECTRIC MATERIAL SHALL BE LISTED BY "UL" FOR THE TYPE OF APPLICATION AND "UL" LABEL SHALL APPEAR ON ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 20.ALL DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (SUCH AS CB's, SWITCHES, CONTACTORS, ETC.), TERMINATIONS SHALL BE FULLY RATED PER UL AS FOLLOWS: a. 125A OR LESS : 60°C OR MORE; b. MORE THAN 125A : 75°C OR MORE. 21.ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR DESIGN DISCREPANCIES ON PLANS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER FOR CLARIFICATION OR CORRECTION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND PREPARATION OF SUBMITTAL PACKAGES. 22.CONDUCTORS SHALL HAVE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC.(UL) LISTED, 600 VOLT INSULATION OF TYPE SPECIFIED BELOW OR ELSEWHERE IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COPPER. 1. BRANCH CIRCUITS - LIGHTING AND POWER. a. #10 AWG AND SMALLER, SOLID WIRE TYPE THW OR THHN/THWN, THHW(THHN FOR DRY LOCATION ONLY). b. #8 AWG TO #2 AWG, STRANDED TYPE THW OR THHN/THHW. c. #1 AWG AND LARGER, STRANDED TYPE XHHW. 2. FEEDERS : TYPE THW OR THHN/THWN, OR XHHW. 23.PROVIDE GREEN INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN EACH RACEWAY INCLUDING CONDUITS, PLUG STRIPS, WIREMOLD. SIZE OF GROUNDING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE ARTICLE 250. 24.WIRING METHOD SHALL BE EMT ABOVE GROUND AND MOUNTED IN CONCEALED SPACES AND SCHEDULE-40 PVC FOR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION. USE RIGID WHEN ENCASED IN CONCRETE OR SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE. 25.ALL SWITCH LOCATIONS ARE REQUIRED TO HAVE A NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR PROVIDED AT THE SWITCH LOCATION PER CEC 404.2(C). 26.UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, SHARING OF NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTORS AMONG SINGLE PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS OF DIFFERENT PHASES INSTALLED IN THE SAME RACEWAY IS NOT PERMITTED. PROVIDE DEDICATED NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTOR FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL BRANCH CIRCUIT. GENERAL NOTES 1.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES BUILDING CODE (TITLE 26). 2.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES ELECTRICAL CODE (TITLE 27) 3.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES PLUMBING CODE (TITLE 29) 4.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES MECHANICAL CODE (TITLE 29) 5.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS CODE (TITLE 31) 6.2020 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES EXISTING BUILDING CODE (TITLE 33) 7.2019 BUILDING STANDARDS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, PART 1, TITLE 24 C.C.R. 8.2019 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, PART 9, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (IFC WITH AMENDMENTS) 9.2019 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS, PART 12, TITLE 24 C.C.R. 10.2019 TITLE 19 C.C.R., PUBLIC SAFETY, STATE FIRE MARSHAL REGULATIONS. 11.2019 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE (PART 6, TITLE 24 C.C.R.) NOTE TO CONTRACTOR DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY PLANS AND EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS ON THE JOB SITE AND SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK OR BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAME. RACEWAY CONCEALED IN WALLS OR ABOVE CEILING, 3/4" UON CONDUIT CONCEALED IN OR UNDER FLOOR, 3/4" UON, COORDINATE WITH G.C.: OR, BURIAL CONDUIT UNDERGROUND IN SCHEDULE - 40 PVC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. VERIFY DEPTH AND TRENCHING WITH G.C. 3/4" UON HOMERUN TO CIRCUITS #1 AND #3 IN PANEL "A". (CROSSMARKS INDICATE NUMBER OF PHASES AND NEUTRAL. PROVIDE GROUND WIRE.) 4' LED WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE WITH DIMMING DRIVER. OUTDOOR WALL PACK LED FIXTURE WITH ELECTRONIC DRIVER. PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 SHEET INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE E1.0 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS & NOTES E1.1 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE E1.2 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM & PANEL SCHEDULE E2.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E2.1 SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN E3.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E4.1 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - INDOOR E4.2 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - OUTDOOR ELECTRICAL LEGENDS & NOTES 8 61E1.0 COMMENT 00001 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE NOTES LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE TYPE VOLTS WATTAGE LAMPS FIXTURE DESCRIPTION MFR.CATALOG #MOUNTING SYMBOLNOTESLUMENS 1.EQUALS SHALL BE CONSIDERED UPON SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL. PLEASE NOTE THAT IF AN ALTERNATE IS CONSIDERED: a.THE CONTRACTOR IS COMPLETELY AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL ASPECTS OF THE SUBSTITUTION INCLUDING UPDATING CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OBTAINING APPROVALS AND PERMITS FROM LOCAL AUTHORITY, AND COORDINATING WITH ALL TRADES TO ENSURE CHANGES TO AFFECTED BUILDING SYSTEM ARE ACCOUNTED FOR AND ACCEPTABLE TO THE ENGINEERING TEAM. CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT MEETS OR EXCEEDS DESIGN INTENT REGARDING RATINGS, PERFORMANCE, DIMENSIONAL CLEARANCES, PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS (MAX/MIN), WEIGHT LIMITATIONS, AND OTHER ASPECTS, PROVING SUBSTITUTION IS SUITABLE TO THE APPLICATION. ENGINEERS WILL REVIEW THE RATING AND PERFORMANCE OF SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT ONLY AND WILL NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBSTITUTION AT ANY LEVEL. b.IF CONTRACTOR CANNOT MAKE SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT WORK IN THIS PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVERT TO REQUIREMENTS OF PERMITTED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THEIR EXPENSE. c.IT IS UNDERSTOOD BY ALL PARTIES THAT ANY SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS ARE DONE FOR THE PURPOSE OF COST SAVINGS TO THE OWNER. THEREFORE, ANY MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION OR DEVIATIONS PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE INCLUDED WITH THE INITIAL BID AND SHALL SHOW A LINE ITEMS CREDIT TO THE OWNER FOR EACH SUBSTITUTION IN LIEU OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS. 2.THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE INDICATES GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES AND MANUFACTURERS CATALOG NUMBERS. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT CEILING CONFIGURATION AND PROVIDE THE FIXTURES WITH ALL NECESSARY TRIMS AND MOUNTING HARDWARE SO THAT BOTH THE CEILING SYSTEM AND THE FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION MATCHES. PROVIDE SEISMIC HANGERS AS REQUIRED. 3.IT SHALL BE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND TYPE OF CEILING WITH ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PRIOR TO ANY WORK. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PRIOR TO ANY WORK. SEE ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION DRAWING FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES. 4.A COMPLETE TITLE 24 COMPLIANT LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED TO CONTROL ALL INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS. REFER TO LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAMS, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS. 5.PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE ANCHORAGE AND SUPPORTS TO INSTALL LIGHTING FIXTURES. 6.PROVIDE SWIVEL BASE AND STEMS. LENGTHS AS REQUIRED TO MOUNT THE PENDANT MOUNTED FIXTURES. THE INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH TITLE 24 SEISMIC AND APPLICABLE UBC REQUIREMENTS. 7.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE LIGHTING SYSTEM AS PART OF THIS BUILDING CONTRACT. 8.FOR SUSPENDED AND SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES, THE PRODUCT OF ICP NEED NOT EXCEED 12 FOR ANY VALUE OF 1. 9.IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THAT THE FIXTURE BALLAST OR DRIVER VOLTAGE MATCHES THE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE SUPPLYING FIXTURE PRIOR TO ORDERING. 10.IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY BALLAST/DRIVER DIMMING CONFIGURATION IS COMPATIBLE WITH CONTROLS BEING PROVIDED PRIOR TO ORDERING FIXTURES. EX. 2 WIRE, 3 WIRE, 4 WIRE, 0-10V, CAT 5, ETC. 11.LED LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH IES, NFPA, UL, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, AND AS SPECIFIED. 12.LED LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE REDUCTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES (ROHS)-COMPLIANT. 13.LED DRIVERS SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: ·MINIMUM EFFICIENCY: 85% AT FULL LOAD. ·MINIMUM OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: -20 DEG C. (-4 DEG F.) ·INPUT VOLTAGE: 120 - 277V (±10%) AT 60 HZ., UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ·INTEGRAL SHORT CIRCUIT, OPEN CIRCUIT, AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION. ·POWER FACTOR: >=0.95. ·TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION: <=20%. ·COMPLY WITH FCC 47 CFR PART 15. 14.LED MODULES SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED: ·COMPLY WITH IES LM-79 AND LM-80 REQUIREMENTS. ·MINIMUM CRI 80 AND COLOR TEMPERATURE 4000K UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE. ·MINIMUM RATED LIFE: 50,000 HOURS PER IES L70. ·LIGHT OUTPUT LUMENS AS INDICATED IN THE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE. 15.ALL FIXTURES MOUNTED OUTDOORS SHALL BE UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATION. 240S2 50 ROUND SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH TYPE 3 OPTICS, ELECTRONIC DRIVER AND INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR. MOUNTED AT 12'-0" A.F.G. SOLERALED 4000K SCSD-50W-5136LM- 4000K-UNV-ER3- CPL-TY3-MS-BL POLE: RPSQ-12-4-11-D1 POLE5,136 COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS ECLIPSE 574-WM-SPL-LED40- 35K-80CRI-UNV-BZ- -D7A COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT 4' VANDAL RESISTANT WALL MOUNTED LED FIXTURE WITH 0-10V DIMMING DRIVER. MOUNTED AT 8'-6" A.F.F. 120F1 40 LED 3500K SURFACE4,961 120F2 29 1,460 LED 4000K SURFACE KENALL MLAS826-SQR- PP-25L40K-DCC-DV VANDAL RESISTANT WALL PACK LED FIXTURE WITH ELECTRONIC DRIVER. MOUNTED AT 8'-6" A.F.F. 240S3 220 ROUND DUAL-HEAD POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH TYPE 3 OPTICS, ELECTRONIC DRIVER AND INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR. MOUNTED AT 18'-0" A.F.G. SOLERALED 4000K SCSD-110W-12,000LM- 4000K-UNV-ER3- CPL-TY3-MS-BL POLE:RPSQ-18-4- D2@180 POLE24,000 COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT B2-U0-G3 240S1 110 ROUND SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH TYPE 3 OPTICS, ELECTRONIC DRIVER AND INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR. MOUNTED AT 18'-0" A.F.G. SOLERALED 4000K SCSD-110W-12,000LM- 4000K-UNV-ER3- CPL-TY3-MS-BL POLE: RPSQ-18-4-11-D1 POLE12,000 COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT B2-U0-G3 120S4 120S5 120S6 120S7 LIGMAN TA-31882-T4- T4-W30-12075.6 4,982 LED 4000K SURFACE CYLINDRICAL UP/DOWNLIGHT VANDAL RESISTANT LED FIXTURE WITH ASYMMETRICAL UPLIGHT. MOUNTED AT 8'-0" A.F.F. 120S8 LIGMAN UALD-30091-24W-LED- N-W40-120-ADJ3242,127 LED 4000K SURFACE 39" WIDE VANDAL RESISTANT LED FLOODLIGHT FIXTURE. MOUNTED AT 7'-0" A.F.F. ELLIPTIPAR S151-R06G-H2FT-M- 0-840-00120S9202,398 LED 4000K SURFACE 72" WIDE SIGNAGE LED LIGHT FIXTURE. MOUNTED AT ??? A.F.F. 20 2,591 LED 4000K IN-GRADE LIGMAN UKWH-30001-20W- T2-W40-120 12 1,036 LED 4000K IN-GRADE IN-GRADE FLUSH FRAME VANDAL RESISTANT LED FLOODLIGHT FIXTURE.LIGMAN UKI-60741-12W-M- W40-120 ALPHABET 624-RD-SW-13LM-40K- 80-WH50-UNV-10V-NC10875LED 4000K RECESSED 2" WET LOCATION LED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE WITH 0-10V DIMMING DRIVER. IN-GRADE VANDAL RESISTANT LED FLOODLIGHT FIXTURE. 120S10 11 1,068 LED 4000K RECESSED LIGMAN UBOH-60013-11W- M-W40-120UNDERWATER LED PROJECTOR FIXTURE. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL DETAIL 1 GENERAL NOTES 1.PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM AS SHOWN. CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, SWITCHES, OCCUPANCY SENSORS, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE AND TITLE 24 APPROVED CERTIFICATION. 2.THE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF A LOCAL DATALINE FROM EACH PANEL 1600ft USING FREE TOPOLOGY WITHOUT A REPEATER. 3.CABLE RUNS ARE CONTINUOUS BETWEEN CONNECTED DEVICES, NO SPLICING ALLOWED. 4.PHOTOCELLS LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. LOAD(d) PARKING LOT (SEE PLANS FOR QTY) LOAD(c) PARK (SEE PLANS FOR QTY) LOAD(b) PARK (SEE PLANS FOR QTY) LOAD(a) PARK (SEE PLANS FOR QTY) TO BREAKER PANEL TO BREAKER PANEL HOT NEUT HOT A HOT BARP LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL HOT NEUT GND PS50 POWER SUPPLY LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD LINE LOAD2-POLE RELAYRELAYRELAYRELAYRELAYRELAYRELAYRELAY DRIVER CARDPHOTOCELL INPUT STATUS SCODE 0-10V DIMMINGOUTPUTS #1-88 RELAY ENCLOSURE SHOWN 0-10V DIMMING OUTPUTS TERMINAL BLOCKS #1-8 ONE JUMPER BINDS TWO ADJOINING RELAYS AS A TWO POLE UNIT LABEL CLIP BRIDGING CLIP REQUIRED TO INTERLOCK SWITCH TOGGLE MECHANISM nLIGHT INTERFACE CARD RJ45 RJ45 ZONE & RELAY SCHEDULE 2 WALL OCCUPANCY SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAM3 -4 -5 120F3 ECLIPSE 574-WM-SPL-LED20- 35K-80CRI-UNV-BZ- -D7A COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT 4' VANDAL RESISTANT WALL MOUNTED LED FIXTURE WITH 0-10V DIMMING DRIVER. MOUNTED AT 8'-6" A.F.F. 20 LED 3500K SURFACE2481 FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS HOT BLK RED LOAD 2 LOAD 1 NEUTRAL BLU RED DUAL RELAY OCCUPANCY SENSOR GROUND S11 120 ELLIPTIPARSURFACELED 4000K S170-M028-X-M- 0-840-00-ASP-S201,78916 POST-MOUNTED LED UPLIGHT FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL DRIVER. COORDINATE COLOR OF FINISH WITH ARCHITECT FIXTURE IS LESS THAN 6,200 LUMENS PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 1 PLAN CHECK 1 JM BB 11/06/2020 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE 8 62E1.1 GENERAL NOTES CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 2 PROVIDE NEW ELECTRICAL SERVICE AS SHOWN.1 3POLE LIGHTING VOLTAGE DROP CALCS. 4FEEDER SCHEDULES 1.REFER TO 'GENERAL NOTES' ON ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND NOTES SHEET FOR WIRING METHODS, MATERIALS, AND REQUIREMENTS. 2.ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND PANELBOARDS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. 3.ALL GROUND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CADWELD. 4.ALL PANELBOARDS SHALL BE FULLY RATED FOR THE AVAILABLE FAULT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5.THE FEEDER LENGTHS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE FOR CALCULATION PURPOSES ONLY AND ARE NOT VALID FOR BIDDING. 6.NEW SERVICE EQUIPMENT, AT OTHER THAN DWELLING, UNITS SHALL BE LEGIBLY MARKED IN THE FIELD WITH THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT PER CEC 110.24(A). THE FIELD MARKING(S) SHALL INCLUDE THE DATE THE FAULT-CURRENT CALCULATION WAS PERFORMED AND BE OF SUFFICIENT DURABILITY TO WITHSTAND THE ENVIRONMENT INVOLVED. THE CALCULATION SHALL BE DOCUMENTED AND MADE AVAILABLE TO THOSE AUTHORIZED TO DESIGN, INSTALL, INSPECT, MAINTAIN, OR OPERATE THE SYSTEM. 7.EQUIPMENT DATA AND CONFIGURATIONS SHOWN ON THE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PROVIDE GENERAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATED DESIGN INFORMATION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DESCRIPTIONS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TO BE PRESENTED TO THE ENGINEER OF RECORD PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THE BID PROCESS FOR CLARIFICATION. NO EQUIPMENT SHALL BE ORDERED UNTIL DISCREPANCIES ARE RESOLVED THROUGH A FORMAL RFI PROCESS. 8.ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (I.E. SWITCHGEAR, TRANSFORMERS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, ETC.) SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A PHENOLIC NAMEPLATE WITH ENGRAVED LETTERS PER SPECIFICATIONS. ALL NAMEPLATES SHALL BE FASTENED WITH A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) MACHINE SCREWS. NO SELF ADHESIVE NAMEPLATES ARE ALLOWED. 9.ANY FLOOR-STANDING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (I.E. INVERTERS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, ATS SWITCHES, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, ETC.) WHICH ARE MOUNTED AT/BELOW GRADE AND/OR SUSCEPTIBLE TO WATER DAMAGE SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A MINIMUM 4" HIGH HOUSEKEEPING PAD WHICH EXTENDS 4" BEYOND EQUIPMENT IN ALL DIRECTIONS. 10.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INCLUDE IN BID ALL ASSOCIATED COSTS FOR THIRD PARTY TESTING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, GROUND FAULT, CONDUCTORS, ETC. G N 200A 120/240V 1Ø 3W METER/MAIN PANEL SCHEDULE (N) 200A 2P PANEL 'A' 200-B (1) #4 CU. BOND TO EACH OF THE FOLLOWING: BLDG. STEEL C.W. SERVICE, UFER GROUND PER CEC 250.52 (A) 3 20-B 600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 1Ø 3W SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUNDNEUTRAL CONDUIT 1 2 # 12 30-B 1 2 # 10 1 2 # 8 1 2 # 6 1 2 # 6 1 2 # 4 1 2 # 4 1 2 # 2 1 2 # 1 1 2 # 1 1 1 1 40-B 50-B 60-B 70-B 80-B 90-B 100-B 125-B 150-B 175-B 200-B 20A-3W 200A-3W 175A-3W 150A-3W 125A-3W 100A-3W 80A-3W 60A-3W 50A-3W 30A-3W 40A-3W 70A-3W 90A-3W 2 # 1/0 2 # 2/0 2 # 3/0 1 # 12 1 # 6 1 # 6 1 # 6 1 # 6 1 # 8 1 # 8 1 # 10 1 # 10 1 # 10 1 # 10 1 # 8 1 # 8 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 2" 2" 1 # 12 1 # 10 1 # 10 1 # 6 1 # 6 1 # 4 1 # 4 1 # 2 1 # 1 1 # 1 1 # 1/0 1 # 2/0 1 # 3/0 1-1/4" 1-1/2" NOTE: ALL CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE BASED ON TYPE THHN COPPER CONDUCTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE AMPACITY OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BASED ON THE TERMINALS NOT TO EXCEED 60°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE #14 THROUGH #1 AWG OR 75°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE OVER #1 AWG AS PER NEC 110.14(C). INCOMING POWER UTILITY SERVICE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LCPA' PROVIDE PHOTOCELL LIGHTING CIRCUITS (TYP) MODEL: ACUITY BRANDS ARP-INTENC08-NLT- 8FCR-MVOLT-SC- SM-DTC-ARPA-PC PC 10,000 A.I.C. 1 L=40' V.D.=0.40% PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM & PANEL SCHEDULE 8 63E1.2 (E) UTILITY POLE (E) UTILITY POLE (E) UTILITY POLE (E) UTILITY POLE METER/MAIN TEL. BKBD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 ACCESSIBLE ROUTE E.V. CHARGER 12 12 12 1111 11 12 12 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1414 1414 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 14 15 14 1414 14 14 15 14 15 15 14 14 14 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 14 14 14 14 1414 14 14 14 814 14 14 14 4 E3.0 6 E3.0 1 E3.0 (TYP. OF ALL S3)6 E3.0 (TYP. OF ALL S5) 7 E3.0 (TYP. OF ALL S2) E.V. CHARGER CLEAR FLOOR SPACE (TYP. OF 2) 22 WP 22 WP 24 WP 24 WP 22 WP 22 WP 24 WP 15 14 14 14 14 24 WP 17 15 1414 14 141414 14 14 (A-26) 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1.ALL UTILITY SERVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY FINAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS WITH UTILITY COMPANY SERVICE PLANNERS. 2.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT AND VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF UTILITY SERVICES. 3.COORDINATE TRENCH ROUTING AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NEW WORK. 4.UTILITY SERVICE INFORMATION SHOWN IS FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. 5.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE UTILITY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE TO ESTABLISH PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION, OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY METERS AND/OR APPROVALS, AND SCHEDULE UTILITY WORK TO COORDINATE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. 6.ALL SITE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SHALL BE #10 AWG. OR LARGER. 7.CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXISTING BUILDING FOOTING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF STUB-UP CONDUITS FOR NEW WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX TO AVOID ANY INTERFERENCE. 8.CONTRACTOR SHALL UTILIZE "GPR" GROUND PENETRATING RADAR TO SURVEY AND TRACE ALL EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES IN AREAS WHERE NEW TRENCHING IS PLANNED. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT "GPR" REPORT TO PROJECT MANAGER FOR REVIEWING PRIOR TO TRENCHING. 9.ALL POWER UTILITY WORK SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THESE DRAWINGS AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SERVING UTILITY COMPANY. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONTACT THE SERVING UTILITY TO RECEIVE COMPLETE INFORMATION ON THEIR REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF THE BID. THE ACT OF SUBMITTING THE BID SHALL CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE OF FULL RESPONSIBILITY BY THE CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SERVICE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SERVING UTILITY AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 10.ALL SITE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT TO BE 1" MIN. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 11.SUPPORT CONDUIT(S) EVERY 10'-0" AND WITHIN 3'-0" OF ANY JUNCTION BOX OR TERMINATION. 12.CONTACT INFORMATION FOR UTILITY COMPANIES ARE AS FOLLOWS: POWER TBD SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON 626-303-8489 TELEPHONE TBD 13.CONTRACTOR IS TO CONTACT UTILITY INSPECTOR (LISTED ON FINAL UTILITY APPROVED PLANS) TO SCHEDULE A PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING PRIOR TO ALL UTILITY CONSTRUCTION. 14.CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE SPECIAL CARE NOT TO DAMAGE PLANTS OR TREE ROOTS WHEN TRENCHING IN BEDDING OR TREE ROOT AREA. ANY DAMAGED PLANTS TO BE REPLACED/REPAIRED AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 15.FOR ALL PULLBOX INSTALLATION, SEE DETAIL: 16.FOR ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT BURIAL, SEE DETAIL: GENERAL NOTES CONSTRUCTION NOTES UNDERGROUND PULLSECTION PER POWER UTILITY SERVICE REQUIREMENTS. SEE SINGLELINE DIAGRAM(S) FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED BY THE SERVICE UTILITY COMPANY. POWER UTILITY SECONDARY CONDUITS. PROVIDE CONDUITS PLUS SPARE CONDUIT AS SPECIFIED BY UTILITY COMPANY. VERIFY SIZE AND QUANTITY OF CONDUITS REQUIRED WITH UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO BID. ALL WORK TO BE DONE FROM UTILITY CO. APPROVED PLANS. POINT OF CONNECTION TO POWER UTILITY COMPANY AT EXISTING UTILITY POLE. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH UTILITY SERVICE PLANNER AND IN FIELD. STUB UP MAIN TELEPHONE CONDUITS IN STORAGE ROOM. COORDINATE STUBS WITH DIMENSIONED ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE CONDUITS FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE AS REQUIRED BY UTILITY COMPANY. POINT OF CONNECTION TO TELEPHONE UTILITY COMPANY AT EXISTING UTILITY POLE. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH UTILITY SERVICE PLANNER IN FIELD. PROVIDE 120V POWER TO IRRIGATION CONTROLLER. VERIFY LOCATION WITH LANDSCAPE DESIGNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. ROUTE CIRCUIT VIA LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 'LCPA'. REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR EXACT CIRCUITS. PROVIDE NEW 18"x24"x3/4" FIRE RESISTANT PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. PROVIDE AND INSTALL TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND BAR WITH #6 COPPER BONDING CONDUCTOR FROM BUILDING GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM TO GROUND BAR. PLYWOOD SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED AND PAINTED WITH NON-CONDUCTIVE GRAY PAINT. PROVIDE 120V POWER FOR RESTROOM LOW VOLTAGE DEVICES. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER TO CONNECT TO PLUMBING DEVICES, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO MAKE FINAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE EXACT ELECTRICAL LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE (1) 1" C.O. TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD FOR DUAL PORT E.V. CHARGER. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE (4) #8, (1) #10 GND. IN 1" CONDUIT FOR DUAL PORT E.V. CHARGER. REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR FEEDER SIZE. PROVIDE (2) #10, (1) #10 GND. IN 1" CONDUIT. PROVIDE (2) #10, (1) #10 GND. IN 3/4" CONDUIT. PROVIDE 120V POWER TO WATER FEATURE CONTROLLER. VERIFY LOCATION WITH LANDSCAPE DESIGNER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. STUB SPARE 120V CONDUCTORS IN JUNCTION BOX. CAP AND COIL 10 FEET OF CONDUCTORS FOR FUTURE OUTLETS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 E3.0 5 E3.0 16 17 PANEL 'A' LCPA TEL. BKBD.9A-14 14 10 10 A-16 METER/MAIN 13 WH 1 A-17 A-19 19 A-4 #10 A-2 7 3 E3.0 (TYP. OF 3) A-21 16 A-10 A-128 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2RESTROOM POWER FLOOR PLAN NORTHSCALE: 1" = 20'-0"1ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN NORTH SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3RESTROOM LIGHTING PLAN NORTHELECTRICAL SITE PLAN 8 64E2.0 3.0 4.7 7.6 10.2 6.9 4.3 2.9 1.9 1.3 3.1 4.7 6.3 6.9 6.6 6.0 4.3 3.1 2.2 1.6 1.6 2.4 3.6 4.4 4.9 4.7 4.3 3.4 2.6 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.5 1.7 2.2 3.3 4.8 7.1 8.4 8.5 6.7 4.3 2.8 1.7 1.1 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.6 2.9 2.8 2.5 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.9 2.4 3.5 4.8 6.1 6.6 6.5 5.7 4.3 3.1 2.0 1.3 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.3 2.1 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.8 3.7 4.1 4.5 4.4 4.0 3.5 2.7 1.9 1.4 1.3 1.8 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.0 3.6 3.2 2.4 1.9 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.0 2.5 3.2 3.5 3.9 4.0 3.8 3.4 2.5 1.8 1.4 1.7 2.6 3.8 5.2 6.6 6.6 6.0 4.7 3.3 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.8 3.7 4.9 5.4 6.0 5.5 4.5 3.2 2.1 1.5 1.8 2.8 4.0 6.3 8.3 8.5 7.4 5.3 3.6 2.4 1.9 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.7 2.1 3.0 4.0 5.9 7.5 7.7 6.9 5.5 3.7 2.3 1.5 1.8 2.7 4.2 5.8 7.7 7.7 6.6 5.2 3.5 2.4 1.9 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.8 9.7 8.3 5.3 3.5 2.2 1.5 1.7 2.6 4.1 6.4 9.7 10.2 8.0 4.9 3.4 2.4 1.9 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.7 4.1 5.9 8.2 8.7 7.7 5.0 3.4 2.2 1.5 1.7 2.7 4.3 6.1 7.1 7.2 6.8 5.1 3.5 2.5 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.8 4.2 6.3 7.9 8.4 7.5 5.4 3.4 2.4 1.5 1.5 2.2 3.4 4.5 5.2 5.2 4.7 3.9 2.9 2.1 1.7 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.7 5.1 5.9 6.4 5.4 4.5 3.1 2.1 1.4 1.2 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.0 3.1 2.7 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.5 3.2 3.6 3.7 3.3 2.8 2.2 1.5 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.4 2.4 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.3 2.6 3.1 3.3 3.1 2.7 2.1 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.4 3.2 2.7 2.0 1.5 1.1 2.4 3.4 4.7 5.3 5.8 5.2 4.3 3.0 2.1 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.4 4.7 5.2 5.8 5.3 4.3 3.0 1.9 1.3 4.0 5.9 7.5 7.5 6.7 5.2 3.6 2.3 1.7 1.5 1.4 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.9 3.9 5.8 7.4 7.6 6.8 5.4 3.6 2.2 4.0 5.9 9.0 9.8 7.7 5.0 3.4 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.9 5.6 8.7 9.7 8.3 5.2 3.4 2.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 10.3 1.4 5.2 6.6 4.0 2.3 1.6 1.7 2.6 2.5 2.6 2.0 1.2 0.9 1.0 1.4 1.7 1.0 1.6 3.2 5.4 6.3 4.7 2.9 2.0 5.3 7.1 6.6 4.4 2.3 1.3 1.1 3.8 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.3 1.2 3.5 3.7 3.8 1.1 0.9 2.3 1.0 1.8 1.8 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.5 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0 7.6 1.7 3.3 2.4 2.3 4.6 1.5 4.2 5.0 2.8 5.7 3.5 1.0 2.1 3.0 3.7 6.6 3.0 1.4 1.5 3.5 6.1 2.1 0.9 2.3 4.3 2.8 2.7 1.2 2.2 3.6 1.1 0.9 0.9 1.3 1.2 5.6 3.7 2.2 1.4 0.9 1.2 1.2 6.3 0.8 1.1 3.6 9.1 7.7 5.3 1.2 2.2 2.2 5.2 3.0 1.3 1.2 2.2 4.2 4.4 3.9 3.3 2.3 1.7 1.2 0.8 1.7 3.0 2.2 1.4 1.3 1.9 5.6 6.5 6.7 6.2 4.8 3.2 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.1 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7 9.2 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 SCALE: 1" = 20'-0"1SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN NORTH Statistics Description Symbol Avg Max Min Max/Min Avg/Min PARK 2.7 fc 9.2 fc 0.7 fc 13.1:1 3.9:1 PARKING LOT 3.4 fc 10.3 fc 1.0 fc 10.3:1 3.4:1 Luminaire Schedule Symbol Label Description Lamp Lumens Per Lamp Light Loss Factor S1 SCSD-22-110W-TYPEIII-CPL- NW MOUNTED 18'-0" A.F.G. 593.325 0.91 S2 428 0.91 S3 SCSD-22-110W-TYPEIII-CPL- NW MOUNTED 18'-0" A.F.G. LED 593.325 0.91 LED LED SCSD-22-50W-TYPEIII-CPL- NW MOUNTED 12'-0" A.F.G. SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN 8 65E2.1 DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE DETAIL 1 2 3 6 5 8 7 PULLBOX INSTALLATION SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT BURIAL ABOVE GRADE POLETOP LIGHTING FLUSH GRADE POLETOP LIGHTING - 4UTILITY SERVICE TRENCH DETAIL GENERAL NOTES: 1.PULLBOX TO BE SIZED PER NEC, U.O.N. 2.PROVIDE COVER LABELED WITH "POWER" OR "DATA" DESIGNATION. PROVIDE BOLT DOWN COVER. COVER TO BE HEAVY DUTY TRAFFIC RATED WHERE INSTALLED IN AREAS SUBJECT TO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC. PROVIDE 3/4" CRUSHED ROCK 6" OUT FROM ALL SIDES OF PULLBOX AND 12" DEEP. CONCRETE WALL FASTEN UNISTRUT TO BUILDING WALL STUD 4 PLACES (1 EACH CORNER) 3/8"Ø HILTI KB-TZ (ICC#ESR-3785) WITH MINIMUM 2-1/2" EMBEDMENT AT EACH OF 4 HOLE LOCATIONS P-1000 UNISTRUT, LENGTH AS REQUIRED3/8" BOLT, SPRING NUT AND WASHERS (TYPICAL FOR EACH CORNER) ELECTRICAL PANEL (MAX. SIZE: 12"W.x14"H.x6"D. MAX. WEIGHT: 150 LBS) NOTES: 1.VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND ROUTING OF TRENCH WITH UTILITY COMPANY. 2.TRENCH NOT TO BE COVERED UNTIL POWER AND UTILITY WIRES ARE INSTALLED. 3.COMPACT TO 90%, OR TO ELECTRICAL UTILITY STANDARDS. 4.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE QUANTITY, SIZE AND TYPE OF CONDUIT(S), PULLROPES, BURIAL DEPTHS, ETC. WITH INFORMATION PROVIDED BY UTILITIES. 5.IT IS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONTACT DRY UTILITIES AND OBTAIN A COMPLETE LIST OF UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO INCLUDE IN HIS BID PRICE, ALL COSTS, INVOLVED IN BRINGING DRY UTILITIES TO THE SITE. OWNER WILL PAY COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH APPLYING FOR NEW DRY UTILITY SERVICE. IF E.C. IS UNABLE TO CONTACT ANY DRY UTILITY, HE IS TO CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER, PRIOR TO BID, FOR DIRECTION. 6.EDISON: FULL ENCASEMENT REQUIRED FOR MORE 4 CONDUITS. SEMI ENCASEMENT REQUIRED FOR 3 OR 4 CONDUITS. 7.TRENCHING TO BE 2' BACK FROM CURB. 8.MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH TO BE 24". MIN. 3" REF NOTE 6. 3" 24" MIN. DETAIL IS FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. CONSTRUCTION TO BE PER UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. TELEPHONE UTILITY (TO BE PLACED BY E.C.) ELECTRICAL UTILITY (TO BE PLACED BY E.C.) FINISH GRADE MIN. 3" 12" 38" ~60" NONMETALLIC SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDUITS - SIZE AND QUANTITIES AS SHOWN ON PLANS. PROVIDE MIN. OF 1" CONDUIT FOR EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS. GENERAL NOTES: 1.PLACE CONDUIT IN TRENCH, FILL, AND COMPACT TO 90%. REPAIR AREA TO MATCH SURROUNDING. BACK FILL IS TO BE FREE OF LARGE ROCK, PAVING MATERIALS, ETC., THAT MAY CAUSE PHYSICAL DAMAGE TO CONDUIT. PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL WITH A SAND EQUIVELENT (SE) GREATER THAN 30 PER COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE STANDARDS. 2.PROVIDE 30" MINIMUM COVER WHERE CONDUIT IS PLACED UNDER STREETS, HIGHWAYS, ROADS, ALLEYS, DRIVEWAYS, AND PARKING LOTS. 3.MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH TO BE 24". FINISH GRADE PROVIDE CONTINUOUS MARKING TAPE DIRECTLY ABOVE CONDUIT PER COUNTY OF RIVERSIDE STANDARDS.24" MIN.12"#4 TIES AT 6"O.C. 2'-6" LIGHT POLE (SEE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE). 30" MIN. POLETOP FOOTING SCHEDULE 12'-0" 20'-0" 3'-0" 4'-0"2'-0" 1'-6" BELOW GRADE POLE HEIGHT FOOTING DEPTH FOOTING DIAMETER 8#6 VERTICAL REBARS W/ 3" CLEAR MIN. FOOTING HEIGHT ABOVE GRADE 2'-6" 2'-6" PROVIDE 20'-0 IF #4 BSCU GROUND WIRE. COIL GROUND WIRE IN BOTTOM OF POLE BASE EXCAVATION. #4 B.S. COPPER POLE GROUND WIRE. IN-LINE WATERTIGHT FUSE HOLDER WITH FUSES SIZED PER LIGHT FIXTURE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMENDATION (TYPICAL) #10 CIRCUIT GROUND WIRE (EXTEND UP TO LUMINARE) REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR FOOTING DIAMETER. REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR FOOTING LENGTH BELOW GRADE REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POLETOP FOOTING CONCRETE P.S.I. REQUIREMENTS. GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLT FURNISHED W/ POLE. TYP. SLIGHTLY SLOPE TOP OF BASE FOR PROPER DRAINAGE, RADIUS EDGES AND GRIND SMOOTH ALL EXPOSED ABOVE GRADE SURFACES. MANUFACTURER PROVIDED BASE COVER ANCHORED W/ TAMPER PROOF HARDWARE. MANUFACTURER PROVIDED HAND HOLE W/ GROUNDING LUG. GENERAL NOTES: 1.GROUND POLE TO GROUND CONDUCTORS IN CONDUITS. 2.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FOR FINAL SITE FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 3.LOCATE ALL SITE POLETOP FIXTURES SO THAT THEY LINE UP WITH THE NEAREST PARKING STRIPE. 4.MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS SHALL SUPERCEDE THIS DETAIL. CONDUIT CONTAINING CIRCUIT WIRING AND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR. 30" MIN. POLETOP FOOTING SCHEDULE 3" MIN. CONCRETE HANDHOLE. 6" GRAVEL BASE CONDUIT CONTAINING CIRCUIT WIRING AND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE 20'-0 OF #4 BSCU GROUND WIRE. COIL GROUND WIRE IN BOTTOM OF POLE BASE EXCAVATION. #4 B.S. COPER POLE GROUND WIRE. PROVIDE GROUND CLAMP ON ANCHOR BOLT. GROUND LUG (CONNECT CIRCUIT AND POLE GROUNDS) MANUFACTURER PROVIDED HAND HOLE W/GASKETED BOLT DOWN COVER PLATE. #10 CIRCUIT GROUND WIRE (EXTEND UP TO LUMINARE) LIGHT POLE (SEE LUMINARE SCHEDULE).IN-LINE WATERTIGHT FUSE HOLDER WITH FUSES SIZED PER LIGHT FIXTURE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION (TYPICAL) 8#6 VERTICAL REBARS W/ 3" CLEAR MIN. #4 TIES AT 6"O.C. REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POLETOP FOOTING CONCRETE P.S.I. REQUIREMENTS. GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLT FURNISHED W/ POLE. TYP. MANUFACTURER PROVIDED BASE COVER ANCHORED W/ TAMPER PROOF HARDWARE. REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR FOOTING DIAMETER. GENERAL NOTES: 1.GROUND POLE TO GROUND CONDUCTORS IN CONDUITS. 2.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FOR FINAL SITE FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 3.LOCATE ALL SITE POLETOP FIXTURES SO THAT THEY LINE UP WITH THE NEAREST PARKING STRIPE. 4.MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS SHALL SUPERCEDE THIS DETAIL. REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR FOOTING LENGTH BELOW GRADE 12'-0" 20'-0" 3'-0" 4'-0"2'-0" 1'-6" BELOW GRADE POLE HEIGHT FOOTING DEPTH FOOTING DIAMETER DENOTES RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHT. DENOTES CEILING BY OTHERS. 2 1 1 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 8 66E3.0 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - INDOOR 8 67E4.1 COMMENT 00005 PRIMROSE PARK PRIMROSE PARK 5928 PRIMROSE AVENUE, TEMPLE CITY, CA 91780 CITY PROJECT I.D.: XS-19-233 68 DESIGN WEST ENGINEERING MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONSULTANTS San Bernardino, CA 92408 412 E. Vanderbilt Way Phone: 909.890.3700 Fax: 909.890.3770 Email: cadd@designwesteng.com 811 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS - OUTDOOR 8 68E4.2 COMMENT 00005